GARMIN1000 Pilots Manual

G1000® NXi Pilot’s Guide
Pilot’s Guide
Garmin International, Inc. Garmin AT, Inc. Garmin (Europe) Ltd. Garmin Corporation
Diamond DA40NG
1200 East 151st Street 2345 Turner Road SE Liberty House, Hounsdown Business Park No. 68, Zhangshu 2nd Road
Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A. Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A. Southampton, Hampshire SO40 9LR U.K. Xizhi District,
New Taipei City, Taiwan Cirrus SR2x
Contact Garmin Product Support at: www.flygarmin.com

190-02452-00
Diamond DA40NG
For warranty information refer to: www.flygarmin.com Revision A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL & CNS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Copyright © 2018 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved..
This manual reflects the operation of System Software version 1929.10 or later for the Diamond DA40NG. Some differences in operation
may be observed when comparing the information in this manual to earlier or later software versions.
Garmin International, Inc. Garmin (Europe) Ltd.

1200 East 151st Street Liberty House, Hounsdown Business Park
Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A. Southampton, Hampshire SO40 9LR U.K.
Garmin AT, Inc. Garmin Corporation

2345 Turner Road SE No. 68, Zhangshu 2nd Road
Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A. Xizhi District, New Taipei City, Taiwan
Contact Garmin Product Support at www.flygarmin.com.
For warranty information refer to www.flygarmin.com.
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted, disseminated, downloaded or stored
in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express written permission of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission to download
a single copy of this manual and of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed for
personal use, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this manual or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice
and provided further that any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited.
Garmin® G1000® NXi, FliteCharts®, and SafeTaxi® are registered trademarks of Garmin International, Inc. or its subsidiaries. Garmin ESP™,
Garmin SVT™, Connext™, and WireAware™ are trademarks of Garmin International, Inc. or its subsidiaries. These trademarks may not be
used without the express permission of Garmin.
Skywatch® and Stormscope® are registered trademarks of L-3 Communications. Ryan®, TCAD® and Avidyne® are registered trademarks of
Avidyne Corporation. CO Guardian is a trademark of CO Guardian, Inc. AC-U-KWIK® is a registered trademark of Penton Business Media
Inc. Bendix/King® and Honeywell® are registered trademarks of Honeywell International, Inc. Becker® is a registered trademark of Becker
Flugfunkwerk GmbH. NavData® is a registered trademark of Jeppesen, Inc.; Wi-Fi® is a registered trademark of the Wi-Fi Alliance. Sirius,
XM, and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio, Inc. and its subsidiaries. The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are
owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Garmin is under license.
AOPA Membership Publications, Inc. and its related organizations (hereinafter collectively “AOPA”) expressly disclaim all warranties,
with respect to the AOPA information included in this data, express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties
of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. The information is provided “as is” and AOPA does not warrant or make any
representations regarding its accuracy, reliability, or otherwise. Under no circumstances including negligence, shall AOPA be liable for any
incidental, special or consequential damages that result from the use or inability to use the software or related documentation, even if
AOPA or an AOPA authorized representative has been advised of the possibility of such damages. User agrees not to sue AOPA and, to
the maximum extent allowed by law, to release and hold harmless AOPA from any causes of action, claims or losses related to any actual
or alleged inaccuracies in the information. Some jurisdictions do not allow the limitation or exclusion of implied warranties or liability for
incidental or consequential damages so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you.
190-02452-00 Rev. A Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG
AC-U-KWIK and its related organizations (hereafter collectively “AC-U-KWIK Organizations”) expressly disclaim all warranties with
respect to the AC-U-KWIK information included in this data, express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. The information is provided “as is” and AC-U-KWIK Organizations do not warrant or
make any representations regarding its accuracy, reliability, or otherwise. Licensee agrees not to sue AC-U-KWIK Organizations and, to the
maximum extent allowed by law, to release and hold harmless AC-U-KWIK Organizations from any cause of action, claims or losses related
to any actual or alleged inaccuracies in the information arising out of Garmin’s use of the information in the datasets. Some jurisdictions
do not allow the limitation or exclusion of implied warranties or liability for incidental or consequential damages so the above limitations
or exclusions may not apply to licensee.
Printed in the U.S.A.
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG 190-02452-00 Rev. A
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING: Do not use terrain avoidance displays as the sole source of information for maintaining separation
from terrain and obstacles. Garmin obtains terrain and obstacle data from third party sources and cannot
independently verify the accuracy of the information.
WARNING: Always refer to current aeronautical charts and NOTAMs for verification of displayed aeronautical
information. Displayed aeronautical data may not incorporate the latest NOTAM information.
WARNING: Do not use geometric altitude for compliance with air traffic control altitude requirements. The
primary barometric altimeter must be used for compliance with all air traffic control altitude regulations,
requirements, instructions, and clearances.
WARNING: Do not use basemap information (land and water data) as the sole means of navigation. Basemap
data is intended only to supplement other approved navigation data sources and should be considered only
an aid to enhance situational awareness.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic
within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate information
from aircraft or ground stations, traffic may be present that is not represented on the display.
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous
weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current
weather conditions.
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather
information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product
may be older than the indicated weather product age.
WARNING: Do not rely on the displayed minimum safe altitude (MSAs) as the sole source of obstacle
and terrain avoidance information. Always refer to current aeronautical charts for appropriate minimum
clearance altitudes.
WARNING: Do not operate this equipment without first obtaining qualified instruction.
WARNING: Do not use a QFE altimeter setting with this system. System functions will not operate properly
with a QFE altimeter setting. Use only a QNH altimeter setting for height above mean sea level, or the
standard pressure setting, as applicable.
190-02452-00 Rev. A Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG i
WARNING: Do not use GPS to navigate to any active waypoint identified as a ‘NON WGS84 WPT’ by a
system message. ‘NON WGS84 WPT’ waypoints are derived from an unknown map reference datum that
may be incompatible with the map reference datum used by GPS (known as WGS84) and may be positioned
in error as displayed.
WARNING: Do not rely on the autopilot to level the aircraft at the MDA/DH when flying an approach with
vertical guidance. The autopilot will not level the aircraft at the MDA/DH even if the MDA/DH is set in the
altitude preselect.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering.
The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any
circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
WARNING: Do not rely on the accuracy of attitude and heading indications in the following geographic
areas (due to variations in the earth’s magnetic field): North of 72° North latitude at all longitudes; South
of 70° South latitude at all longitudes; North of 65° North latitude between longitude 75° W and 120° W.
(Northern Canada); North of 70° North latitude between longitude 70° W and 128° W. (Northern Canada);
North of 70° North latitude between longitude 85° E and 114° E. (Northern Russia); South of 55° South
latitude between longitude 120° E and 165° E. (Region south of Australia and New Zealand).
WARNING: Do not rely on information from a lightning detection system display as the sole basis for hazardous
weather avoidance. Range limitations and interference may cause the system to display inaccurate or
incomplete information. Refer to documentation from the lightning detection system manufacturer for
detailed information about the system.
WARNING: Use appropriate primary systems for navigation, and for terrain, obstacle, and traffic avoidance.
Garmin SVT is intended as an aid to situational awareness only and may not provide either the accuracy or
reliability upon which to solely base decisions and/or plan maneuvers to avoid terrain, obstacles, or traffic.
WARNING: Do not use the Garmin SVT runway depiction as the sole means for determining the proximity of
the aircraft to the runway or for maintaining the proper approach path angle during landing.
WARNING: Do not use TAWS information for primary terrain or obstacle avoidance. TAWS is intended only
to enhance situational awareness.
WARNING: Do not use SurfaceWatch™ information as the primary method of flight guidance during airborne
or ground operations. SurfaceWatch does not have NOTAM or ATIS information regarding the current active
runway, condition, or information about the position of hold lines.
ii Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG 190-02452-00 Rev. A
CAUTION: Do not clean display surfaces with abrasive cloths or cleaners containing ammonia. They will
harm the anti-reflective coating.
CAUTION: Do not allow repairs to be made by anyone other than an authorized Garmin service center.
Unauthorized repairs or modifications could void both the warranty and affect the airworthiness of the
aircraft.
NOTE: Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) information.
Always confirm TFR information through official sources such as Flight Service Stations or Air Traffic Control.
NOTE: All visual depictions contained within this document, including screen images of the system panel
and displays, are subject to change and may not reflect the most current system and aviation databases.
Depictions of equipment may differ slightly from the actual equipment.
NOTE: The United States government operates the Global Positioning System and is solely responsible for
its accuracy and maintenance. The GPS system is subject to changes which could affect the accuracy and
performance of all GPS equipment. Portions of the system utilize GPS as a precision electronic NAVigation
AID (NAVAID). Therefore, as with all NAVAIDs, information presented by the system can be misused or
misinterpreted and, therefore, become unsafe.
NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Interference from GPS repeaters operating inside nearby hangars can cause an intermittent loss of
attitude and heading displays while the aircraft is on the ground. Moving the aircraft more than 100 yards
away from the source of the interference should alleviate the condition.
NOTE: Use of polarized eyewear may cause the flight displays to appear dim or blank.
NOTE: This product, its packaging, and its components contain chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer, birth defects, or reproductive harm. This notice is being provided in accordance with
California’s Proposition 65. If you have any questions or would like additional information, please refer to
our web site at www.garmin.com/prop65.
NOTE: Operating the system in the vicinity of metal buildings, metal structures, or electromagnetic fields
can cause sensor differences that may result in nuisance miscompare annunciations during start up, shut
down, or while taxiing. If one or more of the sensed values are unavailable, the annunciation indicates no
comparison is possible.
190-02452-00 Rev. A Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG iii
NOTE: The system responds to a terminal procedure based on data coded within that procedure in the
Navigation Database. Differences in system operation may be observed among similar types of procedures
due to differences in the Navigation Database coding specific to each procedure.
NOTE: The FAA has asked Garmin to remind pilots who fly with Garmin database-dependent avionics of the
following:
• It is the pilot’s responsibility to remain familiar with all FAA regulatory and advisory guidance and information
related to the use of databases in the National Airspace System.
• Garmin equipment will only recognize and use databases that are obtained from Garmin or Jeppesen. Databases
obtained from Garmin or Jeppesen that have a Type 2 Letter of Authorization (LOA) from the FAA are assured
compliance with all data quality requirements (DQRs). A copy of the Type 2 LOA is available for each applicable
database and can be viewed at http://fly.garmin.com by selecting ‘Aviation Database Declarations.’
• Use of a current Garmin or Jeppesen database in your Garmin equipment is required for compliance with
established FAA regulatory guidance, but does not constitute authorization to fly any and all terminal procedures
that may be presented by the system. It is the pilot’s responsibility to operate in accordance with established
current version of the pertinent flight manual and regulatory guidance or limitations as applicable to the pilot,
the aircraft, and installed equipment.
NOTE: The pilot/operator must review and be familiar with Garmin’s database exclusion list as discussed in
SAIB CE-14-04 to determine what data may be incomplete. The database exclusion list can be viewed at
www.flygarmin.com by selecting ‘Database Exclusions List.’
NOTE: The pilot/operator must have access to Garmin and Jeppesen database alerts and consider their
impact on the intended aircraft operation. The database alerts can be viewed at www.flygarmin.com by
selecting ‘Aviation Database Alerts.’
NOTE: If the pilot/operator wants or needs to adjust the database, contact Garmin Product Support.
NOTE: Garmin requests the flight crew report any observed discrepancies related to database information.
These discrepancies could come in the form of an incorrect procedure; incorrectly identified terrain, obstacles
and fixes; or any other displayed item used for navigation or communication in the air or on the ground. Go
to FlyGarmin.com and select ‘Aviation Data Error Report’.
NOTE: Operate G1000NXi system power through at least one cycle in a period of four days of continuous
operation to avoid an autonomous system reboot.
iv Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG 190-02452-00 Rev. A
NOTE: Electronic aeronautical charts displayed on this system have been shown to meet the guidance in AC
120 76D as a Type B Electronic Flight Bag (EFB) for FlightCharts and ChartView. The accuracy of the charts
is subject to the chart data provider. Own-ship position on airport surface charts cannot be guaranteed to
meet the accuracy specified in AC 120-76D. Possible additional requirements may make a secondary source
of aeronautical charts, such as traditional paper charts or an additional electronic display, necessary on the
aircraft and available to the pilot. If the secondary source of aeronautical charts is a Portable Electronic
Device (PED), its use must be consistent with the guidance in AC 120-76D.
NOTE: When using Stormscope, there are several atmospheric phenomena in addition to nearby thunderstorms
that can cause isolated discharge points in the strike display mode. However, clusters of two or more
discharge points in the strike display mode do indicate thunderstorm activity if these points reappear after
the screen has been cleared.
NOTE: Intruder aircraft at or below 500 ft. AGL may not appear on the Garmin SVT display or may appear as
a partial symbol.
190-02452-00 Rev. A Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG v
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT

BY USING THE DEVICE, COMPONENT OR SYSTEM MANUFACTURED OR SOLD BY GARMIN (“THE GARMIN PRODUCT”), YOU AGREE TO
BE BOUND BY THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE FOLLOWING SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT. PLEASE READ THIS AGREEMENT
CAREFULLY. Garmin Ltd. and its subsidiaries (“Garmin”) grants you a limited license to use the software embedded in the Garmin Product
(the “Software”) in binary executable form in the normal operation of the Garmin Product. Title, ownership rights, and intellectual property
rights in and to the Software remain with Garmin and/or its third-party providers. You acknowledge that the Software is the property of
Garmin and/or its third-party providers and is protected under the United States of America copyright laws and international copyright
treaties. You further acknowledge that the structure, organization, and code of the Software are valuable trade secrets of Garmin and/or its
third-party providers and that the Software in source code form remains a valuable trade secret of Garmin and/or its third-party providers.
You agree not to reproduce, decompile, disassemble, modify, reverse assemble, reverse engineer, or reduce to human readable form the
Software or any part thereof or create any derivative works based on the Software. You agree not to export or re-export the Software to
any country in violation of the export control laws of the United States of America.
vi Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG 190-02452-00 Rev. A
REVISION INFORMATION
Record of Revisions
Part Number Revision Date Page Range Description
190-02452-00 A 06/7/18 All Initial Release for GDU 20.80
190-02452-00 Rev. A Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW 2.4 Garmin Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT)............ 73

1.1 System Description.................................................... 1 SVT Operation............................................................. 74
Line Replaceable Units (LRU).......................................... 1 SVT Features............................................................... 75
1.2 System Controls......................................................... 4 Field of View............................................................... 84
PFD/MFD Controls......................................................... 4 2.5 Abnormal Operations.............................................. 86
Secure Digital Cards....................................................... 7 Abnormal GPS Conditions............................................ 86
1.3 System Operation...................................................... 8 SVT Troubleshooting.................................................... 87
System Power-up........................................................... 8 Unusual Attitudes........................................................ 87
Normal Operation.......................................................... 8 SVT Unusual Attitudes.................................................. 88
Reversionary Mode........................................................ 9 SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM (EIS)
System Annunciations.................................................. 10 3.1 Engine Display.......................................................... 90
System Status.............................................................. 11 3.2 Engine Page.............................................................. 92
AHRS Operation.......................................................... 12 Fuel Calculations......................................................... 94
GPS Receiver Operation............................................... 14
3.3 Reversionary Mode.................................................. 95
1.4 Accessing System Functionality............................. 19
Softkey Function.......................................................... 19 SECTION 4 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Menus........................................................................ 23 4.1 Overview................................................................... 97
MFD Page Groups........................................................ 24 PFD Controls and Frequency Display.............................. 98
Split Screen Functionality............................................. 28 Audio Panel Controls................................................. 100
System Settings........................................................... 30 4.2 COM Operation...................................................... 103
System Utilities............................................................ 40 COM TUNING BOXES................................................. 103
1.5 Display Backlighting................................................ 44 COM Transceiver Manual Tuning................................. 104
Auto-Tuning the COM Frequency................................. 104
SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Frequency Spacing.................................................... 107
2.1 Flight Instruments.................................................... 48
4.3 NAV Operation....................................................... 108
Attitude Indicator........................................................ 48
NAV Tuning Boxes..................................................... 108
Airspeed Indicator....................................................... 49
NAV Radio Selection and Activation............................ 109
Altimeter.................................................................... 50
NAV Receiver Manual Tuning...................................... 109
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)........................................ 54
Auto-Tuning a NAV Frequency from the MFD............... 110
Vertical Deviation........................................................ 54
Marker Beacon Receiver............................................. 112
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)............................... 56
ADF/DME.................................................................. 113
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)................................... 60
ADF Tuning............................................................... 114
2.2 Supplemental Flight Data....................................... 67
DME Tuning.............................................................. 116
Generic Timer.............................................................. 67
4.4 Mode S Transponder.............................................. 117
Temperature Displays................................................... 67
Transponder Controls................................................. 117
Wind Data.................................................................. 68
Transponder Mode Selection....................................... 118
Vertical Navigation (VNV) Indications............................ 69
Entering a Transponder Code...................................... 120
2.3 PFD Annunciations and Alerting Functions........... 70
IDENT Function......................................................... 120
Marker Beacon Annunciations...................................... 70
4.5 Additional Audio Panel Functions........................ 122
Altitude Alerting.......................................................... 70
Power-Up.................................................................. 122
Low Altitude Annunciation........................................... 71
Mono/Stereo Headsets............................................... 122
Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height Alerting....... 71
Speaker.................................................................... 122
viii Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG 190-02452-00 Rev. A
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Intercom................................................................... 122 5.7 Vertical Navigation................................................ 210

Blue-Select Mode (Telephone/Entertainment Distribution)... Altitude Constraints................................................... 212
125 Vertical Situation Display (VSD)................................... 214
3D Audio.................................................................. 126 5.8 Procedures.............................................................. 218
Bluetooth®..................................................................................................................127 Departures................................................................ 220
Clearance Recorder and Player.................................... 128 Arrivals .................................................................... 223
Entertainment Inputs................................................. 129 Approaches .............................................................. 226
4.6 Audio Panel Preflight Procedure.......................... 130 5.9 Trip Planning........................................................... 234
4.7 Abnormal Operation.............................................. 131 Trip Planning............................................................. 234
Stuck Microphone...................................................... 131 5.10 Abnormal Operation.............................................. 238
COM Tuning Failure.................................................... 131
SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Audio Panel Fail-Safe Operation.................................. 131
Reversionary Mode.................................................... 131 6.1 Data Link Weather................................................. 242
Activating Data Link Weather Services......................... 243
SECTION 5 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Weather Product Age................................................. 246
5.1 Introduction............................................................ 133 Displaying Data Link Weather Products........................ 251
Navigation Status Box and Data Bar............................ 135 Connext Data Requests.............................................. 260
5.2 Using Map Displays............................................... 136 Weather Product Overview......................................... 264
Map Orientation........................................................ 136 FIS-B Weather Status................................................. 300
Map Range............................................................... 138 Abnormal Operations for Garmin Connext Weather...... 301
Map Panning............................................................. 140 6.2 Stormscope Lightning Detection System............ 303
Measuring Bearing and Distance................................. 142 Using the Stormscope Page........................................ 303
Topography............................................................... 142 Setting Up Stormscope on the Navigation Map............ 305
Map Symbols............................................................ 145 6.3 Terrain Displays...................................................... 307
Airways.................................................................... 149 Relative Terrain Symbology......................................... 308
Additional Navigation Map Items................................ 151 Terrain-SVT Alerting Displays...................................... 313
5.3 Waypoints............................................................... 154 Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance............................. 315
Airports.................................................................... 155 System Status............................................................ 316
Non-Airport Waypoints............................................... 160 6.4 Traffic Information Service (TIS)........................... 318
5.4 Airspaces................................................................. 169 Displaying Traffic Data............................................... 319
Nearest Airspace....................................................... 170 Traffic Map Page........................................................ 320
Smart Airspace.......................................................... 172 TIS Alerts.................................................................. 321
5.5 Direct-to-Navigation ............................................ 173 System Status............................................................ 323
5.6 Flight Planning....................................................... 178 6.5 Avidyne TAS600 Traffic.......................................... 325
Flight Plan Views....................................................... 181 TAS Theory of Operation............................................. 325
Creating a Flight Plan................................................ 184 TAS Alerts................................................................. 327
Flight Plan Waypoint and Airway Modifications............ 185 System Test............................................................... 328
Flight Plan Operations................................................ 193 Operation................................................................. 329
Closest Point of FPL................................................... 196 6.6 ADS-B Traffic........................................................... 335
User-Defined Holding Patterns.................................... 197 ADS-B System Overview............................................. 335
Managing Flight Plans............................................... 201 Conflict Situational Awareness & Alerting (CSA)........... 337
190-02452-00 Rev. A Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG ix
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Airborne and Surface Applications............................... 339 8.5 SiriusXM Radio Entertainment............................. 409
Traffic Description...................................................... 341 Activating SiriusXM Satellite Radio Services................. 409
Operation................................................................. 342 Using SiriusXM Radio................................................. 410
ADS-B System Status................................................. 347 8.6 Flight Data Logging............................................... 413
SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM 8.7 Satellite Telephone and SMS Messaging............ 415
7.1 AFCS Overview....................................................... 351 Registering with Garmin Connext ............................... 415
Additional AFCS Controls........................................... 353 Disabling/Enabling Iridium Transceiver......................... 415
7.2 Flight Director Operation...................................... 354 Telephone Communication......................................... 416
Activating the Flight Director...................................... 354 8.8 Connext Setup........................................................ 436
AFCS Status Box........................................................ 355 8.9 Electronic Stability and Protection (ESP)............ 438
Flight Director Modes................................................. 355 Roll Engagement....................................................... 439
Command Bars.......................................................... 356 Pitch Engagement..................................................... 441
7.3 AFCS MODES........................................................... 357 Angle of Attack Protection.......................................... 442
Vertical Modes.......................................................... 357 High Airspeed Protection............................................ 442
Lateral Modes........................................................... 363 8.10 Electronic Checklists.............................................. 443
7.4 Autopilot Operation.............................................. 379 8.11 Abnormal Operation.............................................. 445
Flight Control............................................................ 379 SiriusXM Data Link Receiver Troubleshooting............... 445
Engagement.............................................................. 380 APPENDICES
Control Wheel Steering.............................................. 380 Annunciations and Alerts................................................ 447
Disengagement......................................................... 381
CAS Message Prioritization......................................... 448
7.5 AFCS Annunciations and Alerts............................ 382 CAS Annunciations.................................................... 449
Overspeed Protection................................................. 382 Audio Alerting System Test......................................... 451
7.6 Abnormal Operation.............................................. 384 System Message Advisories........................................ 451
Suspected Autopilot Malfunction................................ 384 Database Management................................................... 461
Overpowering Autopilot Servos................................... 384 Loading Updated Databases....................................... 461
SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES Database Deletion Feature ........................................ 473
8.1 SafeTaxi................................................................... 386 Magnetic Field Variation Database Update................... 474
8.2 Charts...................................................................... 389 Aviation Terms and Acronyms......................................... 475
ChartView................................................................. 390 Frequently Asked Questions........................................... 485
FliteCharts................................................................ 398 Miscellaneous Map Symbols.......................................... 489
IFR/VFR Charts.......................................................... 403
INDEX
8.3 AIrport Directory.................................................... 406
Index ................................................................................... I-1
8.4 Database Cycle Number and Revisions............... 407
Cycle Number and Revision........................................ 407
x Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG 190-02452-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
This section provides an overview of the G1000 NXi Integrated Avionics System as installed in the Diamond
DA40NG. The system presents flight instrumentation, position, navigation, communication, and identification
information to the pilot through large-format displays.
NOTE: Refer to the Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) Section for details on the Garmin AFCS.
EIS
LINE REPLACEABLE UNITS (LRU)
The system consists of the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• GDU 1050 (1) – The GDU 1050 is configured as a Primary Flight Display (PFD). The display communicates
with the Multi Function Display (MFD) and with the #1 Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU) through a High-Speed
Data Bus (HSDB) Ethernet connection.
MANAGEMENT
• GDU 1055 (1) – The GDU 1055 is configured as a Multi Function Display (MFD. The display communicates
FLIGHT
with the PFD and with the #2 Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU) through an HSDB Ethernet connection.
• GIA 63W / GIA 64W (2) – The GIA Integrated Avionics Units (IAU) function as the main communication
hub, linking all LRUs with the PFD and MFD. Each IAU contains a GPS SBAS receiver, VHF COM/NAV/GS
receivers, a flight director (FD) and system integration microprocessors. Each IAU is paired with the PFD
AVOIDANCE
and MFD via HSDB connection. The IAUs are not paired together and do not communicate with each other
HAZARD
directly.
• GRS 79 (1) – The GRS Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) provides aircraft attitude and heading
information via ARINC 429 to both displays and both IAUs. The AHRS contains advanced sensors (including
accelerometers and rate sensors) and interfaces with the Magnetometer to obtain magnetic field information,
AFCS
and with the Air Data Computer to obtain air data. The AHRS communicates with both IAUs to obtain GPS
information.
• GMU 44 (1) – The GMU Magnetometer measures local magnetic field. Data is sent to the AHRS unit for
processing to determine aircraft magnetic heading. The Magnetometer receives communicates with and
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
receives power directly from the AHRS using an RS-485 digital interface.
• GDC 72 (1) – The GDC Air Data Computer (ADC) processes data from the pitot/static system as well as the
Outside Air Temperature (OAT) probe. This unit provides pressure altitude, airspeed, vertical speed and
OAT information to the system, and it communicates with the IAUs, PFD, MFD, and the AHRS, using an
APPENDICES
ARINC 429 digital interface (it also interfaces directly with the Air Temperature Probe).
• GEA 71 / GEA 71B (1) – The GEA Engine Airframe Unit receives and processes signals from the engine and
airframe sensors. This unit communicates with both IAUs using an RS-485 digital interface.
• GMA 1347 / GMA 1360 (1) – The GMA Audio Panel integrates NAV/COM digital audio, intercom system
and marker beacon controls. This unit also enables the manual control of the display reversionary mode (red
INDEX
DISPLAY BACKUP button) and communicates with the #1 IAU, using an HSDB connection. The GMA 1360
offers Bluetooth® capability.
190-02452-00 Rev. A Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG 1
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
• GTX 335R (Standard) / GTX345R (Alternate)(1) – Solid-state transponder that provides Mode A, C, S capability.
SYSTEM
The GTX 345R also provides ADS-B In/Out. The transponder can be controlled from the PFD. The transponder
communicates with the both IAUs through an RS-232 digital interface.
• GSA 81 (3), and GSM 86/85 (3) – The GSA Servos are used for the automatic control of roll, pitch, yaw, and
INSTRUMENTS
pitch trim. These units interface with each IAU.

FLIGHT
The GSM 86/85 servo gearbox is responsible for transferring the output torque of the GSA 81 servo actuator
to the mechanical flight-control surface linkage.
• GDL 69A SXM (1) (Optional) – The GDL SiriusXM Datalink Receiver provides data link weather information
to the MFD (and, indirectly, to PFD map) as well as digital audio entertainment. The unit communicates
EIS
with the MFD via HSDB connection. Subscriptions to the SiriusXM Weather or SiriusXM Satellite Radio are
required to enable services.
• GSR 56 (1) (Optional) – The GSR Iridium Transceiver operation for voice communication is by means of
AUDIO PANEL
pilot and copilot headsets in the cockpit. The transceiver can provide Garmin Connext Weather and SMS
& CNS
functions.
• Flight Stream 510 (1) (Optional) – The Flight Stream Bluetooth Transceiver provides wireless connectivity
between a compatible tablet/mobile device and the avionics system. GPS, AHRS, ADC, ADS-B, traffic, SiriusXM
MANAGEMENT
audio, and weather data can then be shared with the mobile device, and flight plans can be transferred to or
FLIGHT
from the mobile device. Also, database updates may be performed using the Flight Stream 510 WiFi link.
Figure 1-1 shows interactions between the LRUs. Additional optional equipment are also shown in Figure
1-1. The system is also capable of interfacing with the following optional equipment:
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
• KN 63 DME
• RA 3502 ADF Receiver
• TAS 600 Traffic Advisory System
AFCS
• WX-500 Stormscope Lightning Sensor
NOTE: For information on the additional equipment shown in Figure 1-1, consult the applicable optional
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
interface user’s guide. This document assumes that the reader is already familiar with the operation of this
additional equipment.
NOTE: For information on non-Garmin equipment, consult the applicable optional interface user’s guide.
APPENDICES
This document assumes that the reader is already familiar with the operation of this additional equipment.
INDEX
2 Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG 190-02452-00 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
#1 #2
GDU 1050 GDU 1055
(PFD) (MFD)
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
GDL 69A SXM
(Datalink Receiver)
FS 510
(SD Card
GMA 1347 / GMA 1360 Bluetooth Link)
(Audio Panel)
EIS
GDC 72
(Air Data Computer)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GRS 79
(AHRS)
#1 GIA 64W #2 GIA 64W
/ GIA 63W / GIA 63W
MANAGEMENT
(Integrated (Integrated
FLIGHT
Avionics GMU 44 Avionics
Unit) (Magnetometer) Unit)
GTX 335R /
GTX 345R
AVOIDANCE
(Transponder)
HAZARD
GEA 71 / GEA 71B
VHF COM (Engine & VHF COM
GPS/SBAS Airframe Unit) GPS/SBAS
VOR/LOC GSA 81 VOR/LOC

(Servos)
AFCS
G/S G/S
GSR 56
Flight Flight
Director (Iridium Transceiver) Director
AFCS Mode TAS 600 AFCS Mode
ADDITIONAL
Logic (Traffic Advisory) Logic
FEATURES
Servo Logic WX-500 Stormscope Servo Logic
(Lightning Sensor)
KN-63 (DME)
RA 3502 (ADF)
APPENDICES
Optional Optional
Garmin Equipment Non-Garmin Equipment
Garmin Equipment Non-Garmin Equipment
INDEX
Figure 1-1 System (LRU Configuration)
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
1.2 SYSTEM CONTROLS

SYSTEM
NOTE: The Audio Panel controls are described in the CNS & Audio Panel Section.
INSTRUMENTS
The system controls are located on the PFD and MFD bezels and audio panel. The controls for the PFD and
FLIGHT
MFD are discussed within the following pages of this section.
PFD/MFD CONTROLS
EIS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
17
ADDITIONAL
18 24 13
FEATURES
10
19 25 11 14
20 26 12 15
APPENDICES
21 27
16
22 28
23 29
*MFD Only
Figure 1-2 PFD/MFD Controls
INDEX
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
1 NAV VOL/ID Knob Turn to control NAV audio volume (shown in the NAV Frequency Box as a percentage).
Press to toggle Morse code identifier audio ON/OFF.
2 NAV Frequency Trans- Transfers the standby and active NAV frequencies.
fer Key
INSTRUMENTS
3 NAV Knob Turn to tune NAV receiver standby frequencies (large knob for MHz; small for kHz).
FLIGHT
Press to toggle cyan tuning box between NAV1 and NAV2
4 *Heading Knob Turn to manually select a heading. When operating in Heading Select mode, this knob pro-
vides the heading reference to the flight director.
Press to display a digital heading momentarily to the left of the HSI and synchronize the Se-
lected Heading to the current heading.
EIS
5 Range Knob / Turn to change map range.
Joystick Press to activate Map Pointer for map panning.
6 CRS/BARO Knob Turn large knob for altimeter barometric pressure setting.
AUDIO PANEL
Turn the small knob to set the pilot-selected course on the HSI when the VOR1, VOR2, or
& CNS
OBS/SUSP mode is selected. Pressing this knob centers the CDI on the currently selected
VOR. The pilot-selected course provides course reference to the pilot-side flight director
when operating in Navigation and Approach modes.
Press to re-center the CDI and return course pointer directly TO bearing of active waypoint/
MANAGEMENT
station.
FLIGHT
7 COM Knob Turn to tune COM transceiver standby frequencies (large knob for MHz; small for kHz).
Press to toggle cyan tuning box between COM1 and COM2.
The selected COM (green) is controlled with the COM MIC Key (Audio Panel).
8 COM Frequency Transfers the standby and active COM frequencies.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Transfer Key (EMERG) Press and hold two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.5 MHz) automatically into
the active frequency field.
9 COM VOL/SQ Knob Turn to control COM audio volume level (shown as a percentage in the COM Frequency Box).
Press to turn the COM automatic squelch ON/OFF.
AFCS
10 Direct-to Key ( ) Activates the direct-to function and allows the user to enter a destination waypoint and es-
tablish a direct course to the selected destination (specified by identifier, chosen from the
active route).
11 FPL Key Displays flight plan information.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
12 CLR Key Erases information, cancels entries, or removes menus.
(DFLT MAP) Press and hold to display the MFD Navigation Map Page (MFD only).
13 MENU Key Displays a context-sensitive list of options for accessing additional features or making setting
APPENDICES
changes.
14 PROC Key Gives access to IFR departure procedures (DPs), arrival procedures (STARs), and approach
procedures (IAPs) for a flight plan or selected airport.
15 ENT Key Validates/confirms menu selection or data entry.
INDEX
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
16 FMS Knob Press to turn the selection cursor ON/OFF.

(Flight Management Data Entry: With cursor ON, turn to enter data in the highlighted field (large knob moves
System Knob) cursor location; small knob selects character for highlighted cursor location).
Scrolling: When a list of information is too long for the window/box, a scroll bar appears,
INSTRUMENTS
indicating more items to view. With cursor ON, turn large knob to scroll through the list.
FLIGHT
Page Selection: Turn knob on MFD to select the page to view (large knob selects a page
group; small knob selects a specific page from the group).
17 *ALT SEL Knob Sets the selected altitude in the Selected Altitude Box (the large knob selects the thousands,
the small knob selects the hundreds). In addition to providing the standard system altitude
alerter function, selected altitude provides an altitude setting for the Altitude Capture/Hold
mode of the AFCS.
EIS
18 *AP Key Engages/disengages the Autopilot and Flight Director in the default vertical and lateral
modes.
19 *FD Key Activates/deactivates the Flight Director only. Pressing the FD key turns on the Flight
AUDIO PANEL
Director in the default vertical and lateral modes. Pressing the FD key again deactivates
& CNS
the Flight Director and removes the command bars, unless the Autopilot is engaged. If the
Autopilot is engaged, the FD key is disabled.
20 *NAV Key Selects/deselects the Navigation mode.
MANAGEMENT
21 *ALT SEL Key Selects/deselects the Altitude Hold mode.

FLIGHT
22 *VS Key Selects/deselects the Vertical Speed mode.

23 *FLC Key Selects/deselects the Flight Level Change mode.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
24 *YD Key Engages/disengages the Yaw Damper.

25 *HDG Key Selects/deselects the Heading Select mode.
26 *APR Key Selects/deselects the Approach mode.
27
AFCS
*VNV Key Selects/deselects Vertical Navigation mode

(if equipped)
28 *NOSE UP Key Controls the active pitch reference for the Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level
Change modes.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
29 *NOSE DN Key Controls the active pitch reference for the Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level
Change modes.
*This Key only appears on the MFD.
APPENDICES
INDEX
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
SECURE DIGITAL CARDS
SYSTEM
NOTE: Refer to the Appendices for instructions on updating the aviation databases.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
NOTE: Ensure that the system is powered off before inserting the SD card.
The data card slots on the PFD and MFD use Secure Digital (SD) cards and are located on the top right portion
of the display bezels. Each display bezel is equipped with two SD card slots.
Inserting and Removing an SD card:
EIS
Insert the SD card in the SD card slot, pushing the card in until the spring latch engages. The front of the card
should remain flush with the face of the display bezel. To remove, gently press on the SD card to release the
spring latch and eject the card.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
SD Card Slots
HAZARD
AFCS
Figure 1-3 PFD/MFD Display Bezel SD Card Slots
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
1.3 SYSTEM OPERATION

SYSTEM
This section discusses powering up the system, normal and reversionary display operation, system status, AHRS
modes of operation, and GPS receiver operation.
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM POWER-UP
FLIGHT
NOTE: See the Appendices for additional information regarding system-specific annunciations and alerts.
NOTE: See the current, pertinent flight manual for specific procedures concerning avionics power application
EIS
and emergency power supply operation.

The system is integrated with the aircraft electrical system and receives power directly from electrical busses.
AUDIO PANEL
The PFD, MFD, and supporting sub-systems include both power-on and continuous built-in test features that
& CNS
exercise the processor, RAM, ROM, external inputs and outputs to provide safe operation.
When powering up the system, test annunciations are displayed and key annunciator lights also become
momentarily illuminated on the audio panel and the display bezels. On the PFD, the AHRS begins to initialize
and displays ‘AHRS ALIGN: Remain Stationary’. All system annunciations should disappear typically within
MANAGEMENT
one minute of power-up.

FLIGHT
When the MFD powers up, the MFD Power-up Page displays the following information:
• System version • Navigation database name and effective dates
• Land database name and version • Airport Directory name and effective dates
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
• Safe Taxi database name and effective dates • FliteCharts/ChartView database information
• Terrain database name and version • IFR/VFR charts database information
• Obstacle database name and effective dates • Crew Profile
• Navigation database name and effective dates • Copyright
AFCS
Current database information includes the valid operating dates, cycle number and database type. When this
information has been reviewed for currency (to ensure that no databases have expired), the pilot is prompted to
continue. Pressing the ENT Key acknowledges this information and displays the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
ADDITIONAL
NORMAL OPERATION
FEATURES
NOTE: In normal operating mode, backlighting can only be adjusted from the PFD (see Section 1.5). In
reversionary mode, it can be adjusted from the remaining display.
APPENDICES
In normal operating mode, the PFD presents graphical flight instrumentation (attitude, heading, airspeed,
altitude, vertical speed), replacing the traditional flight instrument cluster (see the Flight Instruments Section
for more information). The MFD normally displays a full-color moving map with navigation information (see
the Flight Management Section), while the left portion of the MFD is dedicated to the Engine Indication System
(see the EIS Section). Both displays offer control for COM and NAV frequency selection.
INDEX
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
EIS
Figure 1-4 System Normal Operation
REVERSIONARY MODE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: The system alerts the pilot when backup paths are utilized by the LRUs. Refer to the Appendices for
further information regarding system-specific alerts.
In the event of a display failure, the system can be manually switched to reversionary (backup) mode (all
MANAGEMENT
remaining displays enter reversionary mode). In reversionary mode, all important flight information is presented
FLIGHT
on the remaining display(s) in the same format as in normal operating mode.
If a display fails, the appropriate IAU-display Ethernet interface is cut off. Thus, the IAU can no longer
communicate with the remaining display, and the NAV and COM functions provided to the failed display by the
IAU are flagged as invalid on the remaining display. The system reverts to backup paths for the AHRS, ADC,
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Engine/Airframe Unit, and Transponder, as required. The change to backup paths is completely automated for
all LRUs and no pilot action is required.
Reversionary mode may be manually activated by pressing the Audio Panel’s red DISPLAY BACKUP Button.
Pressing this button again deactivates reversionary mode.
AFCS
NAV1 and COM1 Flagged Invalid (provided by the failed PFD)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
DISPLAY BACKUP Button

Manually Activates/Deactivates Reversionary Mode on All Displays
INDEX
Figure 1-5 Reversionary Mode (Failed PFD)
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM ANNUNCIATIONS
SYSTEM
NOTE: Upon power-up, certain windows remain invalid as system equipment begins to initialize. All windows
should be operational within one minute of power-up. If any window continues to remain flagged, the
INSTRUMENTS
system should be serviced by a Garmin-authorized repair facility.

FLIGHT
When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a large red or amber ‘X’ is typically displayed on windows associated
with the failed data (refer to Table 1-1 for example flags and the responsible LRUs).
NOTE: Refer to the current, pertinent flight manual for additional information regarding pilot responses to
these annunciations.
EIS
System Annunciation Comment System Annunciation Comment

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Air Data, Attitude and Heading Display system is not receiving

Reference System is aligning. vertical speed input from the
air data computer.
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Display system is not receiving Display system is not receiving

attitude information from the valid heading input from the
AHRS. AHRS or magnetometer.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Display system is not receiving

altitude input from the air data
computer.
AHRS calibration incomplete or
configuration module failure.
AFCS

valid OAT information from the
GPS information is either air data computer.
not present or is invalid for
ADDITIONAL
navigation use. Note that

FEATURES
valid transponder information.

AHRS utilizes GPS inputs
during normal operation. A red ‘X’ through any other
AHRS operation may be display field (such as engine
Other Various Red X
degraded if GPS signals are not instrumentation fields)
Indications
indicates that the field is not
APPENDICES
present.
receiving valid data.

airspeed input from the air
data computer.
INDEX
Table 1-1 System Annunciations
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM STATUS
SYSTEM
The status of detected LRUs can be checked on the ‘Aux - System Status’ Page. Active LRUs are indicated by
green check marks; failed by red “X”s. Failed LRUs should be noted and a service center or Garmin-authorized
dealer informed.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Figure 1-6 Example System Status Page
The LRU and ARFRM Softkeys on the ‘Aux - System Status’ Page select the applicable list (‘LRU Information’
AVOIDANCE
or ‘Airframe’ Window) through which the FMS Knob can be used to scroll information within the selected
HAZARD
window.
Pressing the MFD1 DB Softkey (label annunciator turns green indicting the softkey is selected) places the
cursor in the database window. Use the FMS Knob to scroll through database information for the MFD.
Pressing the softkey again will change the softkey label to PFD1 DB. PFD 1 database information is now
AFCS
displayed in the database window. Pressing the softkey a third time will change the softkey label back to MFD1
DB. MFD database information is displayed again in the database window.
The ANN Test Softkey, when selected, causes an annunciation test tone to be played.
Viewing LRU Information:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Status’ Page.
2) To place the cursor in the ‘LRU Info’ Box,
Press the LRU Softkey
APPENDICES
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key
b) With the ‘Select LRU’ Window highlighted, press the ENT Key.
3) Use the FMS Knob to scroll through the box to view LRU status information.
INDEX
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
AHRS OPERATION
SYSTEM
NOTE: Refer to the Appendices for specific AHRS alert information.

INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
NOTE: Aggressive maneuvering while AHRS is not operating normally may degrade AHRS accuracy.
In addition to using internal sensors, the AHRS uses GPS information, magnetic field data and air data
to assist in attitude/heading calculations. In normal mode, the AHRS relies upon GPS and magnetic field
measurements. If either of these external measurements is unavailable or invalid, the AHRS uses air data
information for attitude determination. Four AHRS modes of operation are available and depend upon the
EIS
combination of available sensor inputs. Loss of air data, GPS, or magnetometer sensor inputs is communicated
to the pilot by message advisory alerts.
The AHRS corrects for shifts and variations in the Earth’s magnetic field by applying the Magnetic Field
AUDIO PANEL
Variation Database. The Magnetic Field Variation Database is derived from the International Geomagnetic
& CNS
Reference Field (IGRF). The IGRF is a mathematical model that describes the Earth’s main magnetic field and its
annual rate of change. The database is updated approximately every 5 years. See the Appendices for information
on updating the Magnetic Field Variation Database. The system will prompt you on startup when an update is
available. Failure to update this database could lead to erroneous heading information being displayed to the
MANAGEMENT
pilot.
FLIGHT
GPS Data Available and Reliable?

YES
NO
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Mag Data Available and Reliable? Mag Data AND Air Data
YES
Available and Reliable?

NO
YES
NO
Air Data Available and Reliable?

AFCS
YES
NO
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AHRS Normal AHRS no-Mag AHRS no-Mag/ AHRS no-GPS AHRS coast-on-gyros
Mode Mode no-Air Mode Mode until invalid
APPENDICES
Heading Invalid Heading Invalid Attitude/Heading Invalid
Figure 1-7 AHRS Operation

INDEX
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
GPS INPUT FAILURE
SYSTEM
NOTE: In-flight initialization of AHRS, when operating without any valid source of GPS data and at true
air speed values greater than approximately 200 knots, is not guaranteed. Under these rare conditions, it
INSTRUMENTS
is possible for in-flight AHRS initialization to take an indefinite amount of time which would result in an
FLIGHT
extended period of time where valid AHRS outputs are unavailable.
The system provides two sources of GPS information. If a single GPS receiver fails, or if the information
provided from one of the GPS receivers is unreliable, the AHRS seamlessly transitions to using the other GPS
receiver. An alert message informs the pilot of the use of the backup GPS path. If both GPS inputs fail, the
EIS
AHRS continues to operate in reversionary No-GPS mode so long as the air data and magnetometer inputs
are available and valid.
AIR DATA INPUT FAILURE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
A failure of the air data input has no effect on AHRS output while AHRS is operating in normal mode. A
failure of the air data input while the AHRS is operating in reversionary No-GPS mode results in invalid
attitude and heading information on the PFD (as indicated by red “X” flags).
MANAGEMENT
MAGNETOMETER FAILURE
FLIGHT
If the magnetometer input fails, the AHRS transitions to one of the reversionary No-Magnetometer modes
and continues to output valid attitude information. However, if the aircraft is airborne, the heading output
on the PFD does become invalid (as indicated by a red “X”).
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
GPS RECEIVER OPERATION

SYSTEM
Each Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU) contains a GPS receiver. Information collected by the specified receiver
(GPS1 for the #1 IAU or GPS2 for the #2 IAU) may be viewed on the ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page.
INSTRUMENTS
These GPS sensor annunciations are most often seen after system power-up when one GPS receiver has
FLIGHT
acquired satellites before the other, or one of the GPS receivers has not yet acquired a SBAS signal. While
the aircraft is on the ground, the SBAS signal may be blocked by obstructions causing one GPS receiver to
have difficulty acquiring a good signal. Also, while airborne, turning the aircraft may result in one of the GPS
receivers temporarily losing the SBAS signal.
If the sensor annunciation persists, check for a system failure message in the ‘Alerts’ Window on the PFD. If
EIS
no failure message exists, check the ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page and compare the information for GPS1 and GPS2.
Discrepancies may indicate a problem.
Viewing GPS receiver status information:
AUDIO PANEL
1) Use the large FMS Knob to select the Auxiliary Page Group (see Section 1.4 for information on navigating MFD
& CNS
page groups).
2) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page.
MANAGEMENT
Selecting the GPS receiver for which data may be reviewed:

FLIGHT
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page.
2) To change the selected GPS receiver:
Press the desired GPS Softkey.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Use the FMS Knob to highlight the receiver which is not selected and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
Satellite Constellation Satellite Signal GPS Receiver
SYSTEM
Diagram Information Status Status
RAIM
Availability
Prediction
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
EIS
EGNOS, MSAS
and WAAS
Selected
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Satellite Signal
Strength Bars
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
GPS Selection RAIM Softkey
Softkeys Selected
SBAS Softkey Selected
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-8 GPS Status Page (RAIM or SBAS Selected)
HAZARD
SATELLITE CONSTELLATION DIAGRAM
The ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page displays satellites currently in view at their respective positions on a sky view
diagram. The sky view is always in a north-up orientation, with the outer circle representing the horizon, the
AFCS
inner circle representing 45° above the horizon, and the center point showing the position directly overhead.
Each satellite is represented by an oval containing the Pseudo-random noise (PRN) number (i.e., satellite
identification number). Satellites whose signals are currently being used are represented by solid ovals.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SATELLITE STATUS
This ‘Satellite Status’ Box provides information regarding signal status. The accuracy of the aircraft’s GPS fix
is calculated using Estimated Position Uncertainty (EPU), Dilution of Precision (DOP), and horizontal and
APPENDICES
vertical figures of merit (HFOM and VFOM). EPU is the radius of a circle centered on an estimated horizontal
position in which actual position has 95% probability of laying. EPU is a statistical error indication and not
an actual error measurement.
INDEX
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
DOP measures satellite geometry quality (i.e., number of satellites received and where they are relative to
SYSTEM
each other) on a range from 0.0 to 9.9, with lower numbers denoting better accuracy. HFOM and VFOM,
measures of horizontal and vertical position uncertainty, are the current 95% confidence horizontal and
vertical accuracy values reported by the GPS receiver.
INSTRUMENTS
The current calculated GPS position, time, altitude, ground speed, and track for the aircraft are displayed
FLIGHT
below the satellite signal accuracy measurements.
GPS RECEIVER STATUS

The GPS solution type (ACQUIRING, 2D NAV, 2D DIFF NAV, 3D NAV, 3D DIFF NAV) for the active GPS
receiver (GPS1 or GPS2) is shown in the upper right of the ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page. When the receiver
EIS
is in the process of acquiring enough satellite signals for navigation, the receiver uses satellite orbital data
(collected continuously from the satellites) and last known position to determine the satellites that should be
in view. “Acquiring” is indicated as the solution until a sufficient number of satellites have been acquired for
AUDIO PANEL
computing a solution.
& CNS
The system will determine if messages are being received from the WAAS engine. If so, the SBAS will read
‘Active’. If no messages have been received for 4 seconds and SBAS providers are enabled, the SBAS status will read
‘Inactive’. If SBAS providers are disabled, SBAS status will read ‘Disabled’. Note, that a fix is not required, but rather
the status is determined by communication with the WAAS engine.
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
RAIM PREDICTION
In most cases performing a RAIM prediction is not necessary. However, in some cases, the selected approach
may be outside the SBAS coverage area, and it may be necessary to perform a RAIM prediction for the
AVOIDANCE
intended approach.
HAZARD
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) is a GPS receiver function that performs a consistency
check on all tracked satellites. RAIM ensures that the available satellite geometry allows the receiver to
calculate a position within a specified RAIM protection limit (2.0 nautical miles for oceanic and enroute, 1.0
nm for terminal, and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). During oceanic, enroute, and terminal phases of
flight, RAIM is available nearly 100% of the time.
AFCS
The RAIM prediction function also indicates whether RAIM is available at a specified date and time. RAIM
computations predict satellite coverage within ±15 min of the specified arrival date and time.
Because of the tighter protection limit on approaches, there may be times when RAIM is not available. The
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
system automatically monitors RAIM and warns with an alert message when it is not available. If RAIM is not
predicted to be available for the final approach course, the approach does not become active, as indicated by
the messages “Approach is not active” and “RAIM not available from FAF to Map”. If RAIM is not available
when crossing the FAF, the missed approach procedure must be flown.
APPENDICES
NOTE: The system RAIM prediction capability does not meet all RAIM prediction requirements. Reference
the RAIM/Fault Detection and Exclusion (FDE) Prediction Tool at fly.garmin.com as required.
Predicting RAIM availability at a selected waypoint:

INDEX
1) Select the ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page.

2) If necessary, press the RAIM Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob. The ‘Waypoint’ Field is highlighted.
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘Waypoint Information’ Window.
SYSTEM
5) Enter the desired waypoint:
Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired waypoint by identifier, facility, or city name and press the ENT Key.
Refer to Section 1.7 for instructions on entering alphanumeric data into the system.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Or:
a) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of flight plan waypoints (the FPL list is populated
only when navigating a flight plan).
b) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Flight Plan, Nearest, Recent, or User waypoints, if
required.
EIS
c) Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select the desired waypoint. The system automatically fills in the
identifier, facility, and city fields with the information for the selected waypoint.
d) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
8) With the cursor highlighting ‘Compute RAIM?’, press the ENT Key. Once RAIM availability is computed, one of
MANAGEMENT
the following is displayed:
FLIGHT
• ‘Compute RAIM?’—RAIM has not been computed for the current waypoint, time, and date combination

• ‘Computing Availability’—RAIM calculation in progress

• ‘RAIM Available’—RAIM is predicted to be available for the specified waypoint, time, and date

AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
• ‘RAIM not Available’—RAIM is predicted to be unavailable for the specified waypoint, time, and date

Predicting RAIM availability at present position:

2) If necessary, press the RAIM Softkey.
AFCS
3) Press the FMS Knob. The ‘Waypoint’ Field is highlighted.
4) Press the MENU Key.
ADDITIONAL
5) With ‘Set WPT to Present Position’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
FEATURES
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
8) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
9) With the cursor highlighting ‘Compute RAIM?’, press the ENT Key. Once RAIM availability is computed, one of
the following is displayed:
• ‘Compute RAIM?’—RAIM has not been computed for the current waypoint, time, and date combination

• ‘Computing Availability’—RAIM calculation in progress

INDEX
• ‘RAIM Available’—RAIM is predicted to be available for the specified waypoint, time, and date

• ‘RAIM not Available’—RAIM is predicted to be unavailable for the specified waypoint, time, and date

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
SBAS SELECTION (SBAS SOFTKEY IS SELECTED)

SYSTEM
In certain situations, such as when the aircraft is outside or on the fringe of the SBAS coverage area, it may
be desirable to disable EGNOS, WAAS or MSAS (although it is not recommended). When disabled, the
‘SBAS’ Field in the ‘GPS Status’ Box indicates Disabled. There may be a small delay for the ‘GPS Status’ Box
INSTRUMENTS
to be updated upon WAAS and MSAS enabling/disabling.

FLIGHT
Disabling SBAS:
2) If necessary, press the SBAS Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob, and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘EGNOS’, ‘MSAS’ or ‘WAAS’.
EIS
4) Press the ENT Key to uncheck the box.

5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GPS SATELLITE SIGNAL STRENGTHS

The ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page can be helpful in troubleshooting weak (or missing) signal levels due to poor
satellite coverage or installation problems. As the GPS receiver locks onto satellites, a signal strength bar is
displayed for each satellite in view, with the appropriate satellite PRN number (01-32 or 120-138 for WAAS)
MANAGEMENT
below each bar. The progress of satellite acquisition is shown in three stages, as indicated by signal bar
FLIGHT
appearance:
- No bar—Receiver is looking for the indicated satellite
- Hollow bar—Receiver has found the satellite and is collecting data
AVOIDANCE
- Cyan bar—Receiver has collected the necessary data and the satellite signal can be used
HAZARD
- Green bar—Satellite is being used for the GPS solution

- Checkered bar—Receiver has excluded the satellite (Fault Detection and Exclusion)
- “D” indication—Denotes the satellite is being used as part of the differential computations
Each satellite has a 30-second data transmission that must be collected (signal strength bar is hollow) before
AFCS
the satellite may be used for navigation (signal strength bar becomes solid).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
1.4 ACCESSING SYSTEM FUNCTIONALITY
SYSTEM
SOFTKEY FUNCTION
INSTRUMENTS
Selection softkeys are located along the bottom of the displays. The softkeys shown depend on the softkey
FLIGHT
level previously selected. The bezel keys below the softkey labels can be used to press the appropriate softkey.
There are three types of softkeys. One selects a simple on/off state, indicated by an annunciator on the softkey
label displayed as green (on) or gray (off). The next type of softkey selects among several options, indicated by
the softkey label changing (with the exception of the Map Range keys) to reflect the name of the chosen option.
The last type of softkey, when pressed displays another set of softkeys available for the selected function. Also,
EIS
these softkeys revert to the previous level after 45 seconds of inactivity. When a softkey function is disabled,
the softkey label is subdued (dimmed)
AUDIO PANEL
Softkey On Softkey Subdued
& CNS
Softkey Names
(displayed)
Bezel-Mounted
Softkeys (press)
Figure 1-9 Softkeys (First-Level PFD Configuration)
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
PFD SOFTKEYS
The PFD softkeys provide control over the PFD display and some flight management functions, including
GPS, NAV, terrain, traffic, and weather (optional). Each softkey sublevel has a Back Softkey which can be
pressed to return to the previous level. If messages remain after acknowledgement, the Alerts Softkey is black
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
on white. The Alerts Softkey is visible in all softkey levels. For the top level softkeys and the transponder
(XPDR) levels, the Ident Softkey remains visible.
The following table describes PFD Softkey functions. Softkeys which display another set of softkeys are
indicated in the table by showing the given set as an increased level. For example, the Map/HSI softkey is
shown in the Level 1 column. When pressed, the Map/HSI softkey will display another set of softkeys and
AFCS
these softkeys are explained in the Level 2 column. If a softkey on Level 2 provides yet another set of softkey
functions, those new available softkeys are then explained in the Level 3 column, etc.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
Description
CAS Displays the scroll key. Only selectable when the number of CAS messages exceeds the
capacity of the display window.
CAS Up Scroll up list of CAS messages.
APPENDICES
CAS Down Scroll down list of CAS messages.

Map/HSI Displays the PFD Map display settings softkeys.
Layout Displays the PFD Map selection softkeys.
Map Off Removes the PFD map from display (Inset, HSI, or Traffic).
Inset Map Displays the Inset Map.
INDEX
HSI Map Displays the HSI Map.
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Description

Inset Trfc Replaces the Inset Map with a dedicated traffic display.
HSI Trfc Replaces the HSI Map with a dedicated traffic display.
Detail Selects desired amount of map detail:
INSTRUMENTS
All (No Declutter): All map features visible

FLIGHT
Detail 3: Declutters land data

Detail 2: Declutters land and SUA data
Detail 1: Removes everything except for the active flight plan
Traffic Displays traffic information on PFD Map.
EIS
TER Topo: Displays topographical data (e.g., coastlines, terrain, rivers,

lakes) and elevation scale on PFD Map.
REL: Displays relative terrain information on the PFD Map.
AUDIO PANEL
Off: Removes terrain

& CNS
WX LGND Displays/removes the name of the selected weather data provider (SiriusXM) and the
weather product icon and age box (for enabled weather products).
NEXRAD Displays XM NEXRAD weather and coverage on PFD Map (subscription optional)
MANAGEMENT
METAR Displays METAR information on Inset Map (subscription optional)

FLIGHT
Lightning Adds/removes the display of SiriusXM or Connext lightning information (based on

weather data source selection) on the PFD Map.
LTNG Off Disables lightning function on PFD Map. The softkey annunciator is green when the
lightning function is off.
AVOIDANCE
Datalink Selects the datalink weather source for the PFD Map
HAZARD
STRMSCP Adds or removes the display of Stormscope information on the PFD Map. The
softkey annunciator is green when the function is on. When the function is off, the
annunciator is gray.
TFC Map Replaces the PFD Map with a dedicated traffic display.
AFCS
PFD Opt Displays second-level softkeys for additional PFD options.

SVT Displays additional SVT overlay softkeys.
Pathways Displays Pathway Boxes on the Synthetic Vision Display.
Terrain
ADDITIONAL
Enables synthetic terrain depiction.

FEATURES
HDG LBL Displays compass heading along the Zero-Pitch line.

APT Sign Displays position markers for airports within approximately 15 nm of the current
aircraft position. Airport identifiers are displayed when the airport is within
approximately 9 nm.
APPENDICES
Wind Displays the wind option softkeys.

Off Wind information not displayed.
Option 1 Headwind/Tailwind and crosswind arrows with numeric speed components.
Option 2 Total wind direction arrow and numeric speed.
Option 3 Total wind direction arrow with digital numeric direction and speed.
INDEX
DME Displays ‘DME Information’ Window (optional).
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
Bearing 1 Cycles the Bearing 1 Information Window through NAV1, NAV2, GPS/waypoint
identifier and GPS-derived distance information, ADF/frequency, and Off.
Bearing 2 Cycles the Bearing 2 Information Window through NAV1, NAV2, GPS/waypoint identifier
INSTRUMENTS
and GPS-derived distance information, ADF/frequency, and Off.
FLIGHT
ALT Units Displays softkeys to select altitude unit parameters.
Meters When enabled, displays altimeter in meters.
IN Press to display the BARO setting as inches of mercury.
HPA Press to display the BARO setting as hectopascals.
EIS
STD Baro Sets barometric pressure to 29.92 in Hg (1013 hPa if metric units are selected).
OBS Selects OBS mode on the CDI when navigating by GPS (only available with active leg).
When OBS is on, the softkey annunciator is green.
AUDIO PANEL
CDI Cycles through FMS, NAV1, and NAV2 navigation modes on the CDI.
& CNS
ADF/DME Displays the ADF/DME Tuning Window, allowing tuning and selection of the ADF and
DME (optional).
XPDR Displays the transponder selection softkeys.
MANAGEMENT
Standby Selects transponder Standby Mode (transponder does not reply to any interrogations).
FLIGHT
On Activates transponder (transponder replies to identification interrogations).
ALT Altitude Reporting Mode (transponder replies to identification and altitude
interrogations).
VFR Automatically enters the VFR code (1200 in the U.S.A. only).
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Code Displays transponder code selection softkeys 0-7.
0-7 Use numbers to enter code.
Ident Activates the Special Position Identification (SPI) pulse for 18 seconds, identifying the
transponder return on the ATC screen.
BKSP Removes numbers entered, one at a time.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TMR/REF Displays ‘References’ Window.
Nearest Displays ‘Nearest Airports’ Window.
Alerts Displays the ‘Alerts’ Window when pressed. System generated messages cause the
APPENDICES
or Alerts Softkey label to change to a flashing ‘Message’ label. Pressing the Message
Message Softkey opens the ‘Alerts Window, acknowledges the message, and the softkey reverts
to the ‘Alerts’ label.
Table 1-2 PFD Softkeys
INDEX
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
MFD SOFTKEYS
SYSTEM
The MFD softkeys provide control over flight management functions, including GPS, NAV, terrain, traffic,
and weather (optional). There are many softkey functions available on the MFD depending on the page group
and screen selected.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
The following table provides an example of the MFD Softkey functions accessed from the Navigation Map
screen. Further information concerning softkeys providing more navigation and flight planning functions
may be found in the Flight Management Section. Terrain, traffic, and weather softkey descriptions may
be found in the Hazard Avoidance section. Further description of optional equipment and corresponding
softkey functions may be found in the Additional Features Section.
EIS

Engine Displays EIS - Engine Page and second-level engine softkeys; press again to exit page
(see the EIS Section for more information).
AUDIO PANEL
Engine Returns to previously shown softkeys.

& CNS
DEC Fuel Decreases calculated fuel remaining by 1 gallon for each softkey press.
INC Fuel Increases calculated fuel remaining by 1 gallon for each softkey press.
RST Fuel Resets calculated fuel remaining to default and resets fuel used to zero.
MANAGEMENT
Map Opt Displays system oil pressure and temperature, fuel calculations, and electrical
FLIGHT
system information.
Traffic Displays traffic information on Navigation Map Page.
Inset Displays inset window second level softkeys.
Off Removes VSD inset from Navigation Map Page.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
VSD Displays VSD profile information of terrain/obstacles along the current track, vertical
track vector, and selected altitude.
Auto: Automatically displays either VSD profile information for
active flight plan information or along current track with no
active flight plan.
AFCS
FPL: Displays VSD profile information for active flight plan.

TRK: Displays VSD profile information along current track.
TER Displays terrain on the map; cycles through the following:
Off: No terrain information shown on MFD Map.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Topo: Displays topographical data (e.g., coastlines, terrain, rivers,

lakes) and elevation scale on MFD Map.
REL: Displays relative terrain information on the MFD Map.
AWY Displays airways on the map; cycles through the following:
APPENDICES
Off: No airways are displayed.

On: All airways are displayed.
LO: Only low altitude airways are displayed.
HI: Only high altitude airways are displayed.
STRMSCP Displays Stormscope information on Navigation Map (optional).
INDEX
NEXRAD Displays XM NEXRAD weather and coverage on Navigation Map Page (optional).
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
Description
XM LTNG Displays XM lightning information on Navigation Map Page (optional).
METAR Displays METAR information on Inset Map (subscription optional).
Legend Displays legends for the displayed XM Weather products (optional).
INSTRUMENTS
Detail Selects desired amount of map detail; cycles through the following levels:
FLIGHT
Detail All: All map features visible.
Detail-3: Declutters land data.
Detail-2: Declutters land and SUA data.
Detail-1: Removes everything except for the active flight plan.
EIS
Charts When available, displays optional airport and terminal procedure charts.
CHRT Opt Displays chart display settings softkeys (if available).
ROT CCW Rotates chart 90 degrees counter clockwise.
AUDIO PANEL
ROT CW Rotates chart 90 degrees clockwise.
& CNS
Fit WDTH Chart zoom adjusted to fill width of display.
Full SCN When the annunciator bar is green, full screen mode is enabled. The annunciator bar
is grey when in split screen mode.
MANAGEMENT
SYNC Displays the chart associated with the current phase of flight.
FLIGHT
Info Returns to the selected airport information chart (Airport Diagram, Alternate
Minimums, Climb/Descent Table, Diverse Vector Area, Hot Spot, INOP Components,
LAHSO, and Takeoff Minimums)
DP Displays departure procedure chart.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
STAR Displays standard terminal arrival procedure chart.
APR Displays approach procedure chart.
Checklist When available, displays optional checklists.
Table 1-3 MFD Navigation Map Page Softkeys
AFCS
MENUS
The system has a MENU Key that, when pressed, displays a context-sensitive list of options. This options list
allows the user to access additional features or make settings changes which specifically relate to the currently
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
displayed window/page. There is no all-encompassing menu. Some menus provide access to additional
submenus that are used to view, edit, select, and review options. Menus display ‘No Options’ when there are
no options for the window/page selected. The main controls used in association with all window/page group
operations are described in Section 1.2. Softkey selection does not display menus or submenus.
APPENDICES
INDEX
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
Navigating the Page Menu Window:

SYSTEM
1) Press the MENU Key to display the ‘Page Menu’ Window.

2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through a list of available options (a scroll bar appears to the right of the window
when the option list is longer than the window).
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
3) Press the ENT Key to select the desired option.

4) The CLR Key may be pressed to remove the menu and cancel the operation. Pressing the FMS Knob also
removes the displayed menu.
EIS
No Options
with Nearest
Airports Window
Displayed on PFD
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Options with
Active Flight Plan
Page Displayed
MANAGEMENT
on MFD
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Figure 1-10 Page Menu Examples

AFCS
MFD PAGE GROUPS

ADDITIONAL
NOTE: Refer to other supporting sections in this Pilot’s Guide for details on specific pages.
FEATURES
Information on the MFD is presented on pages grouped according to function. The page group and active
page title are displayed in the upper center of the screen, below the Navigation Status Box. In the bottom right
corner of the screen, a page group window is displayed by turning either FMS Knob. The page group tabs are
APPENDICES
displayed along the bottom of the window. The page titles are displayed in a list above the page group tabs.
The current page group and current page within the group are shown in cyan.
INDEX
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
Page Group Active Page Title
SYSTEM
MFD
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Pages in
Current
Group
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
Page Groups
& CNS
Figure 1-11 Page Title and Page Groups
The main page groups are navigated using the FMS Knob; specific pages within each group can vary depending
MANAGEMENT
on the configuration of optional equipment.
FLIGHT
Selecting a page using the FMS Knob:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to display the list of page groups; continue turning the large FMS Knob until the
desired page group is selected
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the desired page within a specific page group.
There are several pages which may be selected by selecting the appropriate softkey at the bottom of the page
(or from the page menu). In this case, the active page title will change when a different page softkey is selected,
but the page will remain the same (i.e. the Radio and Info Softkeys show different active page titles (‘Aux - XM
Radio’ and ‘Aux - XM Information’ respective) within the same page, ‘XM Radio’.
AFCS
Page Group Pages within Page Group
Map (Map Page Group) • Navigation Map
• IFR/VFR Charts
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Traffic Map
• Stormscope® (service optional)
• Weather Data Link (service optional)
APPENDICES
• Terrain-SVT (optional)
INDEX
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM

WPT (Waypoint Page Group) • Airport/Procedures/Weather Information Pages
- Airport Information (Info 1 Softkey)
- Airport Directory Information (Info 2 Softkey)
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
- Departure Information (DP Softkey)

- Arrival Information (STAR Softkey)
- Approach Information (APR Softkey)
- Weather Information (optional) (WX Softkey)
EIS
• Intersection Information
• NDB Information
• VOR Information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• VRP Information
• User Waypoint Information
Aux (Auxiliary Page Group) • Trip Planning
MANAGEMENT
• Utility
FLIGHT
• GPS Status
• System Setup 1/2
• XM Radio (service optional)
AVOIDANCE
- XM Radio (Radio Softkey)

HAZARD
- XM Information (Info Softkey)

• Satellite Phone (service optional)
- Telephone (Phone Softkey)
AFCS
- Text Messaging (SMS Softkey)

• System Status
• ADS-B Status
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Connext Setup
• Databases
APPENDICES
INDEX
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
FPL (Flight Plan Page Group) • Active Flight Plan
- Wide View, Narrow View (View Softkey)
INSTRUMENTS
• Flight Plan Catalog
FLIGHT
- Stored Flight Plan (via New Softkey)
NRST (Nearest Page Group) • Nearest Airports
• Nearest Intersections
• Nearest NDB
EIS
• Nearest VOR
• Nearest VRP
• Nearest User WPTS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Nearest Frequencies
• Nearest Airspaces
EIS (Engine Indication System) • System Instruments and Fluid Quantities
MANAGEMENT
Table 1-4 Page Group and Pages
FLIGHT
PROCEDURE PAGES (PROC)
The Procedure Pages may be accessed at any time on the MFD by pressing the PROC Key. A menu is
AVOIDANCE
initialized, and when a departure, approach, or arrival is selected, the appropriate Procedure Loading Page is
HAZARD
opened. Turning the FMS Knob does not scroll through the Procedure pages
• Departure Loading
• Arrival Loading
• Approach Loading
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
SPLIT SCREEN FUNCTIONALITY

SYSTEM
Chart pages may be viewed in split screen mode with either the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ or ‘FPL - Active
Flight Plan’ Page open. To activate the split screen functionality, press the Charts Softkey. Two display panes
are displayed on the MFD. If split screen is activated from the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page, the page title will
INSTRUMENTS
show ‘Map - Chart + Navigation Map’. If split screen is activated from the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page, the
FLIGHT
page title will change to show ‘FPL - Chart + Active Flight Plan’.
MFD in Split Screen Mode (Narrow View)
Page Title shows
‘Map - Chart + Navigation Map’
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Cyan Pane Selector

shows Charts is the
active display pane
Softkeys for the
active display pane
Figure 1-12 Split Screen Mode
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
CONTROLLING DISPLAY PANES

In split screen mode, the active display pane is outlined by a cyan box called the pane selector. Softkeys
and menu options will automatically change depending on which display pane is active. Display panes may
AFCS
be displayed vertically in Narrow View, or horizontally in Wide View. In Narrow View, move the Joystick left
or right to move the pane selector. In Wide View, move the Joystick up and down to move the pane selector.
To change between Wide View and Narrow View, push and hold the Joystick.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
MFD in Split Screen Mode (Wide View)
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Pane Selector Box
- Move Joystick in
direction of cyan
arrows to move
display pane
EIS
- Push and hold
Joystick to change
Cyan Pane Selector Narrow/Wide view
shows Charts
AUDIO PANEL
is the active
display pane Softkeys for the
& CNS
active display pane
Figure 1-13 Split Screen in Wide View
For information on viewing Charts and the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page with the flight plan map, see the
MANAGEMENT
Flight Management Section.
FLIGHT
For more information on Charts and how to enable Charts Full Screen, see the Additional Features Section.
Enabling/disabling split screen mode:
1) From the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page or the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page press the Charts Softkey, or press
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
the MENU Key and select ‘Chart Mode On’. If necessary, press the CHRT Opt Softkey and press the Full SCN
Softkey to disable full screen mode.
2) To disable the split screen mode, press the Charts Softkey again or press the MENU Key and select ‘Chart Mode
Off’. The display returns to the base page, either the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page or the ‘FPL - Active Flight
Plan’ Page.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM SETTINGS
SYSTEM
System settings are managed from the System Setup Pages. Fields shown in cyan text may be edited. Managing
crew profiles, system time format, display units, arrival alerts, and audio voice format settings are discussed in
this section. For other system settings, see the reference given to their respective sections.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
If desired, the default system settings may be restored at any time.

Restoring system setup defaults:
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup’ Page.
2) Press the Defaults Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Restore Page Defaults’, and press the ENT Key.
EIS
The message ‘Restore Setup X Page Defaults?’ is displayed.

3) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Configure System Fields shown in Cyan may

MANAGEMENT
Time be edited
FLIGHT
Change Display
Unit Settings
Configure arrival alert settings
- Enable / disable alert
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
- Set arrival alert trigger distance
Restore System Defaults

AFCS
Crew Profile
- Choose active profile
- Create new profile
- Edit, rename, and delete
existing profile (other than
ADDITIONAL
default profile) Change audio alert

FEATURES
- Import / Export profile to voice setting

SD Card
APPENDICES
Select System Setup Page

- Setup 1
- Setup 2
Figure 1-14 System Setup 1/2 Pages
INDEX
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
CREW PROFILES
SYSTEM
System settings may be saved under a crew profile. The system can store up to 25 profiles; the currently
active profile, the amount of memory used, and the amount of memory available are shown at the top of
the System Setup Page in the box labeled ‘Crew Profile’. From here, crew profiles may be created, selected,
INSTRUMENTS
renamed, or deleted. Crew profiles may also be exported from the system to an SD card, or imported from
FLIGHT
an SD card into the system.
Crew Profile Import/Export Messages

In some circumstances, some messages may appear in conjunction with others:
EIS
‘No crew profile files found.’ Displayed if the SD card does not have one or more valid crew profile filenames.
‘Overwrite existing profile?’ Displayed if the profile name matches the name of existing profile.
‘Profile name invalid. Enter a different Displayed if the profile name is invalid.
AUDIO PANEL
profile name.’
& CNS
‘All available crew profiles in use. Delete a Displayed if the maximum number for crew profiles has been reached.
profile before importing another.’
‘Crew profile import failed.’ Displayed if the importing operation fails for any other reason.
‘Crew profile import succeeded.’ Displayed if the importing operation succeeds.
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
‘Overwrite existing file?’ Displayed if the filename matches the name of an existing file on the SD card.
‘Crew profile export failed.’ Displayed if the export operation fails.
‘Crew profile export succeeded.’ Displayed if the export operation succeeds.
Table 1-5 Crew Profile Import/Export Messages
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Creating a profile:
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup (1 or 2)’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Create’ in the Crew Profile Box.
AFCS
4) Press the ENT Key. A ‘Create Profile’ window is displayed.
5) Use the FMS Knob to enter a profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key. Crew profile names
cannot begin with a blank as the first letter.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) In the next field, use the small FMS Knob to select the desired settings upon which to base the new profile.
Profiles can be created based on Garmin factory defaults, default profile settings (initially based on Garmin
factory defaults unless edited by the pilot), or other previously created profile settings.
7) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
8) With ‘Create’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to create the profile
Or:
Use the large FMS Knob to select ‘Create & Activate’ and press the ENT Key to activate the new profile.

9) To cancel the process, select ‘Cancel’ with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
Selecting an active profile:

SYSTEM

INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the active profile field in the Crew Profile Box.
FLIGHT
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the crew profile list and highlight the desired profile.
5) Press the ENT Key. The system loads and displays the system settings for the selected profile.
Renaming a profile:
EIS

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Rename’ in the Crew Profile Box.
AUDIO PANEL

& CNS
5) In the ‘Rename Profile’ window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to rename.
MANAGEMENT
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter a new profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
8) With ‘Rename’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.

9) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘Cancel’ and press the ENT Key.
Deleting a profile:
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Delete’ in the Crew Profile Box.
AFCS
5) In the ‘Delete Profile’ window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to delete.
7) With ‘Delete’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
8) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘Cancel’ and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
INDEX
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
Importing a profile from an SD card:
SYSTEM
1) Insert an SD card containing the crew profile(s) into the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup (1 or 2)’ Page.
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the Import Softkey.
FLIGHT
Or:
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Import Crew Profile’ and press the ENT Key.
4) The system displays the Crew Profile Importing window with ‘Import’ highlighted. Turn the large FMS Knob to
EIS
highlight the ‘Profile Name’ field, then scroll to the desired profile name with the large and small FMS Knobs,
then press the ENT Key. Then press the ENT Key with ‘Import’ highlighted.
5) If the imported profile name is the same as an existing profile on the system, the system displays an ‘Overwrite
AUDIO PANEL
existing profile? OK or CANCEL’ prompt. Press the ENT Key to replace profile on the system with the profile
& CNS
imported from the SD card, or turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key to return to the
Crew Profile Importing window.
6) If successful, the system displays ‘Crew profile import succeeded.’ in the window below. With ‘OK’ highlighted,
MANAGEMENT
press the ENT or CLR Keys or press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Aux - System Setup (1 or 2)’ Page.. The
FLIGHT
imported profile becomes the active profile.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
Crew Profile Importing and Import Crew Profiles Available for Import Import Successful
Results Window from SD Card
Figure 1-15 Pilot Profile Import (Aux - System Setup Page)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
Exporting a profile to an SD card:

SYSTEM
1) Insert the SD card for storing the Crew Profile into the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup (1 or 2)’ Page..
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the Export Softkey. The system displays the Crew Profile Exporting window.
FLIGHT
Or:
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Export Crew Profile’ and press the ENT Key.
4) To export the crew profile using the current selected profile, press the ENT Key with ‘Export’ highlighted. To
EIS
change the selected profile, turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Profile Name’ field, then scroll to the
desired profile name with the large and small FMS Knobs, then press the ENT Key. Then press the ENT Key
with ‘Export’ highlighted.
AUDIO PANEL
5) If the selected profile to be exported is the same as an existing profile file name on the SD card, the system
& CNS
displays an ‘Overwrite existing profile? OK or CANCEL’ prompt. Press the ENT Key to replace the profile on
the SD card with the profile to be exported, or turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key
to return to the Pilot Profile Exporting window without exporting the profile.
MANAGEMENT
6) If successful, the window displays ‘Crew profile export succeeded.’ With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT or CLR
FLIGHT
Keys, or press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Aux - System Setup (1 or 2)’ Page.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Crew Profile Exporting Window, Enter Export Successful

AFCS
a Name to Use for Exported Profile

Figure 1-16 Pilot Profile Export on the Aux - System Setup Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
DATE/TIME
SYSTEM
The system obtains the current Universal Coordinated Time (UTC) date and time directly from the GPS
satellite signals (shown on the ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page). System time (displayed in the lower right corner of
the PFD) can be displayed in three formats: local 12-hr, local 24-hr, or UTC. Local time is set by adding/
INSTRUMENTS
subtracting an offset (hours:minutes) to/from UTC.
FLIGHT
EIS
Figure 1-17 System Time (UTC Format)
Configuring the system time:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Time Format’ field.
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired format and press the ENT Key to confirm selection. If local time
FLIGHT
format is selected, the ‘Time Offset’ field is highlighted.
5) If necessary, use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time offset (±HH:MM) and press the ENT Key to confirm
selection.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
DISPLAY UNITS
SYSTEM
Units in which various quantities are displayed on the system screens are listed on the System Setup Page.
The Navigation Angle reference, the Temperature units, and the Position units can be set from here.
INSTRUMENTS
Category Settings Affected Quantities

FLIGHT
Navigation Angle Magnetic (North)* Heading

True (North) Course
Bearing
Track
Desired Track
EIS
Wind direction (Trip Planning Page)

Distance and Speed Metric Crosstrack error (HSI)
Nautical* Bearing distances (information windows)
DME distance (information window)
AUDIO PANEL
Flight plan distances

& CNS
Map ranges
DIS, GS, TAS, XTK fields (Navigation Status Box)
All distances on MFD
MANAGEMENT
Altitude buffer distance (System Setup)

Arrival Alert trigger distance (System Setup)
FLIGHT
All speeds on MFD

†
Altitude and Vertical Speed Feet* All altitudes on MFD
Meters All elevations on MFD
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
††
Temperature Celsius* All temperatures on PFD
Fahrenheit Total Air Temperature (Trip Planning Page)
†††
Fuel and Fuel Flow*** Gallons Fuel parameters (Trip Planning Page)
AFCS
†††
Weight** Pounds* N/A
Kilograms
Position HDDD°MM.MM’ All positions
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
HDDD°MM’SS.S”*
MGRS 1m
MGRS 10m
UTM/UPS
* Default setting
APPENDICES
** Contact a Garmin-authorized service center to change this setting

*** Not configurable
† Excludes: airspeed indicator, altitude, true airspeed (PFD), wind speed vector, map range (‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page),
CDI scaling (System Setup), and fuel range calculation (EIS))
†† Excludes: altimeter, Vertical Speed Indicator, and VNV altitudes (Active Flight Plan). QFE settings can be in meters.
††† Excludes: Engine Indication System (EIS)
INDEX
Table 1-6 Display Units Settings (System Setup Page)
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
Changing a display unit setting:
SYSTEM
1) While on the ‘Aux - System Setup’ Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the ‘Display Units’ Box.
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired units.
FLIGHT
4) Press the ENT Key. Press the CLR Key to cancel the action without changing the units.
NOTE: The altimeter barometric correction units may only be changed using the softkeys on the PFD.
BARO TRANSITION ALERT
EIS
See the Flight Instruments Section for a discussion on setting the Baro Transition Alert.
AIRSPACE ALERTS
AUDIO PANEL
See the Flight Management Section for a discussion on Airspace Alerts settings.
& CNS
ARRIVAL ALERTS
The ‘Arrival Alert’ Box on the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page allows the alerts to be turned ‘On/Off’ and the
MANAGEMENT
alert trigger distance (up to 99.9 units) set for alerts in the ‘Alerts’ Window and the PFD Navigation Status
FLIGHT
Box. An arrival alert can be set to notify the pilot with a message upon reaching a user-specified distance from
the final destination (the direct-to waypoint or the last waypoint in a flight plan). When Arrival Alerts is set
to ‘On’, and the set distance is reached, an “Arrival at waypoint” message is displayed in the PFD Navigation
Status Box, and a “WPT ARRIVAL - Arriving at waypoint - [xxxx]” is displayed in the ‘Alerts’ Window. When
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Arrival Alerts is set to ‘Off’, only the PFD Navigation Status Box message “Arriving at waypoint” is displayed,
and it is displayed when the time to the final destination is approximately ten seconds.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 1-18 Arrival Alert Settings (System Setup 1 Page)
Enabling/disabling the Alerts Window arrival alert:

APPENDICES
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘On/Off’ field in the ‘Arrival Alert’ Box.
INDEX
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert On or counterclockwise to turn the alert Off.
SYSTEM
Changing the arrival alert trigger distance:

INSTRUMENTS

FLIGHT
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the distance field in the ‘Arrival Alert’ Box.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter a trigger distance and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT DIRECTOR
EIS
The Flight Director command bars format is set to Single Cue and may not be changed. See the AFCS
Section for more information.
BARO QFE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
See the Flight Instruments Section for more information on Baro QFE settings.
MFD DATA BAR FIELDS

See the Flight Management Section for a discussion on the MFD Data Bar Fields settings.
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
GPS CDI
See the Flight Instruments Section for a discussion on setting the GPS CDI format.
COM CONFIGURATION
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
See the Audio Panel & CNS Section for a discussion on the COM Configuration for channel spacing.
NEAREST AIRPORT
See the Flight Management Section for a discussion on the Nearest Airport settings.
AFCS
STABILITY & PROTECTION

See the Additional Features Section for more information on the Electronic Stability and Protection (ESP)
settings.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AUDIO ALERTS
The ‘Audio’ Box on the ‘Aux - System Setup 2’ Page allows the audio alert voice setting (male or female).
Changing the audio alert voice:
APPENDICES
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the voice field in the ‘Audio’ Box.
4) Use the FMS Knob to select the desired voice setting and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
Enabling/Disabling 3D Audio:
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Pilot 3D Audio’ or ‘Copilot 3D Audio’ ‘On/ Off’ Field in the Audio Box.
FLIGHT
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn 3D Audio On or counterclockwise to turn Off.
Swapping left/right audio in a headset:

EIS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Pilot L-R Swap’ or ‘Copilot L-R Swap’ ‘On/ Off’ Field in the Audio Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the Swap On or counterclockwise to turn Off.
AUDIO PANEL
CHARTS
& CNS
See the Additional Features Section for a discussion on chart settings.
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM UTILITIES
SYSTEM
For flight planning purposes, timers, trip statistics, and a scheduler feature are provided on the ‘Aux - Utility’
Page. The timers available include a stopwatch-like generic timer, a total time in flight timer, and a record of the
time of departure. Trip statistics—odometer, trip odometer, and average trip and maximum groundspeeds—are
INSTRUMENTS
displayed from the time of the last reset.

FLIGHT
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Figure 1-19 Utility Page

AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
TIMERS
The system timers available on the Aux - Utility Page include:
• Stopwatch-like generic timers
AFCS
• Total-time-in-flight timer
• Time since departure
The generic timer can be set to count up or down from a specified time (HH:MM:SS). When the countdown
ADDITIONAL
on the timer reaches zero the digits begin to count up from zero. If the timer is reset before reaching zero on
FEATURES
a countdown, the digits are reset to the initial value. If the timer is counting up when reset, the digits return
to zero.
Setting the generic timer:
APPENDICES
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.

3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the timer counting direction (Up/Dn) and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
4) If a desired starting time is desired:
SYSTEM
a) Use the large FMS Knob to highlight the HH:MM:SS field.
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time and press the ENT Key.
INSTRUMENTS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Start?’ and press the ENT Key to start the timer. The field changes to
FLIGHT
‘Stop?’.
6) To stop the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘Stop?’ highlighted. The field changes to ‘Reset?’.
7) To reset the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘Reset?’ highlighted. The field changes back to ‘Start?’ and the digits
are reset.
EIS
The flight timer can be set to count up from zero starting at system power-up or from the time that the
aircraft lifts off; the timer can also be reset to zero at any time.
Setting the flight timer starting criterion:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the field next to the flight timer.
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion (Pwr-On or In-Air) and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
Resetting the flight timer:
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
3) With ‘Reset Flight Timer’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
The system records the time at which departure occurs, depending on whether the pilot prefers the time
to be recorded from system power-up or from aircraft lift off. The displayed departure time can also be reset
to display the current time at the point of reset. The format in which the time is displayed is controlled from
the System Setup Page.
AFCS
Setting the departure timer starting criterion:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the field next to the departure time.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion (Pwr-On or In-Air) and press the ENT Key. APPENDICES
Resetting the departure time:

3) Use the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Reset Departure Time’ and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
TRIP STATISTICS
SYSTEM
The odometer and trip odometer record the total mileage traveled from the last reset; these odometers can
be reset independently. Resetting the trip odometer also resets the average trip groundspeed. Maximum
groundspeed for the period of time since the last reset is also displayed.
INSTRUMENTS
Resetting trip statistics readouts:

FLIGHT

2) Press the MENU Key. The following reset options for trip statistics are displayed:
• Reset Trip ODOM/AVG GS—Resets trip average ground speed readout and odometer

EIS
• Reset Odometer—Resets odometer readout only

• Reset Maximum Speed—Resets maximum speed readout only

• Reset All—Resets flight timer, departure timer, odometers, and groundspeed readouts

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Use the FMS Knob to highlight the desired reset option and press the ENT Key. The selected parameters are
reset to zero and begin to display data from the point of reset.
SCHEDULER
MANAGEMENT
The system’s Scheduler feature can be used to enter and display reminder messages (e.g., “Switch fuel
FLIGHT
tanks”, “Overhaul”, etc.) in the ‘Alerts’ Window on the PFD. Messages can be set to display based on a
specific date and time (event), once the message timer reaches zero (one-time; default setting), or recurrently
whenever the message timer reaches zero (periodic). Message timers set to periodic alerting automatically
reset to the original timer value once the message is displayed. When power is cycled, messages are retained
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
until deleted, and message timer countdown is restarted.

Scheduler messages appear in the ‘Alerts’ Window on the PFD and cause the Alerts Softkey label to change
to a flashing ‘Message’ label. Pressing the Message Softkey opens the “Alerts” Window and acknowledges the
scheduler message. The softkey reverts to the “Alerts” label. Pressing the Alerts Softkey again removes the
‘Alerts’ Window from the display and the scheduler message is deleted from the message queue.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 1-20 PFD Alerts Window

INDEX
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
Entering a scheduler message:
SYSTEM
1) Select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the first empty field within the ‘Scheduler’ Box.
FLIGHT
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter text within the ‘Message’ Field to be displayed in the ‘Messages’ Window and press
the ENT Key.
5) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the ‘Type’ Field.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select set the message alert type:
EIS
• ‘Event’ — Message issued at the specified date/time

• ‘One-time’ — Message issued when the message timer reaches zero (default setting)

• ‘Periodic’ — Message issued each time the message timer reaches zero

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
8) For periodic and one-time message, use the FMS Knob to enter the timer value (HHH:MM:SS) from which to
countdown and press the ENT Key.
MANAGEMENT
9) For event-based messages:
FLIGHT
a) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired date (DD-MMM-YY) and press the ENT Key.
b) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
c) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time (HH:MM) and press the ENT Key.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
10) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to enter the next message.
Deleting a scheduler message:

1) Select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
AFCS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Message’ Field of the scheduler message to be deleted.
4) Press the CLR Key to clear the message text. If the CLR Key is pressed again, the message is restored.
ADDITIONAL
5) Press the ENT Key to confirm message deletion.
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
OVERVIEW
1.5 DISPLAY BACKLIGHTING

SYSTEM
The PFD and MFD display backlighting, the PFD and MFD bezel, and the Audio Panel keys can be adjusted
manually in one of two ways:
INSTRUMENTS
• Using the individual dimmer bus control for the desired display, or
FLIGHT
• Using the PFD Setup Menu and the following procedures. In normal operating mode, backlighting can only be
adjusted from the PFD. In reversionary mode, adjustments can be made from any remaining displays.
Adjusting display backlighting:
1) Press the PFD MENU Key to display the PFD Setup Menu. ‘Auto’ is now highlighted next to ‘PFD Display’. If
EIS
desired, turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘Auto’ next to ‘MFD Display’.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Manual’ and press the ENT Key. The intensity value is now highlighted.
AUDIO PANEL
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired backlighting then press the ENT Key.
& CNS
4) To remove the menu, press the CLR or MENU Key.
Adjusting key backlighting:

MANAGEMENT
1) Press the PFD MENU Key to display the PFD Setup Menu. ‘Auto’ is now highlighted next to ‘PFD Display’.
FLIGHT
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘PFD Display’ or ‘MFD Display’, as desired.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob in the direction of the green arrowhead to display ‘PFD Key’ or ‘MFD Key’.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Auto’.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Manual’ and press the ENT Key. The intensity value is now highlighted.
6) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired backlighting and press the ENT Key.
7) To remove the menu, press the CLR or MENU Key.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 1-21 PFD Setup Menu

INDEX
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
OVERVIEW
SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
NOTE: The Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) provides additional readouts and bugs on selected flight
INSTRUMENTS
instruments. Refer to the AFCS Section for details on these bugs and readouts, as they appear on the display
FLIGHT
during certain AFCS flight director modes.
The system increases pilot situational awareness by providing an easy-to-scan Primary Flight Display (PFD);
which features a large horizon, airspeed, attitude, vertical speed, and course deviation information. The PFD also
displays navigation, communication, terrain, traffic, and weather information. Different sections of the Pilot’s
Guide explain these other uses.
EIS
The following flight instruments and supplemental flight data are displayed on the PFD:
• Airspeed Indicator, showing • Horizontal Situation Indicator, showing
AUDIO PANEL
– Indicated airspeed – Turn Rate Indicator
& CNS
– True airspeed – Bearing pointers and information windows
– Airspeed awareness ranges – Navigation source
MANAGEMENT
– Vspeed reference bugs – Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)
FLIGHT
• Attitude Indicator with slip/skid indication – DME Information Window (optional)
• Altimeter, showing – HSI Map
– Trend vector • ADF/DME Tuning Window
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
– Barometric setting • References Window, showing
– Selected altitude – Generic timer
• Vertical Deviation, Glideslope, and Glidepath – Vspeed values
Indicators – Barometric or temperature compensated
AFCS
• Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) minimum descent altitude (MDA) or decision
• Vertical Navigation (VNV) indications height (DH)
• Outside air temperature (OAT) • Wind data
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• ISA temperature deviation
The PFD also displays various alerts and annunciations.

APPENDICES
INDEX
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
19 18 17
INSTRUMENTS
1
FLIGHT
16
15
2 14
EIS
13
3
AUDIO PANEL
12
& CNS
4
11
5
10
6
MANAGEMENT
7
FLIGHT
8
AVOIDANCE
1 NAV Frequency Box 11 Turn Rate Indicator

HAZARD
2 Airspeed Indicator 12 Barometric Altimeter Setting

3 True Airspeed 13 Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
4 Current Heading 14 Selected Altitude Bug
5 Horizontal Situation Indicator ( HSI) 15 Altimeter
AFCS
6 Outside Air Temperature (OAT) 16 Selected Altitude

7 ISA Temperature Deviation 17 Navigation Status Box
8 Softkeys 18 Slip/Skid Indicator
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
9 System Time 19 Attitude Indicator

10 Heading Bug
Figure 2-1 Primary Flight Display (Default)

APPENDICES
INDEX
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
9
INSTRUMENTS
8
FLIGHT
7
6
1
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
3
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
4 5
FLIGHT
1 Selected Heading 6 Selected Course
2 Wind Data Box 7 Required Vertical Speed
Indicator
3 HSI Map
8 Vertical Deviation Indication
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
4 Bearing Information Windows
9 VNV Target Altitude
5 Minimum Descent Altitude/
Decision Height
Figure 2-2 Additional PFD Information
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
OVERVIEW
2.1 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM
ATTITUDE INDICATOR
INSTRUMENTS
Attitude information is displayed over a virtual blue sky and brown ground with a white horizon line. The
FLIGHT
Attitude Indicator displays the pitch, roll, and slip/skid information.
8
1 Roll Pointer
1
EIS
2 Roll Scale
7 3 Horizon Line
2
4 Aircraft Symbol
AUDIO PANEL
6 5 Land Representation
& CNS
3
6 Pitch Scale
7 Slip/Skid Indicator
4 8 Sky Representation
MANAGEMENT
5 9 Roll Scale Zero

FLIGHT
Figure 2-3 Attitude Indicator

AVOIDANCE
The horizon line is part of the pitch scale. Above and below the horizon line, major pitch marks and numeric
HAZARD
labels are shown for every 10˚, up to 80˚. Minor pitch marks are shown for intervening 5˚ increments, up to
25˚ below and 45˚ above the horizon line. Between 20˚ below to 20˚ above the horizon line, minor pitch marks
occur every 2.5˚.
The inverted white triangle indicates zero on the roll scale. Major tick marks at 30˚ and 60˚ and minor tick
AFCS
marks at 10˚, 20˚, and 45˚ are shown to the left and right of the zero. Angle of bank is indicated by the position
of the pointer on the roll scale.
The Slip/Skid Indicator is the bar beneath the roll pointer. The indicator bar moves with the roll pointer and
moves laterally away from the pointer to indicate uncoordinated flight. Slip (inside the turn) or skid (outside
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
the turn) is indicated by the location of the bar relative to the pointer.
When the optional Garmin Electronic Stability and Protection (Garmin ESP™) system is available, additional
indications may appear on the pitch and roll scales; refer to the Additional Features and AFCS Sections for more
information about Garmin ESP.
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 2-4 Slip/Skid Indication
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
OVERVIEW
AIRSPEED INDICATOR
SYSTEM
NOTE: Refer to the current version of the pertinent flight manual for airspeed criteria and Vspeed values.
INSTRUMENTS
The Airspeed Indicator displays airspeed on a moving tape rolling number gauge. The true airspeed is
FLIGHT
displayed in knots below the Airspeed Indicator. The numeric labels and major tick marks on the moving
tape are shown at intervals of 10 knots. The minor tick marks on the moving tape are marked at intervals of
five knots. Speed indication starts at 20 knots, with 60 knots of airspeed viewable at any time. The indicated
airspeed is displayed inside the black pointer. The pointer remains black until reaching never-exceed speed
(VNE), at which point it appears red.
EIS
Flaps Airspeed
Operating Trend Vector
Range
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Vspeed
Bugs
Indicated
Airspeed
MANAGEMENT
Speed
FLIGHT
Ranges
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
True
Airspeed
Airspeed Indicator Low Speed Range Red and White
Operating Ranges Barber Pole at VNE
Figure 2-5 Airspeed Indicator Ranges
AFCS
Color coded stripes appear on the Airspeed Indicator to show the operating ranges. The low speed range
stripe is red. Normal operating range is green, caution range is amber, and the never exceed speed (VNE) begins
with a red and white barber pole. The flap operating range is indicated by a white stripe.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
A red horizontal bar on the airspeed tape represents VMCA. A cyan horizontal bar represents VYSE.
The Airspeed Trend Vector is a vertical magenta line that appears to the right of the color-coded speed range
strip when airspeed is either accelerating or decelerating. One end of the magenta line is anchored to the
tip of the airspeed pointer while the other end moves continuously up or down corresponding to the rate of
APPENDICES
acceleration or deceleration. For any constant rate of acceleration or deceleration, the moving end of the line
shows approximately what the indicated airspeed value will be in six seconds. The trend vector is absent if the
speed remains constant or if any data needed to calculate airspeed is not available.
INDEX
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
OVERVIEW
Vspeeds (Glide, VR, VX, VY,, VLE, and VLO) can be changed and their respective bugs turned on/off from the
SYSTEM
References Window. When active (on), the Vspeed bugs are displayed to the right of the airspeed scale. All
Vspeed values are reset and all bugs turned off during power up.
Enabling/disabling and modifying Vspeed bugs:
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey to show the References Window.

2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired vspeed bug value.
3) Turn the small FMS Knobs to adjust the value for the selected vspeed bug.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ON/OFF field.
EIS
5) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to ON or counterclockwise to OFF.

6) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
References Window References Menu

AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-6 References Window and Menu

HAZARD
Vspeed bugs can be enabled/disabled individually, or collectively.

Enabling/disabling or restoring default values to all vspeed bugs as a group:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
AFCS

3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘All References On’, ‘All References Off’, or ‘Restore Defaults.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ALTIMETER
The Altimeter displays 600 feet or 200 meters of barometric altitude values at a time on a moving tape rolling
APPENDICES
number gauge. Numeric labels and major tick marks are shown at intervals of 100 feet or 50 meters. Minor
tick marks are at intervals of 20 feet or 10 meters. The indicated altitude is displayed inside the black pointer.
The Selected Altitude is displayed above the Altimeter in the box indicated by a selection bug symbol. A bug
corresponding to this altitude is shown on the tape. If the Selected Altitude exceeds the range shown on the
INDEX
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
tape, the bug appears at the upper or lower edge of the tape. When the metric value is selected it is displayed
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
in a separate box above the Selected Altitude.
A magenta Altitude Trend Vector extends up or down the left of the altitude tape, the end resting at the
approximate altitude to be reached in six seconds at the current vertical speed. The trend vector is not shown
INSTRUMENTS
if altitude remains constant or if data needed for calculation is not available due to a system failure.
FLIGHT
Setting the Selected Altitude:
T urn the ALT Knob to set the Selected Altitude. Turn the large knob for 1000-ft increments, small knob for 100-
ft increments. If set to Metric mode, the large knob adjusts the Selected Altitude in 500-meter increments; the
small knob adjusts the Selected Altitude in 50-meter increments..
EIS
If a Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height (MDA/DH) value has been set, this altitude is also available for

the Selected Altitude.
Altitudes can also be displayed in meters. Using an overlay Feet and Meters can be displayed simultaneously.
AUDIO PANEL
Note that the altitude tape does not change scale.
& CNS
Reference Reference
Altitude Altitude
(Meters)
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Indicated
Altitude
(Meters)
Altitude Indicated
Trend Altitude
AVOIDANCE
Vector
HAZARD
Selected MDA/DH
Altitude Altitude
Bug Bug
Barometric
Barometric Setting Box
AFCS
Setting (Hectopascals)
Figure 2-7 Altimeter
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Displaying altitude in feet or meters using an overlay:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
2) Press the ALT Units Softkey.
3) Press the Meters or Feet Softkey to overlay on top of the base display setting (See Below)
APPENDICES
4) Press the Back Softkey twice to return to the top-level softkeys.
Changing base altitude display:

INDEX
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page on the MFD.
2) Push the FMS knob to activate the cursor and find the ‘Display Units’ box.
3) Use the FMS knob and highlight ALT, VS.
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
OVERVIEW
4) Turn the FMS knob between Feet or Meters and then press the ENT key.
SYSTEM
The barometric pressure setting is displayed below the Altimeter in inches of mercury (in Hg) or hectopascals
(hPa) when metric units are selected. Adjusting the altimeter barometric pressure setting creates discontinuities
in VNV vertical deviation, moving the descent path. For large adjustments, it may take several minutes for the
INSTRUMENTS
aircraft to re-establish on the descent patch. If the change is made while nearing a waypoint with a VNV Target
FLIGHT
Altitude, the aircraft may not re-establish on the descent path in time to meet the vertical constraint.
WARNING: Do not use a QFE altimeter setting with this system. System functions will not operate properly
with a QFE altimeter setting. Use only a QHN altimeter setting for the height above mean sea level, or the
standard pressure setting, as applicable.
EIS
Selecting the altimeter barometric pressure setting:

Turn the BARO Knob to select the desired setting.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting standard barometric pressure (29.92 in Hg):

2) Press the STD Baro Softkey.
MANAGEMENT
Changing altimeter barometric pressure setting units:

FLIGHT

2) Press the ALT Units Softkey.
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the IN Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in inches of mercury (in Hg).
HAZARD
Or, press the HPA Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in hectopascals (hPa).
4) Press the Back Softkey twice to return to the top-level softkeys.
The Baro Transition Alerts flash the barometric pressure setting to remind the pilot to change the barometric
pressure setting to or from standard. Two alerts are available. The altitude Baro Transition Alert occurs when
AFCS
climbing through the transition altitude beginning at 200 below this altitude. The flight level Baro Transition
Alert occurs when descending through the transition flight level beginning at 200 feet above this flight level.
The barometric pressure setting stops flashing after the pilot changes the barometric pressure setting. The pilot
can enable/disable either Baro Transition Alert, and choose the altitude or flight level used to trigger the alerts.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Setting the Baro Transition Alert:

1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page on the MFD.
APPENDICES
3) To enable/disable the Baro Transition Alert based on altitude, turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘On’ or
‘Off’ field for the BARO Transition Alert Altitude in the BARO Transition Alert Box.
4) If desired, turn the small FMS Knob to set the BARO Transition Alert Altitude On or Off.
INDEX
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
OVERVIEW
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Altitude field.
SYSTEM
6) Use the FMS Knob to change the altitude and press the ENT Key to accept or press the CLR Key to return to the
previous altitude selection.
7) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘On’ or ‘Off’ field for the BARO Transition Alert Level.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
8) If desired, turn the small FMS Knob to set the BARO Transition Alert Flight Level On or Off.
9) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Flight Level field.
10) Use the FMS Knob to change the Flight Level for the alert and press the ENT Key to accept or press the CLR Key
to return to the previous altitude selection.
11) Push the FMS Knob to deactivate the cursor.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
OVERVIEW
VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR (VSI)

SYSTEM
NOTE: The Glidepath Indicator is only available on GPS approaches supporting SBAS vertical guidance when
SBAS is available.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
The Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) displays the aircraft vertical speed on a fixed scale with labels at 1000 and
2000 fpm and minor tick marks every 500 fpm. Digits appear in the pointer when the climb or descent rate
is greater than 100 fpm. If the rate of ascent/descent exceeds 2000 fpm, the pointer appears at the edge of the
tape and the rate appears inside the pointer. If the VSI is set to use meters, then the major tickmarks are 5 and
10 mps with minor tickmarks every 2.5 mps.
EIS
A magenta chevron is displayed on the VSI to indicate the Required Vertical Speed for reaching a VNV target
altitude once the “TOD [Top of Descent] within 1 minute” alert has generated.
VERTICAL DEVIATION
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI; Figure 2-8) is a magenta chevron indicating the baro-VNV vertical
deviation when Vertical Navigation (VNV) is being used. The VDI appears in conjunction with the “TOD within
1 minute” alert. The VDI is removed from the display if vertical deviation becomes invalid. See the Flight
Management Section for details on VNV features, and refer to Section 2.2, Supplemental Flight Data, for more
MANAGEMENT
information about VNV indications on the PFD.

FLIGHT
The Glideslope Indicator (Figure 2-9) appears to the left of the Altimeter whenever an ILS frequency is
tuned in the active NAV field. A green diamond acts as the Glideslope Indicator, like a glideslope needle on
a conventional indicator. If a localizer frequency is tuned and there is no glideslope, “NO GS” is displayed in
AVOIDANCE
place of the diamond.

HAZARD
VNV Target
Altitude Marker
Beacon
Annunciation
Vertical
Speed
AFCS
Scale
Vertical
Deviation Glideslope
Indicator Vertical Indicator
ADDITIONAL
Speed
FEATURES
Indicator
Required
Vertical
Speed
APPENDICES
Figure 2-8 Vertical Speed and Figure 2-9 Glideslope Indicator

Deviation Indicator (VSI and VDI)
INDEX
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
OVERVIEW
The Glidepath Indicator is a vertical deviation scale for GPS approach service levels supporting SBAS vertical
SYSTEM
guidance (LNAV+V, L/VNAV, LPV, LP+V) or advisory vertical guidance (LNAV+V, LP+V). When one of these
approaches is loaded into the flight plan, GPS is the selected navigation source, and SBAS is used for vertical
approach guidance, the Glidepath Indicator appears as a magenta diamond (Figure 2-10). Full-scale deflection
(two dots), is angular with upper and lower limits. The upper limit is +/-492 feet (150 meters) and lower limits
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
depend on approach service level.
• LNAV/VNAV, LNAV+V, and LP+V, is +/- 148 feet (45 meters).
• LPV is +/- 49 feet (15 meters).
If the approach type downgrades past the final approach fix (FAF), “NO GP” is displayed in place of the
diamond.
EIS
NOTE: The Glidepath Indicator appears on the display as soon as the Final Approach Fix (FAF) becomes the
active waypoint. Depending on procedure design, pilot action, and/or ATC clearance, the aircraft may be
AUDIO PANEL
centered on or above the glidepath when the Glidepath Indicator appears.
& CNS
Vertical
Deviation Vertical
MANAGEMENT
Limit Deviation
FLIGHT
Indicator Limit
Indicator
(excessive
Glidepath Glidepath deviation)
Indicator Indicator
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Figure 2-10 Glidepath Indicator Figure 2-11 Glidepath Indicator and Vertical
AFCS
Deviation Limit Indicators
While executing an LNAV/VNAV approach, and between the FAF and MAP, the Vertical Deviation Limit
ADDITIONAL
Indicators appear as vertical white lines (Figure 2-11) indicating the area where deviation exceeds allowable
FEATURES
limits for the glidepath. The Vertical Deviation Limit Indicator provides a scaled representation of +/- 75 feet
of the calculated glidepath. The “window” between the lines represents the area of acceptable deviation. The
length of the lines will change while progressing through the final approach. When the Glidepath Indicator
enters an excessive deviation area, the Glidepath and Vertical Deviation Limit Indicators are amber (Figure
APPENDICES
2-11).
INDEX
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
OVERVIEW
HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR (HSI)

SYSTEM
The Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) displays a rotating compass card in a heading-up orientation. Letters
indicate the cardinal points with numeric labels every 30˚. Major tick marks are at 10˚ intervals and minor
tick marks are at 5˚ intervals. A digital reading of the current heading appears on top of the HSI. The HSI also
INSTRUMENTS
presents turn rate, course deviation, bearing, and selected navigation source information. The HSI is available
FLIGHT
in two formats: a 360˚ compass rose and a 210˚ HSI Map. The HSI Map is mutually exclusive with the Inset
Maps.
Enabling/disabling the HSI Map on the PFD:
1) Press the Map/HSI Softkey.
EIS
2) Press the Layout Softkey.

3) Press the HSI Map Softkey to enable the HSI Map.
AUDIO PANEL
Or:
& CNS
Press the Map Off Softkey to disable the HSI Map.

The HSI with the HSI map disabled presents a Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) with a Course Pointer, To/
From Indicator, and a sliding deviation bar and scale. The Course Pointer is a single line arrow (GPS, VOR1,
MANAGEMENT
and LOC) or a double line arrow (VOR2 and LOC2) which points in the direction of the set course. The To/
FLIGHT
From Indicator rotates with the Course Pointer and appears when the system is receiving the active NAVAID.
16 15 14 13
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
12
1
2 11
3
10
4
AFCS
5
9
6 8
7
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1 Current Track Indicator 9 Lateral Deviation Scale

2 Selected Heading Bug 10 Flight Phase
APPENDICES
3 Course Deviation Indicator 11 Course Pointer

(CDI)
12 Selected Course
4 Navigation Source
13 Lubber Line
5 Aircraft Symbol
14 Current Heading
6 To/From Indicator
INDEX
15 Turn Rate and Heading

7 Rotating Compass Card Trend Vector
8 OBS Mode Active 16 Selected Heading
Figure 2-12 Horizontal Situation Indicator
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
OVERVIEW
The HSI Map is a 210 ˚ expanded compass rose which also includes a navigation map with overlay capabilities
SYSTEM
such as topographical, weather, and land information. The HSI Map contains a Course Pointer, a combined To/
From Indicator with a sliding deviation indicator, and a lateral deviation scale. Upon passing a station, the To/
From Indicator points to the tail of the aircraft. Depending on the navigation source, the CDI on the HSI Map
can appear either as an arrowhead (GPS, VOR, OBS) as a diamond (LOC). Refer to the Flight Management
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Section for information about using HSI Map overlays.
Lateral Deviation Scale
Flight Phase
Navigation Source Annunciation
Course Deviation
EIS
Course Pointer Indicator and To/
From Indicator
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Figure 2-13 HSI Map
A digital reading of the current heading appears above the rotating compass card. A magenta diamond on the
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
HSI represents the current track over the ground the aircraft is flying. To the upper left of the HSI, the Selected
Heading shows in cyan for three seconds after it is adjusted, which corresponds to the cyan heading bug on
the compass rose. The Desired Track (DTK) shows in magenta to the upper right of the HSI when the selected
navigation source is GPS and OBS Mode is not active. The Selected Course (CRS) shows to the upper right
of the HSI when the selected navigation source is VOR or LOC and in magenta when the selected navigation
AFCS
source is GPS with OBS Mode active. Upon station passage, the To/From Indicator flips and points to the tail
of the aircraft, just like a conventional To/From flag. Depending on the navigation source, the CDI on the can
appear in two different ways: an arrowhead (GPS, VOR, OBS) or a diamond (LOC).
ADDITIONAL
Adjusting the Selected Heading:
FEATURES
Turn the HDG Knob to set the Selected Heading.
Press the HDG Knob to synchronize the bug to the current heading.
Adjusting the Selected Course:
APPENDICES
Turn the CRS Knob to set the Selected Course.

Press the CRS Knob to re-center the CDI and return the course pointer to the bearing of the active waypoint or

navigation station.
INDEX
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
OVERVIEW
Current Track Indicator

SYSTEM
Current Heading
Selected Heading Selected Course
Selected Heading Bug

INSTRUMENTS
Figure 2-14 Heading and Course Indications

FLIGHT
The Current Track Indicator, represented by a magenta diamond on the HSI, is the current over the ground
track the aircraft is flying.
Navigation angles (track, heading, course, bearing) are corrected to the computed magnetic variation (Mag
EIS
Var) or referenced to true north (T), set on the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page. When an approach referenced to
true north has been loaded into the flight plan, the system generates a message to change the navigation angle
setting to True at the appropriate time.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-15 Heading and Course Indications (True)

FLIGHT
Changing the navigation angle true/magnetic setting:

1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page on the MFD.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Nav Angle’ in the ‘Display Units’ box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
• True - References angles to true north (T)
AFCS
• Magnetic - Angles corrected to the computed magnetic variation (Mag Var)
TURN RATE INDICATOR

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Turn Rate Indicator is located directly above the rotating compass card. Tick marks to the left and right
of the lubber line denote half-standard and standard turn rates. A magenta Turn Rate Trend Vector shows the
current turn rate. The end of the trend vector gives the heading predicted in 6 seconds, based on the present
turn rate. A standard-rate turn is shown on the indicator by the trend vector stopping at the standard turn
rate tick mark, corresponding to a predicted heading of 18˚ from the current heading. At rates greater than
APPENDICES
4 deg/sec, an arrowhead appears at the end of the magenta trend vector and the prediction is no longer valid.
Half Standard
Turn Rate Arrow Shown
for Turn Rate
Standard > 4 Degrees
Turn Rate per Second
INDEX
Figure 2-16 Turn Rate Indicator and Trend Vector
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
OVERVIEW
BEARING POINTERS AND INFORMATION WINDOWS
SYSTEM
Two bearing pointers and associated information can displays on the HSI for NAV and GPS sources by
pressing the PFD Softkey then a BRG Softkey. The bearing pointers are cyan and are single-line (BRG1) or
double-line (BRG2). A pointer symbol shows in the information window to indicate the navigation source.
INSTRUMENTS
The bearing pointers never override the CDI and are visually separated from the CDI by a white ring, except
FLIGHT
when the HSI Map is enabled. Bearing pointers may be selected but not necessarily visible due to data
unavailability.
Bearing 1
EIS
Pointer
Tuning Mode
Frequency
AUDIO PANEL
Distance Bearing 2
& CNS
Pointer
DME Information Window
(optional)
MANAGEMENT
Distance to Bearing Pointer
FLIGHT
Bearing Source Source Icon
Bearing 2
AVOIDANCE
Information
HAZARD
Window
Bearing 1 Information Window
Figure 2-17 HSI with Bearing and DME Information
When a bearing pointer is displayed, the associated information window is also displayed. The Bearing
AFCS
Information windows are displayed at the lower sides of the HSI and give the following information:
• Bearing source (NAV, GPS, ADF) • Station/waypoint identifier (NAV, GPS)
• Pointer icon (BRG1 = single line, BRG2 = double • GPS-derived great circle distance to bearing
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
line) source
• Frequency (ADF)
When the NAV radio is tuned to an ILS frequency the bearing source and the bearing pointer is removed
APPENDICES
from the HSI. When NAV1 or NAV2 is the selected bearing source, the frequency is replaced by the station
identifier when the station is within range. If GPS is the bearing source, the active waypoint identifier is
displayed instead of a frequency.
The bearing pointer is removed from the HSI and NO DATA is displayed in the information window if the
NAV radio is not receiving a VOR station or if GPS is the bearing source and an active waypoint is not selected.
INDEX
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
OVERVIEW
Selecting bearing display and changing sources:

SYSTEM
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.

2) Press either Bearing 1 or Bearing 2 Softkey to display the desired bearing pointer and information window
with a NAV source.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
3) Press either Bearing 1 or Bearing 2 Softkey again to change the bearing source to GPS.
4) Press either Bearing 1 or Bearing 2 Softkey a third time to change the bearing source to ADF (note: ADF radio
installation is optional).
5) To remove the bearing pointer and information window, press either Bearing 1 or Bearing 2 Softkey again.
EIS
DME INFORMATION WINDOW
NOTE: DME radio installation is optional.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The DME Information Window is displayed above the BRG1 Information Window and shows the DME
label, tuning mode (NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD), frequency, and distance. When a signal is invalid, the distance
is replaced by “–.– – NM”. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section for information on tuning the radios.
MANAGEMENT
Displaying the DME Information Window:

FLIGHT

2) Press the DME Softkey to display the DME Information Window above the BRG1 Information Window.
3) To remove the DME Information Window, press the DME Softkey again.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
COURSE DEVIATION INDICATOR (CDI)

The Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) moves left or right from the course pointer along a lateral deviation
scale to display aircraft position relative to the course. If the course deviation data is not valid, the CDI is not
displayed.
AFCS
Flight
Phase
ADDITIONAL
Navigation
FEATURES
Source
Scale
Crosstrack
CDI Error
APPENDICES
Figure 2-18 Course Deviation Indicator
The CDI can display two sources of navigation, GPS or VOR/LOC. The color indicates the current navigation
INDEX
source, magenta for GPS and green for VOR and LOC. The full scale limits for the CDI are defined by an GPS-
derived distance when coupled to the GPS. If the CDI exceeds the maximum deviation on the scale (two dots)
while navigating with GPS, the crosstrack error (XTK) is displayed below the white aircraft symbol. When
navigating using a VOR or localizer (LOC), the CDI uses the same angular deviation as a mechanical CDI.
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
EIS
Figure 2-19 Navigation Sources
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Changing navigation sources:
1) Press the CDI Softkey to change from GPS to VOR1 or LOC1. This places the cyan tuning box over the NAV1
standby frequency in the upper left corner of the PFD.
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the CDI Softkey again to change from VOR1 or LOC1 to VOR2 or LOC2. This places the cyan tuning box
FLIGHT
over the NAV2 standby frequency.
3) Press the CDI Softkey a third time to return to GPS.
NAV1 Selected for Tuning NAV2 Selected for Tuning
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
FMS LOC1 VOR2
Selected Selected Selected
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
Pressing the CDI Softkey
FEATURES
Cycles through
Navigation Sources
Figure 2-20 Selecting a Navigation Source APPENDICES
The system automatically switches from GPS to LOC navigation source and changes the CDI scaling
accordingly when all of the following occur:
• A localizer or ILS approach has been loaded into the active flight plan
• The final approach fix (FAF) is the active leg, the FAF is less than 15 nm away, and the aircraft is moving
toward the FAF
INDEX
• A valid localizer frequency has been tuned

• The GPS CDI deviation is less than 1.2 times full-scale deflection
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
OVERVIEW
GPS steering guidance is still provided after the CDI automatically switches to LOC until LOC capture, up
SYSTEM
to the Final Approach Fix (FAF) for an ILS approach, or until GPS information becomes invalid. Activating a
Vector-to-Final (VTF) also causes the CDI to switch to LOC navigation source. GPS steering guidance is not
provided after the switch.
INSTRUMENTS
On some ILS approaches where the glideslope intercept point is at or in close proximity to the fix prior to the
FLIGHT
FAF, it is possible to be above the glideslope when the navigation source automatically switches from GPS to
LOC. The probability of this occurring varies based on air temperature.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
Fix Prior to the FAF

& CNS
Glideslope Intercept Point

MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Figure 2-21 ILS Approach with Glideslope Intercept Point at Fix Prior to the FAF
GPS CDI SCALING

AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
When GPS is the selected navigation source, the flight plan legs are sequenced automatically and
annunciations appear on the HSI for the flight phase. Flight phase annunciations are normally shown in
magenta, but when cautionary conditions exist the color changes to amber. If the current leg in the flight plan
is a heading leg, HDG LEG is annunciated in magenta beneath the aircraft symbol.
The current GPS CDI scale setting is displayed as System CDI on the Aux - System Setup 1 Page and the
AFCS
full-scale deflection setting may also be changed (2.0 nm, 1.0 nm, 0.3 nm, or Auto) from this page. If the
selected scaling is smaller than the automatic setting for enroute and terminal phases, the CDI is scaled
accordingly and the selected setting is displayed rather than the flight phase annunciation.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Changing the selected GPS CDI setting:

1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page on the MFD.
APPENDICES
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘Format Allowed’ field in the ‘GPS CDI’ box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
5) To cancel the selection, press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.
When set to Auto (default), the GPS CDI scale automatically adjusts to the desired limits based upon the
current phase of flight (Figure 2-22, Table 2-1).
INDEX
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
CDI Full-scale Deflection
2.0 nm
1.0 nm
1.0 nm
1.0 nm
0.3 nm
0.3 nm
Refer to accompanying
INSTRUMENTS
approach CDI scaling figures
FLIGHT
Enroute Missed
Departure Terminal (Oceanic if >200 nm Terminal Approach
from nearest airport)
Approach
EIS
Figure 2-22 Automatic CDI Scaling
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Once a departure procedure is activated, the CDI is scaled for departure (0.3 nm).
• The system switches from departure to terminal CDI scaling (1.0 nm) under the following conditions:
- The next leg in the departure procedure is not aligned with the departure runway
MANAGEMENT
- The next leg in the departure procedure is not a CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF (see
FLIGHT
Glossary for leg type definitions)
- After any leg in the departure procedure that is not a CA or FA
• At 30 nm from the departure airport, the enroute phase of flight is automatically entered and CDI scaling
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
changes to 2.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm, except under the following conditions:
- When navigating with an active departure procedure, the flight phase and CDI scale does not change
until the aircraft arrives at the last departure waypoint (if more than 30 nm from the departure airport) or
the leg after the last departure waypoint has been activated or a direct-to waypoint is activated.
• If after completing the departure procedure the nearest airport is more than 200 nm away from the aircraft
AFCS
and the approach procedure has not yet commenced, the CDI is scaled for oceanic flight (4.0 nm).
• Within 31 nm of the destination airport (terminal area), the CDI scale gradually ramps down from 2.0 nm
to 1.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm, except under the following conditions:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Upon reaching the first waypoint of an arrival route that is more than 31 nm from the destination airport,
the flight phase changes to terminal and the CDI scale begins to transition down from 2.0 nm to 1.0 nm
over a distance of 1.0 nm.
• During approach, the CDI scale ramps down even further (Figures 2-23 and 2-24). This transition normally
APPENDICES
occurs within 2.0 nm of the final approach fix (FAF). The CDI switches to approach scaling automatically
once the approach procedure is activated or if Vectors-To-Final (VTF) are selected.
- If the active waypoint is the FAF, the ground track and the bearing to the FAF must be within 45° of the
final approach segment course.
- If the active waypoint is part of the missed approach procedure, the active leg and the preceding missed
INDEX
approach legs must be aligned with the final approach segment course and the aircraft must not have
passed the turn initiation point.
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
CDI scale is set to the smaller of 0.3 nm


or an angle set by the system
1.0 nm
1.0 nm
0.3 nm
0.3 nm
course width
angle based
350 ft
angle set
on database
INSTRUMENTS
by system
information
2 nm 2 nm
FLIGHT
FAF FAF Landing

Threshold
CDI scale varies if VTF is activated

CDI scale varies if VTF is activated
EIS
Figure 2-23 Typical LNAV and LNAV+V Approach Service Level Figure 2-24 Typical LNAV/VNAV, Visual, LP, LP+V and LPV
CDI Scaling Approach Service Level CDI Scaling
• When a missed approach is activated, the CDI scale changes to 0.3 nm.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• The system automatically switches back to terminal mode under the following conditions:
- The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not aligned with the final approach path
- The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not a CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF
MANAGEMENT
- After any leg in the missed approach procedure that is not a CA or FA

FLIGHT
Flight Phase Annunciation* Automatic CDI Full-scale Deflection

Departure DPRT 0.3 nm
Terminal TERM 1.0 nm
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Enroute ENR 2.0 nm

Oceanic OCN 4.0 nm
Approach
LNAV
(Non-precision)
1.0 nm decreasing to 350 feet depending on
AFCS
Approach
variables (Figure 2-22)
(Non-precision with
LNAV + V
Advisory Vertical
Guidance)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Approach
L/VNAV
(LNAV/VNAV)
Approach
LPV
(LPV)
1.0 nm decreasing to a specified course width, then
APPENDICES
Approach
(Non-precision with 0.3 nm, depending on variables (Figure 2-23)
LP+V
Advisory Vertical
Guidance)
Approach
LP
(LP)
INDEX
Missed Approach MAPR 0.3 nm

* Flight phase annunciations are normally shown in magenta, but when cautionary
conditions exist the color changes to amber.
Table 2-1 Automatic GPS CDI Scaling
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
OVERVIEW
OBS MODE
SYSTEM
NOTE: VNV is inhibited while automatic waypoint sequencing has been suspended.
INSTRUMENTS
Enabling Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode suspends the automatic sequencing of waypoints in a GPS
FLIGHT
flight plan (GPS must be the selected navigation source), but retains the current Active-to waypoint as the
navigation reference even after passing the waypoint. Selecting OBS Mode adds an ‘OBS’ annunciation to the
lower right of the aircraft symbol.
While OBS is enabled, a course line is drawn through the Active-to waypoint on the moving map. If
desired, the course to/from the waypoint can now be adjusted. When OBS Mode is disabled, the flight plan
EIS
returns to normal operation, with automatic sequencing of waypoints, following the course set in OBS Mode.
The flight plan on the moving map retains the modified course line.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GPS
Selected
Extended
Course
MANAGEMENT
OBS Mode
Line Enabled
FLIGHT
Pressing the OBS Pressing the OBS
Softkey Enables Softkey Again
OBS Mode Disables OBS Mode
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Figure 2-25 Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode
Enabling/disabling OBS Mode while navigating a GPS flight plan:

1) Press the OBS Softkey to select OBS Mode.
AFCS
2) Turn the CRS Knob to select the desired course to/from the waypoint. Press the CRS Knob to synchronize the
Selected Course with the bearing to the next waypoint.
3) Press the OBS Softkey again to return to automatic waypoint sequencing.
ADDITIONAL
As the aircraft crosses the missed approach point (MAP), automatic approach waypoint sequencing is
FEATURES
suspended. SUSP appears on the HSI at the lower right of the aircraft symbol. The OBS Softkey label changes
to indicate the suspension is active as shown in the following figure. Pressing the SUSP Softkey, deactivates
the suspension and resumes automatic sequencing of approach waypoints. APPENDICES
INDEX
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
SUSP
EIS
Softkey SUSP
Annunciation
Figure 2-26 Suspending Automatic Waypoint Sequencing
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
OVERVIEW
2.2 SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA
SYSTEM
In addition to the flight instruments, the PFD also displays various supplemental information, including
temperatures, wind data, and Vertical Navigation (VNV) indications.
INSTRUMENTS
GENERIC TIMER
FLIGHT
The generic timer can be accessed via softkeys on the PFD and allows for quick access for timing functions
(either counting up or down) for the pilot.
Setting the generic timer:
EIS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the timer field (HH:MM:SS).
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the ENT Key. The Up/Dn field is now highlighted.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the UP/DOWN Window.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Up’ or ‘Dn’.
MANAGEMENT
7) Press the ENT Key. ‘Start?’ is now highlighted.
FLIGHT
8) Press the ENT Key to start the timer. The field changes to ‘Stop?’. If the timer is counting DOWN, it will start
counting UP after reaching zero.
9) To stop the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘Stop?’ highlighted. The field changes to ‘Reset?’.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
10) To reset the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘Reset?’ highlighted. The field changes back to ‘Start?’ and the digits
are reset.
TEMPERATURE DISPLAYS
AFCS
The Outside Air Temperature (OAT) and deviation from International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) temperature
are displayed in the lower left corner of the PFD under normal conditions, or below the true airspeed in
Reversionary Display Mode. Both are displayed in either degrees Celsius(°C) or Fahrenheit(°F), depending on
ADDITIONAL
the temperature units selected on the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page.
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 2-27 Outside Air Temperature (PFD)

INDEX
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
OVERVIEW
Changing temperature display units:

SYSTEM
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page on the MFD using the FMS Knob.
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Temperature’ field in the Display Units box.
FLIGHT
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight either ‘Celsius(°C) or Fahrenheit(°F)’and press the ENT Key to confirm
the selection.
5) To cancel the selection, press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.
WIND DATA
EIS
Wind direction and speed in knots can be displayed relative to the aircraft in a window to the upper left of
the HSI. When the window is selected for display, but wind information is invalid or unavailable, the window
displays NO WIND DATA. Wind data can be displayed in three different ways.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Option 1 Option 2
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Option 3 No Data
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Figure 2-28 Wind Data

AFCS
Displaying wind data:

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

2) Press the Wind Softkey to display wind data to the left of the HSI.
3) Press one of the Option softkeys to change how wind data is displayed:
• Option 1: Headwind/tailwind and crosswind arrows with numeric speed components
APPENDICES
• Option 2: Wind direction arrow and speed

• Option 3: Total wind direction arrow with numeric headwind (H) or tailwind (T) and
crosswind (X) compenents.
4) To remove the window, press the Off Softkey.
INDEX
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
OVERVIEW
VERTICAL NAVIGATION (VNV) INDICATIONS
SYSTEM
When a VNV flight plan has been activated, VNV indications (VNV Target Altitude, RVSI, VDI) appear on the
PFD in conjunction with the “TOD within 1 minute” message and “Vertical track” voice alert. See the Flight
Management and AFCS sections for details on VNV features. VNV indications are removed from the PFD
INSTRUMENTS
according to the criteria listed in the table.
FLIGHT
Top of Descent Message
VNV Target
Altitude
EIS
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Required
Vertical
Speed Bug
Phase of
MANAGEMENT
GPS is Flight
Selected
FLIGHT
Navigation
Source
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Figure 2-29 Vertical Navigation Indications (PFD)
VNV Indication Removed
AFCS
Criteria Required Vertical Vertical VNV Target
Speed (RVSI) Deviation (VDI) Altitude*
Aircraft > 1 min before the next TOD due to flight plan change X X X
VNV cancelled (CNCL VNV Softkey pressed on MFD) X X X
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Distance to active waypoint cannot be computed due to
unsupported flight plan leg type (see Flight Management X X X
Section)
Aircraft > 250 feet below active VNV Target Altitude X X X
APPENDICES
Current crosstrack or track angle error has exceeded limit X X X

Active altitude-constrained waypoint can not be reached within
X X
maximum allowed flight path angle and vertical speed
Table 2-2 VNV Indication Removal Criteria
INDEX
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
OVERVIEW
2.3 PFD ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTING FUNCTIONS

SYSTEM
The following annunciations and alerting functions pertaining to flight instruments are displayed on the PFD.
Refer to Appendix A for more information on alerts and annunciations.
INSTRUMENTS
MARKER BEACON ANNUNCIATIONS

FLIGHT
Marker Beacon Annunciations are displayed on the PFD to the left of the Altimeter. The outer marker (O)
reception is indicated in cyan, middle (M) in amber, and inner (I) in white. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS
Section for more information on Marker Beacon Annunciations.
EIS
Outer Marker Middle Marker Inner Marker

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Altimeter
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-30 Marker Beacon Annunciations

FLIGHT
ALTITUDE ALERTING
Altitude Alerting provides the pilot with a visual alert when approaching the Selected Altitude. Whenever the
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Selected Altitude is changed, the Altitude Alerter is reset. The following occur when approaching the Selected
Altitude:
• Upon passing through 1000 feet of the Selected Altitude, the Selected Altitude changes to black text on a cyan
background and flashes for five seconds.
AFCS
• When the aircraft passes within 200 feet of the Selected Altitude an aural tone is heard. The Selected Altitude
changes to cyan text on a black background and flashes for five seconds.
• After reaching the Selected Altitude, if the pilot flies outside the deviation band (±200 feet of the Selected
Altitude) an aural tone is heard. The Selected Altitude changes to amber text on a black background and
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
flashes for five seconds.

Within 1000 ft Within 200 ft Deviation of ±200 ft
APPENDICES
Figure 2-31 Altitude Alerting Visual Annunciations

INDEX
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
OVERVIEW
LOW ALTITUDE ANNUNCIATION
SYSTEM
NOTE: A Low Altitude Annunciation is available only when SBAS is available. This annunciation is only
available when Terrain-SVT alerting has been inhibited, is not available, or has failed.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
When the Final Approach Fix (FAF) is the active waypoint in a GPS SBAS approach using vertical guidance,
a Low Altitude Annunciation may appear if the current aircraft altitude is at least 164 feet below the prescribed
altitude at the FAF. A black-on-amber LOW ALT annunciation appears to the top left of the Altimeter, flashes
for several seconds, then remains displayed until the condition is resolved.
EIS
Figure 2-32 Low Altitude Annunciation on PFD
AUDIO PANEL
MINIMUM DESCENT ALTITUDE/DECISION HEIGHT ALERTING
& CNS
For altitude awareness, a barometric Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA) or Decision Height (DH) can be set in
the References Window and is reset when the power is cycled. When active, the altitude setting is displayed to
the bottom left of the Altimeter. Once the altitude is within the range of the tape, a bug appears at the reference
MANAGEMENT
altitude on the Altimeter. The following visual annunciations occur when approaching the MDA/DH:
FLIGHT
• When the aircraft altitude descends to within 2500 feet of the MDA/DH setting, the BARO MIN or COMP
MIN box appears with the altitude in cyan text. The bug appears on the altitude tape in cyan (or magenta for
COMP MIN) once in range.
• When the aircraft passes through 100 feet of the MDA/DH, the bug and text turn white.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
• Once the aircraft reaches MDA/DH, the bug and text turn amber and the voice alert, “Minimums. Minimums”,
is heard.
Within 2500 ft Within 100 ft Altitude Reached
Barometric
AFCS
Minimum
Bug
ADDITIONAL
Selected
FEATURES
Altitude
Bug
Barometric
Minimum
Box
APPENDICES
Figure 2-33 Barometric MDA/DH Alerting Visual Annunciations

INDEX
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
OVERVIEW
Alerting is inhibited while the aircraft is on the ground and until the aircraft reaches 150 feet above the MDA.
SYSTEM
If the aircraft proceeds to climb after having reached the MDA, once it reaches 50 feet above the MDA, alerting
is disabled. The function is reset when the power is cycled or a new approach is activated.
Setting the Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height and bug:
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT

2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Minimums field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select BARO, TEMP COMP, or OFF is selected by default. Press the ENT Key or turn
the large FMS Knob to highlight the next field.
4) Use the small FMS Knob to enter the desired altitude (from zero to 16,000 feet).
EIS
5) If TEMP COMP was selected, press the ENT Key or turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the next field and then
enter the temperature (-59˚C to 59˚C)
AUDIO PANEL
6) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the TMR/REF Softkey.
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Figure 2-34 BARO and TEMP COMP MDA/DH

AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
OVERVIEW
2.4 GARMIN SYNTHETIC VISION TECHNOLOGY (SVT)
SYSTEM
WARNING: Use appropriate primary systems for navigation, and for terrain, obstacle, and traffic avoidance.
INSTRUMENTS
SVT is intended as an aid to situational awareness only and may not provide either the accuracy or reliability
FLIGHT
upon which to solely base decisions and/or plan maneuvers to avoid terrain, obstacles, or traffic.
The optional Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) is a visual enhancement to the system. SVT depicts a forward-
looking attitude display of the topography immediately in front of the aircraft. The field of view is 30 degrees to
the left and 35 degrees to the right. SVT information is shown on the Primary Flight Display (PFD), or on the
EIS
Multifunction Display (MFD) in Reversionary Mode. The depicted imagery is derived from the aircraft attitude,
heading, GPS three-dimensional position, and a 4.9 arc-second database of terrain, obstacles, and other relevant
features. Loss of any of the required data, including temporary loss of the GPS signal, will cause SVT to be
AUDIO PANEL
disabled until the required data is restored.
& CNS
The SVT terrain display shows land contours (colors are consistent with those of the topographical map display),
large water features, towers, and other obstacles over 200’ AGL that are included in the obstacle database. Cultural
features on the ground such as roads, highways, railroad tracks, cities, and state boundaries are not displayed even
if those features are found on the MFD map. The terrain display also includes a north–south east–west grid with
MANAGEMENT
lines oriented with true north and spaced at one arc-minute intervals to assist in orientation relative to the terrain.
FLIGHT
The Terrain-SVT is integrated within SVT to provide visual and auditory alerts to indicate the presence of terrain
and obstacle threats relevant to the projected flight path. Terrain alerts are displayed in red and yellow shading
on the PFD.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
The terrain display is intended for situational awareness only. It may not provide the accuracy or fidelity on
which to base decisions and plan maneuvers to avoid terrain or obstacles. Navigation must not be predicated
solely upon the use of the terrain or obstacle data displayed by the SVT.
The following SVT enhancements appear on the PFD:
• Pathways • Airport Signs
AFCS
• Flight Path Marker • Runway Display
• Horizon Heading Marks • Terrain Alerting
ADDITIONAL
• Traffic Display • Obstacle Alerting
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Figure 2-35 Synthetic Vision Imagery
SVT OPERATION
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
SVT is activated from the PFD using the softkeys located along the bottom edge of the display. Pressing the
softkeys turns the related function on or off. When SVT is enabled, the pitch attitude scale is reduced from 20
degrees up and down to 10 degrees up to 7.5 degrees down.
SVT functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. The PFD Opt Softkey leads into the PFD function
Softkeys, including synthetic vision. Pressing the SVT Softkey displays the SVT feature softkeys. The softkeys
AFCS
are labeled Pathways, Terrain, HDG LBL, and APT Sign. The Back Softkey returns to the previous level of
softkeys. Synthetic Terrain must be active before any other SVT feature may be activated.
Pathways, HDG LBL, and APT Sign Softkeys are only available when the Terrain Softkey is activated (gray
ADDITIONAL
with black characters). After activating the Terrain Softkey, the Pathways, HDG LBL, and APT Sign softkeys
FEATURES
may be activated in any combination to display desired features. When system power is cycled, the last selected
state (on or off) of the Pathways, Terrain, HDG LBL, and APT Sign softkeys is remembered by the system.
• Pathways Softkey enables display of rectangular boxes that represent course guidance.
APPENDICES
• Terrain Softkey enables synthetic terrain depiction.

• HDG LBL Softkey enables horizon heading marks and digits.
• APT Sign Softkey enables airport signposts.
Activating and deactivating SVT:
INDEX

2) Press the SVT Softkey.
3) Press the Terrain Softkey. The SVT display will cycle on or off with the Terrain Softkey.
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
OVERVIEW
Activating and deactivating Pathways:
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the Pathways Softkey. The Pathway feature will cycle on or off with the Pathways Softkey.
FLIGHT
Activating and deactivating Horizon Headings:
3) Press the HDG LBL Softkey. The horizon heading display will cycle on or off with the HDG LBL Softkey.
EIS
Activating and deactivating Airport Signs:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the APT Sign Softkey. Display of airport signs will cycle on or off with the APT Sign Softkey.
SVT FEATURES
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Airport Selected
Runway Altitude
Pathways Color
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Matches CDI
Indicating Nav
Source
Zero
Pitch Line
Flight (ZPL) with
Path Horizon
Marker Heading
AFCS
Marks
ADDITIONAL
Airplane Synthetic
FEATURES
Symbol Terrain
APPENDICES
SVT
Softkeys
Figure 2-36 SVT on the Primary Flight Display
INDEX
NOTE: Pathways and terrain features are not a substitute for standard course and altitude deviation
information provided by the altimeter, CDI, and VDI.
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
OVERVIEW
PATHWAYS
SYSTEM
Pathways provide a three-dimensional perspective view of the selected route of flight shown as colored
rectangular boxes representing the horizontal and vertical flight path of the active flight plan. The box
size represents 700 feet wide by 200 feet tall during enroute, oceanic, and terminal flight phases. During
INSTRUMENTS
an approach, the box width is 700 feet or one half full scale deviation on the HSI, whichever is less. The
FLIGHT
height is 200 feet or one half full scale deviation on the VDI, whichever is less. The altitude at which the
pathway boxes are displayed is determined by the higher of either the selected altitude or the VNAV altitude
programmed for the active leg in the flight plan.
The color of the rectangular boxes may be magenta, green, or white depending on the route of flight and
navigation source selected. The active GPS or GPS overlay flight plan leg is represented by magenta boxes
EIS
that correspond to the Magenta CDI. A localizer course is represented by green boxes that correspond to a
green CDI. An inactive leg of an active flight plan is represented by white boxes corresponding to a white line
drawn on the navigation map indicating an inactive leg.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected
Altitude
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Programmed
Altitudes
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 2-37 Programmed and Selected Altitude

APPENDICES
Pathways provide supplemental glidepath/glideslope information on an active ILS, LPV, LNAV/VNAV,

Visual, and some LNAV approaches. Pathways are intended as an aid to situational awareness and should not
be used independent of the CDI, VDI, glide path indicator, and glide slope indicator. They are removed from
the display when the selected navigation information is not available. Pathways are not displayed beyond the
active leg when leg sequencing is suspended and are not displayed on any portion of the flight plan leg that
INDEX
would lead to intercepting a leg in the wrong direction.
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
OVERVIEW
Departure and Enroute
SYSTEM
Prior to intercepting an active flight plan leg, pathways are displayed as a series of boxes with pointers at
each corner that point in the direction of the active waypoint. Pathways are not displayed for the first leg
of the flight plan if that segment is a Heading-to-Altitude leg. The first segment displaying pathways is the
INSTRUMENTS
first active GPS leg or active leg with a GPS overlay. If this leg of the flight plan route is outside the SVT
FLIGHT
field of view, pathways will not be visible until the aircraft has turned toward this leg. While approaching
the center of the active leg and prescribed altitude, the number of pathway boxes decreases to a minimum
of four.
Climb profiles cannot be displayed due to the variables associated with aircraft performance. Flight
plan legs requiring a climb are indicated by pathways displayed at a level above the aircraft at the altitude
EIS
selected or programmed.
Descent and Approach
AUDIO PANEL
During an approach, Pathways be can shown for the programmed descent, level transition flight, and
& CNS
at the Selected Altitude within the approach segments. When an approach providing vertical guidance is
activated, the corresponding approach glideslope or glidepath will be displayed using a color corresponding
to the selected navigation source and conditions.
MANAGEMENT
White Pathways represent the next segment of the approach that is not yet active. Magenta Pathways
FLIGHT
represent the active segment with GPS as the navigation source. Green Pathways indicate the ILS/LOC
navigation source. During the arrival/approach phases of flight, gray pathways indicate the anticipated
preview glidepath/glideslope. The gray Approach Preview Pathways will be displayed beginning at the start
of the segment leading to the FAF waypoint. With active approach vertical guidance, the selected altitude
AVOIDANCE
will be displayed as a level gray Pathway if the Selected Altitude is lower than the glidepath/glideslope.
HAZARD
The gray Selected Altitude Preview Pathways are displayed until they converge with the green glideslope
or magenta glidepath pathways. If approach vertical guidance is not yet active, pathways at the Selected
Altitude will be displayed in magenta throughout the arrival/approach.
During an ILS approach, the initial approach segment is displayed in magenta at the segment altitudes
AFCS
if GPS is the selected as the navigation source on the CDI. When switching to localizer inbound with the
LOC selected as the navigation source on the CDI, pathways are displayed in green along the localizer and
glideslope. VOR, LOC, BC, and ADF approach segments that are approved to be flown using GPS are
displayed in magenta boxes. Segments that are flown using other than GPS or ILS, such as heading legs or
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
VOR final approach courses are not displayed.
APPENDICES
INDEX
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
Selected Altitude
set for Enroute
Selected Altitude
set for Departure
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Climbs NOT Non-programmed descents NOT displayed by pathway

displayed
by pathway
TOD
Selected Altitude
for Step Down
EIS
Programmed descent
displayed by pathway
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected Altitude or Programmed Altitude

(whichever is higher)
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Figure 2-38 SVT Pathways, Enroute and Descent

AVOIDANCE
Missed Approach
HAZARD
Upon activating the missed approach, pathways lead to the Missed Approach Holding Point (MAHP) and
are displayed as a level path at the published altitude for the MAHP, or the selected altitude, whichever is
the highest. If the initial missed approach leg is a Course-to-Altitude (CA) leg, the pathways boxes will
be displayed level at the altitude published for the MAHP. If the initial missed approach leg is defined by
AFCS
a course using other than GPS, pathways are not displayed for that segment. In this case, the pathways
displayed for the next leg may be outside the field of view and will be visible when the aircraft has turned
in the direction of that leg.
ADDITIONAL
Pathways are displayed along each segment including the path required to track course reversals that are
FEATURES
part of a procedure, such as holding patterns. Pathways boxes will not indicate a turn to a MAHP unless a
defined geographical waypoint exists between the MAP and MAHP.
APPENDICES
INDEX
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
FAF
INSTRUMENTS
Descent displayed
FLIGHT
by pathway Selected Altitude
or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)
EIS
Turn Segment
MAP Climbs NOT displayed NOT displayed
by pathway by pathway
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MAHP
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Figure 2-39 SVT Pathways, Approach, Missed Approach, and Holding
FLIGHT PATH MARKER
AFCS
The Flight Path Marker (FPM), also known as a Velocity Vector, is displayed on the PFD at groundspeeds
above 30 knots. The FPM depicts the approximate projected path of the aircraft accounting for wind speed
and direction relative to the three-dimensional terrain display.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The FPM is always available when the Synthetic Terrain feature is in operation. The FPM represents the
direction of the flight path as it relates to the terrain and obstacles on the display, while the airplane symbol
represents the aircraft heading.
The FPM works in conjunction with the Pathways feature to assist the pilot in maintaining desired altitudes
APPENDICES
and direction when navigating a flight plan. When on course and altitude the FPM is aligned inside the
pathway boxes as shown.
The FPM may also be used to identify a possible conflict with the aircraft flight path and distant terrain or
obstacles. Displayed terrain or obstacles in the aircraft’s flight path extending above the FPM could indicate a
potential conflict. However, decisions regarding terrain and/or obstacle avoidance should not be made using
INDEX
only the FPM.
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
Flight Path
Marker
INSTRUMENTS
(FPM)
FLIGHT
EIS
Wind
Vector
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Figure 2-40 Flight Path Marker
ZERO PITCH LINE

AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
The Zero Pitch Line is drawn completely across the display and represents the horizon when the terrain
horizon is difficult to distinguish from other terrain being displayed. It may not align with the terrain
horizon, particularly when the terrain is mountainous or when the aircraft is flown at high altitudes.
HORIZON HEADING
AFCS
The Horizon Heading is synchronized with the HSI and shows approximately 60 degrees of compass
heading in 30‑degree increments on the Zero Pitch Line. Horizon Heading tick marks and digits appearing
on the zero pitch line are not visible behind either the airspeed or altitude display. Horizon Heading is used
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
for general heading awareness, and is activated and deactivated by pressing the HDG LBL Softkey.
TRAFFIC
NOTE: Intruder aircraft at or below 500 ft. AGL may not appear on the SVT display or may appear as a
APPENDICES
partial symbol.
Traffic symbols are displayed in their approximate locations as determined by the related traffic systems.
Traffic symbols are displayed in three dimensions, appearing larger as they are getting closer, and smaller
when they are further away. Traffic within 250 feet laterally of the aircraft will not be displayed on the SVT
INDEX
display. Traffic symbols and coloring are consistent with that used for traffic displayed on the navigation or
traffic maps. If the traffic altitude is unknown, the traffic will not be displayed on the SVT display. For more
details refer to the traffic system discussion in the Hazard Avoidance section.
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
OVERVIEW
AIRPORT SIGNS
SYSTEM
Airport Signs provide a visual representation of airport location and identification on the synthetic terrain
display. When activated, the signs appear on the display when the aircraft is approximately 15 nm from
an airport and disappear at approximately 4.5 nm. Airport signs are shown without the identifier until
INSTRUMENTS
the aircraft is approximately eight nautical miles from the airport. Airport signs are not shown behind the
FLIGHT
airspeed or altitude display. Airport signs are activated and deactivated by pressing the APTSIGNS Softkey.
Airport
EIS
Sign Airport
without Sign with
Identifier Identifier
(Between (Between
8 nm and 4.5 nm and
AUDIO PANEL
15 nm) 8 nm)
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Figure 2-41 Airport Signs
AFCS
RUNWAYS
WARNING: Do not use SVT runway depiction as the sole means for determining the proximity of the aircraft
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
to the runway or for maintaining the proper approach path angle during landing.
NOTE: Not all airports have runways with endpoint data in the database, therefore, these runways are not
displayed.
APPENDICES
Runway data provides improved awareness of runway location with respect to the surrounding terrain. All
runway thresholds are depicted at their respective elevations as defined in the database. In some situations,
where threshold elevations differ significantly, crossing runways may appear to be layered. As runways are
displayed, those within 45 degrees of the aircraft heading are displayed in white. Other runways will be gray
in color. When an approach for a specific runway is active, that runway will appear brighter and be outlined
INDEX
with a white box, regardless of the runway orientation as related to aircraft heading. As the aircraft gets closer
to the runway, more detail such as runway numbers and centerlines will be displayed.
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Airport Other
Runway Runway
on Airport
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Figure 2-42 Airport Runways
TERRAIN ALERTING
AVOIDANCE
Terrain alerting on the synthetic terrain display is triggered by Forward-looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA)
HAZARD
alerts, and corresponds to the yellow terrain shading for a caution alert and the red shading for a warning alert
on the navigation map displays. For more detailed information regarding Terrain-SVT refer to the Hazard
Avoidance Section.
In some instances, a terrain or obstacle alert may be issued with no conflict shading displayed on the
AFCS
synthetic terrain. In these cases, the conflict is outside the SVT field of view to the left or right of the aircraft.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
Terrain
Annunciation
Terrain
INSTRUMENTS
Caution
FLIGHT
EIS
Potential
Impact
AUDIO PANEL
Area
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Figure 2-43 Terrain Caution
Obstacles are represented on the synthetic terrain display by standard two-dimensional tower or wind turbine
symbols found on the navigation maps and charts. Obstacle symbols appear in the perspective view with
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
relative height above terrain and distance from the aircraft. Unlike the Inset map and MFD moving map display,
obstacles on the synthetic terrain display do not change colors to warn of potential conflict with the aircraft’s
flight path until the obstacle is associated with an actual FLTA alert. Obstacles greater than 1000 feet below the
aircraft altitude are not shown. Obstacles are shown behind the airspeed and altitude displays.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
Terrain
Annunciation
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Potential
Impact
Area
EIS
Potential
Impact
AUDIO PANEL
Point
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Figure 2-44 Terrain Warning
FIELD OF VIEW
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
The PFD field of view can be represented on the MFD Navigation Map Page. Two dashed lines forming a
V‑shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map, represent the forward viewing area shown on the PFD.
Configuring field of view:
1) While viewing the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page, press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
AFCS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Map Settings and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Map Group and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Map Group options to Field of View.
FEATURES
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select On or Off.

6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Navigation Map’ Page.
APPENDICES
INDEX
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
OVERVIEW
The following figure compares the PFD forward looking depiction with the MFD plan view and Field of View
SYSTEM
turned on.
INSTRUMENTS
Lines
FLIGHT
Depict
PFD Field
of View
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
SVT View on the PFD Field of View on the MFD
& CNS
Figure 2-45 PFD and MFD Field of View Comparison
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
OVERVIEW
2.5 ABNORMAL OPERATIONS

SYSTEM
ABNORMAL GPS CONDITIONS

INSTRUMENTS
The annunciations listed in Table 2-3 can appear on the HSI when abnormal GPS conditions occur (Figure
FLIGHT
2-46). Refer to the Flight Management Section for more information on Dead Reckoning Mode.
Annunciation Location Description

Loss of Integrity Monitoring–GPS integrity is insufficient for the current
GPS LOI Right of HSI
phase of flight
EIS
Integrity OK–GPS integrity has been restored to within normal limits

GPS INTEG OK Right of HSI
(annunciation displayed for 5 seconds)
Dead Reckoning–System is using projected position rather than GPS
Lower left of
AUDIO PANEL
DR position to compute navigation data and sequence active flight plan

aircraft symbol
& CNS
waypoints
Table 2-3 Abnormal GPS Conditions Annunciated on HSI

MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
Figure 2-46 Example HSI Annunciations

FEATURES
In Dead Reckoning Mode the CDI is removed from the display when GPS is the selected navigation source.
The following items on the PFD are then shown in amber:
APPENDICES
• Current Track Indicator

• Wind Data
• Ground Speed
• Distances in the Bearing Information Windows
INDEX
• GPS bearing pointers

These items should be verified when operating in Dead Reckoning Mode as they become increasingly
inaccurate over time.
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
OVERVIEW
SVT TROUBLESHOOTING
SYSTEM
SVT is intended to be used with traditional attitude, heading, obstacle, terrain, and traffic inputs. SVT is
disabled when valid attitude or heading data is not available for the display. In case of invalid SVT data, the
PFD display reverts to the standard blue-over-brown attitude display.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
SVT becomes disabled without the following data resources:
• Attitude data
• Heading data
• GPS position data
EIS
• 4.9 Arc-second Terrain data
• Obstacle data
• TAWS function is not available, in test mode, or failed
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• The position of the aircraft exceeds the range of the terrain database.
UNUSUAL ATTITUDES
When the aircraft enters an unusual pitch attitude, red chevrons pointing toward the horizon warn of extreme
MANAGEMENT
pitch. The chevrons are displayed on the Attitude Indicator, starting at 50˚ above and 30˚ below the horizon
FLIGHT
line.
Nose High Nose Low
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
Figure 2-47 Pitch Attitude Warnings FEATURES
APPENDICES
If pitch exceeds +30˚/-20˚ or bank exceeds 65˚, some information displayed on the PFD is removed. The
Altimeter and Airspeed, Attitude, Vertical Speed, and Horizontal Situation indicators remain on the display
and the Bearing Information, Alerts, and Annunciation windows can be displayed during such situations. The
following information is removed from each PFD and their softkeys are disabled when the aircraft experiences
unusual attitudes:
INDEX
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
OVERVIEW
• Traffic Annunciations • System Time •

Minimum Descent Altitude/
SYSTEM
• AFCS Annunciations • PFD Setup Menu Decision Height readout
• Inset Map • Windows displayed in the lower • Vertical Deviation, Glideslope,

right corner of the PFD: and Glidepath Indicators
INSTRUMENTS
• Outside air temperature (OAT)

• Altimeter Barometric Setting
FLIGHT
• ISA temperature deviation – References

– Nearest Airports • Selected Altitude
• Wind data
– Flight Plan • VNV Target Altitude
• Selected Heading readout
– Messages • Ground Speed
• Selected Course readout
EIS
– Procedures • True Airspeed

• Transponder Status Box
AUDIO PANEL
SVT UNUSUAL ATTITUDES

& CNS
During extreme pitch attitudes, the display shows either a brown or blue colored bar at the top or bottom
of the screen to represent earth or sky. The blue colored bar is also displayed when terrain gradient is great
enough to completely fill the display. This is intended to prevent losing sight of the horizon during extreme
MANAGEMENT
pitch attitudes.
FLIGHT
Blue Band
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Terrain
Completely
Fills Display
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 2-48 Blue Sky Bar with Full Display Terrain

APPENDICES
INDEX
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM (EIS)
SYSTEM
NOTE: Refer to the current version of the pertinent flight manual for limitations.
INSTRUMENTS
The Engine Indication System (EIS) for the Diamond DA40NG displays critical engine, electrical, fuel, and
FLIGHT
other system parameters on the left side of the Multi Function Display (MFD) during normal operations (Figure
3-1).
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Display
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Figure 3-1 Multi Function Display (Normal Operations)
The EIS instrument types include dial gauges, horizontal slide bar indicators, and digital displays. Green
bands indicate normal ranges of operation; amber and red bands indicate caution and warning, respectively.
When unsafe operating conditions occur, displays and labels may change color corresponding to the level of the
AFCS
condition. The pointers on the horizontal bar indicators appear in white to indicate normal operation and change
to amber or red to indicate caution or warning conditions.
If sensory data to an instrument becomes invalid or unavailable, an amber “X” is shown across the instrument.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If a display value is out of range, dashes ‘---’ are shown instead of a display.
APPENDICES
INDEX
OVERVIEW
3.1 ENGINE DISPLAY

SYSTEM
Beneath the dial gauges are displays for fuel flow and horizontal bar indicators for oil temperature and pressure,
coolant temperature, and fuel temperature and quantity.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
1
EIS
2
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
4
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
6
AFCS
7
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
8
APPENDICES
Figure 3-2 Engine Display

INDEX
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
1 Engine Load Indicator Displays current engine load as a percentage
(Load %)
2 Tachometer Displays propeller speeds in revolutions per minute (rpm)
(RPM)
INSTRUMENTS
3 Fuel Flow Indicator Displays digital value of current fuel flow in gallons per hour (gph)
FLIGHT
(FFlow GPH)
4 Oil Temperature Indicator Displays engine oil temperature ranges
(Oil Temp)
5 Oil Pressure Indicator Displays engine oil pressure ranges
EIS
(Oil Press)
6 Coolant Temperature Indicator Displays coolant temperature ranges
(Coolant Temp)
AUDIO PANEL
7 Fuel Temperature Indicator Displays fuel temperature for each main tank; pointers labeled L and R
& CNS
(Fuel Temp) indicate the fuel temperature in each tank
8 Fuel Quantity Indicator Displays the fuel quantity in gallons (gal) of fuel in the main tanks;
(Fuel Qty Gal) pointers labeled L and R indicate the fuel quantity in each tank.
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
OVERVIEW
3.2 ENGINE PAGE

SYSTEM
The ‘EIS - Engine’ Page displays all engine, fuel, electrical, and fuel calculation information. To access this
page, press the Engine Softkey or turn the large FMS Knob and select EIS. Refer to Table 3-1 for ‘EIS - Engine’
INSTRUMENTS
Page softkey functions.

FLIGHT
Level 1 Level 2 Description

Engine Displays ‘EIS - Engine’ Page and second-level engine softkeys; press again to exit page
DEC Fuel Decreases displayed fuel remaining in 1-gal increments
INC Fuel Increases displayed fuel remaining in 1-gal increments
EIS
RST Fuel Resets displayed fuel remaining to maximum fuel capacity for aircraft and fuel used to zero
Table 3-1 Engine Page Softkeys
AUDIO PANEL
5 6
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
4
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
3
HAZARD
2
AFCS
1
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 3-3 Engine Page

APPENDICES
INDEX
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
1 Oil Temperature Indicator Displays engine oil temperature ranges in degrees Celsius (°C)
(Oil °C)
2 Oil Pressure Indicator Displays engine oil pressure ranges in bar
(Oil bar)
INSTRUMENTS
3 Tachometer Displays propeller speed in revolutions per minute (rpm)
FLIGHT
(RPM)
4 Engine Load Indicator Displays current engine load as percentages
(Load %)
5 Fluids Displays coolant temperature ranges
EIS
Displays the temperature of the gearbox in degrees Celsius (°C)
6 Electrical Displays primary bus voltage
Displays alternator load in amperes (amps)
AUDIO PANEL
7 Total Service Displays the aircraft’s total flight hours (hrs); activated when the aircraft
& CNS
becomes airborne
8 Fuel System Displays fuel quantity in the main tanks in gallons (gal)
Displays fuel temperature for the main tanks in degrees Celsius (°C)
MANAGEMENT
Displays current fuel flow gallons per hour (GPH)
FLIGHT
9 Fuel Calculator Gallons Remain - Displays current fuel remaining (gal) as set by the
pilot and adjusted for fuel burn since last set
Gallons Used - Displays quantity of fuel used (gal) based on fuel flow
since last reset
AVOIDANCE
Endurance - Displays flight time remaining in hours and minutes
HAZARD
(HH:MM) based on the calculated fuel remaining
Range NM - Displays aircraft range in nautical miles (nm) based on the
calculated fuel remaining
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
OVERVIEW
FUEL CALCULATIONS
SYSTEM
NOTE: Fuel calculations do not use the aircraft fuel quantity indicators and are calculated from the last time
the fuel was reset.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Fuel used (Gallons Used), Endurance, and range (in nautical miles, Range NM) are calculated based on the
displayed fuel remaining (Gallons Remain) and the fuel flow totalizer. The calculated range also takes into
account the aircraft’s heading and the wind direction and speed.
Adjusting the fuel totalizer quantity:
EIS
On the Engine Page, use the DEC Fuel and INC Fuel Softkeys to obtain the desired fuel remaining (Gallons

Remain).
Resetting the fuel totalizer:
AUDIO PANEL
On the Engine Page, select the RST Fuel Softkey; this resets displayed fuel remaining (Gallons Remain) to the

& CNS
maximum fuel capacity for the aircraft and fuel used to zero.
A map feature related to the EIS Fuel Calculations is the Fuel Range Ring, which graphically illustrates the
aircraft’s remaining range based on the endurance, heading, groundspeed, and wind direction and speed.
MANAGEMENT
The solid green circle represents the range until all the remaining fuel is depleted. The dashed green circle
FLIGHT
indicates the aircraft range until only reserve fuel remains. Once on reserve fuel, the range is indicated by a
solid amber circle.
The Fuel Range Ring shifts position in relation to the aircraft according to wind effects. For example, more
fuel is required for flying into a headwind, and the aircraft’s decreased range in that direction is indicated by
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
the Fuel Range Ring shifting toward the tail of the Aircraft Symbol.
The amount of reserve fuel (only for purposes of the Fuel Range Ring) is set on the Navigation Map
Page Setup Menu in terms of remaining flight time. When enabled, the Fuel Range Ring appears on the
Navigation Map Page, the Weather Data Link Page, and PFD Inset Map. (Refer to Flight Management for more
information on the Fuel Range Ring).
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
OVERVIEW
3.3 REVERSIONARY MODE
SYSTEM
In the event of a PFD or MFD display failure, the display(s) operating in Reversionary Mode are configured to
present PFD symbology together with the EIS Display (refer to the System Overview for information about display
INSTRUMENTS
reversionary mode).
FLIGHT
The EIS Display, in reversionary mode, is identical to the normal EIS Display on the MFD.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
EIS
& CNS
Display
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Figure 3-4 Primary Flight Display (Reversionary Mode)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
ADDITIONAL HAZARD FLIGHT AUDIO PANEL FLIGHT SYSTEM
INDEX APPENDICES AFCS EIS
FEATURES AVOIDANCE MANAGEMENT & CNS INSTRUMENTS OVERVIEW
96
Blank Page
Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG

190-02452-00 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
OVERVIEW
SECTION 4 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
4.1 OVERVIEW
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
The Communication/Navigation/Surveillance (CNS) system includes the Audio Panels, communication radios,
navigation radios, and Mode S transponders. The System Overview Section provides a block diagram description
of the Audio Panels and CNS system interconnection.
CNS operation is performed by the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
EIS
• Primary Flight Display (PFD) • Audio Panel
• Multi Function Display (MFD) • Mode S Transponder
• Integrated Avionics Unit (2)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The MFD/PFD controls are used to tune the communication transceivers and navigation radios.
The Audio Panel provides the traditional audio selector functions of microphone and receiver audio selection.
The Audio Panel includes an intercom system (ICS) between the pilot, copilot, and passengers, a marker beacon
receiver, and a COM clearance recorder. Ambient noise from the aircraft radios is reduced by a feature called
MANAGEMENT
Master Avionics Squelch (MASQ). When no audio is detected, MASQ processing further reduces the amount of
FLIGHT
background noise from the radios.
The Mode S transponder is controlled with softkeys and the FMS Knob located on the Primary Flight Display
(PFD). The Transponder Data Box is located to the left of the System Time Box. The data box displays the active
AVOIDANCE
four-digit code, mode, and reply status.
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
OVERVIEW
PFD CONTROLS AND FREQUENCY DISPLAY

SYSTEM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
9
FLIGHT
10
11
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
13 12
Figure 4-1 PFD Controls, NAV/COM Frequency Tuning Boxes, and ADF/DME Tuning Window
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
1 NAV VOL/ID Knob – Controls NAV audio volume level. Press to turn the Morse code identifier audio on
and off. Volume level is shown in the NAV frequency field as a percentage.
2 NAV Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active NAV frequencies.
INSTRUMENTS
3 NAV Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the NAV receiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for kHz).
FLIGHT
Press to move the frequency selected for tuning (light blue numbers) and the Frequency Transfer Arrow
between NAV1 and NAV2.
4 NAV Frequency Box – Displays NAV standby and active frequency fields, volume, and station ID. The
frequency of the NAV radio selected for navigation is displayed in green.
EIS
5 COM Frequency Box – Displays COM standby and active frequency fields and volume. If available, the
communication source description is displayed in green underneath the COM Frequency Box.
AUDIO PANEL
6 COM Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the COM transceiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for
& CNS
kHz). Press to move the frequency selected for tuning (light blue numbers) and the Frequency Transfer
Arrow between COM1 and COM2.
7 COM Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active COM frequencies. Press and hold this key
MANAGEMENT
for two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) automatically into the active frequency
FLIGHT
field.
8 COM VOL/SQ Knob – Controls COM audio volume level. Press to turn the COM automatic squelch on
and off. Volume level is shown in the COM frequency field as a percentage.
AVOIDANCE
9 ADF/DME Tuning Window – Displays ADF frequencies, volume setting, and modes, and DME tuning
HAZARD
selection. Display by pressing the optional ADF/DME Softkey.
10 ENT Key – Validates or confirms an ADF frequency or ADF/DME mode and Auto-tune selection..
11 FMS Knob – Flight Management System Knob, used to enter transponder codes, select ADF/DME modes,
and Auto-tune entries when ADF/DME Tuning Window or NRST Window is present. Press the FMS Knob
AFCS
to turn the selection cursor on and off. The large knob moves the cursor in the window. The small knob
selects individual characters for the highlighted cursor location.
12 Transponder Data Box – Indicates the selected transponder code, operating mode, reply, and ident status
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
for the applicable transponder.
13 ADF/DME Softkey – Displays the optional ADF/DME Tuning Window.
APPENDICES
INDEX
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL CONTROLS

SYSTEM
1 2
INSTRUMENTS
3 4
FLIGHT
5 6
7 8
9 10
EIS
11 12
13 14
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
15 16
17 PA Annunciation
MANAGEMENT
18 19
FLIGHT
20 21
Volume/Squelch 22
Annunciations
24
AVOIDANCE
23
HAZARD
25
26
GMA 1360
AFCS
Figure 4-2 Audio Panel Controls
NOTE: When a GMA 1360 Key is selected, the in-key annunciation is illuminated.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1 COM1 MIC – Selects the #1 transmitter for transmitting. COM1 receive is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #1 COM receiver to be heard. COM2 receive can be
added by pressing the COM2 Key.
APPENDICES
2 COM1 – When selected, audio from the #1 COM receiver can be heard.
3 COM2 MIC – Selects the #2 transmitter for transmitting. COM2 receive is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #2 COM receiver to be heard. COM1 receive can be
added by pressing the COM1 Key.
INDEX
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
4 COM2 – When selected, audio from the #2 COM receiver can be heard.
5 AUX MIC – Not used in the Diamond DA40NG aircraft.
6 AUX – Not used in the Diamond DA40NG aircraft.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
7 DME – Turns optional DME audio on or off.
8 NAV1 – When selected, audio from the #1 NAV receiver can be heard.
9 ADF – Turns optional ADF receiver audio on or off.
EIS
10 NAV2 – When selected, audio from the #2 NAV receiver can be heard.
11 PILOT ICS – Controls the pilot intercom system. Press and hold to enable/disable Bluetooth recording mode.
12 TEL – When selected, audio from the satellite telephone can be heard.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
13 COPLT ICS – Controls the copilot intercom system. Press and hold to enable/disable Bluetooth recording
mode.
14 MUS1 – Selects/Deselects the MUS1 audio source and assigns the Bluetooth device to the MUS1 audio. Press
MANAGEMENT
the MUS1 key until the annunciator turns blue. The in-key annunciator will cycle from OFF to WHITE
FLIGHT
to BLUE. WHITE selects the wired audio source and BLUE selects the Bluetooth audio source. NOTE: The
Bluetooth audio can only be assigned to one source at a time for each audio panel. Once the Bluetooth audio
is assigned to an audio source, the remaining entertainment audio sources will only cycle between OFF and
WHITE.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
15 PASS ICS – Controls the passenger intercom system. Press and hold to enable/disable Bluetooth recording
mode.
16 MUS2 – Selects/Deselects the MUS2 audio source and can assign the Bluetooth device to the MUS2 audio.
Press the MUS2 key until the annunciator turns blue. The in-key annunciator will cycle from OFF to WHITE
AFCS
to BLUE. WHITE selects the wired audio source and BLUE selects the Bluetooth audio source. NOTE: The
Bluetooth audio can only be assigned to one source at a time for each audio panel. Once the Bluetooth audio
is assigned to an audio source, the remaining entertainment audio sources will only cycle between OFF and
WHITE.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
17 SPKR/PA – Selects and deselects the cabin speaker. The selected COM transmitter is deselected when the
SPKR/PA Key is pressed.
Press and hold SPKR/PA for 2 seconds to select the PA system. When the PA is active the annunciation to
the right of the SPKR/PA softkey will be illuminated. The annunciator will flash when PA mode is active
APPENDICES
and the PTT is pressed.

18 MKR/MUTE – Selects marker beacon receiver audio. Mutes the currently received marker beacon receiver
audio. Unmutes automatically when new marker beacon audio is received. Also, stops play of recorded
COM audio.
INDEX
19 HI SENS – Press to increase marker beacon receiver sensitivity. Press again to return to low sensitivity.
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
20 PLAY – Press once to play the last recorded COM audio. Press again while audio is playing and the
previous block of recorded audio is played. Each subsequent press plays each previously recorded block.
Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key during play of a memory block stops play.
INSTRUMENTS
21 MAN SQ – Enables manual squelch for the intercom. When the intercom is active, press the PILOT Knob
FLIGHT
to illuminate the squelch annunciation. Turn the PILOT/PASS Knobs to adjust squelch.
22 Volume/Squelch Indicator – Indicates volume/squelch setting relative to full scale.
23 Volume/Squelch (VOL/SQ) Control Knob – Turn the smaller knob to control volume or squelch of the
selected source (indicated by the flashing white or blue annunciator). When the volume control cursor is not
EIS
active press to switch to Blue-Select mode. If the volume control cursor is active, press twice (once to cancel
the cursor, twice to activate Blue-Select mode). Press and hold for five seconds to enable the audio panel as
discoverable for pairing. The Bluetooth Annunciator will flash to indicate that the unit is discoverable. The
unit will remain discoverable for 90 seconds or until a successful pair is established. Once a successful pair is
AUDIO PANEL
established, the audio “Bluetooth paired” is played.

& CNS
24 Cursor (CRSR) Control Knob – Turn to move the cursor (flashing white or blue annunciator) to the desired
source.
MANAGEMENT
25 Bluetooth® Connection Annunciator – A flashing cyan annunciator indicates the unit is discoverable. A solid
FLIGHT
blue annunciator indicates an active Bluetooth connection.
26 DISPLAY BACKUP Button – Manually selects Reversionary Mode.

AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
OVERVIEW
4.2 COM OPERATION
SYSTEM
COM TUNING BOXES
INSTRUMENTS
1 2 3 4 5
FLIGHT
6 7
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
8
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Figure 4-3 COM Tuning Box Indications
NOTE: When turning on the system for use, the system remembers the last frequencies used and the active
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
COM transceiver state prior to shutdown.
1 Active Field – The COM Frequency Box is composed of four fields; the two active frequencies are on the
left. An active COM frequency is displayed in green and indicates that the COM transceiver is selected
on the Audio Panel (COM1 MIC or COM2 MIC Key). Both active COM frequencies appearing in white
AFCS
indicate that no COM radio is selected for transmitting (PA Key is selected on the Audio Panel).
2 Frequency Transfer Arrow – Moves between the upper and lower radio frequency fields with the Frequency
Tuning Box. Indicates which COM transceiver is selected for frequency transfer between the Standby and
Active fields.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3 Standby Field – The COM Frequency Box is composed of four fields; the two standby frequencies are on
the right. Frequencies in the standby field are displayed in either white or gray. The standby frequency in
the tuning box is white. The other standby frequency is gray.
APPENDICES
INDEX
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
4 Frequency Tuning Box – Moves between the upper and lower radio frequency fields with the Frequency
Transfer Arrow. Indicates which COM transceiver is to be tuned in the Standby Field.
5 Automatic Squelch Indication – Indicates that Automatic Squelch is disabled. Automatic Squelch quiets
INSTRUMENTS
unwanted static noise when no audio signal is received, while still providing good sensitivity to weak COM
FLIGHT
signals. When Automatic Squelch is disabled, COM audio reception is always on. Continuous static noise
is heard over the headsets and speaker, if selected.
6 Transmit and Receive Indications – During COM transmission, a white TX appears by the active COM
frequency replacing the Frequency Transfer Arrow. During COM signal reception, a white RX appears by
the active COM frequency replacing the Frequency Transfer Arrow.
EIS
7 Frequency Spacing – The COM radios can tune either 25-kHz spacing (118.000 to 136.975 MHz) or
8.33-kHz spacing (118.000 to 136.990 MHz) for 760-channel or 3040-channel configuration. When
8.33-kHz channel spacing is selected, all of the 25-kHz channel spacing frequencies are also available in
AUDIO PANEL
the complete 3040-channel list.

& CNS
8 COM Volume – COM radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the VOL/SQ Knob.
Turning the knob clockwise increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise decreases volume.
When adjusting volume, the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies. Volume level indication
MANAGEMENT
remains for two seconds after the change.

FLIGHT
COM TRANSCEIVER MANUAL TUNING

The COM frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the right side of the MFD and PFD.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Manually tuning a COM frequency:

1) Turn the COM Knob to tune the desired frequency (large knob for MHz; small knob for kHz).
2) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the active field.
3) Adjust the volume level with the COM VOL/SQ Knob.
AFCS
4) Press the COM VOL/SQ Knob to turn automatic squelch on and off.
AUTO-TUNING THE COM FREQUENCY

ADDITIONAL
COM frequencies can be automatically tuned from the following:

FEATURES
• Nearest Airports Window (PFD) • NRST – Nearest Frequencies Page (ARTCC, FSS, WX)
• WPT – Airport Information Page • NRST – Nearest Airspaces Page
• NRST – Nearest Airports Page
APPENDICES
AUTO-TUNING FROM THE PFD

COM frequencies for the nearest airports can be automatically tuned from the Nearest Airports Window on
the PFD. When the desired frequency is entered, it becomes a standby frequency. Pressing the Frequency
Transfer Key places this frequency into the COM Active Frequency Field.
INDEX
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
OVERVIEW
Auto-tuning a COM frequency for a nearby airport from the PFD:
SYSTEM
1) Press the Nearest Softkey on the PFD to open the Nearest Airports Window. A list of 25 nearest airport
identifiers and COM frequencies is displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the list and highlight the desired COM frequency.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
3) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the COM Standby Frequency Field.
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Press the Nearest Softkey to Open
the Nearest Airports Window
Figure 4-4 Nearest Airports Window (PFD)
AFCS
AUTO-TUNING FROM THE MFD
Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the COM Frequency Box from pages in the NRST or WPT
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
page group by highlighting the frequency and pressing the ENT Key.
Auto-tuning a COM frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages:
1) From any page that the COM frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by pressing the FMS Knob or
APPENDICES
pressing the appropriate softkey.

2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired COM frequency.
3) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the standby field of the selected COM radio.
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key on either PFD to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
INDEX
Or:
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
OVERVIEW
1) Press the MENU Key to display the page menu.

SYSTEM
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options.
3) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor on the desired selection.
INSTRUMENTS
4) Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob or the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
5) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the standby field of the selected COM radio.
6) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Nearest Airports Menu Nearest Frequencies Menu Nearest Airspaces Menu

MANAGEMENT
Figure 4-5 Nearest Pages Menus

FLIGHT
On the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page, the cursor can be placed on the frequency field by pressing the
FMS Knob and scrolling through the list. The frequency is transferred to the COM Standby Field with the
ENT Key.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Selected Airport
Identifier and
Information
AFCS
Runway Information
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press ENT Key to load

frequency into PFD1
APPENDICES
Press INFO 1 Softkey COM Standby Field.

for AIRPORT, Cursor then advances
RUNWAYS, and to the next frequency.
FREQUENCIES
Windows
Figure 4-6 ‘WPT – Airport Information’ Page
INDEX
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
OVERVIEW
COM frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the ‘NRST – Nearest Airspaces’, ‘NRST – Nearest Frequencies’,
SYSTEM
and ‘NRST – Nearest Airports’ Pages on the MFD in a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys or
MENU Key, the FMS Knob, and the ENT Key.
FREQUENCY SPACING
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
The COM radios can tune either 25-kHz spacing (118.000 to 136.975 MHz) or 8.33-kHz spacing (118.000
to 136.990 MHz) for 760-channel or 3040-channel configuration. When 8.33-kHz channel spacing is selected,
all of the 25-kHz channel spacing frequencies are also available in the complete 3040-channel list.
COM channel spacing is set on the System Setup 1 Page of the Aux Page Group.
EIS
Changing COM frequency channel spacing:
1) From the ‘Aux – System Setup 1’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the flashing cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Channel Spacing Field in the COM Configuration Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired channel spacing.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the channel spacing selection.
MANAGEMENT
While the COM Configuration Window is selected, the softkeys are blank.
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
Select 8.33-kHz
or 25.0-kHz
COM Frequency
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Channel Spacing
APPENDICES
Figure 4-7 ‘Aux – System Setup 1’ Page

INDEX
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
OVERVIEW
4.3 NAV OPERATION

SYSTEM
NAV TUNING BOXES

INSTRUMENTS
1 2 3 4 5 6
FLIGHT
EIS
Figure 4-8 NAV Tuning Box Indications

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1 Standby Fields – The NAV Frequency Box is composed of four fields; the two standby frequencies are on
the left. Frequencies in the standby field are displayed in either white or gray. The standby frequency in
the tuning box is white. The other standby frequency is gray.
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
2 Frequency Transfer Arrow – Moves between the upper and lower radio frequency fields with the Frequency
Tuning Box. Indicates which NAV transciever is selected for frequency transfer between the Standby and
Active fields.
3 Active Fields – The NAV Frequency Box is composed of four fields; the two active frequencies are on the
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
right. An active NAV frequency is displayed in green. The active NAV radio is selected by pressing the
CDI softkey on the PFD. Both active NAV frequencies appearing in white indicate that no NAV radio is
selected.
4 NAV Tuning Box – Moves between the upper and lower radio standby frequency fields with the Frequency
Transfer Arrow. Indicates which NAV transceiver is to be tuned in the Standby Field. Moving the Frequency
AFCS
Tuning Box is accomplished by pressing the NAV knob on the PFD.

5 VOR/LOC Morse Code Audio Indication – When the Morse code Identifier audio is on for a NAV radio,
a white ID replaces the Frequency Transfer Arrow to the left of the active NAV frequency. In order to
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
listen to either station identifier, press the NAV1 or NAV2 Key on the Audio Panel. Pressing the VOL/ID
Knob turns on/off the Morse code audio only in the radio with the NAV Tuning Box. To turn on/off both
NAV IDs, transfer the NAV Tuning Box between NAV1 and NAV2 by pressing the small NAV Knob and
pressing the VOL/ID Knob again to turn the Morse code off in the other radio.
APPENDICES
6 Decoded Morse Code Station Identifier – The NAV Frequency Box displays the decoded Morse Code
station identifier that is received from the navigation source. Audio verification of the selected station
identifier can be accomplished by selecting the corresponding NAV radio on the audio panel and pressing
the NAV VOL/ID Knob.
INDEX
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
7 NAV VOLUME – NAV radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the VOL/SQ Knob.
Turning the knob clockwise increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise decreases volume.
When adjusting volume, the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies. Volume level indication
remains for two seconds after the change.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
NAV RADIO SELECTION AND ACTIVATION
The NAV Frequency Box is composed of four fields; two standby fields and two active fields. The active
frequencies are on the right side and the standby frequencies are on the left.
A NAV radio is selected for navigation by pressing the CDI Softkey located on the PFD. The active NAV
EIS
frequency selected for navigation is displayed in green. Pressing the CDI Softkey once selects NAV1 as the
navigation radio. Pressing the CDI Softkey a second time selects NAV2 as the navigation radio. Pressing the
CDI Softkey a third time activates GPS mode. Pressing the CDI Softkey again cycles back to NAV1.
AUDIO PANEL
While cycling through the CDI Softkey selections, the selected NAV standby frequency is selected for tuning,
& CNS
the Frequency Transfer Arrow is placed in the selected NAV Frequency Field, and the active NAV frequency
color changes to green.
The three navigation modes that can be cycled through are:
MANAGEMENT
• VOR1 (or LOC1) – If NAV1 is selected, a green single line arrow (not shown) labeled either VOR1 or LOC1
FLIGHT
is displayed on the HSI and the active NAV1 frequency is displayed in green.
• VOR2 (or LOC2) – If NAV2 is selected, a green double line arrow (shown) labeled either VOR2 or LOC2 is
displayed on the HSI and the active NAV2 frequency is displayed in green.
• GPS – If GPS Mode is selected, a magenta single line arrow (not shown) appears on the HSI and neither NAV
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
radio is selected. Both active NAV frequencies are then displayed in white and the previously selected NAV
standby frequency remains selected for tuning.
See the Flight Instruments Section for selecting the DME and Bearing Information windows and using VOR
or ADF as the source for the bearing pointer.
The NAV Frequency Box displays the decoded Morse Code station identifier that is received from the
AFCS
navigation source. Audio verification of the selected station identifier is still required, and can be accomplished
by selecting the corresponding NAV radio on the audio panel and pressing the NAV VOL/ID Knob.
NAV radios are selected for listening by pressing the corresponding keys on the Audio Panel. Pressing the
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NAV1, NAV2, ADF, or DME Key selects and deselects the navigation radio source. Selected audio can be heard over
the headset and the speakers (if selected). All radios can be selected individually or simultaneously.
NAV RECEIVER MANUAL TUNING APPENDICES
The NAV frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the left side of the MFD and PFD.
Manually tuning a NAV frequency:
1) Turn the NAV Knob to tune the desired frequency in the NAV Tuning Box.
2) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
INDEX
3) Adjust the volume level with the NAV VOL/ID Knob.

4) Press the NAV VOL/ID Knob to turn the Morse code identifier audio on and off.
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
OVERVIEW
AUTO-TUNING A NAV FREQUENCY FROM THE MFD

SYSTEM
NAV frequencies can be selected and loaded from the following MFD pages:
• WPT – Airport Information • NRST – Nearest Airports • NRST – Nearest Frequencies (FSS, WX)
INSTRUMENTS
• WPT – VOR Information • NRST – Nearest VOR • NRST – Nearest Airspaces

FLIGHT
The MFD provides auto-tuning of NAV frequencies from waypoint and nearest pages. During enroute
navigation, the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV standby frequency field. During approach
activation the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV active frequency field.
Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Box from pages in the NRST or WPT page
EIS
group by highlighting the frequency and pressing the ENT Key.

Auto-tuning a NAV frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages:
1) From any page that the NAV frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by pressing the FMS Knob or the
AUDIO PANEL
appropriate softkey.
& CNS
2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired NAV identifier or NAV frequency.
3) On the Nearest VOR and Nearest Airports pages, press the FREQ Softkey to place the cursor on the NAV
frequency.
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
4) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the standby field of the selected NAV radio.
Press the ENT

Key to load a
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
highlighted
Frequency into
the NAV Standby
Frequency Box
Turn the FMS Knob to
scroll through a list of
Frequencies
AFCS
Figure 4-9 NAV Frequency Auto-Tuning from the MFD
Or:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) When on the NRST pages, press the MENU Key on the MFD control unit to display the page menu.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options.
3) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor in the desired window.
APPENDICES
4) Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob or the ENT Key.
5) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the standby field of the selected NAV radio.
INDEX
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Nearest Airports Menu Nearest VOR Menu Nearest Frequencies Menu Nearest Airspaces Menu
Figure 4-10 Nearest Pages Menus
EIS
In the example shown, the VOR list is selected with the VOR Softkey or from the page menu. The FMS Knob
or ENT Key is used to scroll through the list. The cursor is placed on the frequency with the FREQ Softkey and
loaded into the NAV Tuning Box with the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Press the VOR Softkey Press the ENT Key to
AFCS
to place the Cursor load the Frequency
on the VOR Identifier into the NAV
Standby Field.
Press the FREQ Softkey to place the Cursor
on the VOR Frequency
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-11 Loading the NAV Frequency from the ‘NRST – Nearest VOR’ Page
While enroute, NAV frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the ‘NRST  – Nearest Airports’,
‘WPT – Airport Information’, ‘WPT – VOR Information’, and ‘NRST – Nearest Frequencies’ Pages on the MFD
APPENDICES
in a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys or MENU Key, the FMS Knob, and the ENT Key.
INDEX
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
OVERVIEW
AUTO-TUNING NAV FREQUENCIES ON APPROACH ACTIVATION

SYSTEM
NOTE: The primary NAV frequency is auto-tuned upon loading a VOR or ILS/Localizer approach.
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: When an ILS/LOC approach has been activated in GPS Mode, the system switches to NAV Mode as
FLIGHT
the final approach course is intercepted (within 15 nm of the FAF). See the Flight Management Section for
details.
NAV frequencies are automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency field on approach activation.
When loading or activating a VOR or ILS/LOC approach, the approach frequency is automatically transferred
EIS
to a NAV frequency field as follows:

• If the current CDI navigation source is GPS, the approach frequency is transferred to the NAV1 or NAV2
active frequency fields. The frequency that was previously in the NAV1 or NAV2 active frequency fields are
AUDIO PANEL
transferred to standby.
& CNS
• If the current CDI navigation source is GPS, and if the approach frequency is already loaded into the NAV1
or NAV2 standby frequency field, the standby frequency is transferred to active.
MANAGEMENT
• If the current CDI navigation source is NAV1 or NAV2, the approach frequency is transferred to the standby
FLIGHT
frequency fields of the selected CDI NAV radio.
MARKER BEACON RECEIVER

AVOIDANCE
NOTE: The marker beacon indicators operate independently of marker beacon audio and cannot be turned
HAZARD
off.
The marker beacon receiver is used as part of an ILS. The marker beacon receiver is always on and detects
any marker beacon signals within the reception range of the aircraft.
The receiver detects the three marker tones – outer, middle, and inner – and provides the marker beacon
AFCS
annunciations located to the left of the Altimeter on the PFD.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-12 Marker Beacon Keys

APPENDICES
The Audio Panels provide three different states of marker beacon operation; On, Muted, and Deselected.
Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key selects and deselects marker beacon audio. The key annunciator indicates when
marker beacon audio is selected.
During marker beacon audio reception, pressing the MKR/MUTE Key mutes the audio but does not affect the
marker annunciations. The marker tone is silenced, then waits for the next marker tone. The MKR/MUTE Key
INDEX
Annunciator is illuminated, indicating audio muting. The audio returns when the next marker beacon signal
is received. If the MKR/MUTE Key is pressed during signal reception (O, M, I indication) while marker beacon
audio is muted, the audio is deselected and the MKR/MUTE Key Annunciator is extinguished.
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
OVERVIEW
Pressing the HI SENS Key switches between high and low marker beacon receiver sensitivity. The HI SENS
SYSTEM
function (annunciator illuminated) is used to provide an earlier indication when nearing a marker during an
approach. The LO SENS function (annunciator extinguished) results in a narrower marker dwell while over a
station.
INSTRUMENTS
ADF/DME
FLIGHT
NOTE: When another auxiliary window is turned on, the ADF/DME Tuning Window is replaced on the PFD.
See the Flight Instruments Section for displaying the DME and bearing information windows (ADF) and
using the ADF as the source for the bearing pointer.
EIS
The system tunes the ADF receiver (optional) and DME transceiver (optional). The ADF is tuned by entering
the frequency in the ADF standby frequency field of the ‘ADF/DME Tuning’ Window. (The softkey may be
labeled ADF/DME, ADF, or DME, depending on installed equipment.)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The UHF DME frequency is tuned by pairing with a VHF NAV frequency. DME frequency pairing is automatic
and only the VHF NAV frequency is shown.
The following ADF/DME information is displayed in the ‘ADF/DME Tuning’ Window:
MANAGEMENT
• Active and standby ADF frequencies
FLIGHT
• ADF receiver mode
• ADF receiver volume
• DME tuning mode (DME transceiver pairing)
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
When the ‘ADF/DME Tuning’ Window is displayed, the selection cursor is placed over the standby ADF
frequency field.
Turning the large FMS Knob moves the selection cursor through the various fields (standby ADF frequency,
ADF receiver mode, ADF radio volume, and DME tuning mode). Pressing the FMS Knob activates/deactivates
the selection cursor in the ‘ADF/DME Tuning’ Window. The ADF frequency is entered using the FMS Knob
AFCS
and the ENT Key.
Active ADF Frequency Standby ADF Frequency
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ADF Mode ADF Volume
DME Tuning Mode

APPENDICES
Figure 4-13 ADF/DME Tuning Window

INDEX
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
OVERVIEW
ADF TUNING
SYSTEM
ADF frequencies in the 190.0-kHz to 1799.5-kHz range are entered in the standby ADF frequency field
of the ‘ADF/DME Tuning’ Window. The system does not tune the ADF emergency frequency, 2182.0‑kHz.
INSTRUMENTS
Tuning an ADF frequency:

FLIGHT
1) Press the ADF/DME Softkey to display the ‘ADF/DME Tuning’ Window.

2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the selection cursor over the standby ADF frequency field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to begin data entry and change each digit.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next digit position.
EIS
5) Press the ENT Key to complete data entry for the standby frequency.
AUDIO PANEL
Press the ENT Key

Turn the Small to Complete ADF
& CNS
FMS Knob to Frequency Entry

Enter Data in
the Standby ADF
Frequency Field Turn the Large FMS
Knob to Move the
MANAGEMENT
Cursor to the Next

Character
FLIGHT
Figure 4-14 Entering ADF Standby Frequencies
Pressing the CLR Key before completing frequency entry cancels the frequency change and reverts back to
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
the previously entered frequency.

Pressing the CLR Key when the cursor is flashing, clears the frequency and replaces the standby field with
0000.0.
Transferring the active and standby ADF frequencies:
AFCS
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the selection cursor over the standby ADF frequency field.
2) Press the ENT Key to complete the frequency transfer.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press the ENT Key to Transfer

the ADF Frequencies
APPENDICES
Figure 4-15 Transferring ADF Frequencies

INDEX
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
OVERVIEW
SELECTING ADF RECEIVER MODE
SYSTEM
The following modes can be selected: (In all modes NDB audio can be heard by selecting the ADF Key on
the Audio Panel.)
• ANT (Antenna) – The ADF bearing pointer parks on the HSI at 90 degrees. Best mode for listening to NDB
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
audio.
• ADF (Automatic Direction Finder) – The ADF pointer points to the relative bearing of the NDB station.
• ADF/BFO (ADF/Beat Frequency Oscillator) – The ADF pointer points to the relative bearing of the NDB
station and an audible tone confirms signal reception. This mode allows identification of the interrupted
carrier beacon stations used in various parts of the world.
EIS
• ANT/BFO (Antenna/Beat Frequency Oscillator) – The ADF bearing pointer parks on the HSI at 90 degrees
while an audible tone is provided when a signal is received. This mode also allows identification of the
interrupted carrier beacon stations and confirms signal reception.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting an ADF receiver mode:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the selection cursor over the ADF mode field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired ADF receiver mode.
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Turn the Small FMS Knob
to Select the Mode
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Figure 4-16 Selecting ADF Receiver Mode
AFCS
ADF receiver volume level can be adjusted in the tuning window from 0 to 100%. The default volume level
is set to 50%. The ADF volume level is the same for both Audio Panels.
Adjusting ADF receiver volume:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the selection cursor over the ADF volume field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to adjust volume as desired.
APPENDICES
Turn the Small FMS Knob

to Select the Volume
INDEX
Figure 4-17 Adjusting ADF Receiver Volume
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
OVERVIEW
DME TUNING
SYSTEM
NOTE: When turning on the G1000 NXi for use, the system remembers the last frequency used for DME
tuning and the NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD state prior to shutdown.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
The system tunes the optional DME transceiver. The UHF DME frequency is tuned by pairing with a VHF
NAV frequency. DME frequency pairing is automatic and only the VHF NAV frequency is shown.
The DME Tuning Window is located to the right of the HSI in the lower right corner of the PFD. The DME
transceiver is tuned by selecting NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD in the DME Tuning Window. Pressing the DME
Softkey switches the DME Tuning Window on and off.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
DME
Modes
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Figure 4-18 ADF/DME Tuning Window, DME Modes
The following DME transceiver pairing can be selected:

• NAV1 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV1 frequency.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
• NAV2 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV2 frequency.
• HOLD – When in the HOLD position, the DME frequency remains paired with the last selected NAV frequency.
Selecting DME transceiver pairing:
1) Press the ADF/DME or DME Softkey to display the ‘ADF/DME Tuning’ Window.
AFCS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the DME tuning mode.
3) Press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
ADDITIONAL
Pressing the CLR Key or FMS Knob while in the process of DME pairing cancels the tuning entry and reverts
FEATURES
back to the previously selected DME tuning state. Pressing the FMS Knob activates/deactivates the cursor in
the ‘ADF/DME Tuning’ Window.
See the Flight Instruments Section for displaying the DME information window.
APPENDICES
INDEX
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
OVERVIEW
4.4 MODE S TRANSPONDER
SYSTEM
The Mode S Transponder provides Mode A, Mode C, and Mode S interrogation and reply capabilities. Selective
addressing or Mode Select (Mode S) capability includes the following features:
INSTRUMENTS
• Level-2 reply data link capability (used to exchange information between aircraft and ATC facilities)
FLIGHT
• Surveillance identifier capability
• Flight ID (Flight Identification) reporting – The Mode S Transponder reports aircraft identification as either the
aircraft registration or a unique Flight ID.
• Altitude reporting
EIS
• Airborne status determination
• Transponder capability reporting
AUDIO PANEL
• Mode S Enhanced Surveillance (EHS) requirements
& CNS
• Acquisition squitter – Acquisition squitter, or short squitter, is the transponder 24-bit identification address.
The transmission is sent periodically, regardless of the presence of interrogations. The purpose of acquisition
squitter is to enable Mode S ground stations and aircraft equipped with a Traffic Avoidance System (TAS) to
MANAGEMENT
recognize the presence of Mode S-equipped aircraft for selective interrogation.
FLIGHT
• Extended squitter – The extended squitter is transmitted periodically and contains information such as altitude
(barometric and GPS), GPS position, and aircraft identification. The purpose of extended squitter is to provide
aircraft position and identification to ADS-B Ground-Based Transceivers (GBTs) and other aircraft.
The Hazard Avoidance Section provides more details on traffic avoidance systems.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
TRANSPONDER CONTROLS
Transponder function is displayed on three levels of softkeys on the PFD: Top-level, Mode Selection, and
Code Selection. When the top-level XPDR Softkey is pressed, the Mode Selection softkeys appear: Standby,
On, ALT, VFR, Code, Ident, Back.
AFCS
When the Code Softkey is pressed, the number softkeys appear: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, Ident, BKSP, Back. The
digits 8 and 9 are not used for code entry. Pressing the numbered softkeys in sequence enters the transponder
code. If an error is made, pressing the BKSP Softkey moves the code selection cursor to the previous digit.
ADDITIONAL
Pressing the BKSP Softkey again moves the cursor to the next previous digit.
FEATURES
Pressing the Back Softkey during code selection reverts to the Mode Selection Softkeys. Pressing the Back
Softkey during mode selection reverts to the top-level softkeys.
The code can also be entered with the FMS Knob on either PFD. Code entry must be completed with either
APPENDICES
the softkeys or the FMS Knob, but not a combination of both.

Pressing the Ident Softkey while in Mode or Code Selection initiates the ident function and reverts to the
top-level softkeys.
After 45 seconds of transponder control inactivity, the system reverts back to the top-level softkeys.
INDEX
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
EIS
Figure 4-19 XPDR Softkeys (PFD)

AUDIO PANEL
TRANSPONDER MODE SELECTION

& CNS
Mode selection can be automatic (Altitude Mode) or manual (Standby, ON, and Altitude Modes). The
Standby, On, and ALT Softkeys can be accessed by pressing the XPDR Softkey.
Selecting a transponder mode:
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
1) Press the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
2) Press the desired softkey to activate the transponder mode.
STANDBY MODE (MANUAL)

AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT function is inhibited.
Standby Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the Standby Softkey. In Standby, the transponder
is powered and new codes can be entered, but no replies or squitters are transmitted.. When Standby is
selected, a white STBY indication and transponder code appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data
AFCS
Box.
STBY Mode (White
Code Number and
ADDITIONAL
Mode)
FEATURES
Figure 4-20 Standby Mode

APPENDICES
MANUAL ON MODE
On Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the On Softkey. An On indication will appear in the
mode field of the Transponder Data Box. Selecting On mode enables transmission of transponder replies and
squitters, but transmissions will not include altitude information. The On indication and transponder code
INDEX
in the Transponder Data Box will appear green while airborne and white while on the ground. When the
transponder is operating with an air state of on-ground it will disable replies to Mode A, Mode C, and Mode
S all-call interrogations so the aircraft will not show up on the traffic systems of other aircraft.
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
OVERVIEW
On-Ground On Mode
SYSTEM
(No Altitude Reporting)
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Airborne On Mode
(No Altitude Reporting)
EIS
Figure 4-21 On Mode
AUDIO PANEL
ALTITUDE MODE
& CNS
ALT Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the ALT Softkey. When ALT mode is selected,
an ALT indication will appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box. Selecting ALT mode enables
transmission of transponder replies and squitters. Transmissions will include pressure altitude information.
MANAGEMENT
The ALT indication and transponder code in the Transponder Data Box will appear green while airborne and
FLIGHT
white while on the ground. When the transponder is operating with an air state of on-ground it will disable
replies to Mode A, Mode C, and Mode S all-call interrogations so the aircraft will not show up on the traffic
systems of other aircraft.
AVOIDANCE
On-Ground ALT Mode
HAZARD
AFCS
Airborne ALT Mode
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-22 Altitude Mode
REPLY STATUS
APPENDICES
When the transponder sends replies to interrogations, a white R indication appears momentarily in the
reply status field of the Transponder Data Box.
Reply to Interrogation
INDEX
Figure 4-23 Reply Indication
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
OVERVIEW
VFR CODE
SYSTEM
The VFR code can be entered either manually or by pressing the XPDR Softkey, then the VFR Softkey.
When the VFR Softkey is pressed, the pre-programmed VFR code is automatically displayed in the code field
of the Transponder Data Box. Pressing the VFR Softkey again restores the previous identification code.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
The pre-programmed VFR Code is set at the factory to 1200. If a VFR code change is required, contact a
Garmin-authorized service center for configuration.
VFR Code
EIS
Figure 4-24 VFR Code

AUDIO PANEL
ENTERING A TRANSPONDER CODE

& CNS
Entering a transponder code with softkeys:

1) Press the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
2) Press the Code Softkey to display the Transponder Code Selection Softkeys, for digit entry.
3) Press the digit softkeys to enter the code in the code field. When entering the code, the next softkey in sequence
must be pressed within 10 seconds, or the entry is cancelled and restored to the previous code. Press the BKSP
Softkey to move the code selection cursor to the previous digit. Five seconds after the fourth digit has been
AVOIDANCE
entered, the transponder code becomes active.

HAZARD
Entering a transponder code with the PFD FMS Knob:

1) Press the XPDR and the Code Softkeys as in the previous procedure to enable code entry.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob on the PFD to enter the first two code digits.
AFCS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next code field.
4) Enter the last two code digits with the small FMS Knob.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete code digit entry.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pressing the CLR Key or small FMS Knob before code entry is complete cancels code entry and restores the
previous code. Waiting for 10 seconds after code entry is finished activates the code automatically.
IDENT FUNCTION
APPENDICES
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the Ident Softkey is inoperative.
Pressing the Ident Softkey sends a distinct identity indication to Air Traffic Control (ATC). The indication
distinguishes the identing transponder from all the others on the air traffic controller’s screen. The Ident Softkey
appears on all levels of transponder softkeys. When the Ident Softkey is pressed, a green Ident indication is
INDEX
displayed in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box for a duration of 18 seconds.
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
OVERVIEW
After the Ident Softkey is pressed while in Mode or Code Selection, the system reverts to the top-level softkeys.
SYSTEM
Ident Indication
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Select the Ident Softkey to
Initiate the ID Function
Figure 4-25 Ident Softkey and Indication
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
OVERVIEW
4.5 ADDITIONAL AUDIO PANEL FUNCTIONS

SYSTEM
POWER-UP
INSTRUMENTS
The Audio Panels perform a self-test during power-up. During the self-test all Audio Panel annunciator lights
FLIGHT
illuminate for approximately two seconds. Once the self-test is completed, most of the settings are restored to
those in use before the unit was last turned off. The exceptions are the speaker and intercom, which are always
selected during power up.
MONO/STEREO HEADSETS
EIS
Stereo headsets are recommended for use in this aircraft.

Using a monaural headset in a stereo jack shorts the right headset channel output to ground. While this does
not damage the Audio Panel, a person listening on a monaural headset hears only the left channel in both ears.
AUDIO PANEL
If a monaural headset is used at one of the passenger positions, any other passenger using a stereo headset hears
& CNS
audio in the left ear only.
SPEAKER
MANAGEMENT
All of the radios can be heard over the cabin speaker. Pressing the SPKR/PA Key selects and deselects the
FLIGHT
cabin speaker. Speaker audio is muted when the PTT is pressed. Certain aural alerts and warnings (autopilot,
traffic, altitude) are always heard on the speaker, even when the speaker is not selected.
The speaker volume is adjustable within a nominal range. Contact a Garmin-authorized service center for
volume adjustment.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
PASSENGER ADDRESS MODE (PA MODE)

Press and hold the SPKR/PA Key for 2 seconds to initiate the Passenger Address Mode. Active PA Mode is
annunciated by the PA Annunciator on the audio panel. When in PA Mode the crew can use the PTT “Push-
to-Talk” button to deliver announcements over the speaker, to the passenger headsets, or both depending on
AFCS
configuration.
SPLIT-PA MODE
During Split-PA Mode the pilot can continue to use the radio(s) while the copilot delivers PA announcements.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To initiate Split-PA Mode, first enter Split-COM mode by pressing the COM1 MIC Key and the COM2 MIC
Key simultaneously, then press and hold the SPKR/PA Key for 2 seconds.
INTERCOM
APPENDICES
The GMA 1360 includes an intercom system, two MUSIC inputs, and one telephone/entertainment input for
the pilot, copilot and passengers. The intercom provides Pilot, Copilot, and Passenger audio isolation.
INDEX
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Figure 4-26 Intercom Controls
EIS
Press the PILOT ICS, COPLT ICS, and/or the PASS ICS Key to enable intercom audio for the selected
position. If the annunciators are lit, those positions will share intercom audio. If an annunciator is NOT lit
that position is isolated from the others.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The color of the an ICS annunciation while in an “On” state will be blue if an active Bluetooth connection
is made to a recording device. Otherwise, the “On” state annunciation will be white.
INTERCOM MODES
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Audio Panel Pilot Hears Copilot Hears Passenger Hears
Selected Radios Selected Radios Passenger MIC
Aural Alerts Aural Alerts
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
or or
Selected Radios Selected Radios Selected Radios
Aural Alerts Aural Alerts Aural Alerts
Passenger MIC
AFCS
Selected Radios Selected Radios Passenger MIC
ADDITIONAL
Aural Alerts Aural Alerts
FEATURES
Copilot MIC Pilot MIC
Selected Radios Selectd Radios Selected Radios

APPENDICES

Passenger MIC Copilot MIC
Passenger Mic
INDEX
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
Audio Panel Pilot Hears Copilot Hears Passenger Hears

Selected Radios Selected Radios Selected Radios
Passenger MIC Pilot MIC
INSTRUMENTS
Passenger MIC
FLIGHT
Selected Radios Selected Radios Pilot MIC

Aural Alerts Aural Alerts Copilot MIC
Copilot MIC Pilot MIC Passenger MIC
EIS
Passenger MIC Passenger MIC
Table 4-1 ICS Isolation Modes (GMA 1360)

AUDIO PANEL
INTERCOM VOLUME AND SQUELCH

& CNS
The VOL/CRSR Knob controls selection and volume or manual squelch adjustment for audio sources that
may not be adjustable anywhere else in the system. The small knob controls the volume or squelch. Turning
the large knob activates and/or moves the cursor (flashing white annunciator or flashing blue annunciator in
MANAGEMENT
Blue-Select Mode) to select the audio source to adjust. The cursor will time-out after a few seconds and the
FLIGHT
position of the cursor will always default back to the CREW Key. Pressing the small knob cancels the cursor.
Manual Squelch Annunciator

Manual Squelch Key Off for Automatic Squelch, On for
Off for Automatic Squelch,
AVOIDANCE
Manual Squelch
HAZARD
On for Manual Squelch

Volume/Squelch Indicator
Indicates volume/squelch setting
Volume Annunciatio relative to full scale
Squelch Annunciatio
AFCS
VOL/SQ Control Knob CRSR Control Knob

Turn to adjust Squelch when Turn to move the cursor (flashing
SQ Annunciation is lit, Volume annunciator) to the desired
when VOL Annunciation is lit. source
Figure 4-27 Volume/Squelch Control (GMA 1360)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
OVERVIEW
BLUE-SELECT MODE (TELEPHONE/ENTERTAINMENT DISTRIBUTION)
SYSTEM
The music and telephone (TEL, MUS1, and MUS2) audio are distributed using the Blue-Select Mode. The
following example indicates that the pilot, copilot, and passengers will all hear the telephone audio.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-28 Blue Select Mode (GMA 1360)
MANAGEMENT
The Blue-Select Mode is entered by pressing the small knob when the volume control cursor (flashing white
FLIGHT
annunciator) is not active. If the volume control cursor is active, press the small knob twice. The first press will
cancel the volume control cursor, the second will activate Blue-Select Mode.
The annunciator over the TEL Button will be flashing blue. Any combination of the annunciators over the
PILOT ICS, COPLT ICS, and PASS ICS buttons may be blue. Select the desired button to turn the blue
AVOIDANCE
annunciator on or off to distribute the telephone audio to selected crew/passenger positions. Turn the large
HAZARD
knob to select MUS1 or MUS2, and select the crew/passenger positions to receive the music audio.
Selecting any button other than PILOT ICS, COPLT ICS, PASS ICS, TEL,MUS1, or MUS2 will cancel Blue-
Select Mode. Pressing the small knob will also cancel Blue-Select Mode. After approximately ten seconds with
no input, the Blue-Select Mode will automatically cancel.
AFCS
ADJUSTING INTERCOM VOLUME
When the cursor is on PILOT ICS, COPLT ICS, or PASS ICS, the Volume Control Knob adjusts the intercom
volume for the listener.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ADJUSTING SPEAKER VOLUME
When the cursor is on SPKR, the Volume Control Knob adjusts the speaker volume of the selected sources
(COM, NAV, AUX, MKR). Alert volumes are not affected by the speaker volume control knob.
APPENDICES
ADJUSTING MKR, MUS1, OR MUS2 VOLUME

When the cursor is on MKR, MUS1, or MUS2 the Volume Control Knob adjusts the individual volume of
the selected source.
ADJUSTING MANUAL SQUELCH

INDEX
When the cursor is on MAN SQ, the Volume Control Knob adjusts the ICS Squelch Threshold (the volume
level that must be exceeded to be heard over the intercom).
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
OVERVIEW
3D AUDIO
SYSTEM
3D Audio is useful when multiple audio sources are present. By using different responses in each ear, 3D
audio processing creates the illusion that each audio source is coming from a unique location or seat position.
INSTRUMENTS
Because this feature uses different signals for left and right channels, it requires wiring for stereo intercom
FLIGHT
and stereo headsets. If 3D audio is activated when mono headsets are in use, the listener will still hear all audio
sources; however, there is no benefit from location separation.
With a single COM selected and 3D Audio enabled, the listener hears the audio source at the 12 o’clock
position. If both COMs are selected, the listener hears COM1 at 11 o’clock and COM2 at the 1 o’clock position.
All other intercom positions are processed to sound like their relative seat location. By default, the system
EIS
assumes the pilot sits in the left seat. A Garmin authorized service center can make changes to the default
configuration.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
3D Audio Troubleshooting
ADDITIONAL
Symptom(s) Cause(s) Solution(s)

FEATURES
“3D audio left” message 1) Mono headset in use 1) Use a stereo headset
heard in both ears.
Or: 2) Stereo headset in use with 2) Set mono/stereo switch on headset to ‘stereo’
“3D audio right” message mono/stereo switch set to
APPENDICES
not heard ‘mono’

3) Aircraft wiring has left audio 3) If after checking solutions #1 and #2 see a service
wired to both left and right center as soon as possible to inspect/correct wiring.
channels of stereo headset jack This wiring fault can cause fail-safe audio not to
function.
INDEX
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
3D Audio Troubleshooting
“3D audio left” message 1) Mono headset in use 1) Use a stereo headset
heard in both ears, 2) Stereo headset in use with 2) Set mono/stereo switch on headset to ‘stereo’
followed by “3D audio mono/stereo switch set to
INSTRUMENTS
right” message heard in mono
FLIGHT
both ears
3) Incorrect aircraft wiring (left/ 3) If after checking solutions #1 and #2 see a service
right shorted together) center as soon as possible to inspect/correct wiring.
This wiring fault can cause fail-safe audio not to
function.
“3D audio right” message 1) Incorrect aircraft wiring (right 1) See a service center as soon as possible to inspect/
EIS
heard in both ears. “3D channel used for mono instead correct wiring. This wiring fault can cause fail-safe
audio left” not heard of left or left/right swapped) audio not to function.
“3D audio left” message 1) Stereo headset is on backwards 1) Verify correct orientation from the left/right indication
AUDIO PANEL
heard in right ear only on each side of the headset or the position of the
& CNS
followed by “3D audio boom mic (usually attached on left side). If the
right” message heard in headset is backwards left/right position information
left ear only will be swapped.
2) Incorrect aircraft wiring (left/ 2) See a service center as soon as possible to inspect/
MANAGEMENT
right channels swapped) correct wiring. This wiring fault can cause fail-safe
FLIGHT
audio not to function.
“3D audio left” message 1) Aircraft wired for mono 1) See a service center to wire the installation for stereo
heard in left ear only, no intercom headsets.
audio heard in right ear.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
“3D audio right” message 1) Incorrect aircraft wiring (right 1) See a service center as soon as possible to inspect/
heard in right ear only, no channel used for mono instead correct wiring. This wiring fault can cause fail-safe
audio heard in left ear of left, or left/right swapped) audio not to function.
Table 4-2 3D Audio Troubleshooting
AFCS
BLUETOOTH®
NOTE: Pairing is only necessary during the first attempt to connect a Bluetooth device to the audio panel.
Once paired, the audio panel and the device will connect automatically.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
PAIRING A BLUETOOTH DEVICE WITH THE AUDIO PANEL
Press and hold the inner knob for two seconds. The Bluetooth Annunciator flashes to indicate the unit
is discoverable and the aural message “Bluetooth discoverable” is heard. The audio panel will remain
APPENDICES
discoverable for 90 seconds or until a successful pair is established. Once paired, the Bluetooth Annunciator
turns steady blue and the aural message “Bluetooth paired” is heard.
INDEX
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
OVERVIEW
ASSIGNING AN AUDIO SOURCE TO THE BLUETOOTH DEVICE

SYSTEM
Press the TEL, MUS1, or MUS2 key until the annunciator turns blue (the audio from the Bluetooth source
will not be heard until this step is complete). The key annunciator cycles OFF-WHITE-BLUE. WHITE
selects the wired audio source. BLUE selects the Bluetooth audio source. The BLUE source assignment will
INSTRUMENTS
persist through Bluetooth audio connection disruptions.

FLIGHT
NOTE: The Bluetooth audio can only be assigned to one source at a time. Once the Bluetooth audio is
assigned to an audio source, the remaining entertainment audio sources will only cycle between OFF and
WHITE.
EIS
Bluetooth audio will maintain a separate volume level and Blue Select distribution from the wired audio
source. If the Bluetooth connection is supporting a phone call, all intercom positions listening to that source
can also speak on the call through the headset MICs.
AUDIO PANEL
ADDITIONAL BLUETOOTH CONTROL FUNCTIONS

& CNS
When the Audio Panel detects a recording device as the Bluetooth connected device, the Pilot ICS
Annunciator will turn blue. All audio heard by the Pilot will be recorded. Press and hold the PILOT ICS Key
to enable/disable Bluetooth recording mode.
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
CLEARANCE RECORDER AND PLAYER
NOTE: Pressing the play key on the pilot’s Audio Panel plays recorded audio to the Pilot. Pressing the play
key on the Copilot’s Audio Panel plays recorded audio to the Copilot.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
The Audio Panel contains a digital clearance recorder that continually records up to 2.5 minutes of the
selected COM radio signal. Recorded COM audio is stored in separate memory blocks. Once 2.5 minutes of
recording time have been reached, the recorder begins recording over the stored memory blocks, starting from
the oldest block.
AFCS
The PLAY Key controls the play function. The PLAY annunciator remains lit to indicate when play is in
progress. The PLAY annunciator turns off after playback is finished.
Pressing the PLAY Key once plays the latest recorded memory block and then returns to normal operation.
Pressing the PLAY Key again during play of a memory block stops play. If a COM input signal is detected
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
during play of a recorded memory block, play is halted.

Pressing the PLAY Key twice within one-half second while audio is playing plays the previous block of
recorded audio. Each subsequent two presses of the PLAY Key within one-half second backtracks through the
recorded memory blocks to reach and play any recorded block.
APPENDICES
Powering off the unit automatically clears all recorded blocks.

INDEX
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
OVERVIEW
ENTERTAINMENT INPUTS
SYSTEM
SIRIUSXM RADIO ENTERTAINMENT
SiriusXM Radio audio from the Data Link Receiver may be heard by the pilot and passengers simultaneously
INSTRUMENTS
(optional: requires subscription to SiriusXM Radio Service). Refer to the Additional Features Section for more
FLIGHT
details on the Data Link Receiver.
Connecting a stereo input to either MUSIC INPUT #1 or MUSIC INPUT #2 jacks removes the SiriusXM
Radio Audio from that input. For example, if passengers prefer their own music while the pilot listens to the
SiriusXM Radio, the entertainment audio should be connected to the MUSIC INPUT #2 jack.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
OVERVIEW
4.6 AUDIO PANEL PREFLIGHT PROCEDURE

SYSTEM
NOTE: If the pilot and/or copilot are using headsets that have a high/low switch or volume control knob,
INSTRUMENTS
verify that the switch is in the high position and the volume control on the headsets are at maximum volume
FLIGHT
setting. On single‑pilot flights, verify that all other headsets are not connected to avoid excess noise in the
audio system.
NOTE: When the MAN SQ Key is pressed, the ICS squelch can be set manually by the pilot and copilot. If
manual squelch is set to full open (SQ annunciated and the knobs turned counterclockwise) background
EIS
noise is heard in the ICS system as well as during COM transmissions.

After powering up the system, the following steps aid in maximizing the use of the Audio Panel as well as
preventing pilot and copilot induced issues. The system will retain the audio settings from the last power up;
AUDIO PANEL
however, these preflight procedures can be performed each time a pilot boards the aircraft to ensure awareness
& CNS
of all audio levels for the Audio Panel and radios.

Manually Adjusting the Squelch and Volume Settings:
MANAGEMENT
1. Press the MAN SQ Key so that the in-key annunciation is illuminated.

FLIGHT
2. Verify manual squelch is set to full open.

3. To enable the intercom selection(s) press the PILOT ICS, COPILOT ICS, and/or PASS ICS Keys so that the in-
key annunciation(s) are illuminated.
AVOIDANCE
4. Turn CRSR Control Knob to select the intercom audio source to be adjusted. Once selected, turn VOL/SQ
HAZARD
Control Knob to set the intercom audio level for that position.
5. Turn CRSR Control Knob to select the COM/NAV radios and each remaining audio source to be adjusted. Once
selected, turn VOL/SQ Control Knob to adjust the volume level for that position.
6. Press the MAN SQ Key so that the in-key annunciation is no longer illuminated. Auto Squelch will now be
AFCS
active.
Once this procedure has been completed, the pilot and copilot can change settings, keeping in mind the notes
above.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
OVERVIEW
4.7 ABNORMAL OPERATION
SYSTEM
Abnormal operation of the system includes equipment failures of the system components and failure of
associated equipment, including switches and external devices.
INSTRUMENTS
STUCK MICROPHONE
FLIGHT
If the push-to-talk (PTT) Key becomes stuck, the COM transmitter stops transmitting after 35 seconds
of continuous operation. An alert appears in the Alerts Window on the PFD to advise the crew of a stuck
microphone.
The COM1 MIC or COM2 MIC Key Annunciator on the Audio Panel flashes as long as the PTT Key remains
EIS
stuck.
COM TUNING FAILURE
AUDIO PANEL
In case of a COM system tuning failure, the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) is automatically tuned in
& CNS
the radio in which the tuning failure occurred. Depending on the failure mode, a red X may appear on the
frequency display.
AUDIO PANEL FAIL-SAFE OPERATION
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
If there is a failure of the Audio Panel, a fail-safe circuit connects the pilot’s headset and microphone directly
to the COM1 transceiver. Audio is not available on the speaker during Fail-safe operation.
REVERSIONARY MODE
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
The red DISPLAY BACKUP Button selects the Reversionary Mode. See the System Overview Section for
more information on Reversionary Mode.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
132
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Blank Page

190-02452-00 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
SECTION 5 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
5.1 INTRODUCTION
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
The system is an integrated flight, engine, communication, navigation and surveillance system. This section of
the Pilot’s Guide explains flight management using the system.
The most prominent part of the system are the two full color displays: one Primary Flight Display (PFD) and
a Multi Function Display (MFD). The information to successfully navigate the aircraft using the GPS sensors is
displayed on the PFD and the MFD.
EIS
Navigation mode indicates which sensor is providing the course data (e.g., GPS, VOR) and the flight plan phase
(e.g., Departure (DPRT), Terminal (TERM), Enroute (ENR), Oceanic (OCN), RNAV Approach (LNAV, LNAV+V,
L/VNAV, LP, LP+V, LPV), or Missed Approach (MAPR)). L/VNAV, LP, LP+V, and LPV approach service levels are
AUDIO PANEL
only available with SBAS.
& CNS
The Inset Map and HSI Map are small versions of the Navigation Map. The Inset Map is displayed in the lower
left corner of the PFD (lower right during reversionary mode), and the HSI Map is displayed in the center of
the HSI. The Inset Map and the HSI Map may each be referred to as the PFD Map. A PFD Map is displayed by
MANAGEMENT
pressing the Map/HSI Softkey, pressing the Layout Softkey, then pressing either the Inset Map or HSI Map
FLIGHT
Softkey. Pressing the Map Off Softkey removes the PFD Map.
The Navigation Map displays aviation data (e.g., airports, VORs, airways, airspaces), geographic data (e.g.,
cities, lakes, highways, borders), topographic data (map shading indicating elevation), and hazard data (e.g.,
traffic, terrain, weather). The amount of displayed data for the Inset Map can be reduced by pressing the Map/
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
HSI Softkey on the PFD, then pressing the Detail Softkey. The amount of displayed data for the Navigation Map
can be reduced by pressing the Detail Softkey on the MFD. The Navigation Map can be oriented three different
ways: North Up (NORTH UP), Track Up (TRK UP), or Heading Up (HDG UP).
An aircraft icon is placed on the Navigation Map at the location corresponding to the calculated present position.
The aircraft position and the flight plan legs are accurately based on GPS calculations. The basemap upon which
AFCS
these are placed are from a source with less resolution, therefore the relative position of the aircraft to map features
is not exact. The leg of the active flight plan currently being flown is shown as a magenta line on the navigation
map. The other legs are shown in white.
ADDITIONAL
There are 28 different map ranges available, from 250 feet to 1000 nm. Range is indicated in the upper left
FEATURES
quadrant of the range ring shown around the aircraft icon. This indicated range is the range from the aircraft
icon to the range ring, and roughly half the range to the top edge of the displayed map. To change the map
range on any map, turn the Joystick counter-clockwise to zoom in ( -, decreasing), or clockwise to zoom out (+,
increasing).
APPENDICES
The Direct-to Window, the Flight Plan Window, the Procedures Window, and the Nearest Airports Window
can be displayed in the lower right corner of the PFD. Details of these windows are discussed in detail later in
the section.
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
Navigation Status Box

INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Current Track Indicator

Navigation Mode
Inset Map Location of:

- Direct To Window
EIS
- Flight Plan Window

- Procedures Window
- Nearest Airports Window
- References Window
AUDIO PANEL
Figure 5-1 GPS Navigation Information on the PFD Inset Map

& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Navigation Mode
AVOIDANCE
Current Track
HAZARD
Indicator
HSI Map
AFCS
Figure 5-2 GPS Navigation Information on the PFD HSI Map

Navigation Data Bar
Navigation Page Title
Map Orientation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Navigation Map
- Aviation Data
- Geographic Data Map Range
- Topographic Data
- Hazard Data
APPENDICES
Active Flight Plan Leg

Aircraft Icon
at Present Position
Flight Plan Leg

INDEX
Figure 5-3 GPS Navigation Information on the MFD Navigation Page
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
NAVIGATION STATUS BOX AND DATA BAR
SYSTEM
The Navigation Status Box located at the top of the PFD contains two fields displaying the following information:
Figure 5-4 PFD Navigation Status Box
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
• Active flight plan leg (e.g., ‘D-> KICT’ or ‘KIXD -> KCOS’) or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘Turn right to
021˚ in 8 seconds’)
• Distance (DIS) and Bearing (BRG) to the next waypoint or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘TOD within 1 minute’)
The symbols used in the PFD status box are:
Symbol Description Symbol Description
EIS
Active Leg Left Holding Pattern
Direct-to Vector to Final
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Right Procedure Turn Right DME Arc/Radius to Fix Leg
Left Procedure Turn Left DME Arc/Radius to Fix Leg
MANAGEMENT
Right Holding Pattern
FLIGHT
The Navigation Data Bar located at the top of the MFD contains four data fields, each displaying one of the
following items:
BRG Bearing FOD Fuel over Destination
DIS Distance GS Ground Speed
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
DTK Desired Track MSA Minimum Safe Altitude
END Endurance TAS True Airspeed
ENR ETE to Final Destination TKE Track Angle Error
ESA Enroute Safe Altitude TRK Track
AFCS
ETA Estimated Time of Arrival VSR Vertical Speed Required
ETE Estimated Time Enroute XTK Cross-Track Error
FOB Fuel on Board
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-5 MFD Navigation Data Bar
The navigation information displayed in the four data fields can be selected on the MFD Data Bar Fields Box
on the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page. The default selections (in order left to right) are GS, DTK, TRK, and ETE.
Changing a field in the MFD Navigation Data Bar:
APPENDICES
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page.

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field number in the ‘MFD Data Bar Fields’ Box.
INDEX
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and scroll through the data options list to select the desired data.
5) Press the ENT Key. Pressing the Defaults Softkey returns all fields to the default setting.
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
5.2 USING MAP DISPLAYS

SYSTEM
Map displays are used extensively in the system to provide situational awareness in flight. Most system maps
can display the following information:
INSTRUMENTS
• Airports, NAVAIDs, airspaces, airways, land data • Map Pointer information (distance and bearing
FLIGHT
(highways, cities, lakes, rivers, borders, etc.) to pointer, location of pointer, name, and other
with names pertinent information)
• Map range • Fuel range ring
• Wind direction and speed • Flight plan legs
EIS
• Map orientation • User waypoints

• Icons for enabled map features • Track vector
• Aircraft icon (representing present position) • Terrain
AUDIO PANEL
• Obstacle data • Topography data

& CNS
• Topography scale
The information in this section applies to the following maps unless otherwise noted:
• All Map Group Pages (‘Map’) • All Nearest Group Pages (‘NRST’)
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
• All Waypoint Group Pages (‘WPT’) • Direct To Window

• ‘Aux - Trip Planning’ Page (‘Aux’) • PFD Maps
• Flight Plan Pages (‘FPL’) • Procedure Loading Pages
MAP ORIENTATION
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Maps are shown in one of three different orientation options, allowing flexibility in determining aircraft
position relative to other items on the map (north up) or for determining where map items are relative to where
the aircraft is going (track up or heading up). The map orientation is shown in the upper left corner of the map.
AFCS
Figure 5-6 Map Orientation

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• North up (North up) aligns the top of the map display to north (default setting).
• Track up (Track up) aligns the top of the map display to the current ground track.
APPENDICES
• Heading up (HDG up) aligns the top of the map display to the current aircraft heading.
The Auto North Up setting configures the map to switch automatically to a north up orientation when the
map range reaches a minimum range.
NOTE: When panning or reviewing active flight plan legs in a non-North Up orientation, the map does not
INDEX
show the map orientation nor the wind direction and speed.
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
NOTE: Map orientation can only be changed on the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page. Any other displays that
show navigation data reflect the orientation selected for the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Map Settings
Selection
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-7 Navigation Map Page Menu
Map Group Selection
MANAGEMENT
Orientation Field
FLIGHT
North Up Above Field
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
Figure 5-8 Map Settings Menu - Map Group
Changing the Navigation Map orientation:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) With the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed, press the MENU Key. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’
option.
2) Press the ENT Key to display the ‘Map Settings’ Window.
APPENDICES
3) Select the ‘Map’ Group.

4) Press the ENT Key
5) Turn the large FMS Knob, or press the ENT Key once, to select the ‘Orientation’ Field.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired orientation.
7) Press the ENT Key to select the new orientation.
INDEX
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the base page.
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
Enabling/disabling Auto North Up and selecting the minimum switching range:

SYSTEM
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’
option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Menu is displayed.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.

5) Highlight the ‘North Up Above’ Field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’ using the small FMS Knob.
EIS
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the range field.
8) Use the small FMS Knob to select the desired range.
9) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page
MAP RANGE
MANAGEMENT
There are 28 different map ranges available, from 250 feet to 1000 nm. Range is indicated in the upper left
FLIGHT
quadrant of the range ring shown around the aircraft icon. This indicated range is the range from the aircraft
icon to the range ring, and roughly half the range to the top edge of the displayed map. When the map range
is decreased to a point that exceeds the capability of the system to accurately represent the map, a magnifying
glass icon is shown to the left of the map range. To change the map range turn the Joystick counter-clockwise
AVOIDANCE
to decrease the range, or clockwise to increase the range.

HAZARD
Auto Zoom On
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-9 Map Range

APPENDICES
AUTO ZOOM
Auto zoom allows the system to change the map display range to the smallest range clearly showing the
active waypoint. Auto zoom can be overridden by adjusting the range with the Joystick, and remains until
the active waypoint changes, a terrain or traffic alert occurs, the aircraft takes off, or the manual override times
INDEX
out (timer set on ‘Map Settings’ Window). Auto zoom is suspended while the map pointer is active.
If a terrain caution or warning occurs, all navigation maps automatically adjust to the smallest map
range clearly showing the potential impact areas. If a new traffic advisory alert occurs, any navigation map
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
displaying traffic advisory alerts automatically adjusts to the smallest map range clearly showing the traffic
SYSTEM
advisory. When terrain or traffic alerts clear, the map returns to the previous auto zoom range based on the
active waypoint.
The auto zoom function can be turned on or off independently for the PFD and MFD. Control of the ranges
INSTRUMENTS
at which the auto zoom occurs is done by setting the minimum and maximum ‘look forward’ times (set on the
FLIGHT
‘Map Settings’ Window for the ‘Map’ Group). These settings determine the minimum and maximum distance
to display based upon the aircraft’s ground speed.
• Waypoints that are long distances apart cause the map range to increase to a point where many details on
the map are decluttered. If this is not acceptable, lower the maximum look ahead time to a value that limits
the auto zoom to an acceptable range.
EIS
• Waypoints that are very short distances apart cause the map range to decrease to a point where situational
awareness may not be what is desired. Increase the minimum look ahead time to a value that limits the auto
zoom to a minimum range that provides acceptable situational awareness.
AUDIO PANEL
• Flight plans that have a combination of long and short legs cause the range to increase and decrease as
& CNS
waypoints sequence. To avoid this, auto zoom can be disabled or the maximum/ minimum times can be
adjusted.
• The ‘time out’ time (configurable on the ‘Map Settings’ Window for the Map Group) determines how long
MANAGEMENT
auto zoom is overridden by a manual adjustment of the range knob. At the expiration of this time, the auto
FLIGHT
zoom range is restored. Setting the ‘time out’ value to zero causes the manual override to never time out.
• When the maximum ‘look forward’ time is set to zero, the upper limit becomes the maximum range
available (1000 nm).
AVOIDANCE
• When the minimum ‘look forward’ time is set to zero, the lower limit becomes 1.5 nm.
HAZARD
Configuring automatic zoom:
option.
AFCS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ group.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Auto Zoom’ On/Off Field, and select ‘Off’ or ‘On’ using the small FMS
Knob.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the ‘Auto Zoom’ display selection
Field.
APPENDICES
7) Select ‘MFD’, ‘PFD’, or ‘All’ using the small FMS Knob.

8) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the ‘Max Look FWD’ Field.
Times are from zero to 999 minutes.
9) Use the FMS Knobs to set the time. Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
10) Repeat step 9 for ‘Min Look FWD’ (zero to 99 minutes) and ‘Time Out’ (zero to 99 minutes).
11) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
MAP PANNING
SYSTEM
Map panning allows the pilot to:

• View parts of the map outside the displayed range without adjusting the map range
INSTRUMENTS
• Highlight and select locations on the map

FLIGHT
• Review information for a selected airport, NAVAID or user waypoint

• Designate locations for use in flight planning
• View airspace and airway information
When the panning function is selected by pushing the Joystick, the Map Pointer flashes on the map display.
EIS
A window also appears at the top of the map display showing the latitude/longitude position of the pointer,
the bearing and distance to the pointer from the aircraft’s present position, and the elevation of the land at the
position of the pointer.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: The map is normally centered on the aircraft’s position. If the map has been panned and there has
been no pointer movement for about 60 seconds, the map reverts back to centered on the aircraft position
and the flashing pointer is removed.
MANAGEMENT
Map Pointer
FLIGHT
Information
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Map Pointer
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-10 Navigation Map - Map Pointer Activated
When the Map Pointer is placed on an object, the name of the object is highlighted (even if the name was
APPENDICES
not originally displayed on the map). When any map feature or object is selected on the map display, pertinent
information is displayed.
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
Information about Point
SYSTEM
of Interest
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Map Pointer on
POI
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-11 Navigation Map - Map Pointer on Point of Interest
When the Map Pointer crosses an airspace boundary, the boundary is highlighted and airspace information
is shown. The information includes the name and class of airspace, the ceiling in feet above Mean Sea Level
MANAGEMENT
(MSL), and the floor in feet MSL.
FLIGHT
Panning the map:
1) Press the Joystick to display the Map Pointer.
2) Move the Joystick to move the Map Pointer around the map.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
3) Press the Joystick to remove the Map Pointer and recenter the map on the aircraft’s current position.
Reviewing information for an airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint:

1) With the desired map page displayed on the MFD, push the Joystick to display the Map Pointer and place the
Map Pointer on a waypoint.
AFCS
2) Press the ENT Key to display the ‘WPT - Waypoint Information’ Page for the selected waypoint.
3) Press the Go Back Softkey, the CLR Key, or the ENT Key to exit the ‘WPT - Waypoint Information’ Page and
return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page showing the selected waypoint.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Viewing airspace information for a special-use or controlled airspace:
1) Place the Map Pointer on the boundary of an airspace.
2) Push the Joystick to remove the Map Pointer and center the map on the aircraft.
APPENDICES
Or:
1) Place the Map Pointer on an open area within the boundaries of an airspace.
2) Press the ENT Key to display an options menu.
3) ‘Review Airspaces’ should already be highlighted, if not select it. Press the ENT Key to display the Airspace
INDEX
Information Page for the selected airspace.

4) Press the CLR or ENT Key to exit the Airspace Information Page.
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
MEASURING BEARING AND DISTANCE

SYSTEM
Distance and bearing from the aircraft’s present position to any point on the viewable navigation map may be
calculated using the ‘Measure Bearing and Distance’ selection from Navigation Map page menu. The bearing
and distance tool displays a dashed Measurement Line and a Measure Pointer to aid in graphically identifying
INSTRUMENTS
points with which to measure. Lat/Long, distance and elevation data for the Measure Pointer is provided in a
FLIGHT
window at the top of the navigation map.

Measuring bearing and distance between any two points:
1) Press the MENU Key (with the Navigation Map Page displayed).
2) Highlight the ‘Measure Bearing/Distance’ field.
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key. A Measure Pointer is displayed on the map at the aircraft’s present position.
4) Move the Joystick to place the reference pointer at the desired location. The bearing and distance are displayed
AUDIO PANEL
at the top of the map. Elevation at the current pointer position is also displayed. Pressing the ENT Key changes
& CNS
the starting point for measuring.

5) To exit the Measure Bearing/Distance option, push the Joystick; or select ‘Stop Measuring’ from the Page Menu
and press the ENT Key.
MANAGEMENT
Measurement
FLIGHT
Information Pointer Lat/Long

AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Measurement Line
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-12 Navigation Map - Measuring Bearing and Distance
TOPOGRAPHY
APPENDICES
All navigation maps can display various shades of topography colors representing land elevation, similar
to aviation sectional charts. Topographic data can be displayed or removed as described in the following
procedures. Topographic data can also be displayed on the selectable profile map at the bottom of the navigation
map.
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
Topographic data can be displayed or removed as described in the following procedures. Topographic
SYSTEM
data can also be displayed on the selectable VSD Inset at the bottom of the navigation map. In addition, the
Navigation Map can display a topographic scale (located in the lower right hand side of the map) showing a
scale of the terrain elevation and minimum/maximum displayed elevations.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Navigation Map
Topographic Data
Navigation Map
Black Background
EIS
Topographic Data
on VSD Inset
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TOPO Off TOPO On
Figure 5-13 Navigation Map - Topographic Data
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Absolute Terrain On
Terrain Off
AFCS
Figure 5-14 PFD Inset Map - Absolute Terrain Data
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Maximum Displayed Elevation

APPENDICES
Minimum Displayed Elevation

Figure 5-15 Navigation Map - Topo Scale
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Displaying/removing topographic data on all MFD pages displaying navigation maps:

OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey.

2) Press the TER Softkey until ‘Topo’ is shown on the softkey to display topographic data.
3) Press the TER Softkey until ‘Off’ is shown on the softkey to remove topographic data from the navigation map.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
When topographic data is removed from the page, all navigation data is presented on a black background.
Displaying/removing topographic data on the PFD Inset Map or the HSI Map:
1) Press the Map/HSI Softkey .
2) Press the Topo Softkey.
EIS
3) Press the TER Softkey until ‘Off’ is shown on the softkey to remove topographic data from the navigation map.
When topographic data is removed from the page, all navigation data is presented on a black background.
Displaying/removing topographic data using the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ ‘Page Menu’ Window:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group.

FLIGHT

5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Terrain Display’ Field.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Topo’ or ‘Off’.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Selecting a topographical data range (Terrain Display):

option.
AFCS

3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Use the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Terrain Display’ range field. Ranges are from 1 nm to 1000 nm.
6) To change the Terrain Display range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
7) Select the desired range using the small FMS Knob.
APPENDICES

Displaying/removing the topographic scale (Topo Scale):

INDEX
option.
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ group and press the ENT Key.
SYSTEM
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Topo Scale’ Field.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
MAP SYMBOLS
This section discusses the types of land, aviation, and airspace symbols that can be displayed. Each listed type
of symbol can be turned on or off, and the maximum range to display each symbol can be set. The decluttering
of the symbols from the map using the Detail Softkey is also discussed.
EIS
LAND SYMBOLS
The following items are configured on the land menu:
AUDIO PANEL
Default Maximum
Land Symbols Symbol
& CNS
Range (nm) Range (nm)
User Waypoint 25 40
Highways and Roads
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Interstate Highway (Freeway) 50 400
International Highway (Freeway) 50 400
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
US Highway (National Highway) 15 150
State Highway (Local Highway) 2.5 100
Local Road (Local Road) N/A 4 25
AFCS
Railroads 7.5 25
Large City (> 200,000) 100 1000

Medium City (> 50,000) 50 400
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Small City (> 5,000) 25 100
State/Province 400 1000
River/Lake 75 100
APPENDICES
Latitude/Longitude (LAT/LON) 1 1000
Table 5-1 Land Symbol Information

INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
AVIATION SYMBOLS
SYSTEM
The following items are configured on the aviation menu:

Default Maximum
Aviation Symbols Symbol
INSTRUMENTS
Large Airport (Longest Runway ≥ 8100 ft)

FLIGHT
100 1000
Medium Airport (8100 ft > Longest Runway ≥ 5000 ft, or
50 400
Longest Runway < 5000 ft with control tower)
Small Airport (Longest Runway < 5000 ft without a control
25 150
tower)
EIS
Taxiways (SafeTaxi) See Additional Features 1.5 5
Runway Extension 7.5 150

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Missed Approach Preview On/Off (Missed APPR) N/A N/A N/A

Intersection (INT) 25 40
Non-directional Beacon (NDB) 25 50
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
VOR 50 250
VOR Compass Rose On/Off N/A N/A N/A
Visual Reporting Point (VRP) 25 1000
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) 250 1000
VNAV Constraints 1000 1000
Table 5-2 Aviation Symbol Information

AFCS
AIRSPACE SYMBOLS
The following items are configured on the airspace menu:
Default Maximum
Airspace Symbols Symbol
ADDITIONAL

FEATURES
Class B Airspace Altitude Label (ceiling/floor) * *
Class C Airspace Altitude Label (ceiling/floor) * *

APPENDICES
Class D Airspace Altitude Label (ceiling) * *

Class B/Terminal Manoeuvring Area
50 150
and Airways surrounding TMA (CL B/TMA/AWY)
Class C Airspace/Control Area
50 100
INDEX
(CL C/CTA)
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
Default Maximum
Airspace Symbols Symbol
Class A Airspace and Class D Airspace
10 100
(CL A/D)
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Restricted and Prohibited Areas
50 100
(Restricted)
Military Operations Areas
50 250
(MOA (Military))
EIS
ADIZ, Alert, Danger, and Warning
(see below)
(Other)
ADIZ
AUDIO PANEL
50 250
& CNS
Alert
Danger/Warning
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
* Label placement and range is determined by the system for best display and minimal clutter
Table 5-3 Airspace Symbol Information
SYMBOL SETUP
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
All navigation maps can display land, aviation and airspace symbols. Symbol types (e.g. runway extensions,
railroads) can be removed individually. The range sets the maximum range at which items appear on the
display. For example, enabling “Runway Extension” displays a dashed line on the map extending from each
runway of an airport in the flight plan when the range is set at or below the value of the map settings option.
Setting up the ‘Land’, ‘Aviation’ or ‘Airspace’ group items:
AFCS
option.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired group.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the first field.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the desired option.
APPENDICES
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired setting (e.g. On/Off or maximum range).
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option and move the cursor to the next item.
8) Repeat steps 5-7 as necessary.
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
MAP DECLUTTER
SYSTEM
The declutter feature allows the pilot to progressively step through four levels of removing map information.
The declutter level is displayed in the Detail Softkey and next to the Declutter Menu Option.
The following table lists the items that are decluttered at each map detail level. The ‘X’ represents map items
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
decluttered for each level of detail.

Item Detail 3 Detail 2 Detail 1
Data Link Radar Precipitation X
Data Link Lightning X
Graphical METARs X
EIS
Airports X
Safe Taxi X
Runway Labels X
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TFRs X
Restricted X
MOA (Military) X
User Waypoints X X
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Latitude/Longitude Grid X X
NAVAIDs (does not declutter if used to define airway) X X
VRPs X X
Intersections (does not declutter if used to define airway) X X
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Class B Airspaces/TMA/AWY X X
Class C Airspaces/CTA X X
Class A/D Airspaces X X
Other Airspaces/ADIZ X X
Obstacles X X
AFCS
Cities X X X
Roads X X X
Railroads X X X
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
State/Province Boundaries X X X
Table 5-4 Navigation Map Items Decluttered for each Detail Level
Decluttering the MFD navigation map:

Press the Detail Softkey with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The current declutter level is shown.

APPENDICES
With each softkey press, another level of map information is removed.

Or:
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Declutter’. The current declutter level is shown.
INDEX
3) Press the ENT Key to apply the next declutter level and return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
Decluttering the PFD Map:
SYSTEM
2) Press the Detail Softkey. The current declutter level is shown. With each selection, another level of map
information is removed.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
AIRWAYS
This airways discussion is based upon the North American airway structure. The airway structure in places
other than North America vary by location, etc. and are not discussed in this book. Low Altitude Airways
(Victor Airways or T-Routes) start 1,200 feet above ground level (AGL) and extend up to 18,000 feet mean sea
EIS
level (MSL). Low Altitude Airways are designated with a “V” or a “T” before the airway number.
High Altitude Airways (Jet Routes or Q-Routes) start at 18,000 feet MSL and extend upward to 45,000 feet
MSL. High Altitude Airways are designated with a “J” or a “Q” before the airway number.
AUDIO PANEL
Low Altitude Airways are drawn in gray (the same shade used for roads). High Altitude Airways are drawn
& CNS
in green. When both types of airways are displayed, High Altitude Airways are drawn on top of Low Altitude
Airways.
When airways are selected for display on the map, the airway waypoints (VORs, NDBs and Intersections) are
MANAGEMENT
also displayed.
FLIGHT
High Altitude
AVOIDANCE
Airway
HAZARD
(Jet Route)
Low Altitude
Airway
(Victor Airway)
AFCS
Low Altitude
Airway
(T-Route)
High Altitude
ADDITIONAL
Airway
FEATURES
(Q-Route)
APPENDICES
Figure 5-16 Airways on MFD Navigation Page
Airways may be displayed on the map at the pilot’s discretion using either a combination of AWY Softkey
selections, or menu selections using the MENU Key from the Navigation Map Page. The Airway range can also
be programmed to only display Airways on the MFD when the map range is at or below a specific number.
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
The following items are configured on the airways menu:

SYSTEM
Default Maximum
Airways Symbols Symbol
Low Altitude Airways (V Routes and T Routes) 50 100

INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
High Altitude Airways (J Routes and Q Routes) 50 100
Table 5-5 Airways Symbol Information
Displaying/removing airways:
EIS

2) Press the AWY Softkey. Both High and Low Altitude Airways are displayed (AWY On).
AUDIO PANEL
3) Press the softkey again to display Low Altitude Airways only (‘AWY LO’).
& CNS
4) Press the softkey again to display High Altitude Airways only (‘AWY HI’).
5) Press the softkey again to remove High Altitude Airways. No airways are displayed (‘AWY Off’).
Or:
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
option.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airways’ Group, and press the ENT Key.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Low ALT Airways’ or the ‘High ALT Airways’ On/Off Field.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Off’ or ‘On’.
Selecting an airway range (Low ALT Airways or High ALT Airways):

AFCS
option.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airways’ Group, and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Low ALT Airways’ or ‘High ALT Airways’ range field.
5) To change the range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
APPENDICES
6) Select the desired range using the small FMS Knob.

INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL NAVIGATION MAP ITEMS
SYSTEM
Navigation maps can display some additional items. These items (e.g. Selected Altitude Intercept Arc, Track
Vector, Wind Vector, Fuel Range Ring, and SVT Field of View) can be displayed/removed individually.
INSTRUMENTS
See the Hazard Avoidance Section for information on displaying obstacles (Point Obstacle, Wire Obstacle) on
FLIGHT
the map.
TRACK VECTOR
The Navigation Map can display a track vector that is useful in minimizing track angle error. The track
vector is a solid cyan line segment extended to a predicted location. The track vector look-ahead time is
EIS
selectable (30 sec, 60 sec (default), 2 min, 5 min, 10 min, 20 min) and determines the length of the track
vector. The track vector shows up to 90 degrees of a turn for the 30 and 60 second time settings. It is always
a straight line for the 2 min, 5 min, 10 min and 20 min settings.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Track Vector
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Figure 5-17 Navigation Map -Track Vector
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
SELECTED ALTITUDE INTERCEPT ARC
The map can display the location along the current track where the aircraft will intercept the selected
altitude. The location will be shown as a cyan arc when the aircraft is actually climbing or descending.
AFCS
Selected
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Altitude
Intercept Arc
APPENDICES
Figure 5-18 Navigation Map - Range to Altitude Arc

INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
WIND VECTOR ON MFD

SYSTEM
The map displays a wind vector arrow in the upper right-hand portion of the MFD. Wind vector information
is displayed as a white arrow pointing in the direction in which the wind is moving for wind speeds greater
than or equal to 1 kt.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Wind Direction Wind Speed
Figure 5-19 Navigation Map - Wind Vector

EIS
NOTE: The wind vector is not displayed until the aircraft is moving. It is not displayed on the Waypoint
AUDIO PANEL
Information pages.
& CNS
FUEL RANGE RING

The map can display a fuel range ring which shows the remaining flight distance. A dashed green circle
MANAGEMENT
indicates the selected range to reserve fuel. A solid green circle indicates the total endurance range. If only
FLIGHT
reserve fuel remains, the range is indicated by a solid amber circle.

AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Time to Reserve Fuel Total Endurance Range

Range to Reserve Fuel
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-20 Navigation Map - Fuel Range Ring

APPENDICES
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
FIELD OF VIEW (SVT)
SYSTEM
The map can display the boundaries of the PFD Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) lateral field of view. The
field of view is shown as two dashed lines forming a V shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map. This
is only available if SVT is installed on the aircraft.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Lateral Field
of View
Boundaries
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-21 Navigation Map - Field of View
Setting up additional ‘Map’ Group items:
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Settings Menu is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ group.
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the first field.
HAZARD
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the desired option.
Or:
AFCS
If it is a data field, use the FMS Knob to select the range or time value.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option and move the cursor to the next item.
8) Repeat steps 5-7 as necessary.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
9) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map.
APPENDICES
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
5.3 WAYPOINTS
SYSTEM
Waypoints are predetermined geographical positions (internal database) or pilot-entered positions, and are
used for all phases of flight planning and navigation.
Communication and navigation frequencies can be tuned “automatically” from various Waypoint Information
INSTRUMENTS
(WPT) pages, Nearest (NRST) pages, and the ‘Nearest Airports’ Window (on PFD). This auto-tuning feature
FLIGHT
simplifies frequency entry over manual tuning. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS section for details on auto-tuning.
Waypoints can be selected by entering the ICAO identifier, entering the name of the facility, or by entering
the city name. See the System Overview section for detailed instructions on entering data in the system. As
a waypoint identifier, facility name, or location is entered, the system scrolls through the database, displaying
those waypoints matching the characters which have been entered to that point. A direct-to navigation leg to the
EIS
selected waypoint can be initiated by pressing the Direct-to Key on any of the waypoint pages.
Identifier Entry Field Waypoint Identifier Symbol

AUDIO PANEL
Facility Entry Field

& CNS
City Entry Field

MANAGEMENT
Entered Waypoint on Map

FLIGHT
Map Area Showing

Entered Waypoint
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Waypoint Location
Figure 5-22 Waypoint Information Window

If duplicate entries exist for the entered facility name or location, additional entries may be viewed by continuing
to turn the small FMS Knob during the selection process. If duplicate entries exist for an identifier, a ‘Duplicate
AFCS
Waypoints’ Window is displayed when the ENT Key is pressed.
Identifier with
ADDITIONAL
Duplicates
FEATURES
Duplicate
APPENDICES
Waypoints
INDEX
Duplicate Message
Figure 5-23 Waypoint Information Window - Duplicate Identifier
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
AIRPORTS
SYSTEM
AIRPORT INFORMATION
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: ‘North Up’ orientation on the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page cannot be changed; the pilot needs
FLIGHT
to be aware of proper orientation if the Navigation Map orientation is different from the ‘WPT - Airport
Information’ Page Map.
The ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page is the first page in WPT group and allows the pilot to view airport
information, load frequencies (COM, NAV, and lighting), review runways, and review instrument procedures
that may be involved in the flight plan. See the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information on
EIS
loading frequencies (auto-tuning). After engine startup, the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page defaults to the
airport where the aircraft is located. After a flight plan has been loaded, it defaults to the destination airport.
On a flight plan with multiple airports, it defaults to the airport which is the current active waypoint.
AUDIO PANEL
In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected airport and surrounding area, the ‘WPT - Airport
& CNS
Information’ Page displays airport information in three boxes labeled ‘Airport’, ‘Runways’, and ‘Frequencies’.
For airports with multiple runways, information for each runway is available. This information is viewed on
the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page by pressing the Info Softkey until ‘Info 1’ is displayed.
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Airport Information
- ID/Facility/City
- Usage Type/Region
Navigation Map - Lat/Long/Elev
Showing Selected - Fuel Available
AVOIDANCE
Airport
HAZARD
- Time Zone (UTC Offset)
Runway Information
- Designation
- Length/Width/Surface
- Lighting Available
COM/NAV Freq. Info.
AFCS
- Identification
- Frequency
Airport/Runway - Availability
Diagram - Additional Information
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-24 Airport Information Page
APPENDICES
The following descriptions and abbreviations are used on the Airport Information Page:
• Usage type: Public, Military, Private, or Heliport
• Runway surface type: Hard, Turf, Sealed, Gravel, Dirt, Soft, Unknown, or Water
• Runway lighting type: No Lights, Part Time, Full Time, Unknown, or PCL Freq (for pilot-controlled lighting)
INDEX
• COM Availability: TX (transmit only), RX (receive only), PT (part time), i (additional information available)
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
Airport Information Airport Directory

- ID/Facility/City Information
- Usage Type/Region
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-25 Airport Directory Page Example

MANAGEMENT
The airport directory information is viewed on the ‘WPT - Airport Directory’ Page by pressing the Info
FLIGHT
Softkey until ‘Info 2’ is displayed. The following are types of airport directory information shown (if available)
on the ‘WPT - Airport Directory’ Page:
Airport: Identifier, Type, Name, Control Tower: Full/Part-time Attendance: Annual, weekly, daily,
City, State, Map Hours, Days Open hours
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Facility Lighting and Beacon: Noise Abatement: Flying Pattern Altitudes: Aircraft Class/
Hours operating, Type and Location, Procedures Altitude
CTAF, beacon colors
Runways: Headings, Length, FBO: Name/Type, Frequencies, Aircraft Businesses/Clubs:
Width, Facility Obstructions, Surface, Services, Fees, Fuel, Credit Cards, Name, Type (sales, training,
AFCS
Condition, Clearance Slope Phone/Fax, Hours Internet, Courtesy servicing), Frequencies/Phone/Fax,

Car Credit Cards, Internet, Services
Frequencies: Type/Frequency Weather Contacts: Service Type Obstructions: General Airport
and Frequencies/Phone (AWOS/ Obstructions
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ASOS)
Flight Service Station (FSS): Approaches: Types General Information and/or
FSS Name, Phone Numbers Notes: Fees, Airport Notes, local
area information
APPENDICES
Special Operations at Airport: Restaurants: On the Field and Transportation: Taxi Services, Car
Helicopters, etc. Nearby Rentals, Type and Availability (public,
shuttle, limo, etc.)
Attractions: Hotels, Museums, NAVAIDS: Type, Identifier, Charts: VFR Sectional
Raceways, Golfing, etc. Frequency, Radial, Distance
INDEX
Elevation: Airfield Elev (ft) Mag Var: Airfield Mag Var Airport Manager: Phone
(degrees)
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
The ‘Frequencies’ Box uses the descriptions and abbreviations listed in the following table:
SYSTEM
Communication Frequencies Navigation Frequencies
Approach * Control Pre-Taxi ILS
INSTRUMENTS
Arrival * CTA * Radar LOC
FLIGHT
ASOS Departure * Ramp
ATIS FSS Terminal *
AWOS Gate TMA *
Center Ground Tower
Class B * Helicopter TRSA *
EIS
Class C * Multicom Unicom
Clearance Other
* May include Additional Information
AUDIO PANEL
Table 5-6 Airport Frequency Abbreviations
& CNS
A departure, arrival, or approach can be loaded using the softkeys on the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page.
See the Procedures section for details. METARs or TAFs applicable to the selected airport can be selected for
display (see the Hazard Avoidance section for details about weather).
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Selecting an airport for review by identifier, facility name, or location:
1) From the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page (Info 1 Softkey), press the FMS Knob.
2) Use the FMS Knobs and enter an identifier, facility name, or location within the ‘Airport’ Box.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Selecting a runway:
1) With the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page (Info 1 Softkey) displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
AFCS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the ‘Runways’ Box, on the runway designator.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the desired runway (if more than one) for the selected airport.
4) To remove the flashing cursor, press the FMS Knob.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Viewing a destination airport:
From the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page (Info 1 Softkey) press the MENU Key. Select ‘View Destination
Airport’. The Destination Airport is displayed.
APPENDICES
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
NEAREST AIRPORT
SYSTEM
The system provides a Nearest Softkey on the PFD, which gives the pilot quick access to nearest airport
information (very useful if an immediate landing is required). The ‘Nearest Airports’ Window displays a list
of up to 25 of the nearest airports. If there are more than three they are displayed in a scrollable list. If there
INSTRUMENTS
are no nearest airports available, “None Within 200nm” is displayed.

FLIGHT
Bearing/Distance to Airport
Airport Identifier/ Approach Available

Type
EIS
Length of Longest
COM Freq. Info. Runway
- Identification
- Frequency
Additional Airports
AUDIO PANEL
(within 200 nm)

& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Nearest Softkey
Figure 5-26 ‘Nearest Airports’ Window on PFD

AVOIDANCE
Pressing the ENT Key displays the PFD ‘Airport Information’ Window for the highlighted airport. Pressing
HAZARD
the ENT Key again returns to the ‘Nearest Airports’ Window with the cursor on the next airport in the list.
Continued presses of the ENT Key sequences through the information pages for all airports in the Nearest
Airports list.
AFCS
Airport Information
- ID/Type/City
- Facility
ADDITIONAL
Airport Information
FEATURES
- Usage/Time/Elev
- Region
Airport Information
- Lat/Long
APPENDICES
Figure 5-27 ‘Airport Information’ Window on PFD

INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
Viewing information for a nearest airport on the PFD:
SYSTEM
1) Press the Nearest Softkey to display the ‘Nearest Airports’ Window. Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Highlight the airport identifier with the FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to display the ‘Airport Information’
Window.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
3) To return to the ‘Nearest Airports’ Window press the ENT Key (with the cursor on ‘Back’) or press the CLR
Key. The cursor is now on the next airport in the nearest airports list. (Repeatedly pressing the ENT Key
moves through the airport list, alternating between the ‘Nearest Airports’ Window and the ‘Airport Information’
Window.)
4) Press the CLR Key or the Nearest Softkey to close the PFD ‘Nearest Airports’ Window.
EIS
The ‘NRST - Nearest Airports’ Page on the MFD is first in the group of NRST pages because of its potential
use in the event of an in-flight emergency. The selected airport is indicated by a white arrow, and a dashed
white line is drawn on the navigation map from the aircraft position to the nearest airport. The currently
AUDIO PANEL
selected airport remains in the list until it is unselected.
& CNS
In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected airport and surrounding area, the page displays
nearest airport information in five boxes labeled ‘Nearest Airports’, ‘Information’, ‘Runways’, ‘Frequencies’,
and ‘Approaches’. If there are more than can be shown in the given box, each list can be scrolled. If there are
MANAGEMENT
no items for display in a boxed area, text indicating that fact is displayed.
FLIGHT
See the Audio Panel and CNS Section for frequency selection and the Procedures section for approaches.
AVOIDANCE
Nearest Airports
HAZARD
- ID/Type
- Bearing/Distance
Nearest Airport Airport Information

- Facility/City/Elevation
AFCS
Runway Information
- Designation/Surface
- Length/Width
COM/NAV Freq. Info.
- Identification
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Navigation Map - Frequency
Showing Nearest
Airport
Approaches Available
LD APR Softkey (only

Window Selection
APPENDICES
available if an approach is
Softkeys highlighted)
Figure 5-28 Nearest Airport Page
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
Viewing information for a nearest airport on the MFD:

SYSTEM
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘NRST’ Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘NRST - Nearest Airports’ Page (it is the first page of the group, so it may
already be selected). If there are no Nearest Airports available, “None Within 200nm” is displayed.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
3) Press the APT Softkey; or press the FMS Knob; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Airport Window’ and
press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘Nearest Airports’ Box. The first airport in the nearest airports list
is highlighted.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired airport. (Pressing the ENT Key also moves to the next airport.)
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
EIS
Viewing runway information for a specific airport:

1) With the ‘NRST - Nearest Airports’ Page displayed, press the RNWY Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight
AUDIO PANEL
‘Select Runway Window’; and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘Runways’ Box.
& CNS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway.

MANAGEMENT
The ‘Nearest Airports’ Box on the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page defines the minimum runway length and
FLIGHT
surface type used when determining the 25 nearest airports to display on the MFD ‘NRST - Nearest Airports’
Page. A minimum runway length and/or surface type can be entered to prevent airports with small runways
or runways that are not appropriately surfaced from being displayed. Default settings are 3000 feet (or
meters) for runway length and “Hard Only” for runway surface type.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Selecting nearest airport surface and minimum runway length matching criteria:
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Runway Surface’ Field in the ‘Nearest Airport’ Box.
AFCS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway option (Any, Hard Only, Hard/ Soft).
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the ‘Minimum Length’ Field in the ‘Nearest Airport’ Box.
6) Use the FMS Knob to enter the minimum runway length (zero to 25,000 feet) and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NON-AIRPORT WAYPOINTS
WAYPOINT INFORMATION
APPENDICES
Non-Airport Waypoints are considered to be Intersections, VORs, NDBs, VRPs, and User Waypoints. For
each of these waypoints, their respective information pages will show a map of the currently selected waypoint,
the waypoint identifier, and location. Additionally, intersections will show the nearest VOR while both the
VOR and NDB waypoints will show their frequency and the nearest airport. User Waypoint information also
provides the waypoint type (radial/radial, radial/DME, or latitude/longitude), temporary status, comments,
INDEX
and a User Waypoint list.
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
The ‘VOR Information’ Page can be used to view information about VOR and ILS signals (since ILS signals
SYSTEM
can be received on a NAV receiver), or to quickly tune a VOR or ILS frequency. If a VOR station is combined
with a TACAN station it is listed as a VOR-TACAN on the ‘VOR Information’ Page and if it includes only DME,
it is displayed as VOR-DME. Also, the VOR class (Low Altitude, High Altitude, and Terminal) will be shown
in the VOR ‘Information’ Box.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
The system can create and store up to 1,000 user-defined waypoints. User waypoints can be created from
any map page (except PFD Inset Map, ‘Aux - Trip Planning’ Page, or Procedure Pages) by selecting a position
on the map using the Joystick, or from the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page by referencing a bearing/
distance from an existing waypoint, bearings from two existing waypoints, or a latitude and longitude. Once
a waypoint has been created, it can be renamed, deleted, or moved. Temporary user waypoints are erased
EIS
upon system power down.
NOTE: The VOR displayed on the ‘WPT - Intersection Information’ Page is the nearest VOR, not necessarily
the VOR used to define the intersection.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Intersection Identifier
MANAGEMENT
Intersection Info
FLIGHT
Navigation Map - Region
Showing Selected - Lat/Long
Intersection
Nearest VOR Info
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Radial to VOR
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Selected Waypoint: - Distance to VOR
Intersection
(as seen here)
NDB
VOR
VRP, or
User Waypoint
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
Figure 5-29 Non-Airport Waypoint Information Page (Intersection Example)
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
NDB Identifier/Type VOR Identifier/Type

- Facility Name - Facility Name
- Nearest City - Nearest City
NDB Information VOR Information
- Type - Class/Magnetic Variation
INSTRUMENTS
- Region - Region
- Lat/Long - Lat/Long
FLIGHT
NDB Frequency VOR Frequency

Nearest Airport Info Nearest Airport Info
- Identifier/Type (symbol) - Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Bearing/Distance to - Bearing/Distance to
Airport Airport
EIS
User Waypoint Info

VRP Identifier/Symbol - Identifier
- VRP Name - Temporary/Normal
- Waypoint Type
VRP Information
AUDIO PANEL
User Waypoint Comment

- Country
& CNS
- Bearing/Distance to VRP Reference Waypoint Info

from aircraft position - Identifier/Rad/Dist or
- Lat/Long - Identifiers/Radials or
- Region/Lat/Long
User Waypoint List
MANAGEMENT
- Identifier/ Comment
FLIGHT
Figure 5-30 Non-Airport Waypoint Information Pages (NDB, VOR, VRP, and User Waypoint)
Viewing Non-Airport Waypoints:

AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘WPT’ Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘WPT - (Intersection, NDB, VOR, VRP, or User WPT) Information’ Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to display the flashing cursor in the Intersection, NDB, VOR, VRP, or User Waypoint Box.
4) Use the FMS Knobs and enter an identifier, facility name, or location.
AFCS
5) Press the ENT Key, if needed.

NEAREST NON-AIRPORT WAYPOINTS

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Nearest pages can be used to quickly find waypoints close to the aircraft. The system will display
a scrollable list of up to 25 nearest waypoints with bearing and distance from the aircraft, a map of the
surrounding area, and additional information particular to the type of waypoint chosen. A white arrow before
the waypoint identifier/name indicates the currently selected waypoint shown on the map, with its associated
APPENDICES
information in the lower box or boxes:

INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
- The ‘NRST - Nearest Intersection’ Page will show three boxes labeled ‘Nearest INT’, ‘Information’, and a
SYSTEM
‘Reference VOR’.
- The ‘NRST - Nearest NDB’ Page will show three boxes labeled ‘Nearest NDB’, ‘Information’, and ‘Frequency’.
The NDB ‘Information’ Box will show a Compass Locator if the NDB is associated with either a Locator
INSTRUMENTS
Outer Marker (LOM) or Locator Middle Marker (LMM).
FLIGHT
- The ‘NRST - Nearest VOR’ Page will show three boxes labeled ‘Nearest VOR’, ‘Information’, and ‘Frequency’.
The NAV frequency from a selected VOR station can be loaded from the ‘NRST - Nearest VOR’ Page via the
FREQ Softkey. See the Audio & CNS Section for more information.
- The ‘NRST - Nearest VRP’ Page will show two boxes labeled ‘Nearest VRP’ and ‘Information’. Information
will contain the VRP Name, Country and latitude/longitude.
EIS
- The ‘NRST - Nearest User WPTS’ Page will show three boxes labeled ‘Nearest User’, ‘Information’, and
‘Reference Waypoints’. Information will include any Comments and the latitude/longitude. The ‘Reference
Waypoints’ Box will provide a reference NAVAID with a radial/DME that coincides with the User Waypoint.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The nearest waypoint list will only include waypoints within 200nm. If there are no waypoints in the list,
text indicating that there are no nearest waypoints will be displayed, and the information and frequency fields
(if applicable) will be dashed.
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Nearest Intersections
- White arrow indicates
Navigation Map the selected waypoint
Showing Nearest
shown.
Intersection
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Nearest Non-Airport
Waypoint:
Intersection -
NDB -
VOR -
VRP -
AFCS
User Waypoint - Intersection Info
- Lat/Long
Reference VOR Info
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Radial to VOR
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Distance to VOR
Figure 5-31 Nearest Intersection Page APPENDICES

INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
Nearest NDB Nearest VOR

- NDB Identifier/Symbol - VOR Identifier/Symbol
- Bearing/Distance to NDB - Bearing/Distance to VOR
from aircraft position from aircraft position
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
EIS
NDB Information VOR Information

- Facility Name/City - Facility Name/City
- Class/Magnetic Variation
AUDIO PANEL
- Type
- Lat/Long - Lat/Long
& CNS
NDB Frequency VOR Frequency

MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Nearest VRP Nearest User Wpt List

- VRP Identifier/Symbol - Identifier
- Bearing/Distance to VRP - Bearing/Distance from
from aircraft position aircraft position
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
User Waypoint Info

ADDITIONAL
VRP Information
FEATURES
- Comment
- VRP Name - Lat/Long
- Country
- Lat/Long
Reference Wpt Info
- Identifier
- Radial/Distance
APPENDICES
Figure 5-32 Nearest Non-Airport Waypoints (NDB, VOR, VRP, and User WPTS)
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
Viewing Nearest Non-Airport Waypoints:
SYSTEM
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘NRST’ Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘NRST - Nearest Intersections, NDB, VOR, VRP, or User WPTS’ Page.
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the FMS Knob to display the flashing cursor in the ‘Nearest INT, NDB, VOR, VRP, or User’ Box,
FLIGHT
Or:
If the ‘NRST - Nearest VOR’ Page is displayed, to display the flashing cursor:
Press the VOR Softkey.
Or:
EIS
a) Press the MENU Key
b) Highlight ‘Select VOR Window’, and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
4) If needed, press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob as needed to select an identifier.
& CNS
CREATING USER WAYPOINTS
MANAGEMENT
User waypoints can be created from the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page in the following ways:
FLIGHT
Creating user waypoints from the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page:
1) Press the New Softkey, or press the MENU Key and select ‘Create New User Waypoint’.
2) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
3) Press the ENT Key. The current aircraft position is the default location of the new waypoint.
4) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the ‘Reference Waypoints’ Window using the FMS Knobs.
AFCS
Or:
Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the ‘Reference Waypoints’ Window using the FMS Knobs.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the ‘Information’ Window using the FMS Knobs.
5) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
APPENDICES
6) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to temporary or normal by moving the cursor to
“Temporary” and pressing the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.
Or:
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM

3) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Are you sure you want to create the new User Waypoint AAAAAA?’ is
displayed.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
4) With ‘Yes’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.

Or:
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
Or:
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Creating user waypoints from map pages:

AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
1) Push the Joystick to activate the panning function and pan to the map location of the desired user waypoint.
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page is displayed with the captured position.
NOTE: If the pointer has highlighted a map database feature, one of three things happens upon pressing
AFCS
the ENT Key: 1) information about the selected feature is displayed instead of initiating a new waypoint,
2) a menu pops up allowing a choice between ‘Review Airspaces’ or ‘Create User Waypoint’, or 3) a new
waypoint is initiated with the default name being the selected map item.
ADDITIONAL

FEATURES
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected name.

APPENDICES
Or:
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
Or:
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
EIS
9) Press the Go Back Softkey to return to the map page.
EDITING USER WAYPOINTS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Once a user waypoint has been created, it may be edited, renamed, or deleted. A system generated
comment for a user waypoint incorporates the reference waypoint identifier, bearing, and distance. If a
system generated comment has been edited, a new comment can be generated.
The default type of user waypoint (normal or temporary) can be changed using the ‘WPT — User Waypoint
MANAGEMENT
Information’ ‘Page Menu’ Window. Temporary user waypoints are automatically deleted upon the next power
FLIGHT
cycle.
Editing a user waypoint comment or location:
1) With the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
2) Select a user waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint List’ Box, if required, and press the ENT Key.
3) Move the cursor to the desired field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to make any changes.
5) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
AFCS
Changing the user waypoint storage duration default setting:
ADDITIONAL
1) With the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
FEATURES
2) Move the cursor to select ‘Waypoint Setup’, and press the ENT Key.
3) Select ‘Normal’ or ‘Temporary’ as desired, and press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor and return to the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page.
APPENDICES
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
DELETING USER WAYPOINTS

SYSTEM
Deleting a single user waypoint:

1) With the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page displayed, highlight a User Waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint List’
INSTRUMENTS
Box, or enter a waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint’ Box.

FLIGHT
2) Press the Delete Softkey or press the CLR Key. ‘YES’ is highlighted in the confirmation window.
Or:
EIS
1) With the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page displayed, highlight a User Waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint List’
Box, or enter a waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint’ Box.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Select ‘Delete User Waypoint’.

4) Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection.
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
NOTE: The option to ‘Delete All User Waypoints’ is not available while the aircraft is in flight.
Deleting all user waypoints:

AVOIDANCE
1) With the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page displayed, highlight a User Waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint List’ Box.
HAZARD

3) Select ‘Delete All User Waypoints.’
4) Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
5.4 AIRSPACES
SYSTEM
The system can display the following types of airspaces: Class B, TMA, and Airways surrounding TMA, Class
C, CTA, Class A, Class D, Restricted (Prohibited), MOA (Military), and other airspace provided by the navigation
INSTRUMENTS
database. Some examples of typical airspaces are depicted below. See Table 5-3 for the maximum ranges for
FLIGHT
each type of airspace and the symbol used to define the airspace area. Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRs) are
discussed in the Hazard Avoidance Section.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Class B Airspace
Restricted Area
Class D Airspace
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
Class C Airspace Alert Area
(Other)
ADDITIONAL
MOA (Military) FEATURES
ADIZ
(Other)
APPENDICES
Warning Area
(Other)
INDEX
Figure 5-33 Airspaces
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
Displaying and removing airspace altitude labels:

SYSTEM
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airspace’ Group, if necessary, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Airspace ALT LBL’ Field.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ to display labels and ‘Off’ to remove labels.
NEAREST AIRSPACE
EIS
SETTING AIRSPACE ALERTS

AUDIO PANEL
The ‘Airspace Alerts’ Box (‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page) on the MFD allows the pilot to turn the controlled/
& CNS
special-use airspace message alerts on or off. This does not affect the alerts listed on the ‘NRST - Nearest
Airspaces ‘ Page or the airspace boundaries depicted on the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page. It simply turns
on/off the message provided in the ‘Alerts’ Window on the PFD when the aircraft is approaching or near an
airspace.
MANAGEMENT
Pressing the PFD Alerts/Message Softkey displays the ‘Alerts’ Window on the PFD. The following airspace
FLIGHT
alerts may be displayed in the ‘Alerts’ Window:

Message Comments
INSIDE ARSPC – Inside airspace. The aircraft is inside the airspace.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
ARSPC AHEAD – Airspace ahead – less than Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft penetrates the airspace
10 minutes. within 10 minutes.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near and ahead. Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near – less than 2 nm. Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position.
Table 5-7 PFD Airspace Alert Messages
AFCS
An altitude buffer is also provided which “expands” the vertical range above or below an airspace. For
example, if the buffer is set at 500 feet, and the aircraft is more than 500 feet above/below an airspace, an
alert message is not generated, but if the aircraft is less than 500 feet above/below an airspace and projected
ADDITIONAL
to enter it, the pilot is notified with an alert message. The default setting for the altitude buffer is 200 feet.
FEATURES
Turning an airspace alert on or off:

1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page (Setup 1 Softkey).
APPENDICES
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the ‘Airspace Alerts’ Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert On or counterclockwise to turn the alert Off.
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
Changing the altitude buffer distance setting:
SYSTEM
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page (Setup 1 Softkey).
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Altitude Buffer’ Field in the ‘Airspace Alerts’ Box.
FLIGHT
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter an altitude buffer value and press the ENT Key.
VIEWING NEAREST AIRSPACE INFORMATION
EIS
The ‘NRST - Nearest Airspaces’ Page can be used to quickly find airspaces close to the flight path. In
addition, a selected frequency associated with the airspace can be loaded from the ‘NRST - Nearest Airspaces’
Page. In addition to displaying a map of airspace boundaries and surrounding area, the ‘NRST - Nearest
Airspaces’ Page displays airspace information in four boxes labelled ‘Airspace Alerts’, ‘Airspace Agency’,
AUDIO PANEL
‘Vertical Limits’, and ‘Frequencies’.
& CNS
Airspace alerts and associated frequencies are shown in scrollable lists on the ‘NRST - Nearest Airspaces’
Page. The Alerts and FREQ Softkeys place the cursor in the respective list. The FREQ Softkey is enabled
only if one or more frequencies exist for a selected airspace.
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Nearest Airspace Airspace Alerts Info
Information - Name
- Proximity (Ahead, Inside,
Inside of Airspace Ahead < 2nm, Within 2nm)
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
- Time till Intercept (only if
Airspace within 2nm Ahead or Ahead < 2nm)
Airspace/Agency Info
- Airspace Type
- Controlling Agency
AFCS
Airspace Vertical Limits
- Ceiling
- Floor
Associated Frequencies
ADDITIONAL
- Type
FEATURES
- Availability/Info
- Frequency
Figure 5-34 Nearest Airspaces Page

APPENDICES
Selecting and viewing an airspace alert with its associated information:

1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘NRST - Nearest Airspaces’ Page.
2) Press the Alerts Softkey on the MFD; or press the FMS Knob; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Alerts
Window’, and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘Airspace Alerts’ Box.
INDEX
3) Select the desired airspace.

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
SMART AIRSPACE
SYSTEM
The Smart Airspace function de-emphasizes airspaces above or below the current aircraft altitude. The
function does not require the aircraft present position or flight path to enter the lateral boundaries of the
airspace. If the current aircraft altitude is within 1100 feet of the vertical boundaries of the airspace, the airspace
INSTRUMENTS
boundary is shown normally. If the current aircraft altitude is not within 1100 feet of the vertical boundaries of
FLIGHT
the airspace, the airspace boundary is shown subdued.

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Smart Airspace Off Smart Airspace On

Figure 5-35 Smart Airspace
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Turning smart airspace on or off:

1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key, and press the ENT Key. The ’Map Settings’ Window is displayed
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Airspace’ and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Smart Airspace’ Field.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn smart airspace On or counterclockwise to turn smart airspace Off.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
5.5 DIRECT-TO-NAVIGATION
SYSTEM
The Direct-to method of navigation, initiated by pressing the ¯ Key on either the MFD Controller or the
PFD, is quicker to use than a flight plan when the desire is to navigate to a single point such as a nearby airport.
INSTRUMENTS
Once a direct-to is activated, the system establishes a point-to-point course line from the present position to the
FLIGHT
selected direct-to destination. Course guidance is provided until the direct-to is replaced with a new direct-to or
flight plan, or cancelled.
A vertical navigation (VNV) direct-to creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the path) from
the current altitude to a selected altitude at the direct-to waypoint. Vertical navigation is based on barometric
altitudes, not on GPS altitude, and is used for cruise and descent phases of flight.
EIS
The Direct-to Window allows selection and activation of direct-to navigation. The ‘Direct To’ Window displays
selected direct-to waypoint data on the PFD and the MFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Direct-to Point Info
- Identifier/Symbol/Region
- Facility Name
MANAGEMENT
VNV Constraints - City
FLIGHT
- Altitude at Arrival
- Along Track Offset
Map of Selected Point
Desired Course
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Location of Destination
- Bearing/Distance
AFCS
Figure 5-36 ‘Direct To’ Window - MFD
ADDITIONAL
Direct-to Point Info FEATURES
- Identifier/Symbol/City
- Facility Name
APPENDICES
VNV Constraints
- Altitude at Arrival
- Along Track Offset Direct-to Point Info
- Bearing/Distance
- Desired Course
Activation Command
INDEX
Figure 5-37 ‘Direct To’ Window - PFD
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
Any waypoint can be entered as a direct-to destination from the ‘Direct To’ Window. Also, any waypoint
SYSTEM
contained in the active flight plan can be selected as a direct-to waypoint from the ‘Direct To’ Window, the ‘FPL -
Active Flight Plan’ Page, or the active ‘Flight Plan’ Window.
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: In some cases, Origin and Destination airports may not be displayed in the PFD “Flight Plan” or
FLIGHT
“Recent” submenu or the MFD ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page until the airport waypoint is loaded into
the flight plan.
Waypoint Submenu
- Flight Plan Waypoints
- Nearest Airports
- Recent Waypoints
EIS
- User Waypoints
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-38 Waypoint Submenu

MANAGEMENT
The ‘Direct To’ Window can be displayed from any page and allows selection and activation of direct-to
FLIGHT
navigation. If the direct-to is initiated from any page except the WPT pages, the default waypoint is the active
flight plan waypoint (if a flight plan is active) or a blank waypoint field. Direct-to requests on any WPT page
defaults to the displayed waypoint.
When navigating a direct-to, the system sets a direct great circle course to the selected destination. The course
AVOIDANCE
to a destination can also be manually selected using the ‘CRS’ or ‘Course’ Field on the ‘Direct To’ Window.
HAZARD
Entering a waypoint identifier, facility name, or city as a direct-to destination:

1) Press the ¯ Key. The ‘Direct To’ Window is displayed (with the active flight plan waypoint as the default
selection or a blank waypoint field if no flight plan is active).
AFCS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to begin entering a waypoint identifier (turning it counter-clockwise brings
up the waypoint selection submenu - press the CLR Key to remove it), or turn the large FMS Knob to select the
facility name, or city field and turn the small FMS Knob to begin entering a facility name or city. If duplicate
entries exist for the entered facility or city name, additional entries can be viewed by turning the small FMS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Knob during the selection process.

3) Press the ENT Key. ‘Activate?’ is highlighted.
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the direct-to.
APPENDICES
Selecting an active flight plan waypoint as a direct-to destination:

1) While navigating an active flight plan, press the ¯ Key. The ‘Direct To’ Window is displayed with the active
flight plan waypoint as the default selection.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of flight plan waypoints (turning the knob counter-
clockwise displays the waypoint submenu window).
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
3) Select the desired waypoint.
SYSTEM
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
INSTRUMENTS
Or:
FLIGHT
1) Select the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD, or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window on the PFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on PFD), and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the
desired waypoint.
3) Press the ¯ Key.
EIS
Selecting a Nearest, Recent or User waypoint as a direct-to destination:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the ¯ Key. The ‘Direct To’ Window is displayed (with the active flight plan destination as the default
selection or a blank destination if no flight plan is active).
2) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display the waypoint submenu window.
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Nearest, Recent or User waypoints.
FLIGHT
4) Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select the desired waypoint.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Selecting any waypoint as a direct-to destination:
1) Select the page or window containing the desired waypoint type and select the desired waypoint.
2) Press the ¯ Key to display the ‘Direct To’ Window with the selected waypoint as the direct-to destination.
AFCS
4) Press ENT again to activate the direct-to.
Selecting a nearby airport as a direct-to destination:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the Nearest Softkey on the PFD; or turn the FMS Knob to display the ‘NRST - Nearest Airports ‘Page on
the MFD and press the FMS Knob.
2) Use the FMS Knob to select the desired airport (the nearest one is already selected).
3) Press the ¯ Key.
APPENDICES

INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
Selecting a manual direct-to course:

SYSTEM
1) Press the ¯ Key. The ‘Direct To’ Window is displayed.

2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘CRS’ or ‘Course’ Field.
INSTRUMENTS
3) Use the small FMS Knob to enter the desired course.

FLIGHT

Reselecting the direct course from the current position:

1) Press the ¯ Key. The ‘Direct To’ Window is displayed.
EIS

AUDIO PANEL
Direct-to destinations may also be selected by using the pointer on the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page. If no
& CNS
airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint exists at the desired location, a temporary waypoint named ‘MAPWPT’ is
automatically created at the location of the map arrow.
Selecting a waypoint as a direct-to destination using the pointer:
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
1) From a navigation map page, push the Joystick to display the pointer.
2) Move the Joystick to place the pointer at the desired destination location.
3) If the pointer is placed on an existing airport, NAVAID, VRP, or user waypoint, the waypoint name is highlighted.
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the ¯ Key to display the ‘Direct To’ Window with the selected point entered as the direct-to destination.
HAZARD

Cancelling a Direct-to:
AFCS
1) Press the ¯ Key to display the ‘Direct To’ Window.

3) With ‘Cancel Direct-To NAV’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. If a flight plan is still active, the system resumes
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
navigating the flight plan along the closest leg.

APPENDICES
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
A direct-to with altitude constraints creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the path) from the
SYSTEM
aircraft’s current altitude to the altitude of the direct-to waypoint. The altitude is reached at the waypoint, or at the
specified distance along the flight path if an offset distance has been entered. All VNV altitudes prior to the direct-
to destination are removed from the active flight plan upon successful activation of a direct-to destination that is
part of the active flight plan. All VNV altitudes following the direct-to waypoint are retained. See the section on
INSTRUMENTS
Vertical Navigation for more information regarding the use and purpose of VNV altitudes and offset distances.
FLIGHT
Entering a VNV altitude and along-track offset for the waypoint:
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the altitude field (‘VNV’ or ‘ALT’).
EIS
3) Enter the desired altitude.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the altitude constraint; if the selected waypoint is an airport, an additional choice
is displayed. Turn the small FMS Knob to choose ‘MSL’ or ‘AGL’, and press the ENT Key to accept the altitude.
AUDIO PANEL
5) The cursor is now flashing in offset distance field.
& CNS
6) Enter the desired along-track distance before the waypoint.
7) Press the ENT Key. ‘Activate?’ is highlighted.
MANAGEMENT
8) Press the ENT Key to activate.
FLIGHT
Removing a VNV altitude constraint:
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
3) With ‘Clear Vertical Constraints’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
5.6 FLIGHT PLANNING

SYSTEM
Flight planning on the system consists of building a flight plan by entering waypoints one at a time, adding
waypoints along airways, and inserting departures, airways, arrivals, or approaches as needed. The system allows
INSTRUMENTS
flight planning information to be entered from either the MFD or PFD. The flight plan is displayed on maps using
FLIGHT
different line widths, colors, and types, based on the type of leg and the segment of the flight plan currently being
flown (departure, enroute, arrival, approach, or missed approach).
Flight Plan Leg Type Symbol
Active Course Leg*
EIS
Active Heading Leg*
Active Roll Steering Path*†

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Course Leg in the current flight segment
Course Leg not in the current flight segment

MANAGEMENT
Heading Leg
FLIGHT
Roll Steering Path †
Future Roll Steering Path ‡

AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Turn Anticipation Arc
* The active leg or path is the one currently being flown, and is shown in magenta.
† A roll steering path is a computed transition between two disconnected legs.
AFCS
‡ A roll steering path in the flight plan that is beyond the next leg appears as a future roll steering path. When a future roll
steering path becomes the next leg in the flight plan, it appears as a roll steering path.
Table 5-8 Flight Plan Leg Symbols
Up to 99 flight plans with up to 100 waypoints each can be created and stored in memory. Upon power up, the
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
previously active flight plan is retained and automatically repopulated if the aircraft position is at the origin airport
and the aircraft is on the ground. If, however, the aircraft is not within 5 nm of the airport origin, on the ground,
or if more than 12 hours have passed since the last active flight plan modification, the previously active flight plan
is not retained. One flight plan can be activated at a time and becomes the active flight plan. The active flight
APPENDICES
plan is overwritten when another flight plan is activated. When storing flight plans with an approach, departure,
or arrival, the system uses the waypoint information from the current database to define the waypoints. If the
database is changed or updated, the system automatically updates the information if the procedure has not been
modified. If an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is no longer available, the procedure is deleted from the
affected stored flight plan(s), and an alert is displayed (see Miscellaneous Messages in Appendix A) advising that
one or more stored flight plans need to be edited.
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
Whenever an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is loaded into the active flight plan, a set of approach,
SYSTEM
departure, or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan along with a header line describing the instrument
procedure the pilot selected. The original enroute portion of the flight plan remains active (unless an instrument
procedure is activated) when the procedure is loaded.
INSTRUMENTS
When the database is updated, the airways need to be reloaded also. Each airway segment is reloaded from
FLIGHT
the database given the entry waypoint, the airway identifier and the exit waypoint. This reloads the sequence of
waypoints between the entry and exit waypoints (the sequence may change when the database is updated). The
update of an airway can fail during this process. If that happens, the airway waypoints are changed to regular
(non-airway) flight plan waypoints, and an alert is displayed (see Miscellaneous Messages in Appendix A).
The following could cause the airway update to fail:
EIS
• Airway identifier, entry waypoint or exit waypoint not found in the new database.
• Airway entry/exit waypoint is not an acceptable waypoint for the airway – either the waypoint is no longer on
the airway, or there is a new directional restriction that prevents it being used.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Loading the new airway sequence would exceed the capacity of the flight plan.
There are three methods to create or modify a flight plan:
• ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD (create/modify the active flight plan)
MANAGEMENT
• ‘Flight Plan’ Window on the PFD (create/modify the active flight plan)
FLIGHT
• ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page on the MFD (create/modify a stored flight plan)
AVOIDANCE
Active FPL Waypoint List
HAZARD
- Comment
- Procedure Header
- Waypoint Identifier
- Airway Identifier
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Waypoint Altitude Constraint
AFCS
Active Flight
Plan Leg
ADDITIONAL
Turn Anticipation Vertical Navigation Profile
FEATURES
Arc - Active Vertical WPT Alt/ID
- Time to Top of Descent
Non-Active, - Vertical Speed Target
Flight Plan Leg - Flight Path Angle
- Vertical Speed Target
- Vertical Deviation
APPENDICES
Figure 5-39 Active Flight Plan Page

INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
Active Flight Plan Comment

INSTRUMENTS
Active Flight
FLIGHT
Plan Leg
Active Flight Plan
Waypoint List
- Waypoint ID
- Airway Identifier
EIS
Figure 5-40 Active Flight Plan Window on PFD

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Catalog Contents
- # Used
- # Empty
MANAGEMENT
Flight Plan List

- Comment
FLIGHT
Selected
Flight Plan
Map
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Selected FPL Info

- Departure Waypoint
- Destination Waypoint
- Total Flight Plan Distance
- Enroute Safe Altitude
AFCS
Figure 5-41 Flight Plan Catalog Page

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: The system supports AFCS lateral guidance for all leg types (using NAV or FMS APPR mode). The
system does not support course deviation for any heading leg types (VA, VD, VI, VM, or VR).
Auto-designation will determine the most likely airport of origin and auto-populate the Active Flight Plan.
Once determined, the airfield identifier automatically appears in the ‘Origin’ Field and the line immediately below
APPENDICES
‘Origin’ while keeping the runway (‘RW’) Field empty. The line below the Origin line serves as the first point in
the flight plan.
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
Auto-designation occurs between 15 and 60 seconds after display power-up under the following conditions:
SYSTEM
• Aircraft position is known
• Aircraft is on the ground
• Nearest airport is within 200NM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
• Flight plan is empty
If the pilot manually enters the origin, or any other leg of the flight plan before auto-designation occurs, nothing
gets inserted automatically. The automatic insertion logic only runs once, so the pilot can edit the origin if the
nearest airport is not the desired origin.
If the pilot enters a different airport into the first point of the flight plan, the Origin will change to this entry,
EIS
and the pilot will be prompted to enter the departure runway.
Both the Origin airport/runway and the first point of the flight plan will be the same unless a departure is
entered and a manual leg is inserted at the beginning of the loaded departure. Loading a departure locks in the
AUDIO PANEL
origin information.
& CNS
NOTE: In some cases, Origin and Destination airports may not be displayed in the PFD“Flight Plan” or
“Recent” submenu or the MFD ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page until the airport waypoint is loaded into
MANAGEMENT
the flight plan.
FLIGHT
FLIGHT PLAN VIEWS
Flight plan information can be viewed in different locations and formats. The ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page
AVOIDANCE
format can be modified in several ways; flight plan profile information can be viewed on the Navigation Map
HAZARD
VSD Inset; and the MFD Split Screen feature can provide different display configurations of the flight plan,
navigation map and charts.
ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN VIEWS

The ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page can be configured to show cumulative distance over the length of the
AFCS
flight plan or the distance for each leg of the flight plan; and it can be viewed in a narrow or wide view. In
the wide view, additional information is displayed: Fuel Remaining (FUEL REM), Estimated Time Enroute
(ETE), Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA), and Bearing to the waypoint (BRG).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Changing the flight plan view:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Press the View Softkey to display the Wide, Narrow, Leg-Leg, and CUM Softkeys.
APPENDICES
3) Press the CUM Softkey to view cumulative waypoint distance, or press the Leg-Leg Softkey to view leg-to-leg
waypoint distance.
4) Press the Wide Softkey to display the wide view, or press the Narrow Softkey to display the narrow view.
5) Press the Back Softkey to return to the top level active flight plan softkeys..
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
SPLIT SCREEN
SYSTEM
Charts may be viewed alongside the active flight plan in split screen mode. With an active flight plan loaded
into the system, the charts page will automatically display a chart coinciding with the active flight plan leg.
For more information on Charts, see the Additional Features Section.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Pressing the Charts Softkey from the ‘FPL-Active Flight Plan’ Page will remove the active flight plan map to
display a Charts Pane alongside the ‘Active Flight Plan’ Pane. The Active Page Title will change to ‘FPL - Chart
+ Active Flight Plan’. The active flight plan map can be re-displayed. However, displaying the map in split
screen on the ‘Active Flight Plan’ Pane limits the flight plan content which can be displayed. For example,
displaying the Flight Plan Map while in split screen narrow view removes the ‘Active VNV Profile’ Box. See
the following figures depicting the different split screen displays with the active flight plan.
EIS
Display Title shows ‘Chart + Active Flight Plan’

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Split Screen Narrow View Split Screen Wide View

Figure 5-42 Split Screen Mode Narrow and Wide View
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
Split Screen Narrow View with Flight Plan Map Split Screen Wide View with Flight Plan Map
& CNS
Figure 5-43 Split Screen Mode with Flight Plan Map
Viewing charts and ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page in split screen mode:
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
1) Press the FPL Key for the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Press the Charts Softkey. If necessary, press the CHRT Opt Softkey and press the Full SCN Softkey to disable
full screen mode. Split screen mode is now enabled showing two display panes. The Chart Pane is highlighted
by a cyan box indicating it is the active pane.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
3) To quickly view the chart corresponding to the active flight plan leg, press the Sync Softkey.
Displaying the flight plan map on the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page in split screen mode:
1) Press the FPL Key for the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) If necessary, press the CHRT Opt Softkey and press the Full SCN Softkey to disable full screen mode. Split
AFCS
screen mode is now enabled showing two display panes. The Chart Pane is highlighted by a cyan box indicating
it is the active pane.
3) Move the Joystick to select the ‘Active Flight Plan’ Pane as the active display pane.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the MENU Key. ‘Show Flight Plan Map’ is highlighted. Press the ENT Key.
5) To remove the Flight Plan Map, press the MENU Key and select ‘Hide Flight Plan Map’. Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
CREATING A FLIGHT PLAN

SYSTEM
The active flight plan is listed on the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD, and in the ‘Flight Plan’
Window on the PFD. It is the flight plan to which the system is currently providing guidance, and is shown on
the navigation maps. Stored flight plans are listed on the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page, and are available for
INSTRUMENTS
activation (becomes the active flight plan).

FLIGHT
The following procedure is intended to provide an overview of basic flight plan creation. It will create a flight
plan from the origin runway to the destination runway, and includes enroute waypoint selection. The following
procedure does not include airways or terminal procedures. For instructions on how to add airways to a flight
plan, see the Flight Plan Waypoint and Airway Modifications discussion later in this Flight Planning Section.
For information on departures, arrivals, approaches, and missed approaches see the Procedures Section.
EIS
Creating an active flight plan:

1) Press the FPL Key. Press the small FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on PFD).
AUDIO PANEL
2) If the system correctly auto-designated (populated) the Origin, proceed to Step 3.

& CNS
Or:
Select the origin airport and runway as follows:

MANAGEMENT
a) Highlight the field below the Origin header to enter the origin airport identifier using the FMS Knob.
FLIGHT
b) Use the FMS Knob or the waypoint submenu to enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the origin
waypoint.
c) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Set Runway’ Window is displayed with the ‘Runway’ Field highlighted.
AVOIDANCE
d) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the runway, and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
e) Press the ENT Key again to add the origin airport/runway to the flight plan.
3) Select the destination airport and runway by highlighting the field below the Destination header and completing
steps 2b - 2e.
4) Select the enroute waypoints.
AFCS
a) Highlight the location to insert the waypoint using the FMS Knob (If the enroute header is selected, the
new waypoint is placed following the header. If an enroute waypoint or the dashes are selected, the new
waypoint will be placed ahead of the selected item).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
b) Use the FMS Knob or the waypoint submenu to enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint.
The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
5) Repeat step number 4 to enter each additional enroute waypoint.
6) When all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to remove to deactivate the cursor.
APPENDICES
Creating a stored flight plan:

1) Press the FPL Key for the MFD.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
INDEX
3) Press the New Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Create New Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key to
display a blank flight plan for the first empty storage location.
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
4) Select the origin airport and runway.
SYSTEM
a) Highlight the field below the Origin header to enter the origin airport identifier using the FMS Knob.
b) Use the FMS Knob or the waypoint submenu to enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the origin
waypoint.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
c) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Set Runway’ Window is displayed with the ‘Runway’ Field highlighted.
d) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the runway.
e) Press the ENT Key to add the origin airport/runway to the flight plan.
5) Select the destination airport and runway by highlighting the field below the Destination header and completing
steps 4b - 4e.
EIS
6) Select the enroute waypoints.
a) Highlight the location to insert the waypoint using the FMS Knob (If the enroute header is selected, the
AUDIO PANEL
new waypoint is placed following the header. If an enroute waypoint or the dashes are selected, the new
& CNS
waypoint will be placed ahead of the selected item.)
b) Use the FMS Knob or the waypoint submenu to enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint.
c) Press the ENT Key. The stored flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
MANAGEMENT
7) Repeat step number 6 to enter each additional enroute waypoint.
FLIGHT
8) When all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to deactivate the cursor.
FLIGHT PLAN WAYPOINT AND AIRWAY MODIFICATIONS
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Active and stored flight plans can be edited at any time. Waypoints and airways can be added, modified, or
removed from any flight plan. Edits made to an active flight plan affect navigation as soon as they are entered.
Modifications to flight planned departures, arrivals, approaches, and missed approaches are discussed later in
the Procedures portion of Flight Management.
AFCS
FLIGHT PLAN WAYPOINTS
Waypoints can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan. Choose the flight plan, select
the desired point of insertion, enter the waypoint, and it is added in front of the selected waypoint. Flight
ADDITIONAL
plans are limited to 100 waypoints (including waypoints within airways and procedures). If the number of
FEATURES
waypoints in the flight plan exceeds 100, the message “Flight plan is full. Remove unnecessary waypoints.”
appears and the new waypoint(s) are not added to the flight plan.
Adding Waypoints
APPENDICES
NOTE: Manually adding waypoints to a flight plan after a MANSEQ leg creates a lateral gap in the flight
plan. Time, fuel, and distance values for legs beyond the gap do not include the distance across the gap.
NOTE: If the identifier entered in the ‘Waypoint Information’ Window has duplicates, a ‘Duplicate Waypoint’
INDEX
Window is displayed. Use the FMS Knob to select the correct waypoint.
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
NOTE: If the flight plan is successfully edited in the ‘Flight Plan’ Window from PFD while the MFD ‘FPL - Active
Flight Plan’ Page is in the process of being edited, the ‘Flight Plan Modified By Other User’ Window will appear
on the MFD. Press the ENT key to return to the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page with the accepted changes.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Origin Header
EIS
Enroute Header
AUDIO PANEL
Enroute Waypoints
& CNS
Destination Header
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Figure 5-44 Active Flight Plan Waypoints

AVOIDANCE
Adding a waypoint to the active flight plan:

HAZARD
1) Press the FPL Key.

2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD).
3) Select the point in the flight plan before which to add the new waypoint. The new waypoint is placed directly
AFCS
in front of the highlighted waypoint.

4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘Waypoint Information’ Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
‘Waypoint Information’ Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the ‘Waypoint Information’ Window with
a waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway waypoints).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of waypoints
and press the ENT Key. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
Creating and adding user waypoints to the active flight plan using the map pointer:
APPENDICES
1) Press the FPL Key

2) Press the FMS Knob for the MFD to activate the cursor.
3) Select the point in the flight plan to add the new waypoint.
4) Push the Joystick on the MFD to activate the panning function on the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page and pan
to the map location of the desired user waypoint.
INDEX
5) Press the LD WPT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Load Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The user waypoint
is created with a name of USRxxx (using the next available in sequence) and is added to the active flight plan.
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
Adding a waypoint to an existing stored flight plan:
SYSTEM
1) On the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Highlight the desired flight plan.
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the ENT Key, turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select “EDIT” and press the
FLIGHT
ENT Key. The ‘FPL - Stored Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
4) Select the point in the flight plan to add the new waypoint. The new waypoint is placed directly in front of the
highlighted waypoint.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘Waypoint Information’ Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
‘Waypoint Information’ Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the ‘Waypoint Information’ Window with
EIS
a waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway waypoints).
6) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of waypoints
and press the ENT Key. The new waypoint now exists in the flight plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Removing Waypoints
Individual waypoints can be removed from a flight plan. Some waypoints in the final approach segment
(such as the FAF or MAP) can not be removed individually. Attempting to remove a waypoint that is not
MANAGEMENT
allowed results in a window displaying ‘Invalid flight plan modification’.
FLIGHT
NOTE: If removal of a flight plan item (waypoint, procedure, etc.) results in deletion of the end waypoint of
the active leg, an off-route direct-to to the deleted waypoint is created and activated.
Removing an individual waypoint from the active flight plan:
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint to be removed.
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove XXXXX?’ window is displayed.
AFCS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
Removing an individual waypoint from a stored flight plan:
FEATURES
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
APPENDICES
4) Press the Edit Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The ‘FPL - Stored
Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint to be removed.
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove XXXXX?’ window is displayed.
INDEX
press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
Fly-Over Waypoint Designation

SYSTEM
Waypoints entered in the enroute segment of the flight plan may be treated as fly-by waypoints, unless
otherwise designated. A fly-by waypoint is a waypoint that marks the intersection of two straight paths,
with the transition from one path to another being made by the aircraft using a precisely calculated turn
INSTRUMENTS
that “flies by” but does not vertically cross the waypoint. A fly-over waypoint is a waypoint that must be
FLIGHT
crossed vertically by the aircraft.

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Enroute Segment
- TOP as Fly-By Waypoint
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Figure 5-45 TOP Fly-By Waypoint

AFCS
Fly-Over
Waypoint Symbol
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Enroute Segment
- TOP as Fly-Over
APPENDICES
Waypoint
Fly-Over
Waypoint Symbol
INDEX
Figure 5-46 TOP Fly-Over Waypoint
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
Designating a fly-over waypoint:
SYSTEM
1) For the active flight plan, press the FPL Key and press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD).
Or:
INSTRUMENTS
For a stored flight plan, highlight the desired flight plan on the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page’ and press the
FLIGHT
Edit Softkey.
2) Highlight the desired waypoint.
3) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Set Fly-Over Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Set <waypoint> to be a
fly-over waypoint?’ Window is displayed.
EIS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘Cancel’ and
press the ENT Key.
5) To change the waypoint back to a fly-by waypoint, highlight the desired waypoint. Press the MENU Key,
AUDIO PANEL
highlight ‘Set Fly-By Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Set <waypoint> to be a fly-by waypoint?’ Window
& CNS
is displayed. With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT PLAN AIRWAYS
MANAGEMENT
Within flight plans, airways can be added, removed and collapsed/expanded.
FLIGHT
Adding Airways
Airways can be added to any flight plan. An airway can only be added if there is an existing entry waypoint
in the flight plan that is part of the desired airway and is not part of an arrival or approach procedure. The
AVOIDANCE
system anticipates the desired airway based on the selected waypoint and the flight plan.
HAZARD
Airway Entry Waypoint
Selected Airway
AFCS
Airways Available
at TOP
ADDITIONAL
Preview of
FEATURES
Selected Airway
Airway Waypoint
Sequence
APPENDICES
Figure 5-47 Select Airway Page - Selecting Airway

INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
Airway Entry Waypoint

Selected Airway
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Exit Point

FLIGHT
Preview of
Selected Airway
Selected Airway Exit

Point
Airway Exit Points
EIS
Available
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-48 Select Airway Page - Selecting Exit Point

MANAGEMENT
Adding an airway to the active flight plan:

FLIGHT

2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD).
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor below the airway entry waypoint for the insertion point. If there
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
is no valid airway entry waypoint in the flight plan, one must be entered first.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob for the MFD one click clockwise and press the LD AIRWY Softkey, or press the MENU
Key for the and select “Load Airway”(PFD or MFD). The LD AIRWY Softkey or the “Load Airway” menu item is
available only when a valid airway entry waypoint has already been entered in the flight plan.
AFCS
5) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired airway from the list, and press the ENT Key. Low altitude airways
are shown first in the list, followed by “all” altitude airways, and then high altitude airways.
6) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired airway exit point from the list, and press the ENT Key. ‘Load?’ is highlighted.
ADDITIONAL
7) Press the ENT Key. The system returns to editing the flight plan with the new airway inserted.
FEATURES
Adding an airway to a stored flight plan:

1) On the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Highlight the desired flight plan.
APPENDICES
3) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the ENT Key, turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to highlight “EDIT” and press
the ENT Key. The ‘FPL - Stored Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor below the airway entry waypoint for the insertion point. If there
is no valid airway entry waypoint in the flight plan, one must be entered first.
INDEX
5) Turn the small FMS Knob one click clockwise and press the LD AIRWY Softkey (MFD only), or press the MENU
Key and select “Load Airway”. The LD AIRWY Softkey or the “Load Airway” menu item is available only when
a valid airway entry waypoint has already been entered in the flight plan.
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
6) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired airway from the list, and press the ENT Key. Low altitude airways
SYSTEM
are shown first in the list, followed by “all” altitude airways, and then high altitude airways.
7) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired airway exit point from the list, and press the ENT Key. ‘Load?’ is highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key. The system returns to editing the flight plan with the new airway inserted
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Some airways have directional restrictions on all or part of the route. Airway “A2” in Europe has a
directional restriction over the whole route such that it can be flown only one direction.
For example, airway “UR975” in North Africa has more complicated directional restrictions within the
list of airway waypoints. That is, each waypoint may have its own conditional route in relation to another
waypoint.
EIS
In the US, airways that are “one-way” for specified hours of operation are not uncommon. These airways
are always bidirectional in the system database.
The system only allows correct airway sequences to be inserted. If the pilot subsequently inverts the
AUDIO PANEL
flight plan, the system inverts the airway waypoint sequence and removes the airway header.
& CNS
Removing Airways
Removing an entire airway from the active flight plan:
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
the header of the airway to be removed.
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <airway name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
press the ENT Key.
Removing an entire airway from a stored flight plan:
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the header of the airway to be removed.
APPENDICES
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <airway name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
press the ENT Key.
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
Collapsing Airways
SYSTEM
The system allows airways on the active flight plan to be collapsed or expanded. When airways have
been collapsed, it is indicated on the airway heading.
When airways are collapsed, leg-to-leg computed values such as DIS or ETE shown for the exit waypoint
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
reflect the total of all the legs on the airway that have been hidden in the collapsed display. The DTK value
is inhibited because it is not usable in this context.
The active flight plan will always keep the following three waypoints visible: “From” waypoint, “To”
waypoint, and “Next” waypoint. To prevent one or more of these waypoints from being hidden in a
collapsed airway segment, the airway segment that contains either the “To” or the “Next” waypoint is
EIS
automatically expanded. When an airway is loaded, airways are automatically expanded to facilitate flight
plan review.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
V244.SLN Airway
Expanded View
All Airways
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Collapsed View
Figure 5-49 Expanded/Collapsed Airways
Collapsing/expanding the airways in the active flight plan:

AFCS
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Collapse Airways’ or ‘Expand Airways’, and press the ENT Key. The airways are
collapsed/expanded.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT PLAN OPERATIONS
SYSTEM
This section will discuss activating a flight plan leg and conducting enroute operations such as creating an
along track offset, parallel track, closest point from a reference point and user defined holding. For information
on departures, arrivals, and approaches refer to the Procedures portion later in the Flight Management Section.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
ACTIVATING A FLIGHT PLAN LEG
The flight plan leg which is currently being used for navigation guidance is referred to as the ‘active leg’.
The system automatically sequences from one active leg to the next as defined by the active flight plan.
Activating a flight plan leg:
EIS
the end waypoint for the desired leg.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the ACT Leg Softkey (MFD only); or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Activate Leg’, and press the ENT Key.
A confirmation window is displayed with ‘Activate’ highlighted.
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the flight plan leg. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘Cancel’ and press
the ENT Key.
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
5) Press the FMS Knob to deactivate the flashing cursor.
ALONG TRACK OFFSETS

A waypoint having an “along track offset” distance from an existing waypoint can be entered into a flight
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
plan. Along track offset waypoints lie along the path of the existing flight plan, and can be used to make the
system reach a specified altitude before or after reaching the specified flight plan waypoint. Offset distances
can be entered from 1 to 999 nm in increments of 1 nm. Entering a negative offset distance results in an along
track offset waypoint inserted before the selected waypoint, whereas entering a positive offset distance results
in an along track offset waypoint inserted after the selected waypoint. Multiple offset waypoints are allowed.
AFCS
A waypoint must be adjacent to its parent waypoint in the flight plan, so the system limits the along-track
distance to less than the length of the leg before or after the selected waypoint. If the selected waypoint is the
active waypoint, the distance is limited to less than the distance to go to the active waypoint. Assigning an
along track offset to a leg with indeterminate length is not permitted. An along track offset is not allowed at
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
or after the final approach fix of an approach.
An along track offset distance cannot be modified once entered. If the along track offset distance must be
changed, the existing along track offset waypoint must be removed and a new one created with the new offset
distance.
APPENDICES
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Along Track Offset

Along Track Waypoint and Distance
Offset Waypoint from Flight Plan Waypoint
and Distance
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-50 Along Track Offset
Entering an along track offset distance:

MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
the waypoint for the along track offset.
3) Press the ATK OFS Softkey (MFD only); or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Create ATK Offset Waypoint’, and
press the ENT Key.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
4) Enter a positive or negative offset distance in the range of +/- 1 to 999 nm (limited by leg distances).
5) Press the ENT Key to create the offset waypoint.
AFCS
PARALLEL TRACK
The Parallel Track feature allows creation of a parallel course offset of 1 to 50 nm left or right of the current
flight plan. When Parallel Track is activated, the course line drawn on the map pages shows the parallel
ADDITIONAL
course, and waypoint names have a lower case “p” placed after the identifier. Activation of parallel track will
FEATURES
apply from the current position along the flight plan until a leg that does not meet the criteria for parallel
track. Guidance will be computed to return to the original track at the beginning of that leg.
If the parallel track proposed by the offset direction and distance is not allowed by the system, the activation
prompt is displayed, but disabled.
APPENDICES
The following will inhibit activation of a parallel track:

• Initiating a direct-to, to the selected waypoint.
• If an approach leg is active, the status indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track with
the message ‘Parallel Track Unavailable Approach Leg Active’.
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
• If the offset direction and distance results in an unreasonable route geometry (e.g., there is a sharp turn of
SYSTEM
more than 120 degrees), the status indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track because
of invalid geometry (‘Parallel Track Unavailable Invalid Route Geometry’).
• If the active leg is not a track between two fixes (TF) or a course to a fix (DF) leg, the status indicates that
INSTRUMENTS
the system is unable to activate the parallel track because parallel track is not available for the active leg type
FLIGHT
(‘Parallel Track Unavailable Not Allowed for Active Leg’).
If there are no legs remaining in the flight plan after the given leg, or OBS mode is active. The following will
cancel the parallel track:
• Initiating a direct-to, to a waypoint.
EIS
• Initiating a hold at the present position.
• If a course change occurs greater than 120° or the parallel tracks overlap as a result of the course change.
• No legs are remaining in the flight plan after the given leg, or OBS mode is active. Initiating a hold at
AUDIO PANEL
a waypoint will result in the aircraft flying the parallel track until a turn is required to fly to the hold
& CNS
waypoint. If the hold is removed prior to reaching the hold waypoint, the parallel track will be resumed.
Once the holding pattern is active, the parallel track will not be resumed upon exiting the hold.
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: Vertical navigation is unavailable while the Parallel Track feature is active.
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Parallel Track
Waypoints
- TIFTO-p
- TOP-p
- ...
AFCS
Original Track - LAA-p
Parallel Track
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-51 Parallel Track Active

APPENDICES
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
Activating parallel track:

SYSTEM
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Parallel Track’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Parallel Track’ Window is displayed
with the ‘Direction’ Field highlighted.
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘LEFT’ or ‘RIGHT’ and press the ENT Key. The ‘Distance’ Field is highlighted.
FLIGHT
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter a distance from 1-99 nm and press the ENT Key. ‘Activate Parallel Track’ is
highlighted.
5) Press the ENT Key to activate parallel track. Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to cancel the parallel track
activation.
EIS
Cancelling parallel track:

AUDIO PANEL
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Parallel Track’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Parallel Track’ Window is displayed
& CNS
with ‘Cancel Parallel Track?’ highlighted.

CLOSEST POINT OF FPL

MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
‘Closest Point of FPL’ calculates the bearing and closest distance at which a flight plan passes a reference waypoint,
and creates a new user waypoint along the flight plan at the location closest to a chosen reference waypoint.
Determining the closest point along the active flight plan to a selected waypoint:
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the Active ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Closest Point Of FPL’’, and press the ENT Key. A window appears with the
reference waypoint field highlighted.
3) Enter the identifier of the reference waypoint and press the ENT Key. The system displays the bearing (BRG) and
distance (DIS) to the closest point along the flight plan to the selected reference waypoint and creates a user waypoint
AFCS
at this location. The name for the new user waypoint is derived from the identifier of the reference waypoint.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
USER-DEFINED HOLDING PATTERNS
SYSTEM
A holding pattern can be defined at any active flight plan waypoint, at the aircraft present position, or at a
direct-to waypoint.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Hold At
Waypoint
Menu
EIS
Selection
Waypoint
Selected
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Location of Hold
MANAGEMENT
Hold Course Course Direction
FLIGHT
Inbound or Outbound
Leg Length Mode Button Leg Length

(Time or Distance) (Time in nm or Distance in minutes)
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Turn Direction
(Right or Left)
AFCS
Map of Hold Location
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Expect Further Clearance Time
Load Hold in Active Flight Plan

INDEX
Figure 5-52 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at an Active Flight Plan Waypoint
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Waypoint
Selected
EIS
Hold Course
Location of Hold
AUDIO PANEL
Course Direction
& CNS
(Inbound or Outbound)
Leg Length
(Time in nm or
MANAGEMENT
Distance in minutes)
FLIGHT
Turn Direction
(Right or Left)
Leg Length Mode

AVOIDANCE
Button
HAZARD
(Time or Distance)
Map of Hold Location

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Expect Further
Clearance Time
Load Hold and

APPENDICES
Activate Direct To
Hold At Direct To Waypoint Selection

Figure 5-53 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at a Direct To Waypoint
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
Creating a user-defined hold at an active flight plan waypoint:
SYSTEM
the waypoint for the hold.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
3) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Hold At Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Hold at’ Window appears with
the course field highlighted.
4) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the course, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Inbound’ or ‘Outbound’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.
EIS
6) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Time’ or ‘Distance’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
8) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Right’ or ‘Left’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
9) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC Time), and press the ENT Key.
& CNS
10) Press the ENT Key while ‘Load?’ is highlighted to insert the hold into the flight plan.
Creating a user-defined hold at the aircraft present position:
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Hold At Present Position’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Hold at’ Window appears
with the course field highlighted.
3) If desired, use the FMS Knobs to edit the course, and press the ENT Key.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
9) Press the ENT Key while ‘Activate?’ is highlighted to create an Offroute Direct-to hold waypoint at the aircraft
present position and activate the hold.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
Creating a user-defined hold at a direct-to waypoint:

SYSTEM
1) Press a Direct-to Key and set up the direct-to waypoint as desired, but select ‘Hold?’ instead of ‘Activate?’
when finished.
2) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the course, and press the ENT Key.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
EIS
8) Press the ENT Key while ‘Activate?’ is highlighted to activate the direct-to with the user-defined hold defined
at the direct-to waypoint. (If the direct-to waypoint is part of the active flight plan, ‘HOLD’ is inserted into the
AUDIO PANEL
active flight plan. If the direct-to waypoint is not part of the active flight plan, an off-route direct-to hold is
& CNS
created.)
Exiting a user-defined hold inserted into the active flight plan:
MANAGEMENT
Press the SUSP Softkey. The system will provide guidance to follow the holding pattern to the inbound course

FLIGHT
and resume automatic waypoint sequencing.

Removing a user-defined hold inserted into the active flight plan:
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
‘HOLD’ in the flight plan.

3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove Holding Pattern?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) Select ‘OK’ and press the ENT Key. The holding pattern is removed from the active flight plan. Select ‘CANCEL’
and press the ENT Key to cancel the removal of the holding pattern.
AFCS
Removing a user-defined hold at an off-route direct-to:

1) Press a Direct To Key to display the ‘Direct To’ Window.
ADDITIONAL
2) Press the MENU Key to display the ‘Page Menu’ Window with the cursor on the ‘Cancel Direct-To NAV’ selection.
FEATURES
3) Press the ENT Key. The holding pattern is removed.

APPENDICES
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
MANAGING FLIGHT PLANS
SYSTEM
The pilot can manage flight plans by importing/exporting via SD Card or mobile device, and by storing,
copying, inverting, and deleting. Also, the comment field (name) of each flight plan can be changed to
something that is useful for identification and sorting.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
IMPORTING AND EXPORTING FLIGHT PLANS
Flight plans can be transferred to or from a mobile device via the Bluetooth Transceiver. Transfer of a flight
plan to a mobile device is controlled by the mobile device. When a mobile device is attempting to transfer a
flight plan to the system, the pending flight plan may be ignored, previewed, stored, or activated by the pilot.
EIS
Pending Connext Action
Annunciator
Pending Flight Plan
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Store? or Activate?
Selection
Delete Softkey
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Store Softkey Activate Softkey
Figure 5-54 Preview Flight Plan Page
Pending Connext Action

Annunciator
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pending Flight Plan
APPENDICES
Pending Flight Plan

Pop-Up Alert
Ignore Softkey Preview Softkey

INDEX
Figure 5-55 Pending Flight Plan Transfer
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
Ignoring a pending flight plan transferred from a wireless connection:

SYSTEM
1) When a flight plan transfer has been initiated from a mobile device, a ‘PENDING FLIGHT PLAN’ pop-up alert appears
in the lower right corner of the MFD, and an Connext annunciation appears to the right of the MFD page title.
2) Press the CLR Key to remove the pop-up alert and ignore the pending flight plan. The pending flight plan will
INSTRUMENTS
still be available on the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.

FLIGHT
Or:
Press the Ignore Softkey to remove the pop-up alert and ignore the pending flight plan. The pending flight plan
will still be available on the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
Previewing a pending flight plan transferred from a wireless connection:
EIS
1) When a flight plan transfer has been initiated from a mobile device, a ‘PENDING FLIGHT PLAN’ pop-up alert appears
in the lower right corner of the MFD, and an Connext annunciation appears to the right of the MFD page title.
AUDIO PANEL
2) Press the ENT Key to display the ‘FPL - Preview Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
& CNS
Or:
Press the Preview Softkey to display the ‘FPL - Preview Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
MANAGEMENT
Or:
FLIGHT
a) Press the MENU Key,

b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Preview Flight Plan’.
c) Press the ENT Key to display the ‘FPL - Preview Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Storing a pending flight plan transferred from a wireless connection:

2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and
AFCS
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the pending flight plan.

6) Press the Store Softkey to store the flight plan. The pending flight plan is stored and the pending annunciation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
is removed.
Or:
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Store?’.
APPENDICES
c) Press the ENT Key to store the flight plan. The pending flight plan is stored and the pending annunciation
is removed.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key,
INDEX
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Store Flight Plan’.

c) Press the ENT Key to store the flight plan. The pending flight plan is stored and the pending annunciation
is removed.
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
Activating a pending flight plan transferred from a wireless connection:
SYSTEM
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the pending flight plan.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
4) Press the Activate Softkey. The ‘Activate Flight Plan?’ window is displayed.
Or:
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Activate?’.
EIS
c) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate Flight Plan?’ window is displayed.
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Activate Flight Plan’.
c) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate Flight Plan?’ window is displayed.
5) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to activate the pending flight plan. The pending flight plan becomes
MANAGEMENT
the active flight plan and is removed from the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page. To cancel the request, press the
FLIGHT
CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Deleting a pending flight plan:
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired pending flight plan.
5) Press the Delete Softkey. The ‘Delete Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
AFCS
Or:
Press the CLR Key. The ‘Delete Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
Or:
FEATURES
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’.
c) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Delete Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
APPENDICES
6) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the pending flight plan. The pending flight plan is removed
from the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
Deleting all pending flight plans:

SYSTEM

INSTRUMENTS

FLIGHT
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Delete All Pending’.

5) Press the ENT Key. A ‘Delete all pending flight plans?’ confirmation window is displayed.
6) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete all pending flight plans. To cancel the request, press the
CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
EIS
Alternatively, flight plans may be imported from an SD Card or exported to an SD Card from the ‘FPL -
Stored Flight Plan’ Page.
Under certain conditions, some messages may appear when a flight plan is imported or exported.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Flight Plan Import/Export Results Description

‘Flight plan successfully imported.’ A flight plan file stored on the SD card was successfully imported as a stored flight
plan.
MANAGEMENT
‘File contained user waypoints only. User The file stored on the SD card did not contain a flight plan, only user waypoints.
waypoints imported successfully. No These waypoints have been saved to the system user waypoints. No flight plans
FLIGHT
stored flight plan data was modified.’ stored in the system have been modified.
‘No flight plan files found to import.’ The SD card contains no flight plan data.
‘Flight plan import failed.’ Flight plan data was not successfully imported from the SD card.
AVOIDANCE
‘Flight plan partially imported.’ Some flight plan waypoints were successfully imported from the SD card, however
HAZARD
others had errors and were not imported. A partial stored flight plan now exists in
the system.
‘File contained user waypoints only.’ The file stored on the SD card did not contain a flight plan, only user waypoints.
One or more of these waypoints did not import successfully.
‘Too many points. Flight plan truncated.’ The flight plan on the SD card contains more waypoints than the system can
AFCS
support. The flight plan was imported with as many waypoints as possible.
‘Some waypoints not loaded. Waypoints The flight plan on the SD card contains one or more waypoints that the system
locked.’ cannot find in the navigation database. The flight plan has been imported, but
ADDITIONAL
must be edited within the system before it can be activated for use.
FEATURES
‘User waypoint database full. Not all The flight plan file on the SD card contains user waypoints. The quantity of stored
loaded.’ user waypoints has exceeded system capacity, therefore not all the user waypoints
on the SD card have been imported. Any flight plan user waypoints that were not
imported are locked in the flight plan. The flight plan must be edited within the
APPENDICES
system before it can be activated for use.

‘One or more user waypoints renamed.’ One or more imported user waypoints were renamed when imported due to
naming conflicts with waypoints already existing in the system.
‘Flight plan successfully exported.’ The stored flight plan was successfully exported to the SD card.
‘Flight plan export failed.’ The stored flight plan was not successfully exported to the SD card. The SD card
INDEX
may not have sufficient available memory or the card may have been removed
prematurely.
Table 5-9 Flight Plan Import/Export Messages
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
NOTE: If the imported flight plan contains a waypoint with a name that duplicates the name of a waypoint
already stored on the system, the system compares the coordinates of the imported waypoint with those of
the existing waypoint. If the coordinates are different, the imported waypoint is automatically renamed by
adding characters to the end of the name.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
NOTE: The exported flight plan will not contain any procedures or airways.
Importing a Flight Plan from an SD Card:

1) Insert the SD card containing the flight plan in the top card slot on the MFD.
EIS
2) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight an empty or existing flight plan.
6) Press the Import Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Import Flight Plan”, and press the ENT Key.
If an empty slot is selected, a list of the available flight plans on the SD card will be displayed.

MANAGEMENT
Or:
FLIGHT
If an existing flight plan is selected, an “Overwrite existing flight plan? OK or CANCEL” prompt is displayed.

Press the ENT Key to choose to overwrite the selected flight plan and see the list of available flight plans on the
SD card. If overwriting the existing flight plan is not desired, select “CANCEL” using the FMS Knob, press the
AVOIDANCE
ENT Key, select another flight plan slot, and press the Import Softkey again.
HAZARD
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan for importing.
8) Press the ENT Key to initiate the import.
9) Press the ENT Key again to confirm the import.
AFCS
Exporting a flight plan to an SD Card:
1) Insert the SD card into the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be exported.
APPENDICES
6) Press the Export Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Export Flight Plan”.
7) If desired, change the name for the exported file by turning the large FMS Knob to the left to highlight the
name, then use the small and large FMS knobs to enter the new name, and press the ENT Key.
8) Press the ENT Key to initiate the export.
9) Press the ENT Key to confirm the export.
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
INVERTING THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN

SYSTEM
A flight plan may be inverted (reversed) for navigation back to the original departure point. Inverting and
activating stored flight plans is discussed within the Stored Flight Plan Functions portion of this section.
INSTRUMENTS
Inverting the active flight plan:

FLIGHT
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. An ‘Invert Active Flight Plan?’
confirmation window is displayed.
3) Highlight ‘OK’.
EIS
4) Press the ENT Key to invert and activate the active flight plan. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or highlight
‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
DELETING THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN

& CNS
The active flight plan is overwritten when another flight plan is activated. Additionally, the system allows
the pilot to delete the active flight plan, which suspends navigation by the system.
Deleting the active flight plan:
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the Active ‘Flight Plan’ Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Delete all waypoints in flight
plan?’ window is displayed.
AVOIDANCE
3) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the active flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR
HAZARD
Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
STORED FLIGHT PLAN FUNCTIONS

The system can store up to 99 flight plans, numbered 1 through 99. Details about each stored flight plan
can be viewed on the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page and on the ‘FPL - Stored Flight Plan’ Page.
AFCS
A stored flight plan may be viewed or edited. The system also allows copying a flight plan into a new
flight plan memory slot, allowing editing, etc., without affecting the original flight plan. This can be used to
duplicate an existing stored flight plan for use in creating a modified version of the original stored flight plan.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Activating a stored flight plan erases the active flight plan and replaces it with the flight plan being activated.
Inverting a stored flight plan reverses the waypoint order, erases the active flight plan, and replaces it with the
flight plan being activated (the stored flight plan is not changed).
Lastly, individual or all stored flight plans can be deleted from the system memory.
APPENDICES
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
Stored Flight Plan Selected
- Memory Slot
- Comment
- Procedure Identifier
INSTRUMENTS
- Waypoint Identifier
FLIGHT
- Airway Identifier
- Waypoint Altitude Constraint
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-56 Stored Flight Plan Page
Viewing information about a stored flight plan:
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
4) Information is displayed in the ‘Flight Plan Info’ Box showing departure, destination, total distance, and enroute
safe altitude information for the selected Flight Plan.
5) Press the Edit Softkey to open the ‘FPL - Stored Flight Plan’ Page and view the waypoints in the flight plan.
6) Press the FMS Knob to exit the ‘FPL - Stored Flight Plan’ Page.
AFCS
Storing an active flight plan from the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window:
2) Highlight ‘Store Flight Plan’.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. The flight plan is stored in the next available position in the flight
plan list on the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page. APPENDICES
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
Activating a stored flight plan on the MFD:

SYSTEM
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the Activate Softkey; or press the ENT Key twice; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Activate Flight Plan’,
FLIGHT
and press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate stored flight plan?’ window is displayed.
press the ENT Key.
Inverting and activating a stored flight plan on the MFD:
EIS
3) Press the Invert Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert & Activate FPL?’, and press the ENT Key. The
AUDIO PANEL
‘Invert and activate stored flight plan?’ window is displayed.

& CNS
press the ENT Key.
MANAGEMENT
Copying a stored flight plan to another flight plan memory slot, on the MFD:
FLIGHT
3) Press the Copy Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Copy Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Copy
AVOIDANCE
to Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.

HAZARD
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to copy the flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Deleting a stored flight plan:
AFCS
3) Press the Delete Softkey; press the CLR Key; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’, and press
ADDITIONAL
the ENT Key. The ‘Delete Flight Plan #?’ window is displayed.
FEATURES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
APPENDICES
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
NOTE: The option to delete all stored flight plans is not available while the aircraft is in flight.
Deleting all stored flight plans:
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
3) Highlight ‘Delete All’ and press the ENT Key. A ‘Delete all flight plans?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete all flight plans. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
EIS
CHANGING A FLIGHT PLAN COMMENT (NAME)
Changing the active flight plan comment:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
the comment field.
MANAGEMENT
3) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the comment.
FLIGHT
Changing a stored flight plan comment:
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the comment field.
6) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the comment.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
5.7 VERTICAL NAVIGATION

SYSTEM
NOTE: The system supports vertical path guidance and altitude constraints for the following leg types: AF,
INSTRUMENTS
CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FC, FD, PI, RF, and TF. Altitude constraints are not retained in stored flight plans.
FLIGHT
The system Vertical Navigation (VNV) feature provides vertical profile guidance during the enroute and terminal
phases of flight. Guidance based on specified altitudes at waypoints in the active flight plan or to a direct-to
waypoint is provided. It includes vertical path guidance to a descending path, which is provided as a linear
deviation from the desired path. The desired path is defined by a line joining two waypoints with specified
altitudes or as a vertical angle from a specified waypoint/altitude. The vertical waypoints are integrated into the
EIS
active flight plan. Both manual and autopilot-coupled guidance are supported.
Vertical navigation is available for flight control operations when valid VNV data is entered in flight plan, and
the ENBL VNV Softkey is selected (softkey label changes to ‘Cncl VNV’ once enabled) on the ‘FPL - Active Flight
AUDIO PANEL
Plan’ Page. Refer to the AFCS Section for more information on activating the flight director and using the vertical
& CNS
navigation mode.
The system allows a vertical navigation direct-to for any waypoint in the active flight plan with an altitude
constraint “designated” for vertical guidance. Selecting the VNV Direct-to Softkey on the Active Flight Plan Page
MANAGEMENT
allows the flight plan to be flown, while vertical guidance based on the altitude constraint at the VNV direct-to
FLIGHT
waypoint is provided. The altitude change begins immediately and is spread along the flight plan from current
position to the vertical direct-to waypoint, not just along the leg for the direct-to waypoint. A direct-to with
altitude constraint activated by pressing the Direct-to Key also provides vertical guidance, but would bypass
flight plan waypoints between the current position in the flight plan and the direct-to waypoint. A top of descent
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
(TOD) point is computed based on the default flight path angle; descent begins once the TOD is reached
Canceling vertical navigation results in vertical deviation (V DEV), vertical speed required (VS REQ), and
time to top of descent/bottom of descent (TOD/BOD) going invalid. The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI) and
Required Vertical Speed Indicator (RVSI) on the PFD are removed, and the V DEV, VS REQ, and TOD items
displayed in the Active VNV Profile box are dashed. VNV remains disabled until manually enabled. Vertical
AFCS
guidance in reversionary mode can only be enabled for a direct-to waypoint.
NOTE: VNV is inhibited while automatic waypoint sequencing has been suspended.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
Active Vertical Navigation Profile Active Vertical Navigation Profile
SYSTEM
Disabled (fields dashed) Enabled (valid data)
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ENBL VNV Softkey Cncl VNV Softkey
Figure 5-57 Enabling/Disabling Vertical Navigation
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Enabling and Disabling VNV guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the ‘FPL- Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Press the ENBL VNV Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Enable VNV’, and press the ENT Key. Vertical
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
navigation is enabled, and vertical guidance begins with the waypoint shown in the ‘Active VNV Profile’ Box
(defaults first waypoint in the active flight plan with an altitude enabled for vertical navigation (e.g., FALUR)).
3) To Disable VNV guidance, press the Cncl VNV Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Cancel VNV’, and
press the ENT Key. Vertical navigation is disabled.
Activating a vertical navigation direct-to:
AFCS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: The selected waypoint must have a designated altitude constraint (cyan number) to be used. If not,
the first waypoint in the flight plan with a designated altitude constraint is selected.
3) Press the VNV Direct-To Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘VNV Direct-To’, and press the ENT Key.
An ‘Activate vertical Direct-to to: NNNNNFT at XXXXXX?’ confirmation window is displayed.
APPENDICES
4) Press the ENT Key. Vertical guidance begins to the altitude constraint for the selected waypoint.
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
The vertical navigation profile can be modified by directly entering a vertical speed target (VS TGT) and/or flight
SYSTEM
path angle (FPA) in the ‘Active VNV Profile’ Box.

Modifying the VS TGT and FPA:
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
2) Press the VNV Prof Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select VNV Profile Window’, and press the ENT
Key. The cursor is now located in the ‘Active VNV Profile’ Box.
3) Turn the FMS Knobs as needed to edit the values.
EIS
ALTITUDE CONSTRAINTS
The system can use altitude constraints associated with lateral waypoints to give guidance for vertical
AUDIO PANEL
navigation. These altitudes are, depending on the specific instance, manually entered or retrieved from the
& CNS
published altitudes in the navigation database.

Altitudes associated with arrival and approach procedures are “auto-designated”. This means the system
automatically provides descending vertical speed and deviation guidance to an altitude(s) chosen by the system
for any waypoint prior to the FAF. These altitudes are displayed as cyan text. Additionally, altitudes can be
MANAGEMENT
manually designated prior to the FAF. The FAF can be manually designated if the selected approach provides no
FLIGHT
vertical guidance (i.e. glidepath). Manually designated altitudes are displayed as cyan text. For all designated
altitudes, the system will automatically calculate altitude constraints prior to the designated altitude, which are
displayed as white text.
AVOIDANCE
The system will automatically calculate altitude constraints prior to the manually designated altitude, which
HAZARD
are displayed as white text. System calculated altitudes can also be manually designated. Other displayed
altitudes may change due to re-calculations or be rendered invalid as a result of manually changing an altitude
to a designated altitude.
Altitudes that have been designated for use in vertical guidance can be “un-designated” using the CLR Key.
The altitude is now displayed only as a reference (white text). It is not used to give vertical guidance. Other
AFCS
displayed altitudes may change due to re-calculations or be rendered invalid as a result of manually changing
an altitude to a non-designated altitude.
Altitude constraints are displayed and entered in feet mean sea level (MSL) values to the nearest hundred. An
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
altitude constraint in feet above ground level (AGL) format is supported for airports. When a database altitude
restriction is displayed, the system allows entry of a different altitude when creating a waypoint, effectively overriding
the database restriction (only before the FAF). When a database altitude restriction of type “AT or ABOVE” or “AT
or BELOW” is activated, the system uses the “AT” portion of the restriction to define the vertical profile.
APPENDICES
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
Altitude Constraint Displayed Text
Examples Examples
System Calculated Altitude
(White Text)
INSTRUMENTS
Cross AT or ABOVE Edited Altitude Constraint
FLIGHT
5,000 ft (Cyan Text with Pencil Icon)
Designated Altitude Constraint
(Cyan Text)
Cross AT 2,300 ft
White Text with
EIS
Altitude Restriction Bar
Cross AT or BELOW
3,000 ft Temperature
Compensated
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-58 Waypoint Altitude Constraints
White Text Cyan Text
MANAGEMENT
5OOOFT
FLIGHT
Altitude calculated by the system estimating the altitude of Altitude is designated for use in determining vertical
the aircraft as it passes over the navigation point. No white guidance. A pencil icon indicates manual designation or
line above or below to indicate a potential constraint. manually edited data entry.
5OOOFT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Altitude retrieved from the navigation database. White line The system cannot use this altitude in determining vertical
above or below indicates the type of constraint, guidance because of an invalid constraint condition.
as shown in the preceding figure.
These altitudes are provided as a reference, and are not
designated to be used in determining vertical guidance.
AFCS
Table 5-10 Altitude Constraint Color Coding
NOTE: All designated altitudes (cyan text) will be displayed in the active flight plan without restriction bars
ADDITIONAL
regardless of what is shown on the published procedure.
FEATURES
An altitude constraint is invalid or cannot be entered if:
• Meeting the constraint requires the aircraft to climb
• Meeting the constraint requires the maximum flight path angle or maximum vertical speed to be exceeded
APPENDICES
• The altitude constraint results in a TOD behind the aircraft present position
• The constraint is within a leg type for which altitude constraints are not supported
• The altitude constraint is added to the FAF of an approach that provides vertical guidance (i.e., ILS or GPS SBAS approach)
• The altitude constraint is added to a waypoint past the FAF
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
Altitude constraints can be modified or deleted after having been added to the flight plan. In the event an
SYSTEM
altitude constraint is deleted and the navigation database contains an altitude restriction for the lateral waypoint,
the system displays the altitude restriction from the database provided no predicted altitude can be provided.
The system also provides a way to reinstate a published altitude constraint that has been edited.
INSTRUMENTS
Manually designating or editing a waypoint altitude constraint to be used for vertical guidance:
FLIGHT
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Enter an altitude constraint value using the FMS Knobs. To enter altitudes as a flight level, turn the small
FMS Knob counter-clockwise past zero or clockwise past 9 on the first character, and the system automatically
EIS
changes to show units of Flight Level. Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to highlight the first zero and enter
the three digit flight level.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the altitude constraint; if the selected waypoint is an airport, an additional choice
AUDIO PANEL
is displayed. Turn the small FMS Knob to choose ‘MSL’ or ‘AGL’, and press the ENT Key to accept the altitude.
& CNS
Removing an altitude constraint:

MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove VNV altitude?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) Select ‘OK’ and press the ENT Key.
Reverting a manually entered altitude constraint back to the navigation database value:
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
AFCS
4) Select ‘REVERT’ and press the ENT Key. The altitude is changed to the navigation database value.
ADDITIONAL
VERTICAL SITUATION DISPLAY (VSD)

FEATURES
A Vertical Situation Display (VSD) can be shown on the bottom of the Navigation Map Page. The terrain,
obstacles, vertical track vector, selected altitude, and active flight plan information (active flight plan information
consists of waypoints, associated altitude constraints, current VNV profile, TOD/BOD, and destination runway)
APPENDICES
can be displayed on the VSD, depending on the selected mode. See the Hazard Avoidance section for information
about winds aloft, obstacles, and relative terrain on the VSD.
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
The VSD horizontal range is equal to the navigation map indicated range when the VSD is in Track mode.
SYSTEM
When the VSD is in Flight Plan mode, the horizontal range is the lower of twice the navigation map indicated
range or the lowest range the displays all of the remaining active flight plan. The VSD altitude range automatically
changes when the navigation map range is changed to keep a constant ratio of altitude range to horizontal
range, until both minimum and maximum display limits have been met. At ranges above the maximum, the
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
altitude range remains constant at the maximum.
The aircraft symbol is displayed on the left side of the VSD. The position of the aircraft symbol on the vertical
scale is close to the top for a descent phase and in the middle for a cruise phase or if the phase is unknown.
If two waypoints are close together, and their labels or constraint values overlap enough to obscure any text,
one waypoint label/constraint value is removed and the vertical dashed line for that waypoint is displayed as
EIS
darker gray. The priority for which waypoint remains displayed is: (1) the current TO waypoint, (2) waypoint
with an altitude constraint, and (3) waypoint closer to the aircraft.
Terrain/obstacles are available on the VSD, and will be shown if the aircraft altitude is low enough for the
AUDIO PANEL
terrain/obstacles to be in view (terrain will be shown in gray if the terrain is selected Off on the Navigation Map).
& CNS
The depicted terrain profile represents an approximate forward-looking contour of the terrain based upon the
highest reported terrain elevations, measured at intervals defined by the terrain database resolution, within a
predefined width along the active flight plan between the aircraft present position and the end of the map range
or active flight plan. The predefined width is determined by the flight phase.
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
NOTE: Certain leg types (e.g. holds, heading legs) do not support VNV PATH descents because the lateral distance
of those legs in unknown. The VSD will not show a VNV profile for any legs that have no vertical path guidance.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
VSD Mode (AUTO FPL)
Active FPL Waypoints
ADDITIONAL
Selected Alt. (10000ft)
FEATURES
Altitude Constraints
Vertical Situation Destination Runway

Display (VSD)
Absolute Terrain
Current VNAV Profile VSD Mode Buttons
APPENDICES
Obstacle - FPL
- TRK
- Auto
Figure 5-59 Vertical Situation Display (VSD)
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
VSD Mode Displayed

FPL Criteria Items available on VSD
Button Mode
Available active FPL & aircraft Terrain/obstacles along the active flight plan route, vertical track
AUTO FPL
within FPL swath vector, selected altitude, and active flight plan information
INSTRUMENTS
Auto (1) Active FPL available &

Terrain/obstacles along the current track, vertical track vector, and
FLIGHT
AUTO TRK aircraft not within FPL swath,

selected altitude
or (2) Active FPL not available
Terrain/obstacles along the active flight plan route, vertical track
Active FPL available
Flight Plan FPL vector, selected altitude, and active flight plan information
Active FPL not available Only shows message 'Flight Plan Not Available'
EIS
Terrain/obstacles along the current track, vertical track vector, and

Track TRK NA
selected altitude
Active flight plan information consists of waypoints, associated altitude constraints, current VNV profile, TOD/BOD, and
AUDIO PANEL
destination runway
& CNS
Table 5-11 VSD Modes

VSD MESSAGES
Under certain conditions, some messages may appear in conjunction with others.
MANAGEMENT
Message Description
FLIGHT
‘Loading...’ VSD is loading data due to a range change, full/half switch, or first being
selected for display.
‘Flight Plan Not Available’ Flight Plan mode is selected and there is not a flight plan loaded with at
least one leg.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
‘Flight Plan mode unavailable because aircraft off All of the following are true:
course and active leg over 200 NM’ - Flight Plan mode is selected
- The active leg is greater than 200 nm
- The aircraft is outside the swath
‘Aircraft Beyond Active Leg’ Flight Plan mode is selected and the aircraft’s position, as projected on
AFCS
the flight plan, is past the end of the active leg.

‘VSD Not Available’ At least one of the following is true:
- Valid terrain database not available
- GPS MSL altitude not available
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Current barometric altitude not available

- Neither current track nor current heading available
- GPS position not available
- Map range setting is less than 1 nm
APPENDICES
‘VSD Data is old, disable and enable VSD’ The system has encountered a delay and VSD data has failed to update
for 2 seconds or more. This message may be momentarily displayed and
then removed as the delay is overcome.
Table 5-12 VSD System Messages
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
Flight Phase Width of Swath
Approach, Departure 0.6 nm
Terminal 2.0 nm
En Route, Oceanic 4.0 nm
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Enabling the Vertical Situation Display:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
EIS
3) Press the Inset Softkey.
4) Press the VSD Softkey to enable the Vertical Situation Display.
5) Press the VSD Mode softkey to choose between Auto, FPL, or TRK.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Show VSD’ and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
4) Press the Map Opt Softkey
5) Press the Inset Softkey
6) Press the VSD Mode softkey to choose between Auto, FPL, or TRK.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Disabling the Vertical Situation Display:
3) Press the Inset Softkey
AFCS
4) Press the Off Softkey.
Or:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Hide VSD’ and press the ENT Key. APPENDICES
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
5.8 PROCEDURES
SYSTEM
The system can access the whole range of instrument procedures available. Departures (DPs), arrivals (STARs),
and non-precision and precision approaches (APRs) are stored within the database and can be loaded using any
INSTRUMENTS
Procedures (PROC) Key.

FLIGHT
NOTE: The navigation databases used in Garmin navigation systems contain Special Procedures. Prior
to flying these procedures, pilots must have specific FAA authorization, training, and possession of the
corresponding current, and legitimately-sourced chart (approach plate, etc.). Inclusion of the Special
Procedure in the navigation database DOES NOT imply specific FAA authorization to fly the procedure.
EIS
The selected procedure for the departure or arrival airport is added to the active flight plan. No waypoints are
required to be in the active flight plan to load procedures; however, if the origin and destination airport are already
loaded, the procedure loading window defaults to the appropriate airport, saving some time selecting the correct
AUDIO PANEL
airport on the Procedure Loading Page. Furthermore, only one procedure for each type of procedure (DP, STAR,
& CNS
APPR) can be loaded at a time in a flight plan.

The system adds terminal procedures to the flight plan based on leg types coded within that procedure in the
navigation database. If the terminal procedure in the flight plan contains an identifier like ‘6368ft’, that indicates
MANAGEMENT
a leg that terminates when the specified altitude (6368 feet) has been exceeded. A heading leg in the flight plan
FLIGHT
displays ‘hdg’ preceding the DTK (e.g. ‘hdg 008°’). A flight plan leg requiring the pilot to manually initiate
sequencing to the next leg displays ‘MANSEQ’ as the identifier.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Heading Leg Terminating at the

Manually Sequenced Heading Leg Specified Altitude
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-60 Procedure Leg Identifiers

APPENDICES
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
Viewing available procedures at an airport:
SYSTEM
1) From the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page (first page in the ‘WPT’ Page Group):
Press the DP Softkey. The ‘WPT - Departure Information’ Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed
on the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Or.
Press the STAR Softkey. The ‘WPT - Arrival Information’ Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on
the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page.
Or.
EIS
Press the APR Softkey. The ‘WPT - Approach Information’ Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed
on the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor. To select another airport, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
AUDIO PANEL
press the ENT Key.
& CNS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired procedure. The procedure is previewed on the map.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through the available procedures. Press the ENT Key to select the procedure.
The cursor moves to the next box (runway or transition). The procedure is previewed on the map.
MANAGEMENT
5) Turn the FMS Knobs, as required, to highlight a runway or transition. Press the ENT Key to select the runway
FLIGHT
or transition. The cursor moves to the next box. The procedure is previewed on the map.
6) Repeat Step 5, until desired information has been viewed for the chosen procedure.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
DEPARTURES
SYSTEM
A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the flight plan. Only one departure can be
loaded at a time in a flight plan. If a departure is loaded when another departure is already in the active flight
plan, the new departure replaces the previous departure. The route is defined by selection of a departure, the
INSTRUMENTS
transition waypoints, and a runway.

FLIGHT
Available Procedure Actions Departure Airport

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Loaded Procedures Departure Preview Departure Choices

AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Figure 5-61 Departure Selection
Selected Departure Loaded Departure

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys

INDEX
Figure 5-62 Departure Loading
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
Loading a departure into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
SYSTEM
1) Press the PROC Key. The ‘Procedures’ Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘Select Departure’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘PROC - Departure Loading’ Page is displayed.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
4) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
5) Select a departure from the list and press the ENT Key.
6) Select a runway (if required) and press the ENT Key.
7) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key. ‘Load?’ is highlighted.
EIS
8) Press the ENT Key to load the departure procedure.
Loading a departure into the active flight plan from the ‘WPT - Departure Information’ Page:
1) From the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page (first page in the ‘WPT’ Page Group), press the DP Softkey. The ‘WPT -
AUDIO PANEL
Departure Information’ Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the ‘WPT - Airport information’ Page.
& CNS
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
MANAGEMENT
3) Select a different departure, if desired.
FLIGHT
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Departure. The departure is previewed on the map.
b) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available departures. Press the ENT Key to select the departure. The
cursor moves to the ‘Runway’ Box. The departure is previewed on the map.
AVOIDANCE
c) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The
HAZARD
cursor moves to the ‘Transition’ Box (only if there are available transitions). The departure is previewed on
the map.
d) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The
cursor moves to the ‘Sequence’ Box. The departure is previewed on the map.
AFCS
4) Press the MENU Key to display the ‘Page Menu’ Window.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Load Departure’.
6) Press the ENT Key to load the departure procedure into the active flight plan.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Loading a departure procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) Select a stored flight plan from the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
2) Press the Edit Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘FPL - Stored
APPENDICES
3) Press the LD DP Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Departure”, and press the ENT Key. The ‘PROC
- Departure Loading’ Page is displayed.
4) Select a departure. Press the ENT Key.
5) Select a runway served by the selected departure, if required. Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
6) Select a transition for the selected departure. Press the ENT Key.
7) Press the ENT Key to load the selected departure procedure.
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
Removing a departure procedure from the active flight plan:

SYSTEM
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Departure’.
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the departure procedure.
FLIGHT
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Or:
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the departure header in the active flight plan.
EIS
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the departure procedure.
AUDIO PANEL

& CNS
Removing a departure from a stored flight plan:

MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The ‘FPL -
Stored Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
AVOIDANCE
5) Highlight and remove the departure:

HAZARD
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the header of the departure.
b) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
Or:
AFCS
a) Press the MENU Key to display the ‘Page Menu’ Window and turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Remove
Departure’.
b) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
press the ENT Key.

APPENDICES
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
ARRIVALS
SYSTEM
A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available. Only one arrival can
be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an arrival is loaded when another arrival is already in the active flight
plan, the new arrival replaces the previous arrival. The route is defined by selection of an arrival, the transition
INSTRUMENTS
waypoints, and a runway.
FLIGHT
Available Procedure Actions Destination Airport
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Loaded Procedures Arrival Preview Arrival Choices
Figure 5-63 Arrival Selection
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Selected Arrival Loaded Arrival
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys

Figure 5-64 Arrival Loading
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
Loading an arrival into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
SYSTEM

2) Highlight ‘Select Arrival’.
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘PROC - Arrival Loading’ Page is displayed.
FLIGHT
4) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
5) Select an arrival from the list and press the ENT Key.
6) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key.
7) Select a runway (if required) and press the ENT Key. ‘Load?’ is highlighted.
EIS
8) Press the ENT Key to load the arrival procedure
Loading an arrival into the active flight plan from the ‘WPT - Arrival Information’ Page:
AUDIO PANEL
1) From the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page (first page in the WPT group), press the STAR Softkey. The ‘WPT -
& CNS
Arrival Information’ Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the ‘WPT - Airport Information’
Page.
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
MANAGEMENT
press the ENT Key.

FLIGHT
3) Select a different arrival, if desired.

a) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the arrival. The arrival is previewed on the map.
b) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available arrivals. Press the ENT Key to select the arrival. The cursor
AVOIDANCE
moves to the ‘Transition’ Box (only if there are available transitions). The arrival is previewed on the map.
HAZARD
c) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The
cursor moves to the ‘Runway’ Box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
d) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The cursor
moves to the ‘Sequence’ Box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
AFCS
4) Press the MENU Key to display the Arrival Information ‘Page Menu’ Window.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Load Arrival’.
6) Press the ENT Key to load the arrival procedure into the active flight plan.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Loading an arrival procedure into a stored flight plan:

APPENDICES

3) Press the LD STAR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Arrival”, and press the ENT Key. The ‘PROC
- Arrival Loading’ Page is displayed.
4) Select an arrival. Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
5) Select a transition for the selected arrival. Press the ENT Key.
6) Select a runway served by the selected arrival, if required. Press the ENT Key.
7) Press the ENT Key to load the selected arrival procedure.
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
Removing an arrival from the active flight plan:
SYSTEM
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Arrival’.
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the arrival procedure.
FLIGHT
Or:
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the arrival header in the active flight plan.
EIS
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the arrival procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Removing an arrival from a stored flight plan:

MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
5) Highlight and remove the arrival:
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the header of the arrival.
Or:
AFCS
a) Press the MENU Key to display the ‘Page Menu’ Window and turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Remove
Arrival’.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
APPROACHES
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENT APPROACH
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: If certain GPS parameters (SBAS, RAIM, etc.) are not available, some published approach procedures
FLIGHT
for the desired airport may not be displayed in the list of available approaches.
An Approach Procedure (APR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available, and provides guidance for non-
precision and precision approaches to airports with published instrument approach procedures. Only one approach
can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an approach is loaded when another approach is already in the active flight
plan, the new approach replaces the previous approach. The route is defined by selection of an approach and the
EIS
transition waypoints.
When selecting an approach, a “GPS” designation to the right of the procedure name indicates the procedure can be
flown using the GPS receiver. Some procedures do not have this designation, meaning the GPS receiver can be used
AUDIO PANEL
for supplemental navigation guidance only. If the GPS receiver cannot be used for primary guidance, the appropriate
& CNS
navigation receiver must be used for the selected approach (e.g., VOR or ILS). The final course segment of ILS
approaches, for example, must be flown by tuning the NAV receiver to the proper frequency and selecting that NAV
receiver on the CDI.
MANAGEMENT
The SBAS GPS allows for flying LNAV, LNAV+V, LNAV/VNAV, LP, LP+V, and LPV approach service levels according
FLIGHT
to the published chart. LNAV+V is an LNAV with advisory vertical guidance provided for assistance in maintaining
a constant vertical glidepath similar to an ILS glideslope on approach. This guidance is displayed on the system PFD
in the same location as the ILS glideslope using a magenta diamond. In all cases where LNAV+V is indicated by the
system during an approach, LNAV minima are used. The active approach service level is annunciated on the HSI as
AVOIDANCE
shown in the following table:

HAZARD
HSI Annunciation Description Example on HSI

LNAV RNAV GPS approach using published LNAV minima
LNAV+V RNAV GPS approach using published LNAV minima. Advisory
vertical guidance is provided.
AFCS
L/VNAV RNAV GPS approach using published LNAV/VNAV minima

(available only if (downgrades to LNAV if SBAS unavailable)
SBAS available)
LP RNAV GPS approach using published LP minima (downgrades to
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
(available only if LNAV if SBAS unavailable)

SBAS available)
LP+V RNAV GPS approach using published LP minima Approach Service Level
- LNAV, LNAV+V, L/VNAV, LP, LP+V, LPV
(available only if Advisory vertical guidance is provided (downgrades to LNAV if
SBAS available) SBAS unavailable)
APPENDICES
LPV RNAV GPS approach using published LPV minima (downgrades

(available only if to LNAV if SBAS unavailable)
SBAS available)
Table 5-13 Approach Service Levels
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
Available Procedure Actions Destination Airport
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Loaded Procedures Approach Preview Approach Choices
Figure 5-65 Approach Selection
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Selected Approach Loaded Approach
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys LOAD or ACTIVATE? Annunciation
Figure 5-66 Approach Loading APPENDICES
APPROACH SELECTION AND REMOVAL

Whenever an approach is selected, the choice to either ‘Load’ or ‘Activate’ is given. ‘Load’ adds the approach
to the end of the flight plan without immediately using it for navigation guidance. This allows continued
navigation via the intermediate waypoints in the original flight plan, but keeps the procedure available for
quick activation when needed. ‘Activate’ also adds the procedure to the end of the flight plan but immediately
INDEX
begins to provide guidance to the first waypoint in the approach.
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
In many cases, it may be easiest to load the full approach while still some distance away, enroute to the
SYSTEM
destination airport. Later, if vectored to final, use the steps below to select ‘Activate Vector-To- Final’ — which
makes the inbound course to the FAF waypoint active.
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course, the message ‘- NOT APPROVED
FLIGHT
FOR GPS -’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the approach, but the HSI must to be switched to a NAV
receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
NOTE: When there is no arrival procedure in the flight plan, loading an approach after a destination airport
has already been entered will result in a duplicate destination airport waypoint being added to the end of
EIS
the enroute segment.
Loading an approach into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
AUDIO PANEL

& CNS
2) Highlight ‘Select Approach’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘PROC - Approach Loading’ Page is displayed.
3) Select the airport and approach:
MANAGEMENT
a) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
b) Select an approach from the list and press the ENT Key.
Or:
a) If necessary, push the FMS Knob to exit the approach list, and use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor
AVOIDANCE
to the ‘Channel’ Field.

HAZARD
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the approach channel number, and press the ENT Key to accept the approach
channel number. The airport and approach are selected.
4) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key.
5) Minimums
AFCS
a) To set approach minimums, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’ or ‘TEMP COMP’ and press the ENT
Key. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
b) If ‘TEMP COMP’ was selected, the cursor moves to the temperature field. Turn the small FMS Knob to
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
select the temperature, and press the ENT Key.

Or:
To skip setting minimums, select ‘OFF’ and press the ENT Key.
6) Press the ENT Key with ‘Load?’ highlighted to load the approach procedure; or turn the large FMS Knob to
APPENDICES
highlight ‘Activate’ and press the ENT Key to load and activate the approach procedure.
When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course, the message ‘- NOT APPROVED FOR GPS -
GPS guidance is for monitoring only. Load approach?’ is displayed. With ‘Yes’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
Loading an approach into the active flight plan from the ‘NRST - Nearest Airport’ Page:
SYSTEM
1) Select the ‘NRST - Nearest Airports’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob, then turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired nearest airport. The airport is
previewed on the map.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
3) Press the APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Approach Window’, and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired approach.
5) Press the LD APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Load Approach’, and press the ENT Key. The
‘PROC - Approach Loading’ Page is displayed with the ‘Transition’ Field highlighted.
EIS
6) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired transition, and press the ENT Key.
7) Minimums
a) To set ‘Minimums’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’ or ‘TEMP COMP’ and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
Turn the small FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
& CNS
b) If ‘TEMP COMP’ was selected, the cursor moves to the temperature field. Turn the small FMS Knob to
select the temperature, and press the ENT Key.
Or:
MANAGEMENT
To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key. The ‘Load?’ field is highlighted.
FLIGHT
8) Press the ENT Key with ‘Load?’ highlighted to load the approach procedure; or turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight ‘Activate?’ and press the ENT Key to load and activate the approach procedure.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Loading an approach procedure into a stored flight plan:
AFCS
3) Press the LD APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Approach”, and press the ENT Key. The ‘PROC
- Approach Loading’ Page is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Select the airport and approach:
a) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
b) Select an approach from the list and press the ENT Key.
Or:
APPENDICES
a) If necessary, push the FMS Knob to exit the approach list, and use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor
to the Approach ‘Channel’ Field.
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the approach channel number, and press the ENT Key to accept the approach
channel number. The airport and approach are selected.
INDEX
5) Select a transition for the selected approach. Press the ENT Key.
6) Press the ENT Key to load the selected approach procedure.
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
Activating a previously loaded approach:

SYSTEM
1) Press the PROC Key. The ‘Procedures’ Window is displayed with ‘Activate Approach’ highlighted.
2) Press the ENT Key to activate the approach.
INSTRUMENTS
Activating a previously loaded approach with vectors to final:

FLIGHT
1) Press the PROC Key to display the ‘Procedures’ Window.

2) Highlight ‘Activate Vector-to-Final’ and press the ENT Key.
Loading and activating an approach using the MENU Key:

EIS
1) Press the PROC Key.

2) Use the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Select Approach’ and press the ENT Key.
3) From the ‘PROC - Approach Loading’ Page, press the MENU Key on the MFD. The ‘Page Menu’ Window is
AUDIO PANEL
displayed with ‘Load & Activate Approach’ highlighted.

& CNS

MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Removing an approach from the active flight plan:

2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Approach’.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Or:
AFCS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn to highlight the approach header in the active flight plan.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Removing an approach from a stored flight plan:

APPENDICES
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
5) Highlight and remove the approach:
SYSTEM
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the header of the approach.
INSTRUMENTS
Or:
FLIGHT
a) Press the MENU Key to display the ‘Page Menu’ Window and turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Remove Approach’.
press the ENT Key.
EIS
MISSED APPROACH
AUDIO PANEL
In this missed approach procedure, the altitude immediately following the MAP (in this case ‘6600ft’) is
& CNS
not part of the published procedure. It is simply a Course to Altitude (CA) leg which guides the aircraft along
the runway centerline until the altitude required to safely make the first turn toward the MAHP is exceeded.
This altitude is provided by the navigation database, and may be below, equal to, or above the published
minimums for this approach. In this case, if the aircraft altitude is below the specified altitude (6,600 feet)
MANAGEMENT
after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established to provide a course on runway heading until an altitude of
FLIGHT
6,600 feet is reached. After reaching 6,600 feet, a direct-to is established to the published MAHP (in this case
ADANE). If the aircraft altitude is above the specified altitude after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established
to the published fix (ADANE) to begin the missed approach procedure.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
Course to Altitude Leg
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-67 Course to Altitude

In some missed approach procedures this Course to Altitude leg may be part of the published procedure.
For example, a procedure may dictate a climb to 5,500 feet, then turn left and proceed to the Missed Approach
Hold Point (MAHP). In this case, the altitude would appear in the list of waypoints as ‘5500ft’. Again, if
the aircraft altitude is lower than the prescribed altitude, a direct-to is established on a Course to Altitude leg
INDEX
when the missed approach procedure is activated.
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
Activating a missed approach in the active flight plan:

SYSTEM
1) Press the PROC Key.

2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Activate Missed Approach’.
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key. The aircraft automatically sequences to the MAHP.
FLIGHT
Or:
Fly past the MAP, and press the SUSP Softkey on the PFD.

Or:
Press the Go-Around Button.
EIS
TEMPERATURE COMPENSATED ALTITUDE

If desired, the system can compensate the loaded approach altitudes based on a pilot-supplied temperature
AUDIO PANEL
at the destination. For example, if the pilot enters a destination temperature of -40º C, the system increases
& CNS
the approach altitudes accordingly. A temperature compensated altitude is displayed with a snowflake icon
next to it.
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: Activating/cancelling temperature compensation for the loaded approach altitudes does not select/
FLIGHT
deselect temperature compensated minimums (MDA/DH), nor does selecting/deselecting temperature

compensated minimums activate/cancel temperature compensated approach altitudes.
Activating temperature compensated altitude:

AVOIDANCE
1) From the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page, press the MENU Key. The ‘Page Menu’ is displayed.
HAZARD
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Temperature Compensation’.

3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Temperature Compensation’ Window is displayed.
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select the temperature at the <airport>. The compensated altitude is computed as
the temperature is selected.
AFCS
NOTE: The temperature at the destination can be entered in the Temperature Compensation Window on the
MFD, or in the ‘References’ Window on the PFD. There is only one compensation temperature for the system,
ADDITIONAL
therefore, changing the temperature will affect both the loaded approach altitudes and the minimums.
FEATURES
Refer to the Flight Instruments section for information about applying temperature compensation to the
MDA/DH.
5) Press the ENT Key. ‘Activate Compensation?’ is highlighted.
APPENDICES
6) Press the ENT Key. The compensated altitudes for the approach are shown in the flight plan.
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
FLIGHT
Temperature
FAF Altitude
Compensated
Altitude
EIS
Temperature
Compensation
Selected
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-68 Temperature Compensation
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Compensated Uncompensated
Altitudes Altitudes
AFCS
Figure 5-69 Temperature Compensation in the Active Flight Plan
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Cancelling temperature compensated altitude:
1) From the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page, press the MENU Key. The ‘Page Menu’ is displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Temperature Compensation’.
APPENDICES
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Temperature Compensation’ Window is displayed.

4) Press the ENT Key. ‘Cancel Compensation?’ is highlighted.
5) Press the ENT Key. The temperature compensated altitude at the FAF is cancelled.
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
5.9 TRIP PLANNING

SYSTEM
The system allows the pilot to view trip planning information, fuel information, and other information for
a specified flight plan or flight plan leg based on automatic data, or based on manually entered data. Weight
INSTRUMENTS
planning is also available, based on manually entered fuel data and the active flight plan (to estimate remaining
FLIGHT
fuel).
TRIP PLANNING
All of the input of data needed for calculation and viewing of the statistics is done on the Trip Planning Page
located in the Aux Page Group.
EIS
Selected Flight Plan Segment

- FPL Number/Cumulative Legs (CUM or REM) or Leg Number (NN)
- Waypoints Defining Selected Flight Plan/Flight Plan Leg
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Trip Planning Page Mode

- Automatic/Manual
Preview of Selected
MANAGEMENT
Flight Plan/ Trip Input Data (sensor/pilot)

FLIGHT
Flight Plan Leg - Departure Time (local)

- Ground Speed
- Fuel Flow
- Fuel On Board Aircraft
- Calibrated Airspeed
- Indicated Altitude
Trip Statistics
AVOIDANCE
- Barometric Pressure
HAZARD
Desired Track - - Total Air Temperature

Distance -
Est. Time Enroute - Other Statistics
Est. Time of Arrival - - Density Altitude
Enroute Safe Altitude - - True Airspeed (TAS)
Sunrise Time (local) -
Sunset Time (local) -
AFCS
Fuel Statistics
Efficiency - Softkeys
Total Endurance - - Automatic/Manual Page Mode
Remaining Fuel - - Flight Plan/Waypoint Mode
Remaining Endurance -
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Fuel Required -
Total Range -
Figure 5-70 Trip Planning Page
The trip planning inputs are based on sensor inputs (automatic page mode) or on pilot inputs (manual page
mode). Some additional explanation of the sources for some of the inputs is as follows:
APPENDICES
• Departure Time - This defaults to the current time in automatic page mode. The computations are from the
aircraft present position, so the aircraft is always just departing.
• Calibrated Airspeed - The primary source is from the air data system, and the secondary source of information
is GPS ground speed.
• Indicated Altitude - The primary source is the barometric altitude, and the secondary source of information
INDEX
is GPS altitude.
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
TRIP STATISTICS
SYSTEM
The trip statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip planning
inputs, derived from the flight plan. The system calculates these values depending on the specified mode -
flight plan mode (FPL Softkey enabled) or waypoint mode (WPTs Softkey enabled). Stored Flight Plans
INSTRUMENTS
may be used by selecting its corresponding number from the Flight Plan Catalog (01–99). ‘00’ is the default
FLIGHT
number for the active flight plan.
In flight plan mode, with a stored flight plan selected, and the entire flight plan (‘CUM’) selected, the
waypoints are the starting and ending waypoints of the selected flight plan.
In flight plan mode , with a stored flight plan selected, and the desired leg selected (flight plan legs are
EIS
numbered in increasing order starting from ‘01’), the waypoints are the endpoints of the selected leg.
In flight plan mode, with the active flight plan selected, and the remaining flight plan (REM) selected, the
‘from’ waypoint is the present position of the aircraft and the ‘to’ waypoint is the endpoint of the active flight
AUDIO PANEL
plan.
& CNS
In flight plan mode, with the active flight plan selected, and a specific leg selected, the ‘from’ waypoint is
the current aircraft position and the ‘to’ waypoint is the endpoint of the selected leg.
In waypoint mode, these are manually selected waypoints (if there is an active flight plan, these default to
MANAGEMENT
the endpoints of the active leg).
FLIGHT
Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has already
been flown.
• Desired Track - Desired Track is shown as nnn° and is the desired track between the selected waypoints. It
is dashed unless only a single leg is selected.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
• Distance - The distance is shown in tenths of units up to 99.9, and in whole units up to 9999.
• Estimated time enroute (ETE) - ETE is shown as hours:minutes until less than an hour, then it is shown as
minutes:seconds.
• Estimated time of arrival (ETA) - ETA is shown as hours:minutes and is the local time at the destination.
AFCS
- If in waypoint mode then the ETA is the ETE added to the departure time.
- If a flight plan other than the active flight plan is selected it shows the ETA by adding to the departure
time all of the ETEs of the legs up to and including the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected,
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
then the ETA is calculated as if the last leg of the flight plan was selected.
- If the active flight plan is selected, the ETA reflects the current position of the aircraft and the current leg
being flown. The ETA is calculated by adding to the current time the ETEs of the current leg up to and
including the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected, then the ETA is calculated as if the last leg
APPENDICES
of the flight plan was selected.

• Enroute safe altitude (ESA) - The ESA is shown as nnnnnFT
• Destination sunrise and sunset times - These times are shown as hours:minutes of the time at the
destination.
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
FUEL STATISTICS
SYSTEM
The fuel statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip planning
inputs. Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has
already been flown.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
• Fuel efficiency (Efficiency) - This value is calculated by dividing the current ground speed by the current
fuel flow.
• Time of fuel endurance (Total Endurance) - This time is shown as hours:minutes. This value is obtained
by dividing the amount of fuel on board by the current fuel flow.
• Fuel on board upon reaching end of selected leg (Remaining Fuel) - This value is calculated by taking the
EIS
amount of fuel onboard and subtracting the fuel required to reach the end of the selected leg.
• Fuel endurance remaining at end of selected leg (Remaining Endurance) - This value is calculated by taking
the time of fuel endurance and subtracting the estimated time enroute to the end of the selected leg.
AUDIO PANEL
• Fuel required for trip (Fuel Required) - This value is calculated by multiplying the time to go by the fuel
& CNS
flow.
• Total range at entered fuel flow (Total Range) - This value is calculated by multiplying the time of fuel
endurance by the ground speed.
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
OTHER STATISTICS
These statistics are calculated based on the system sensor inputs or the manual trip planning inputs.
• Density Altitude
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
• True Airspeed
The pilot may select Automatic or Manual page mode, and flight plan (FPL) or waypoint (WPTs) mode. In
automatic page mode, only the FPL, LEG, or waypoint IDs are editable (based on FPL/WPTs selection).
Selected Flight Plan NN - Selected Leg(s)

Stored Flight Plan
AFCS
00 is Active FPL
01-99 are Stored FPLs - CUM: Beginning to End of FPL
- NN: Beginning to End of Selected Leg
Active Flight Plan
Starting and Ending Waypoint of - REM: Pres. Pos. to End of FPL
Selected Flight Plan Segment - NN: Pres. Pos. to End of Selected Leg
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-71 Trip Planning Page - Flight Plan Mode
Selected Flight Plan Selected Leg(s)

Not Available Not Available
APPENDICES
Selected Starting and Ending Waypoints

Figure 5-72 Trip Planning Page - Waypoint Mode
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
Selecting automatic or manual page mode:
SYSTEM
From the ‘Aux - Trip Planning’ Page, press the Auto Softkey or the Manual Softkey; or press the MENU Key,
highlight ‘Auto Mode’ or ‘Manual Mode’, and press the ENT Key.
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting flight plan or waypoint mode:
FLIGHT
From the ‘Aux - Trip Planning’ Page, press the FPL Softkey or the WPTs Softkey; or press the MENU Key,
highlight ‘Flight Plan Mode’ or ‘Waypoints Mode’, and press the ENT Key.
Selecting a flight plan and leg for trip statistics:
1) From the ‘Aux - Trip Planning’ Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor in the ‘FPL’ Field.
EIS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired flight plan number.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘CUM’ or ‘REM’. The statistics for each leg can be viewed by turning the
small FMS Knob to select the desired leg. The Trip Planning Map also displays the selected data.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting waypoints for waypoint mode:
1) From the ‘Aux - Trip Planning’ Page, press the WPTs Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Waypoints
Mode’, and press the ENT Key. The cursor is positioned in the waypoint field directly below the FPL Field.
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the FMS knobs to select the desired waypoint (or select from the Page Menu ‘Set WPT to Present Position’
FLIGHT
if that is what is desired), and press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the second waypoint field.
3) Turn the FMS knobs to select the desired waypoint, and press the ENT Key. The statistics for the selected leg
are displayed.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Entering manual data for trip statistics calculations:
1) From the ‘Aux - Trip Planning’ Page, press the Manual Softkey or select ‘Manual Mode’ from the Page Menu,
and press the ENT Key. The cursor may now be positioned in any field in the top right two boxes.
2) Turn the FMS Knobs to move the cursor onto the ‘Departure Time’ Field and enter the desired value. Press the
ENT Key. The statistics are calculated using the new value and the cursor moves to the next entry field. Repeat
AFCS
until all desired values have been entered.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM
NOTE: The Inset Map is removed from the PFD any time aircraft pitch is greater than +30° or less than –20°,
INSTRUMENTS
or when a 65° bank angle is reached.

FLIGHT
This section discusses the Dead Reckoning mode of operation and the subsequent indications.
NOTE: Dead Reckoning Mode only functions in Enroute (ENR) or Oceanic (OCN) phase of flight. In all other
phases, an invalid GPS solution produces a “NO GPS POSITION” annunciation on the map and the system
EIS
stops using GPS.

While in Enroute or Oceanic phase of flight, if the system detects an invalid GPS solution or is unable to
calculate a GPS position, the system automatically reverts to Dead Reckoning (DR) Mode. In DR Mode, the system
AUDIO PANEL
uses its last-known position combined with continuously updated airspeed and heading data (when available) to
& CNS
calculate and display the aircraft’s current estimated position.

It is important to note that estimated navigation data supplied by the system in DR Mode may become increasingly
unreliable and must not be used as a sole means of navigation. If while in DR Mode airspeed and/or heading data
MANAGEMENT
is also lost or not available, the DR function may not be capable of accurately tracking estimated position and,
FLIGHT
consequently, the system may display a path that is different than the actual movement of the aircraft. Estimated
position information displayed by the system through DR while there is no heading and/or airspeed data available
should not be used for navigation.
DR Mode is inherently less accurate than the standard GPS/SBAS Mode due to the lack of satellite measurements
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
needed to determine a position. Changes in wind speed and/or wind direction compound the relative inaccuracy
of DR Mode. Because of this degraded accuracy, other navigation equipment must be relied upon for position
awareness until GPS-derived position data is restored.
DR Mode is indicated on the system by the appearance of the letters ‘DR’ superimposed in amber over the ‘own
aircraft’ symbol on the MFD. In addition, ‘DR’ is prominently displayed in amber on the HSI slightly below and
AFCS
to the left of the aircraft symbol on the HSI. The CDI deviation bar is removed from the display in DR Mode. The
autopilot will remain coupled in DR mode as long as the deviation info is available. Lastly, but at the same time,
a ‘GPS NAV LOST’ alert message appears on the PFD. Normal navigation using GPS/SBAS source data resumes
automatically once a valid GPS solution is restored.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
As a result of operating in DR Mode, all GPS-derived data is computed based upon an estimated position and
is displayed as amber text on the display to denote degraded navigation source information as shown in the
following figure. If the VSD Inset is selected on the MFD, ‘VSD Not Available’ will be displayed.
While the system is in DR Mode, some terrain functions are not available. Additionally, the accuracy of all nearest
APPENDICES
information (airports, airspaces, and waypoints) is questionable. Finally, airspace alerts continue to function, but
with degraded accuracy.
INDEX
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
Distance &
Bearing
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Current
Track
Indicator
GPS Navigation
Lost Message
EIS
Course Deviation
AUDIO PANEL
Indicator Removed
& CNS
Dead Reckoning
Annunciation
Bearing
Pointer/
MANAGEMENT
Distance
FLIGHT
Nav Data Bar
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Dead Reckoning
Annunciation
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-73 Dead Reckoning Mode - GPS Derived Data Shown in Amber
APPENDICES
INDEX
240
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Blank Page

190-02452-00 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
Hazard avoidance features available for the system are designed to aid situational awareness and provide advisory
information with regard to potential hazards to flight safety associated with weather, terrain, and air traffic.
INSTRUMENTS
Weather
FLIGHT
• GDL 69/69A SXM SiriusXM Weather (Subscription Optional)
• GSR 56 Garmin Connext Weather (Optional)
• Flight Information Services-Broadcast (Optional)
• L-3 Stormscope® WX-500 Lightning Detection System (Optional)
EIS
Terrain Avoidance
• Terrain Proximity
AUDIO PANEL
• Terrain-SVT (included with Garmin SVT option)
& CNS
Traffic
• Traffic Information Service (TIS)
MANAGEMENT
®
• Avidyne TAS600 Series Traffic Advisory System (TAS) (Optional)
FLIGHT
• Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Broadcast (ADS-B) Traffic (Optional)
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
6.1 DATA LINK WEATHER

SYSTEM
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous
INSTRUMENTS
weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current
FLIGHT
weather conditions.
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather
information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product
EIS
may be older than the indicated weather product age.

The Data Link Weather feature enables the system to receive weather information from a variety of weather
sources, depending on the equipment installed in the aircraft. These sources may include SiriusXM Weather,
AUDIO PANEL
Garmin Connext Weather, and Flight Information Services-Broadcast (FIS-B). For each source, a ground-based
& CNS
system processes the weather information collected from a network of sensors and weather data providers.
The SiriusXM Weather service, available with the Garmin 69A SXM data link receiver and an active service
subscription, updates its weather data periodically and automatically, and transmits this information to the
MANAGEMENT
aircraft’s receiver via satellite on the S-Band frequency. This service provides continuous reception capabilities at
FLIGHT
any altitude throughout North America.

The FIS-B Weather service, available when equipped with a capable transponder or data link receiver which
can receive 978 MHz Universal Access Transceiver (UAT) data, delivers subscription-free weather information
AVOIDANCE
periodically and automatically to the aircraft. FIS-B uses a network of FAA-operated Ground-Based Transceivers
HAZARD
(GBTs) to transmit the information to the aircraft’s receiver. Reception is limited to line-of-sight, and is available
below 24,000 feet MSL in the United States. FIS-B broadcasts provide weather data in a repeating cycle which
may take approximately ten minutes to transmit all available weather data. Therefore, not all weather data may
be present immediately upon initial FIS-B signal acquisition. FIS-B is a component of the Automatic Dependent
Surveillance (ADS-B) system, which offers both weather and traffic data; refer to the ADS-B Traffic discussion later
AFCS
in this section for a more detailed discussion of the ADS-B system and its capabilities.
The Garmin Connext Weather service, available when equipped with the Garmin GSR 56 Iridium Satellite
Transceiver and an active service subscription, provides data link weather information to the aircraft after the pilot
defines a geographic area and subsequently selects a manual or automatically recurring Connext Data Request.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The transceiver then contacts the Garmin Connext Weather service using the Iridium Satellite telephone system
and retrieves the weather data for the specified area. The Garmin Connext Weather service offers worldwide
weather coverage, but the availability of individual weather products, such as radar precipitation, varies by region.
APPENDICES
NOTE: To check the availability of Garmin Connext weather products offered in a particular region, visit
http://www.flygarmin.com
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
ACTIVATING DATA LINK WEATHER SERVICES
SYSTEM
NOTE: Service activation is not applicable to the FIS-B Weather service.
INSTRUMENTS
ACTIVATING THE SIRIUSXM WEATHER SERVICE
FLIGHT
Before SiriusXM Weather can be used, the service must be enabled by providing SiriusXM’s customer
service the coded ID(s) unique to the installed data link receiver. The Data Radio ID must be provided to
activate the weather service. A separate Audio Radio ID, if present, enables the receiver to provide SiriusXM
Radio entertainment. To view this information, refer to the following locations:
EIS
• The Aux - XM Information Page on the MFD
• The SiriusXM Activation Instructions included with the Data Link Receiver
• The label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SiriusXM uses the coded IDs to send an activation signal that allows the system to display weather data and/
or provide audio entertainment programming through the data link receiver.
Establishing an account for SiriusXM services:
MANAGEMENT
1) Select the XM Radio Page in the Aux Page Group.
FLIGHT
2) If necessary, press the Info Softkey to display the ‘Aux - XM Information’ Page.
3) Note the Data Radio ID (for SiriusXM Weather data) and/or the Audio Radio ID (for SiriusXM Satellite Radio).
4) Contact SiriusXM customer service through the phone number listed on its website, www.siriusxm.com.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
5) Provide SiriusXM customer service the Data Radio ID and/or Audio Radio ID, in addition to payment information,
and the desired weather product subscription package.
After SiriusXM has been contacted, it may take approximately 15 minutes until the activation occurs.
Verifying the SiriusXM Weather service activation:
AFCS
1) Once a SiriusXM Weather account has been established, select the XM Radio Page in the Auxiliary Page Group.
2) If necessary, press the Info Softkey to display the ‘Aux - XM Information’ Page.
3) View the list of supported Weather Products. An empty box appears next to an unavailable weather product; a
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
green filled box appears next to an available weather product. During activation, it may take several minutes
for weather products in the selected subscription package to become available.
NOTE: Not all weather products offered by SiriusXM are supported for display on this system. This pilot’s
APPENDICES
guide only discusses supported weather products.

INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
Data Radio ID Audio Radio ID

(for SiriusXM (for SiriusXM Satellite
Weather Radio)
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Weather Products
(Available Products for
EIS
Service Class Indicated

in Green)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Select to Display XM
Information page
Figure 6-1 XM Information Page
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
ACTIVATING GARMIN CONNEXT WEATHER

The Garmin Connext weather service requires an active Iridium satellite telephone and
weather data subscription. Registration begins by first obtaining the serial number(s) for the
installed Iridium Satellite Transceiver (GSR 1), and the System ID. Then go to the website
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
www.flygarmin.com and follow the instructions for establishing an account for Garmin Connext data services.
Note additional information about the airframe may be required. After an account has been established,
Garmin provides an access code that must be entered on the system and successfully transmitted to the
Garmin Connext service via the Iridium satellite network.
Obtaining the LRU serial numbers and System ID:
AFCS
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Status’ Page.

2) Press the LRU Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
3) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll the cursor until ‘GSR 1’ is visible in the ‘LRU Information’ window.
FEATURES
4) Note the serial number displayed for ‘GSR 1’.

5) Press the FMS Knob to deactivate the cursor.
APPENDICES
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
System ID Number
EIS
Iridium Transceiver
Serial Number
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Figure 6-2 Identification Needed for Iridium Registration
When an account is established, Garmin provides an Access Code which must be entered on the system in
AVOIDANCE
order to complete the registration process.
HAZARD
Registering the system to receive Garmin Connext Weather:
1) Go to www.flygarmin.com. Locate the information for subscribing to Garmin Connext Satellite Services on the
website.
2) Choose a desired service which includes weather data and enter the requested information about the aircraft.
AFCS
3) Note the Access Code provided during the registration process and any additional instructions received.
4) With the aircraft outside and having a clear view of the sky, turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the
Map page group.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (CNXT)’ Page. If another data link weather
source such as ‘XM’ or ‘FIS-B’ is displayed in the page title, it will be necessary to change the data link weather
source to CNXT before continuing. Refer to ‘Viewing the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page’ procedure to change
the data link source to prior to registration.
APPENDICES
6) If the system displays the Connext Registration Window, proceed to step 8. Otherwise, press the MENU Key.
The page menu window is now displayed.
7) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘Register With Connext’ in the menu list.
8) Press the ENT Key. The Connext Registration Window appears as shown in the following figure.
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-3 Enter Access Code

FLIGHT
6) Enter the access code provided by Garmin in the ‘Access Code’ field.
7) Press the ENT Key. ‘Register’ is highlighted as in Figure 6-3.
AVOIDANCE
8) Press the ENT Key. The system contacts Garmin through the Iridium network. System registration is complete
HAZARD
when the Current Registration Window displays the correct information for the Airframe, Tail Number, Airframe
Serial Number, and Iridium Serial Number.
9) When finished, push the FMS Knob to remove the Connext Registration Window.
WEATHER PRODUCT AGE

AFCS
Unlike real-time weather information collected directly from weather sensors on-board an aircraft, such as an
airborne weather radar or a lightning detection system, data link weather in contrast relies on external service
providers to collect, process, and transmit weather information to the aircraft. This information can come from
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
a variety of sources such as government agencies.
NOTE: Due to the time it takes to collect, process, and distribute data link weather information, it is
imperative for pilots to understand that data link weather information is not real-time information and may
APPENDICES
not accurately depict current conditions.

INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
For each data link weather product which can be displayed as a map overlay, such as radar precipitation,
the system can also show a weather product age. This age represents the elapsed time, in minutes, since the
INSTRUMENTS
weather service provider compiled the weather product and the current time. It does not represent the age of the
FLIGHT
information contained within the weather product itself. For example, a single mosaic of radar precipitation is
comprised data from multiple radar sites providing data at differing scan rates or intervals. The weather service
provider periodically compiles this data to create a single composite image, and assigns one time to this image
which becomes the basis of the product age. The service provider then makes this weather product available for
data link transmission at the next scheduled update time. The actual age of the weather data contained within
EIS
the mosaic is therefore older than its weather product age and should never be considered current.
SiriusXM and FIS-B weather products are broadcast automatically on a repeating cycle without pilot
intervention. For the Garmin Connext service, the pilot schedules a one-time or repeating data request at
AUDIO PANEL
regular intervals.
& CNS
Each data link weather product age has an expiration time. The weather product age is shown in white if it
is less than half of this expiration time, otherwise it is shown in amber until reaching its expiration time. After
a weather product has expired, the system removes the expired weather product from the displays, and shows
MANAGEMENT
white dashes instead of the age. If the data link receiver has not yet received a weather product ‘N/A’ appears
FLIGHT
instead of the age to show the product is currently not available for display. This may occur, for example, after
powering on the system but before the data link receiver has received a complete weather data transmission. It
could also indicate a possible outage of a weather product.
The weather product age is shown automatically for weather products displayed on MFD maps. For PFD
AVOIDANCE
maps, the pilot can manually enable/disable the age information.
HAZARD
Enabling/disabling the weather product age for PFD Maps:
1) With the PFD Inset Map or HSI Map displayed, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the WX LGND to show/remove the weather product age information for PFD maps.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
Tables 6-1 and 6-2 show the weather product symbols, the and expiration times for SiriusXM Weather and
SYSTEM
FIS-B Weather, respectively. The FIS-B broadcast rate represents the interval at which the FIS-B Weather service
transmits new signals that may or may not contain updated weather product information. It does not represent
the rate at which the weather information is updated or when the Data Link Receiver receives new data. The
service provider and its weather data suppliers define and control the data update intervals, which are subject
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
to change.
Expiration Time
SiriusXM Weather Product Symbol
(Minutes)
NEXRAD 30
EIS
Cloud Top (CLD TOP) 60

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Echo Top (ECHO TOP) 30
SiriusXM Lightning (LTNG) 30

MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Cell Movement 30
SIGMETs/AIRMETs 60
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
METARs 90
City Forecast 90
Surface Analysis 60
AFCS
Freezing Levels 120

ADDITIONAL
Winds Aloft 90
FEATURES
County Warnings 60
APPENDICES
Cyclone Warnings 60
Icing Potential (CIP and SLD) 90
Pilot Weather Report (PIREP) 90

INDEX
Table 6-1 SiriusXM Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
Expiration Time
SiriusXM Weather Product Symbol
(Minutes)
Air Report(AIREP) 90
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Turbulence 180
Radar Coverage Not Available No product image 30

Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) No product image 60
Terminal Aerodrome Forecast (TAF) No product image 60
EIS
Table 6-1 SiriusXM Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
AUDIO PANEL
Expiration Time Broadcast Rate
& CNS
FIS-B Weather Product Symbol
(Minutes) (Minutes)
NEXRAD Composite (US) 30 15
MANAGEMENT
NEXRAD Composite (Regional) 30 2.5
FLIGHT
METARs 90 5
AVOIDANCE
Pilot Weather Report (PIREP) 90 10
HAZARD
Winds Aloft 90 10
SIGMETs/AIRMETs 60 5
AFCS
No Radar Coverage no product image 30 2.5
Terminal Aerodrome Forecast
no product image 60 10
(TAF)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) no product image 10
Table 6-2 FIS-B Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
The following table shows the Garmin Connext Weather product symbols, the expiration times and the
APPENDICES
refresh rates. The refresh rate represents the interval at which Garmin Connext weather service makes available
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
the most current known weather data. It does not necessarily represent the rate at which the service receives
SYSTEM
new data from various weather sources. The pilot chooses how often to contact the Garmin Connext weather
service in order to retrieve weather data through the Connext Data Request.
Expiration Time Refresh Rate

INSTRUMENTS
Garmin Connext Weather Product Symbol

(Minutes) (Minutes)
FLIGHT
U.S.: 3*
Canada: 3*†
Radar Precipitation 30
Europe: 15
Australia: 15ˆ
EIS
Infrared Satellite 60 30
Datalink Lightning 30 Continuous

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SIGMETs/AIRMETs 60 Continuous
METARs 90 Continuous
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Winds Aloft 90 Continuous
Pilot Weather Report (PIREPs) 90 Continuous

AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRs) no product image 60 Continuous
Terminal Aerodrome Reports TAFs) no product image 60 Continuous
* The composite precipitation image is updated every 3 minutes, but individual radar sites may take between 3 and
10 minutes to provide new data.
AFCS
†
Canadian radar precipitation data provided by Environment Canada.
ˆ Australian radar precipitation data provided by the Australian Bureau of Meteorology.
Table 6-3 Garmin Connext Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
DISPLAYING DATA LINK WEATHER PRODUCTS
SYSTEM
WEATHER DATA LINK PAGE
The Map - Weather Data Link (XM/FIS-B/CNXT) Page is the principal map page for viewing data link weather
INSTRUMENTS
information. This page provides the capability for displaying the most data link weather products of any map
FLIGHT
on the system. The Weather Data Link Page also provides system-wide controls for selecting the data link
weather source, if more than one source has been installed. The page title indicates the selected data link
weather source (e.g., “XM”, “FIS-B” or “CNXT”).
NEXRAD Weather
Product Display
EIS
Enabled Icon
NEXRAD Weather
AUDIO PANEL
Product Age (US)
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
NEXRAD
HAZARD
Weather Product
Selected for
Display
AFCS
Figure 6-4 Weather Data Link (XM) Page
Viewing the Weather Data Link Page and changing the data link weather source, if applicable:
ADDITIONAL
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Weather Data Link (XM or CNXT or FIS-B) Page. The currently selected
data link weather source appears in the page title.
3) If the page title does not contain the desired weather source, press the MENU Key.
APPENDICES
a) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Display XM Weather’, ‘Display Connext Weather’ or ‘Display FIS-B Weather’
(choices may vary depending on the installed equipment).
b) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Figure 6-5 Changing the Data Link Weather Source

EIS
The system presents the softkeys for the selected source on the Weather Data Link Page, and for map overlays
used throughout the system. The following figures show the softkeys for the Weather Data Link Page based on
the selected source.
AUDIO PANEL
WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) PAGE SOFTKEYS

& CNS
NOTE: Only softkeys pertaining to data link weather features are shown in the following tables.
MANAGEMENT

FLIGHT
NEXRAD Enables/disables the NEXRAD weather product overlay.

Echo Top Enables/disables the Echo Tops weather product overlay.
CLD Top Enables/disables the Cloud Tops weather product overlay.
XM LTNG Enables/disables the SiriusXM Lightning weather product overlay.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Cell MOV Enables/disables the Cell Movement weather product overlay.

SIG/AIR Enables/disables the SIGMET/AIRMET weather product overlay.
METAR Enables/disables the graphical METAR weather product overlay.
Legend Enables/disables the SiriusXM Weather Legends Window. Softkey available
for selection when at least one SiriusXM Weather product is enabled.
AFCS
More WX Displays second-level SiriusXM Weather product softkeys.

Cyclone Enables/disables the Cyclone weather product overlay.
SFC Displays third level softkey for enabling/disabling the Surface Analysis and
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
City Forecast weather product and selecting a forecast period.

Off Disables the Surface Analysis and City Forecast weather product overlay.
Current Displays the Surface Analysis for the current time period overlay.
12 HR, 24 HR, 36 HR, These softkeys display a Surface Analysis and City Forecast overlay for the
APPENDICES
48 HR selected future time period.

Back Returns to the second-level softkeys.
FRZ LVL Enables/disables the Freezing Level weather product overlay.
INDEX
Wind Displays third level softkeys for enabling/disabling the Winds Aloft weather
product and selecting a winds aloft altitude.
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
PREV Shows the previous level of winds aloft altitude softkeys.
Off Disables the Winds Aloft weather product overlay.
Softkeys available for Enables/disables the Winds Aloft weather product for the surface (SFC)
INSTRUMENTS
selecting winds from through 15,000 feet. Softkeys available for 3,000 foot increments of
FLIGHT
the Surface to 42,0000 altitude.
feet
Next Shows the next level of winds aloft altitude softkeys.
EIS
ICNG Displays altitude softkeys for the Icing weather product overlay.
AUDIO PANEL
PREV Shows the previous level of Icing altitude softkeys.
& CNS
Off Disables the Icing weather product.
Softkeys available for Enables/disables the Icing weather product overlay from 1,000 feet to
selecting winds from 30,000 feet. Softkeys available for 3,000 foot increments of altitude.
MANAGEMENT
the Icing altitude from
to 1,000 to 30,000 feet
FLIGHT
Next Shows the next level of Icing weather product softkeys.
AVOIDANCE
TURB Displays softkeys for enabling/disabling the Turbulence weather product
HAZARD
overlay.
PREV Shows the previous level of Turbulence altitude softkeys.
Off Disables the Turbulence weather product overlay.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM

Softkeys available for Enables/disables the Icing weather product overlay from 21,000 feet to
selecting Turbulence 45,000 feet. Softkeys available for 3,000 foot increments of altitude.
altitude from 21,000
INSTRUMENTS
feet to 45,000 feet

FLIGHT
Next Shows the next level of Icing weather product softkeys.

AIREPS Enables/disables the AIREPs weather product overlay.
EIS
PIREPS Enables/disables the PIREPs weather product overlay.

County Enables/disables the County Warnings weather product overlay.
AUDIO PANEL
Back Returns to the first level softkeys.

& CNS
WEATHER DATA LINK (CNXT) PAGE SOFTKEYS

PRECIP Enables/disables the Precipitation weather product overlay.
MANAGEMENT
IR SAT Enables/disables the Infrared Satellite weather product overlay.

FLIGHT

METAR Enables/disables the METAR weather product overlay.
Legend Enables/disables the Connext Weather Legends Window. Softkey available
AVOIDANCE
for selection when at least one Connext Weather product is enabled.

HAZARD
More WX Displays second-level Connext Weather product softkeys.

AFCS

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
feet
APPENDICES

PIREPs Enables/disables the PIREPs weather product overlay.
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
WEATHER DATA LINK (FIS-B) PAGE SOFTKEYS)
SYSTEM
NEXRAD Cycles through NEXRAD display modes with each press:
or
INSTRUMENTS
NEXRAD (with annunciator disabled): No NEXRAD is shown.
US
FLIGHT
US: Displays NEXRAD data for the Continental US (CONUS).
or
RGNL: Displays regional NEXRAD data.
RGNL
or US/RGNL: Displays regional NEXRAD data where available, and CONUS
NEXRAD data in other coverage areas.
US/RGNL
EIS
IR SAT Enables/disables the Infrared Satellite weather product overlay.
METAR Enables/disables the METAR weather product overlay.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
More WX Displays second-level Connext Weather product softkeys.
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
feet
AFCS
PIREPs Enables/disables the PIREPs weather product overlay.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Weather Data Link Page can display a legend for each enabled weather product.
Viewing legends for displayed weather products on the Weather Data Link Page:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
APPENDICES
2) Press the Legend Softkey to display the legends for the displayed weather products.
Or:
b) Select ‘Weather Legend’ and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the legends if more are available than fit in the window.
INDEX
4) To remove the Weather Legends Window, press the Legend Softkey, the ENT or the CLR Key, or press the FMS
Knob.
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
Additional information about the following weather products can be displayed by panning the Map Pointer
SYSTEM
over the following products on the Weather Data Link Page:

• Echo Tops • METARs
• Cloud Tops • County Warnings
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
• Cell Movement • TFRs

• SIGMETs • AIREPs
• AIRMETs • PIREPs
The map panning feature is enabled by pressing the Joystick. The map range is adjusted by turning the
Joystick. If the map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map Pointer.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Additional
Information
on Weather Storm Cell
Feature Selected with Map
Selected with Pointer
Map Pointer
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
Figure 6-6 Panning on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
Certain weather products, such as METARs or TFRs have associated full text. When a weather product is
SYSTEM
selected with the Map Pointer, press the ENT Key. The system displays the full text for the selected weather
product in a window. To remove the window, press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.
The Weather Data Link Page also has a page menu that can be accessed by pressing the MENU Key. It has
INSTRUMENTS
controls for enabling/disabling the weather products as an alternative to using the softkeys.
FLIGHT
Customizing the Weather Data Link Page
The Weather Data Link Page includes controls for selecting the maximum map range to display each
weather product on the page. If the pilot increases the map range beyond this selected maximum range,
the system removes the weather product from the map. If more than one data link weather source has been
EIS
installed, the system uses the same maximum map range for the comparable weather product of another
source.
Setting up and customizing the Weather Data Link Page:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Weather Setup’, then press the ENT Key.
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Product Group 1’ or ‘Product Group 2’, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (On/Off, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (XM) Page with the changed settings.
NOTE: ‘Product Group 2’ is only applicable to SiriusXM and Garmin Connext Weather.
Restoring default Weather Data Link Page settings:
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Weather Setup’, then press the ENT Key.
FEATURES
5) Highlight the desired default(s) to restore (all or for selection) and press ENT Key.
6) When finished, press the FMS Knob or press the CLR Key.
APPENDICES
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
WEATHER PRODUCT MAP OVERLAYS

SYSTEM
Other PFD and MFD maps and pages can display a smaller set of data link weather products. The following
table shows which data link weather products can be displayed on specific maps, indicated with a ‘+’ symbol.
INSTRUMENTS
Weather Information Page

FLIGHT
Aux - Trip Planning Page

Weather Data Link Page
Navigation Map Page
Nearest Page Group
Flight Plan Pages

Aux - Video Page
PFD Map
Data Link Weather Product
EIS
NEXRAD + + + + + + +
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Cloud Top +
Echo Top +
Data Link Lightning + + + + + + +
MANAGEMENT
Cell Movement + + +
FLIGHT
SIGMETs/AIRMETs +
METARs + + + + + + + +
Surface Analysis & City Forecast +
AVOIDANCE
Freezing Levels +
HAZARD
Winds Aloft +* +
County Warnings +
Cyclone Warnings +
Icing Potential +
AFCS
PIREPs + +
AIREPs + +
Turbulence (TURB) +
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
No Radar Coverage + + + + + + +
TFRs + + + + + + + +
TAFs +
* Winds Aloft data is available inside the VSD when VSD is enabled on the Navigation Map Page.
APPENDICES
Table 6-4 Weather Product Display Maps
Displaying Data Link Weather Products on the Navigation Map Page:

1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
INDEX
3) Press the softkey to enable/disable the desired weather product.

The Navigation Map Page also can display legends for weather products enabled on this map with the
Legend Softkey. This softkey is subdued if no weather products are enabled.
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
Showing/removing the weather legend on the Navigation Map Page:
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the Legend Softkey to show the weather legends window.
FLIGHT
4) When finished, press the Legend Softkey again, or press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to remove the window.
The Navigation Map Page also allows the pilot to select the maximum map range to display weather
products. If the pilot increases the map range beyond this selected maximum range, the system removes
the weather product from the map. The system uses this setting for all navigation maps, including those
displayed on the PFD.
EIS
Setting up and customizing weather data for the navigation maps:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ Group and press the ENT Key.
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
The system can also display data link weather information on the PFD navigation maps.
Displaying Data Link Weather products on the PFD:
NOTE: Data link lightning is not applicable to the FIS-B Weather service.
AFCS
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) To enable/disable a data link lightning weather product on a PFD, press the Lightning Softkey.
a) Press the desired source of lightning or press the LTNG Off Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
b) Press the Back Softkey twice to return to the top-level PFD Softkeys.
On the MFD maps, the weather product icon and age appear automatically when a weather is enabled and
the range is within the maximum display limits. On PFD maps, this information is available using the PFD
softkeys.
APPENDICES
Enabling/disabling the weather product icon and age display (PFD maps):
2) Press the WX LGND Softkey to enable/disable the weather product age, source, and icon box display on PFD
Maps.
INDEX
The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page and the Weather Data Link Page control the map range settings
above which weather products data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the weather
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
product map range setting is selected, the weather product data is removed from the map. The page menus
SYSTEM
also provide an alternative to using the softkeys to enable/disable data link weather product overlays on maps.
CONNEXT DATA REQUESTS

INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
NOTE: Data requests are not applicable to the SiriusXM Weather or FIS-B Weather services.
The Connext Data Request Menu provides the pilot with the options to define the requested weather coverage
area(s), choose automatic weather update intervals (if desired), and the ability to send or cancel weather data
requests. A Request Status Window inside the menu shows the status of the Connext Data Request.
EIS
Before a Connext Data Request can occur, a valid request coverage area must be defined from which all
currently available Garmin Connext Weather products will be retrieved. At a minimum, either the aircraft’s
present position or a waypoint (as part of a flight plan or entered directly in the ‘WAYPOINT’ coverage field)
must be part of the request coverage area, otherwise the request status window indicates ‘INVALID COVERAGE
AUDIO PANEL
AREA’ and the system will not allow a request to occur.

& CNS
It is not necessary for a destination (based on an active flight plan), a flight plan, or waypoint to be specified
prior to enabling these coverage areas; however no weather data will be retrieved for these option(s) until a
flight plan or waypoint is provided, respectively.
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Manually Requesting Garmin Connext Weather information:

1) Select the ‘Weather Data Link (CNXT)’ Page.
AVOIDANCE
3) With ‘Connext Data Request’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.

HAZARD
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired coverage option(s) and press the ENT Key to show or hide a
green check mark to select one of more of the following coverage selections (Figures 6-8, 6-9):
• Present Position – Requests data based on current location.
• Destination – Requests data based on the active flight plan destination (Direct-To destinations excluded). See
AFCS
the Flight Management section for more information about entering and activating flight plans.
• FPL – Requests data along an active flight plan, if one currently exists. Turn the small FMS Knob to select
the desired flight plan look-ahead distance option (or choose ‘Remaining FPL’ to request weather data for the
ADDITIONAL
remainder of the flight plan), then press the ENT Key.

FEATURES
• Waypoint – Requests data based on a waypoint (which may be off-route). Turn the large and small FMS
Knobs to enter a waypoint, then press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob highlight to the ‘Diameter / Route Width’ distance field and turn the small FMS Knob
APPENDICES
to select the desired diameter and route width of the request, then press the ENT Key.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob until the ‘Send Request’ field is highlighted. Press the ENT Key to initiate the request
immediately or press the FMS Knob to return to the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page without requesting
weather data.
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
EIS
Figure 6-7 Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page Menu
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Figure 6-8 Connext Data Request Window
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Destination Selected,
Present Position Selected, 200 nm Diameter
200 nm Diameter Requested
EIS
Requested
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Off-Route Waypoint
Next 80 nm of Flight Plan Selected, 200 nm Diameter
AVOIDANCE
Selected, 200 nm Route Requested

HAZARD
Width Requested
Figure 6-9 Garmin Connext Weather Data Request Results with Precipitation Data Displayed
AFCS
During a Connext Data Request, the Request Status Window initially displays “Contacting Connext...”. Once
a connection is established, the Request Status Window displays “Receiving Wx Data... Time Remaining:” with
an estimated data transfer time (either minutes or seconds). If desired, the Connext Data Request Menu may
be removed while the data request is processing by pressing the FMS Knob; the data request will continue
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
to process in the background. Connext Data Requests typically take between 1 to 4 minutes to complete
depending on the size of the selected weather coverage area, the amounts of weather activity present, and the
Iridium signal strength.
The system retrieves all available Garmin Connext Weather products within the selected coverage area during
APPENDICES
an initial Connext Data Request, regardless of which products (if any) are currently enabled for display. On
subsequent requests, the system retains previously retrieved textual data (such as METARs and TAFS) if it has
not expired, while new textual weather data matching the current coverage area and all graphical weather data
is transferred to the aircraft during every data request.
At the completion of a successful weather data request, the Request Status Window indicates ‘OK’ if the
INDEX
Connext Data Request menu is still within view.
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
Cancelling a Connext Data Request in Progress:
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Cancel Request’ field and press the ENT Key. The request status box
indicates ‘Request Cancelled’.
5) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
The flight crew can schedule Connext Data Requests to recur automatically. Automatic requests remain
EIS
enabled until the flight crew them, or the system power is removed. The Request Status Window indicates the
number of minutes or seconds until the next automatic data request occurs.
NOTE: If automatic Connext Data Requests were enabled prior to the system entering Reversionary Mode,
AUDIO PANEL
the automatic weather data requests will continue in Reversionary Mode, however the Connext Data
& CNS
Request Window and its associated options will not be available in Reversionary Mode.
Enabling/disabling automatic Connext Data Requests:
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
4) Choose the desired weather coverage options.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Update Rate’ field. Then turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the
desired automatic update frequency (Off, 5 Min, 10 Min, 15 Min, 20 Min, 30 Min, 45 Min, or 60 Min), then press
the ENT Key.
6) The ‘Send Request’ field is highlighted and a countdown timer is displayed in the ‘Request Status’ Window
based on the currently selected update rate. Press the ENT Key to immediately send an immediate Connext
AFCS
Data Request.
Or:
Press the FMS Knob to return to the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
WEATHER PRODUCT OVERVIEW

SYSTEM
The following is an overview of data link weather products the system can display.
NEXRAD (SIRIUSXM)
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
NOTE: Datalink weather radar information cannot be displayed at the same time as relative terrain, echo
tops, icing, or turbulence data.
The National Weather Service (NWS) operates the WSR-88D, or NEXRAD (NEXt-generation RADar)
system, an extensive network of 156 high-resolution Doppler radar systems. The NEXRAD network provides
EIS
centralized meteorological information for the continental United States and selected overseas locations. The
maximum range of a single NEXRAD site is 250 nm.
Individual NEXRAD sites supply the network with radar images, and the images from each radar site may
AUDIO PANEL
arrive at the network at different rates and times. Periodically, the weather data provider compiles the available
& CNS
individual site images from the network to form a composite image, and assigns a single time to indicate when
it created the image. This image becomes the NEXRAD weather product. Individual images--gathered from
each NEXRAD site--differ in age, and are always older than the displayed NEXRAD weather product age. The
data provider then sends the NEXRAD data to the SiriusXM Weather service, whose satellites transmit this
MANAGEMENT
information during the next designated broadcast time for the NEXRAD weather product.
FLIGHT
Because of the time required to detect, assemble, and distribute the NEXRAD weather product, the displayed
weather information contained within the product may be significantly older than the current radar synopsis
and may not depict the current weather conditions. The NEXRAD weather product should never be used as a
basis for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous weather regardless of the information it contains.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 6-10 NEXRAD Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
For radar sites in the United States, the NEXRAD weather product shows a composite reflectivity image.
SYSTEM
This shows the highest radar energy received from multiple antenna tilt angles at various altitudes. For radar
sites based in Canada, the NEXRAD weather product shows radar returns from the lowest antenna tilt angle,
known as base reflectivity. The display of the information is color-coded to indicate the intensity of the echoes
and the type of precipitation, if known.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Displaying the NEXRAD weather product on the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey.
A mosaic of data from all the available NEXRAD radar sites is shown.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
No Radar Coverage
Figure 6-11 NEXRAD Weather Product Legend
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Displaying the NEXRAD weather product on the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey.
Displaying the NEXRAD weather product on PFD maps
AFCS
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey to enable/disable the display of NEXRAD information.
ADDITIONAL
The display of No Radar Coverage is always active when either NEXRAD or Echo Tops is selected. Areas
FEATURES
where NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops information is not currently available or is not being collected
are indicated in gray shade of purple.
The pilot can select either the United States or Canada region for the desired NEXRAD coverage area on the
Weather Data Link (XM) Page. NEXRAD information is shown for the selected region, while a gray shade of
APPENDICES
purple is shown for the region which is not selected.

INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
Selecting the NEXRAD Coverage Region on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page:
SYSTEM

2) Turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Weather Setup’ and press the ENT Key.
INSTRUMENTS
3) With Product Group 1 selected, turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the NEXRAD Region field.
FLIGHT
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘US’ or ‘CNDA’, then press the ENT Key.
5) To remove the menu, push the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.
The NEXRAD weather product age display indicates either ‘US’ or ‘CN’ for the selected coverage region.
Reflectivity
EIS
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the NEXRAD
display are directly correlative to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous
AUDIO PANEL
weather can be very complex.

& CNS
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of weather
reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the
weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not. Both
wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
The different NEXRAD echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z). NEXRAD
measures the radar reflectivity ratio, or the energy reflected back to the radar receiver (designated by the
letter Z). The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases.
NEXRAD Limitations
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
NEXRAD radar images may have certain limitations:

• Undetermined precipitation types may be displayed as mixed.
• An individual NEXRAD site cannot depict high altitude storms at close ranges. It has no information
about storms directly over the site.
AFCS
• Precipitation may be occurring below the lowest antenna tilt angle (0.5º), and therefore the radar beam
overshoots the precipitation. For example, at a distance of 124 miles from the radar site, the radar beam
is approximately 18,000 feet above the radar site. The radar cannot detect any precipitation occurring
below the beam at this distance and altitude.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• At smaller map ranges, the smallest square block on the display represents an area of approximately
four square kilometers. The intensity level reflected by each square represents the highest level of radar
reflectivity sampled within the area.
• Unknown precipitation below 52ºN is displayed as rain regardless of actual precipitation type.
APPENDICES
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
Block represents
FLIGHT
approximately 4 km2
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-12 NEXRAD Weather Product with 30 NM Map Range
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed NEXRAD radar images:
• Ground clutter
• Strobes and spurious radar data
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
• Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun)
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
• Metallic dust (chaff) from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar scans
AFCS
NEXRAD Limitations (Canada)
• Radar coverage extends to 55ºN.
• Any precipitation displayed between 52ºN and 55ºN is displayed as mixed precipitation regardless of
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
actual precipitation type.
• If the precipitation type is unknown, the system displays the precipitation as rain, regardless of actual
precipitation type. APPENDICES
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
No Coverage
FLIGHT
Above 55°N
EIS
Precipitation
Above 52°N
Always Displays
AUDIO PANEL
as Mixed
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-13 NEXRAD Weather Product - Canada

FLIGHT
NEXRAD (FIS-B)
NOTE: The NEXRAD weather product cannot be displayed at the same time as terrain.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
The National Weather Service (NWS) operates the WSR-88D, or NEXRAD (NEXt-generation RADar)
system, an extensive network of 156 high-resolution Doppler radar systems. The NEXRAD network provides
centralized meteorological information for the continental United States and selected overseas locations. The
maximum range of a single NEXRAD site is 250 nm.
Individual NEXRAD sites supply the network with radar images, and the images from each radar site may
AFCS
arrive at the network at different rates and times. Periodically, the weather data provider to FIS-B compiles
the available individual site images from the network to form a composite image, and assigns a single time
to indicate when it created the image. This image becomes the NEXRAD weather product. Individual
images--gathered from each NEXRAD site--differ in age, and are always older than the displayed NEXRAD
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
weather product age. The data provider then sends the NEXRAD data to the FIS-B GBTs, which transmit this
information during the next designated broadcast time for the NEXRAD weather product.
Because of the time required to detect, assemble, and distribute the NEXRAD weather product, the displayed
weather information contained within the product may be older than the current radar synopsis and may not
APPENDICES
depict the current weather conditions. NEXRAD information should never be used as a basis for maneuvering
in, near, or around areas of hazardous weather regardless of the information it contains.
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
Regional
NEXRAD
Boundary Weather Product
of Regional Icon and Age
NEXRAD Data
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
No radar coverage
within coverage
boundary
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Regional
NEXRAD
Weather Product
MANAGEMENT
enabled
FLIGHT
Figure 6-14 Regional NEXRAD Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page
The FIS-B NEXRAD weather product may be displayed for a region around the GBT (higher resolution,
updated more frequently) or for across the continental United States (lower resolution, updated less
AVOIDANCE
frequently). A combined version of both weather products is also available for display on the same map.
HAZARD
When the combined NEXRAD is selected, regional NEXRAD takes display precedence where data is available,
and continental US NEXRAD is displayed outside of the regional NEXRAD coverage area.
Displaying the FIS-B NEXRAD weather product on the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (FIS-B)’ Page
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (FIS-B)’ Page.
AFCS
2) Press the NXRD Softkey. Each press cycles though a coverage option as the softkey name changes (NXRD US,
NXRD REG, NXRD OFF, or NXRD ALL).
Or:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Weather Setup’ and press the ENT Key.
3) To enable/disable the display of NEXRAD information for the continental United States, turn the small FMS
Knob to highlight the NEXRAD On/Off field.
APPENDICES
a) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘On’ to enable the display of NEXRAD or ‘Off’ to disable.
4) To select the region, turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the Region field.
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
a) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired region. (CONUS, Regional, or Combined)
SYSTEM

5) When finished, push the FMS Knob.
INSTRUMENTS
Continental
FLIGHT
USA NEXRAD
Weather Product
Icon and Age
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
No radar coverage
MANAGEMENT
Regional
FLIGHT
NEXRAD
Weather Product
enabled
Figure 6-15 Continental US (CONUS) NEXRAD Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
Enables/disables
NEXRAD data display for
the continental United
Selects regions States
for NEXRAD
display
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
Figure 6-16 Weather Data Link
& CNS
(FIS-B) Page Menu
Figure 6-17 Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page Setup Menu
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Displaying the FIS-B NEXRAD weather product on the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey. Each press cycles though a coverage option as the softkey name changes (US,
AVOIDANCE
RGNL, or US/RGNL).
HAZARD
Or:
AFCS
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ Group, then press the ENT Key.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the NEXRAD Data Region field.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘CONUS’ (continental United States), ‘RGNL’ (regional), or ‘Combined’,
ADDITIONAL
then press the ENT Key. This selection also affects display of NEXRAD on the PFD Maps.
FEATURES
8) When finished, press the FMS Knob or press the CLR Key.
Displaying the FIS-B NEXRAD weather product on PFD maps: APPENDICES

2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey to enable/disable the display of NEXRAD information.
The regional NEXRAD weather product coverage area varies, as it is determined by the data received from
ground-based sources. When the regional NEXRAD weather product is enabled, a white spiked boundary
INDEX
encloses this area to indicate the geographic limits of the regional NEXRAD coverage being displayed. The
system shows composite radar data from all available NEXRAD sites inside of this boundary area.
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
If the continental United States version of the NEXRAD weather product is shown (US Softkey enabled),
SYSTEM
the coverage boundary is not shown on the map.

This data is composed of the maximum reflectivity from the individual radar sweeps. The display of the
information is color-coded to indicate the weather severity level. All weather product legends can be viewed
INSTRUMENTS
on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page. For the NEXRAD legend, select the Legend Softkey when the
FLIGHT
NEXRAD weather product is enabled.

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
No radar coverage
Boundary of radar
coverage area
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-18 NEXRAD Weather Product Legend

FLIGHT
The display of no radar coverage is enabled when NEXRAD is selected for display. Areas where radar data
is not currently available, has not yet been received, or is not being collected are indicated in gray shade of
purple.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
NOTE: If the system has not received all available NEXRAD weather data (such as during initial FIS-B signal
acquisition or in areas of marginal or poor signal reception), the system may display areas of no radar
coverage which are subsequently removed as radar data is received. It may take up to approximately ten
minutes to receive all FIS-B data, when adequate reception is available.
AFCS
Reflectivity
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the NEXRAD
ADDITIONAL
display are directly correlative to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous
FEATURES
weather can be very complex.

weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not.
APPENDICES
Both wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous. The different NEXRAD echo intensities are measured
in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z). NEXRAD measures the radar reflectivity ratio, or the energy
reflected back to the radar receiver (designated by the letter Z). The value of Z increases as the returned
signal strength increases.
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
NEXRAD Limitations
SYSTEM
NEXRAD radar images may have certain limitations:
• At smaller map ranges, individual blocks of NEXRAD weather data are viewable. For the regional version
of the NEXRAD weather product, the smallest block represents 1.5 nm wide by 1 nm tall. For the
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
continental United States version of the NEXRAD weather product, each block is 7.5 nm wide by 5 nm
wide. The color of each block represents the highest radar reflectivity detected within that area.
• The continental US version of the NEXRAD weather product is not available above 60º of latitude.
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed NEXRAD radar images:
• Ground clutter
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
PRECIPITATION (GARMIN CONNEXT)
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
NOTE: Precipitation data cannot be displayed at the same time as terrain data.
The Precipitation weather product provides radar precipitation information in selected radar coverage areas.
This information comes from individual weather radar sites and weather data sources such as government
agencies. Each radar site or source may provide weather data at differing rates and times. Periodically, the
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Garmin Connext Weather service compiles the available information to form a composite image, and assigns
a single time to indicate when it created the image. This image becomes the Precipitation weather product.
Individual images--gathered from each radar site--differ in age, and are always older than the displayed
Precipitation weather product age.
Because of the time required to detect, assemble, and distribute the Precipitation weather product, the
AFCS
displayed weather information contained within the product may be significantly older than the current
radar synopsis and may not depict the current weather conditions. The Precipitation weather product should
never be used as a basis for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous weather regardless of the
information it contains.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
Precipitation
Weather Product
Boundary of Icon and Age
weather data
request
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Precipitation
Weather Product
enabled
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-19 Precipitation Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
FLIGHT
Displaying Precipitation weather information:

1) Press the Map Opt Softkey (for PFD maps, press the Map/HSI or Map Opt Softkey). This step is not necessary
AVOIDANCE
on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.

HAZARD
2) Press the PRECIP Softkey.

The system displays either base or composite radar imagery, depending on the region.
Region Radar Reflectivity Type

AFCS
United States Composite Reflectivity

Canada, Europe, Australia Base Reflectivity
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The base reflectivity precipitation weather product shows the radar returns from the perspective of a single
antenna tilt angle. The composite reflectivity precipitation weather product shows the highest radar energy
received from multiple antenna tilt angles. The display of the information is color-coded to indicate the
intensity of the echoes and the type of precipitation.
APPENDICES
All weather product legends can be viewed on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page. For the Precipitation
legend, press the Legend Softkey when Precipitation is selected for display.
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
No radar coverage
Boundary of
weather data
EIS
request
Figure 6-20 Precipitation Weather Product Legend
AUDIO PANEL
The display of radar coverage is enabled active when Precipitation is selected for display. Areas where
& CNS
precipitation radar coverage is not currently available or is not being collected are indicated in gray shade of
purple. A white boundary line depicting the selected coverage area of the Connext Data Request encloses the
precipitation data when this weather product is displayed.
MANAGEMENT
Reflectivity
FLIGHT
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the Precipitation
display directly correlate to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous weather
can be very complex.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not. Both
wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
The different radar echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z). Weather
AFCS
radars measure the reflectivity ratio, or the energy reflected back to the radar receiver (designated by the
letter Z). The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases.
Precipitation Limitations
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Radar images may have certain limitations:
• Radar composite reflectivity does not provide sufficient information to determine precipitation
characteristics (wet hail vs. rain). For example, it is not possible to distinguish between wet snow, wet
hail, and rain.
APPENDICES
• An individual radar site cannot depict high altitude storms at close ranges. It has no information about
storms directly over the site.
• At smaller map ranges, individual blocks of radar data are viewable. Each block of radar information
represents approximately four square kilometers and depicts the highest level of reflectivity detected
within that area.
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
EIS
Block represents
AUDIO PANEL
approximately 4 km2
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-21 Precipitation Weather Product at 10 NM Map Range

FLIGHT
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed radar images:

• Ground clutter
AVOIDANCE

HAZARD
AFCS
ECHO TOPS (SIRISUXM)

NOTE: Echo Tops cannot be displayed at the same time as Cloud Tops or NEXRAD data is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Echo Tops weather product shows the location, elevation, and direction of the highest radar echo. The
highest radar echo does not indicate the top of a storm or clouds; rather it indicates the highest altitude at
which precipitation is detected. Information is derived from NEXRAD data.
APPENDICES
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Altitude for
selected Echo Top
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-22 Echo Tops Weather Product
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Displaying Echo Tops information:
1) Select the ‘Weather Data Link’ Page.
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the Echo Top Softkey.
HAZARD
Since Echo Tops and Cloud Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude, display of these weather
products is mutually exclusive. When Echo Tops is activated, NEXRAD and Cloud Tops data are removed.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
No Radar Coverage
Figure 6-23 Echo Tops Legend APPENDICES

INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
CLOUD TOPS (SIRIUSXM)

SYSTEM
NOTE: Cloud Tops and Echo Tops cannot be displayed at the same time.
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: If a GDL 69/69A SXM receiver is installed, the broadcast rate for Cloud Tops is 30 minutes. As with
FLIGHT
all SiriusXM Weather products, the product age becomes amber when it reaches half of the expiration time,
which is 60 minutes for Cloud Tops. Therefore, this weather product age may be amber during routine
operation.
The Cloud Tops weather product depicts cloud top altitudes as determined from satellite imagery.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Figure 6-24 Cloud Tops Weather Product

AFCS
Displaying Cloud Tops information:

1) Select the ‘Weather Data Link’ Page with the FMS Knob.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the CLD Top Softkey.
Since Cloud Tops and Echo Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude, display of these weather
products is mutually exclusive. When Cloud Tops is activated, Echo Tops data is removed.
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 6-25 Cloud Tops Legend
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
DATA LINK LIGHTNING (SIRIUSXM, GARMIN CONNEXT)
SYSTEM
NOTE: Lightning from a data link source cannot be displayed simultaneously on the same map as information
from an optional on-board lightning detection system.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
The Data Link Light weather product shows the approximate location of cloud-to-ground lightning strikes.
A strike icon represents a strike that has occurred within a two-kilometer region. The exact location of the
lightning strike is not displayed.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Lightning
Strikes
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Figure 6-26 Data Link Weather Product
Displaying Data Link Lightning information on Weather Data Link Page:
AFCS
1) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the XM LTNG or DL LTNG Softkey (softkey name depends on the selected weather source).
ADDITIONAL
To display the Lightning legend on the Weather Data Link Page, select the Legend Softkey when Data Link
FEATURES
Lightning is selected for display.
APPENDICES
Figure 6-27 Data Link Lightning Legend
Displaying Data Link Lightning information on the Navigation Map Page:

1) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Navigation Map Page.
INDEX

3) Press the XM LTNG or DL LTNG Softkey.
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
Enabling/disabling Data Link Lightning information on PFD maps:

SYSTEM

2) Press the Lightning Softkey.
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the Datalink Softkey to enable data link lightning from the selected data link weather source, or press
FLIGHT
the LTNG Off Softkey to disable data link lightning.

4) When finished, press the Back Softkey.
CELL MOVEMENT (SIRIUSXM)

The Cell Movement weather product shows the location and movement of storm cells as identified by the
EIS
ground-based system. Cells are represented by yellow squares, with direction of movement indicated with
short, orange arrows.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Storm Cells
Additional
AVOIDANCE
information for
HAZARD
selected Storm Cell

AFCS
Figure 6-28 Cell Movement Weather Product

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
On the Weather Data Link (XM) Page, the Cell Movement weather product has a dedicated CEL MOV
softkey for enabling/disabling this weather product on this page.
NOTE: The Storm Cell base height is not available if a GDL 69 SXM or 69A SXM data link receiver is installed.
APPENDICES
In this case, the Storm Cell base height is displayed as 0 feet when the map pointer selects a storm cell.
Displaying Cell Movement information on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page:
1) Select the ‘Map -Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page using the FMS Knob.
2) Press the Cell MOV Softkey.
INDEX
Figure 6-29 Cell Movement Legend
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
For navigation maps, the pilot can enable/disable the Cell Movement weather product using the NEXRAD
SYSTEM
Softkey. For this to occur, the pilot must first enable the ‘Cell Movement’ option in the Map Settings menu
of the Navigation Map Page.
Setting up the system to display Cell Movement with NEXRAD on navigation maps:
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘Weather’ and press the ENT Key.
EIS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to ‘On’ or ‘Off’ for the Cell Movement menu option. When set to ‘On’, Cell Movement
is enabled/disabled with the NEXRAD weather product on navigation maps. When set to ‘Off’, Cell Movement
is not displayed on navigation maps.
AUDIO PANEL
6) When finished, push the FMS Knob or CLR Key to remove the menu.
& CNS
After the ‘Cell Movement’ option is set to ‘On’, refer to the previous procedures for enabling/disabling the
NEXRAD weather product to control both products simultaneously on navigation maps using the NEXRAD
Softkey.
MANAGEMENT
INFRARED SATELLITE (GARMIN CONNEXT)
FLIGHT
The Infrared Satellite (IR SAT) weather product depicts cloud top temperatures from satellite imagery.
Brighter cloud top colors indicate cooler temperatures occurring at higher altitudes.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-30 Infrared Satellite Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
Displaying Intrared Satellite information:

SYSTEM

2) Select the IR SAT Softkey.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
EIS
Figure 6-31 Infrared Satellite Legend

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SIGMETS AND AIRMETS

SIGMET (SIGnificant METeorological Information) and AIRMET (AIRmen’s METeorological Information)
MANAGEMENT
are issued for potentially hazardous weather. A Convective SIGMET is issued for hazardous convective
FLIGHT
weather such as severe or widespread thunderstorms. A localized SIGMET is a significant weather condition
occurring at a localized geographical position.
NOTE: If SiriusXM Weather is the active data link weather source and a GDL 69/69A SXM receiver installed,
AVOIDANCE
the SIGMET and AIRMET weather products are not available unless at least one SIGMET or AIRMET has
HAZARD
been received. The weather product age indicates ‘N/A’ when no SIGMET or AIRMET is available.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
AIRMET for
Turbulence
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
AIRMET for IFR
AIRMET for conditions
Icing conditions
EIS
SIGMET
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-32 SIGMET/AIRMET Data
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Displaying SIGMETs and AIRMETs:
2) Press the SIG/AIR Softkey.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
3) To view the text of the SIGMET or AIRMET, press the Joystick and move the Map Pointer over the icon.
4) Press the ENT key. The following figure shows sample SIGMET text.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Sample SIGMET Text SIGMET/AIRMET Legend
APPENDICES
Figure 6-33 SIGMET/AIRMET Text and Legend

INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
METARS AND TAFS

SYSTEM
NOTE: Atmospheric pressure as reported for METARs is given in hectopascals (hPa), except for in the United
States, where it is reported in inches of mercury (in Hg). Temperatures are reported in Celsius.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
NOTE: METAR information is only displayed within the installed navigation database service area.
METARs (METeorological Aerodrome Reports) typically contain information about the temperature,
dewpoint, wind, precipitation, cloud cover, cloud heights, visibility, and barometric pressure at an airport or
observation station. They can also contain information on precipitation amounts, lightning, and other critical
EIS
data. METARs reflect hourly observations; non-routine updates include the code “SPECI” in the report.
METARs are shown as colored flags at airports that provide them.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
METAR flag Additional Informa-

selected with Map tion on Weather
Pointer Feature Selected
with Map Pointer
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
Figure 6-34 METAR Flags on the Weather Data Link Page

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TAFs (Terminal Aerodrome Forecasts) are weather predictions for specific airports within a 24- hour period,
and may span up to 36 hours. TAFs typically include forecast wind, visibility, weather phenomena, and sky
conditions using METAR codes.
METAR and TAF text are displayed on the Weather Information Page. METAR data is displayed first in a
APPENDICES
decoded fashion, followed by the original text. Note the original text may contain additional information not
found in the decoded version. TAF information is displayed only in its original form when TAFs are available.
Displaying METAR and TAF text on the MFD:
1) On the ‘Weather Data Link’ Page, press the METAR Softkey.
INDEX
2) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired airport.

3) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with METAR and TAF text.
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. METAR text must be completely
SYSTEM
scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link Page.
Or:
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Waypoint Page Group
a) Select the Airport Information Page.
b) Press the WX Softkey to select the Weather Information Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to display the cursor.
EIS
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired airport and press the ENT Key.
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. Note that the METAR text must
be completely scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
METAR Text for the
Selected Airport
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
TAF Text for the
Selected Airport
AFCS
Figure 6-35 METAR and TAF Text on the Weather Information Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the METAR legend on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page, select the Legend Softkey when
METARs are enabled for display.
The METAR flag color is determined by the information in the METAR text. The system displays a gray
APPENDICES
METAR flag when the system cannot determine the METAR category based on the information available.
INDEX
Figure 6-36 METAR Legend
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
The system also shows METAR flags and their associated text on the Active Flight Plan Page on the MF.D.
SYSTEM
The system shows a METAR flag next to waypoints in the flight plan with an available METAR.
Displaying original METAR text on the Active Flight Plan Page:
INSTRUMENTS
1) Select the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.

FLIGHT

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight a waypoint with an available METAR (indicated with a METAR flag next
to it). The METAR text will appear in the ‘Selected Waypoint Weather’ Window below.
4) When finished, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor or press the FPL Key to exit the Active Flight Plan
Page.
EIS
Original METAR text is also accessible on navigation maps displaying METAR flags. When the map pointer
is panned over a METAR flag, the METAR text is shown in a box near the flag.
AUDIO PANEL
Displaying original METAR text information on the PFD Inset Map:

& CNS

2) Press the METAR Softkey.
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired METAR flag. Original METAR text appears on the map.
FLIGHT
4) When finished, press the Joystick to remove the Map Pointer.
SURFACE ANALYSIS AND CITY FORECAST (SIRIUSXM)

Surface Analysis and City Forecast information is available for current and forecast weather conditions.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Forecasts are available for intervals of 12, 24, 36, and 48 hours.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 6-37 Current Surface Analysis Data
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
Displaying Surface Analysis and City Forecast information:
SYSTEM
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link’ Page.
2) Press the More WX Softkey.
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the SFC Softkey.
FLIGHT
4) Press the softkey for the desired forecast time: Current, 12 HR, 24 HR, 36 HR, or 48 HR. The SFC Softkey
label changes to show the forecast time selected.
Or:
Press the Off Softkey to disable the display of the weather product.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Figure 6-38 Surface Analysis Legend
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
FREEZING LEVEL (SIRIUSXM)

SYSTEM
The Freezing Level weather product shows the color-coded contour lines for the altitude and location at
which the first isotherm is found. When no data is displayed for a given altitude, the data for that altitude
has not been received, or is out of date and has been removed from the display. New data appears when it
INSTRUMENTS
becomes available.
FLIGHT
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Figure 6-39 Freezing Level Data
Displaying Freezing Level information:

AFCS
3) Press the FRZ LVL Softkey.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-40 Freezing Levels Legend

INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
WINDS ALOFT
SYSTEM
The Winds Aloft weather product shows the forecast wind speed and direction at the surface and at selected
altitudes. Altitude can be displayed in 3000-foot increments beginning at the surface up to 42,000 feet MSL.
If the FIS-B option is installed and FIS-B is the active data link weather source, the Winds Aloft weather
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
product also displays temperatures aloft next to the winds aloft arrows on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page.
Displaying the Winds Aloft weather product:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link’ Page with the FMS Knob.
EIS
3) Press the Wind Softkey.
4) Select a softkey for the desired altitude level: SFC (surface) up to 42,000 feet. Select the Next or Prev Softkey
to cycle through the altitude softkeys. The Wind Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
Figure 6-41 Winds Aloft Data at 12,000 Feet
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-42 Winds Aloft Data with Legend

INDEX
Headwind and tailwind components aloft are available inside the Vertical Situation Display (VSD) on the
Navigation Map Page. The displayed components are relative to current aircraft altitude and track, but not
to aircraft speed.
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
Track Mode
Boundary of VSD
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
EIS
Winds Aloft Data Age
Wind Component
AUDIO PANEL
Altitude Scale
Velocity and Direction
& CNS
Arrows
Figure 6-43 Navigation Map Page with Winds Aloft Data on Profile View
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Arrows pointing to the left indicate headwind components; tailwind component arrows point to the right,
as shown in Table 6-5.
Headwind Symbol Tailwind Symbol Headwind/Tailwind Component

AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
None None Less than 5 knots
5 knots
10 knots
AFCS
50 knots
Table 6-5 VSD Headwind/Tailwind Component Symbols

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Enabling/disabling the Vertical Situation Display (containing winds aloft data):

APPENDICES

3) Press the Inset Softkey.
4) Press the VSD Softkey to enable/disable the Vertical Situation Display.
Or:
INDEX

3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Show VSD’ or ‘Hide VSD’ and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
Winds Aloft data inside the VSD is enabled by default when the VSD is displayed on the Navigation Map
SYSTEM
Page. This behavior can be changed on the Navigation Map Page.
Enabling/disabling winds aloft data display for the VSD:
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘VSD’ and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Winds on/off field.
EIS
7) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page with the changed settings.
AUDIO PANEL
COUNTY WARNINGS (SIRIUSXM)
& CNS
The County warning weather product provides specific public awareness and protection weather warnings
from the National Weather Service (NWS). This can include information on tornadoes, severe thunderstorms,
and flood conditions.
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Flood
Warnings
Thunderstorm
Warning
AFCS
Additional
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Information
on Flood
Warning
Selected
with Map
Pointer
APPENDICES
Figure 6-44 County Flood Warning

INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
Displaying County Warning information:

SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the County Softkey.

FLIGHT
EIS
Figure 6-45 County Warnings Legend

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
CYCLONE (SIRIUSXM)
The Cyclone weather product shows the current location of cyclones (hurricanes), tropical storms,
and their projected tracks. The system displays the projected track information in the form of
MANAGEMENT
DD/HH:MM.
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Cyclone
APPENDICES
Figure 6-46 Cyclone Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
Displaying cyclone (hurricane) track information:

INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
3) Press the Cyclone Softkey.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Figure 6-47 Cyclone Legend
NOTE: The Cyclone weather product is not available unless at least one cyclone or tropical storm has been
received. The weather product age indicates ‘N/A’ when no cyclone or tropical storm has been received.
EIS
ICING (CIP & SLD) (SIRIUSXM)
The Current Icing Product (CIP) weather product shows a graphical view of the current icing environment.
AUDIO PANEL
Icing severity is displayed in four categories: light, moderate, severe, and extreme (not specific to aircraft
& CNS
type). The CIP product is not a forecast, but a presentation of the current conditions at the time of the
analysis.
Supercooled Large Droplet (SLD) icing conditions are characterized by the presence of relatively large,
MANAGEMENT
super cooled water droplets indicative of freezing drizzle and freezing rain aloft. SLD threat areas are depicted
FLIGHT
as magenta dots over the CIP colors.
Displaying Icing data:
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
3) Press the ICNG Softkey.
4) Select a softkey for the desired altitude level: 1,000 feet up to 30,000 feet. Press the Next or PREV Softkey to
cycle through the altitude softkeys. The ICNG Softkey label changes to indicate the altitude selected.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Light Icing Potential

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-48 Icing Data at 18,000 Feet

MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Figure 6-49 Icing Potential Legend
TURBULENCE (SIRIUSXM)
The Turbulence weather product identifies the potential for erratic movement of high-altitude air mass
AFCS
associated winds. Turbulence is classified as light, moderate, severe or extreme, at altitudes between 21,000
and 45,000 feet. Turbulence information is intended to supplement AIRMETs, SIGMETs, and PIREPs.
Displaying Turbulence data:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

3) Press the TURB Softkey.
APPENDICES
4) Select a softkey for the desired altitude: 21,000 feet up to 45,000 feet. Press the Next or PREV Softkey to cycle
through the altitude softkeys. The TURB Softkey label changes to indicate the altitude selection.
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-50 Turbulence Weather Product at 21,000 Feet
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Figure 6-51 Turbulence Legend
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
PIREPS AND AIREPS

SYSTEM
NOTE: AIREPs are only available with the SiriusXM Weather service.
INSTRUMENTS
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) are in-flight weather observations collected from pilots. When significant
FLIGHT
weather conditions are reported or forecast, Air Traffic Control (ATC) facilities are required to solicit PIREPs.
A PIREP may contain adverse weather conditions, such as low in-flight visibility, icing conditions, wind shear,
and turbulence. PIREPs are issued as either Routine (UA) or Urgent (UUA).
Another type of PIREP is an Air Report (AIREP). Commercial airlines typically generate AIREPs.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
AIREP
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Urgent PIREP
AVOIDANCE
PIREP selected with

HAZARD
Map Pointer
Figure 6-52 PIREPs and AIREPS on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
AFCS
Displaying PIREP and AIREP text:

ADDITIONAL
2) Select the More WX Softkey.

FEATURES
3) Select the PIREPS or AIREPS Softkey. (Note the AIREPS Softkey is only available with the SiriusXM Weather
service.)
4) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired weather report. A gray circle will appear around the weather report
APPENDICES
when it is selected.
5) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with PIREP or AIREP text. The data is first displayed
in a decoded fashion, followed by the original text. Note the original text may contain additional information
not present in the decoded version.
6) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the PIREP or AIREP text.
INDEX
7) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the ‘Map - Weather Data Link’ Page.
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Decoded PIREP Text
Original PIREP
EIS
Text
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Figure 6-53 PIREP Text on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
The PIREP color is determined by the type (routine or urgent).
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
Figure 6-54 AIREPs & PIREPs Legend
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TFRS
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
NOTE: Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) information.
Always confirm TFR information through official sources such as Flight Service Stations or Air Traffic Control.
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) data from Garmin Connext is only available in the United States (not
FLIGHT
including any U.S. territories.) Refer to http://sites.garmin.com/connext for product coverage information.
In the United States, the FAA issues Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRs) to designate areas where flight is
restricted. TFRs are issued to restrict flight for a variety of reasons including national security, law enforcement,
natural disasters, and large sporting events. TFRs may be issued at any time, and TFR data displayed on the
EIS
system is only intended to supplement official TFR information obtained from Flight Service Stations (FSS),
and air traffic control.
The age of TFR data is not shown; however, if TFR data is not available or has expired, the system displays
AUDIO PANEL
‘TFR N/A’ in the upper-left corner of maps on which TFRs can be displayed.
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Information for
AVOIDANCE
selected TFR
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-55 TFR Data on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
Displaying TFR Data:

1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link’ Page or the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
APPENDICES
2) Press the Joystick and pan the map pointer over a TFR to highlight it. The system displays TFR summary
information above the map.
3) Press the ENT Key. The system displays a pop-up menu.
4) If necessary, turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Review Airspaces’ and press the ENT Key. The system displays the
TFR Information window.
INDEX
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to remove the TFR Information window.
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-56 Full Text for Selected TFR
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page control the map range settings above which TFR data is
decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the TFR product map range setting is selected, the
TFR product data is removed from the map.
Maps other than the Navigation Map Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Setting up and customizing TFR data for maps on which TFR data can be displayed:
AFCS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aviation’ Group and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll to the TFR product range setting.
ADDITIONAL
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (Off, range settings).
FEATURES
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings. APPENDICES
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
FIS-B WEATHER STATUS

SYSTEM
Additional information about the status of FIS-B weather products is available on the Aux - ADS-B Status
Page.
Viewing FIS-B status:
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Aux Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - ADS-B Status’ Page.
On the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) page, the pilot can enable/disable the FIS-B weather feature, which includes
all FIS-B weather products and related softkeys on various maps.
EIS
Enabling/disabling the FIS-B weather feature:

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘Enable FIS-B Weather’ or ‘Disable FIS-B Weather’, and press the ENT Key.
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-57 Viewing FIS-B Weather Status on the ADS-B Status Page
APPENDICES
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
ABNORMAL OPERATIONS FOR GARMIN CONNEXT WEATHER
SYSTEM
If the system cannot complete a Connext Data Request, one or more messages will appear in the Request
Status Window.
INSTRUMENTS
Weather Request Description
FLIGHT
Status Message
Auto requests inhibited The system has disabled automatic weather data requests due to excessive errors. Automatic
Send manual request to weather data requests have stopped. Send a manual weather data request to resume automatic
reset. updates.
Auto update retry: ## The system will attempt another automatic weather data request after an error occurred during the
EIS
Seconds previous request. Timer counts down until the next automatic request occurs.
Connext Comm Error [1] A general error has occurred. If the error persists, the system should be serviced.
Connext Comm Error [2] A communications error has occurred with the GIA. The system should be serviced.
AUDIO PANEL
Connext Comm Error [3] A general error has occurred. If the error persists, the system should be serviced.
& CNS
Connext Comm Error [4] This occurs if multiple automatic weather data requests have recently failed, or the GIA is off-line.
Connext Comm Error [5] This can occur if the Iridium or Garmin Connext services are not accessible. Check Iridium signal
MANAGEMENT
strength. If this error persists, the system should be serviced.
FLIGHT
Connext Comm Error [6] A communications error has occurred. It this error persists, the system should be serviced.
Connext Comm Error [7] A weather data transfer has timed out. Check Iridium signal strength and re-send the data request.
Connext Comm Error [8] A server error has occurred or invalid data received.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Connext Comm Error [9] An error occurred while reading or writing data. If the error persists, the system should be serviced.
Connext Login Invalid There is a problem with the Garmin Connext registration.
Connext Server Temp The Garmin Connext Weather data server is temporarily out of service, but is expected to return to
Inop service in less than 30 minutes.
AFCS
Connext Server Inop The Garmin Connext Weather data server will be out of service for at least 30 minutes.
Invalid Coverage Area The weather data request coverage area does not contain at least one of the following: a
waypoint, a flight plan, or a flight plan destination. Verify at least one of the coverage options is
ADDITIONAL
enabled (checked) and contains required criteria, then re-send the data request.
FEATURES
No Connext The system is not be currently subscribed to Garmin Connext services or the access code is
Subscription incorrect. Verify the access code.
Reduce Request Area The size of the received weather data has exceeded system memory limits. Reduce the size of the
coverage area and issue another Connext Data Request to ensure all available weather data has
APPENDICES
been received.
Request Canceled The user has cancelled a Connext Data Request.
Request Failed - Try The weather data request timed-out. Re-send data request.
Again
Table 6-6 Abnormal Garmin Connext Data Request Status Messages
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
When the system is operating in Reversionary Mode, only those weather products which can be displayed
SYSTEM
on the PFD maps will be available for display (see Table 6-4 for a list of weather products and their associated
map availability).
If manual Connext Data Requests were enabled prior to entering Reversionary Mode, no new weather data
INSTRUMENTS
will be retrieved while operating in Reversionary Mode. If automatic Connext Data Requests were enabled
FLIGHT
prior to Reversionary Mode operation, the system will continue the automatic data requests in Reversionary
Mode (provided automatic requests have not been inhibited due to a system error).
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
6.2 STORMSCOPE LIGHTNING DETECTION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
WARNING: Do not rely on information from the lightning detection system display as the sole basis for
INSTRUMENTS
hazardous weather avoidance. Range limitations and interference may cause the system to display inaccurate
FLIGHT
or incomplete information. Refer to documentation from the lightning detection system manufacturer for
detailed information about the system.
NOTE: Stormscope lightning information cannot be displayed simultaneously on the same map as lightning
information from data link lightning sources.
EIS
The system can display L-3 WX-500 Stormscope lightning detection system information on the Stormscope
Page, and as an overlay on navigation maps. The system uses the symbols shown in the following table to depict
lightning strikes and cells based on the age of the information.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Lightning Age Symbol
Strike is less than 6 seconds old
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Strike is between 6 and 60 seconds old
Strike is between 1 and 2 minutes old
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Strike is between 2 and 3 minutes old
Table 6-7 Lightning Age and Symbols
USING THE STORMSCOPE PAGE
AFCS
On the Stormscope Page, lightning information can be displayed at the ranges of 25 nm, 50 nm, 100 nm,
and 200 nm.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Adjusting the Stormscope Map Range:
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Stormscope Page.
3) Turn the Joystick clockwise to increase the map range or counter-clockwise to decrease the map range.
APPENDICES
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Stormscope Mode
Lightning Strike
Rate Per Minute
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-58 Stormscope Page with Cell Mode Selected
Selecting ‘cell’ or ‘strike’ mode:

MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
1) Select the ‘Map - Stormscope®’ Page.

2) Press the Mode Softkey. The Cell and Strike softkeys are displayed.
3) Press the Cell Softkey to display ‘CELL’ data or select the Strike Softkey to display ‘STRIKE’ data. ‘CELL’ or
‘STRIKE’ is displayed in the mode box in the upper right corner of the Stormscope Page.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
4) Press the Back Softkey to return to the top level softkeys for the Stormscope Page.
Or:
2) Press the MENU Key to display the Stormscope Page Menu. Either ‘Cell Mode’ or ‘Strike Mode’ is highlighted
AFCS
in cyan to indicate the mode to be selected.

3) Press the ENT Key to select the highlighted mode and remove the menu. To remove the menu without changing
modes, press the MENU Key or the CLR Key, or push the FMS Knob.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If heading input is lost, strikes and/or cells must be cleared manually after the execution of each turn . This
is to ensure that the strike and/or cell positions are depicted accurately in relation to the nose of the aircraft.
Clearing Stormscope lightning on any map clears this information from all displays on the system.
Manually clearing Stormscope cell or strike information:
APPENDICES

2) Press the Clear Softkey.
Or:
INDEX
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Clear Lightning Data’, then press the ENT Key.
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
Or:
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Clear Stormscope® Lightning’, then press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
Displaying Stormscope information on MFD navigation maps:
2) Press the STRMSCP Softkey.
Displaying Stormscope information on PFD maps:
EIS
2) Press the Lightning Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
3) Press the STRMSCP Softkey.
& CNS
SETTING UP STORMSCOPE ON THE NAVIGATION MAP
MANAGEMENT
Setting up Stormscope options on the Navigation Map:
FLIGHT
1) On the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page, press the MENU Key.
2) With ‘Map Settings’ selected, press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the group selection window. Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Weather’,
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight and move between the product selections.
5) When an item is highlighted, turn the small FMS Knob to select the option.
AFCS
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
The following options are available:
• Stormscope On/Off field – Enables/disables the display of Stormscope lightning symbols.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Stormscope maximum display range – Selects the maximum map range to display Stormscope symbols.
Stormscope data is removed when a map range greater than the STRMSCP SMBL value is selected.
• Stormscope Mode – Selects the Cell or Strike mode of lightning activity. Cell mode identifies clusters or
cells of electrical activity. Strike mode indicates the approximate location of lightning strikes.
APPENDICES
CELL AND STRIKE MODE ON THE NAVIGATION MAP

On the Navigation Map, cell mode identifies cells of lightning activity. Stormscope identifies clusters of
electrical activity that indicate cells. Strike mode indicates the approximate location of lightning strikes.
Selecting the ‘cell’ or ‘strike’ mode on the Navigation Map:
INDEX

2) With ‘Map Settings’ selected, press the ENT Key.
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ group and press the ENT Key.
SYSTEM
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Stormscope Mode field.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to change between ‘Cell’ and ‘Strike’ options. When the desired item is selected, press
the ENT Key.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
6) Press the FMS knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
EIS
Stormscope Mode
Lightning Strike
AUDIO PANEL
Rate Per Minute

& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Stormscope Navigation Map

Overlay Enabled Icon
Figure 6-59 Navigation Map Page with Stormscope Lightning Data

AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
If heading input is lost, strikes and/or cells must be cleared manually after the execution of each turn. This
is to ensure that the strike and/or cell positions are depicted accurately in relation to the nose of the aircraft.
Manually clearing Stormscope data on the Navigation Map:
AFCS
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Clear Stormscope® Lightning’.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selecting a Stormscope range on the Navigation Map:

APPENDICES
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the select the ‘Weather’ group, and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Stormscope maximum map display range distance.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Stormscope maximum map display range distance.
INDEX
To change the display range on the Navigation Map Page, turn the Joystick clockwise to increase the map
range or counter-clockwise to decrease the map range.
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
6.3 TERRAIN DISPLAYS
SYSTEM
WARNING: Do not use terrain avoidance displays as the sole source of information for maintaining separation
INSTRUMENTS
from terrain and obstacles. Garmin obtains terrain and obstacle data from third party sources and cannot
FLIGHT
independently verify the accuracy of the information.
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft is outside of the installed terrain database coverage
area.
EIS
NOTE: Terrain and obstacle alerting is not available north of 89º North latitude and south of 89º South
latitude. This is due to limitations present within the Terrain database and the system’s ability to process
the data representing the affected areas.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: Terrain and obstacle alerting requires the Terrain-SVT option included with Garmin SVT. No terrain or
obstacle alerting occurs for the Terrain Proximity feature.
MANAGEMENT
The terrain system increases situational awareness and aids in reducing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT) and
FLIGHT
obstacles.
One of the following terrain systems is installed on this aircraft:
• Terrain Proximity
AVOIDANCE
• Terrain-SVT (included with the Garmin SVT option) is not installed; refer to the Flight Instruments section for
HAZARD
more information about Garmin SVT.)
The installed terrain system provides color indications on map displays when terrain or obstacles are within a
certain altitude threshold from the aircraft. Terrain-SVT furthermore provides advisory visual annunciations and
voice alerts to indicate the presence of threatening terrain or obstacles relevant to the projected flight path. This
alerting capability is not present in the Terrain Proximity feature. The terrain system requires the following for
AFCS
proper operation:
• Valid 3-D GPS position
• Valid terrain and obstacle databases
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The terrain system uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by government sources. Terrain information
is based on terrain elevation information in a database that may contain inaccuracies. Individual obstructions may
be shown if available in the database. Garmin verifies the data to confirm accuracy of the content. However, the
displayed information should never be understood as being all-inclusive and data may still contain inaccuracies.
APPENDICES
The terrain system uses information provided from the GPS receiver to provide a horizontal position and
altitude. GPS altitude is derived from satellite measurements. GPS altitude is then converted to the height above
geodetic sea level (GSL), which is the height above mean sea level (MSL) calculated geometrically. The system
uses GSL altitude to determine alerts for the Terrain-SVT system. GSL altitude accuracy is affected by satellite
geometry, but is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature that normally affect pressure altitude
INDEX
sensors. GSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude. It is a widely-used MSL
altitude source. Therefore, GSL altitude provides a highly accurate and reliable MSL altitude source to calculate
terrain and obstacle alerts.
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
The terrain and obstacle databases used by the terrain system are referenced to MSL. Using the GPS position
SYSTEM
and GSL altitude, terrain system displays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the
position and altitude of the aircraft. Furthermore, for the Terrain-SVT, the system uses the GPS position and GSL
altitude to calculate and “predict” the aircraft’s flight path in relation to the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In
this manner, the Terrain-SVT can provide advanced alerts of predicted dangerous terrain conditions.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Baro-corrected altitude (or indicated altitude) is derived by adjusting the altimeter setting for local atmospheric
conditions. The most accurate baro-corrected altitude can be achieved by frequently updating the altimeter
setting to the nearest reporting station along the flight path. However, because actual atmospheric conditions
seldom match the standard conditions defined by the International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) model (where
pressure, temperature, and lapse rates have fixed values), it is common for the baro-corrected altitude (as read
EIS
from the altimeter) to differ from the GSL altitude. This variation results in the aircraft’s GSL altitude differing
from the baro-corrected altitude.
RELATIVE TERRAIN SYMBOLOGY

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The terrain system uses colors and symbols to represent terrain and obstacles (with heights greater than 200
feet above ground level, AGL) present in the databases relative to aircraft altitude. The system dynamically
adjusts these colors as the aircraft altitude changes, and after takeoff and landing.
While the aircraft is on the ground, the system displays relative terrain 400 feet or more above the aircraft
MANAGEMENT
altitude using red, and terrain at less than 400 feet above aircraft altitude using black, as shown on the On-
FLIGHT
Ground Legend. When the aircraft is in the air, the system displays relative terrain information using red,
yellow, green, and black, as shown on the In-Air Legend. As the aircraft transitions from on-ground to in-air, or
from in-air to on-ground, the display of relative terrain momentarily fades into the corresponding colors. For
Terrain-SVT system, if an alert occurs, the relative terrain colors transition to the In-Air Legend if in the On-
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Ground Legend was shown in order to provide the flight crew with the most information possible.
On-Ground Legend
In-Air Legend
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-60 Relative Terrain Legend

APPENDICES
The following figure shows the relative terrain coloring for the Terrain Proximity system.
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
Terrain above or within 100 feet
100 ft Threshold Red
below the aircraft altitude
Lighted Obstacle
INSTRUMENTS
Terrain is between 100 feet and
Yellow
1000 feet below aircraft altitude
FLIGHT
2000 ft
Green Terrain is between 1000 feet and

Black Terrain is at least 2000 feet

below aircraft altitude
EIS
Figure 6-61 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for Terrain Proximity
AUDIO PANEL
The following figure shows relative terrain coloring for the Terrain-SVT and TAWS-B systems.
& CNS
Projected Flight Path
Terrain above or within 100 feet
Red
MANAGEMENT
100 ft Threshold below the aircraft altitude
FLIGHT
Lighted Obstacle
Terrain is between 100 feet and
Yellow
2000 ft
Green Terrain is between 1000 feet and
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Black Terrain is at least 2000 feet
below aircraft altitude
Figure 6-62 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for the Terrain-SVT System
AFCS
The following tables show the relative obstacle coloring used by the terrain systems.
Unlighted Obstacle Lighted Obstacle
ADDITIONAL
Obstacle Location
FEATURES
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft below the aircraft

altitude
APPENDICES
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the

aircraft altitude
White obstacle is more than 1000 ft below aircraft altitude

INDEX
Table 6-8 Relative Obstacle Symbols and Colors
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
Unlighted Wind Lighted Wind

Wind Turbine Obstacle Location
Turbine Obstacle Turbine Obstacle
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft below the aircraft altitude

INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft

altitude
White obstacle is more than 1000 ft below aircraft altitude

EIS
Table 6-9 Wind Turbine Obstacles and Colors
The Terrain-SVT system shows potential impacts areas for terrain and obstacles using yellow and red as
AUDIO PANEL
shown in the following table.

& CNS
Potential Impact
Alert Type Example Annunciation
Area Examples
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Warning
or
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Caution
or
Table 6-10 Terrain-SVT and TAWS-B Potential Impact Area with Annunciations
AFCS
The Map - Terrain Proximity or Terrain-SVT Page is the principal map page for viewing terrain information.
Terrain and obstacle information can be displayed on the following maps and pages:
• PFD Maps • Trip Planning Page
ADDITIONAL
• Navigation Map Page • Flight Plan Page

FEATURES
• Terrain Proximity/Terrain-SVT Page

Displaying terrain and obstacle information (MFD maps other than the terrain page):
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the Map/HSI Softkey).
APPENDICES
2) Press the TER Softkey to cycle through a terrain option with each press. The selected mode is displayed in cyan:
Off, Topo, REL. Press the TER Softkey as needed until ‘REL’ is displayed on the softkey.
Displaying relative terrain information on PFD Inset Map or HSI Map
INDEX
2) Press the Rel Ter Softkey.
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
When relative terrain is selected on maps other than the terrain page, an icon to indicate the feature is enabled
SYSTEM
for display and a legend for the relative terrain colors are shown.
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkey for enabling/disabling
display of terrain and obstacles. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which terrain and
INSTRUMENTS
obstacle data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
FLIGHT
data is removed from the map.
Terrain information can be selected for display independently of obstacle data; however, obstacles recognized
by Terrain Proximity as yellow or red are shown when terrain is selected for display and the map range is within
the setting limit.
Maps besides the Terrain Proximity Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
EIS
The maximum display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the range setting made for the
Navigation Map.
AUDIO PANEL
Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the Navigation Map Page:
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key.
• Terrain Display - Turns the display of relative (‘REL’) terrain data on or off and sets maximum range at which
terrain is shown.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
• Point Obstacle– Turns the display of obstacle data on or off and sets maximum range at which obstacles are
shown
AFCS
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page with the changed settings.
Additional information about obstacles can be displayed by panning over the display on the map. The map
panning feature is enabled by pressing the Joystick. The map range is adjusted by turning the Joystick. If the
ADDITIONAL
map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map Pointer.
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
Additional
SYSTEM
Information on
Obstacle Selected
with Map Pointer
Yellow Terrain Area
INSTRUMENTS
(Between 100’ and

Lighted Obstacle 1000’ Below Aircraft
FLIGHT
Selected with Map Altitude)

Pointer
Red Lighted
Obstacles
EIS
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude) Terrain Display
Enabled Icon
AUDIO PANEL
Red Terrain Area

& CNS
(Above or Within Terrain Legend

100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Figure 6-63 Terrain Information on the Navigation Map Page

MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
TERRAIN PAGE
The ‘Map - Terrain Proximity’, or ‘Map - Terrain-SVT’ Page is specialized to show terrain, and obstacle in
relation to the aircraft’s current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. This page is the principal page for
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
viewing terrain information. Aviation data (airports, VORs, and other NAVAIDs) can be enabled for reference.
For Terrain-SVT system only, this page also shows potential impact areas. If an obstacle and the projected
flight path of the aircraft intersect, the display automatically adjusts to a map range if necessary to emphasize
the display of the potential impact area.
Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading, in which case the
AFCS
orientation is track up. Map range is adjustable with the Joystick from 1 to 200 nm, as indicated by the map
range rings (or arcs).
Displaying the terrain page:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map - Terrain Proximity Page/Terrain-SVT’ Page.
Showing/hiding aviation information on the terrain page:

APPENDICES

2) Select ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
Current Aircraft
Map Orientation GPS-derived GSL
Altitude
Black Terrain
INSTRUMENTS
(More than 1000’
FLIGHT
Below the Aircraft
Altitude)
Yellow Lighted Obstacles Red Lighted Obstacle

(Between 100’ and 1000’ (Above or Within
Below Aircraft Altitude) 100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
EIS
Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’
and 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Red Terrain
AUDIO PANEL
Altitude)
(Above or Within
& CNS
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude) Terrain Legend
Figure 6-64 Terrain Proximity Page
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
TERRAIN-SVT ALERTING DISPLAYS
Alerts are issued when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within Terrain-SVT software algorithms.
Terrain alerts typically employ a CAUTION or a WARNING alert severity level, or both. When an alert is
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
issued, visual annunciations are displayed and voice alerts are simultaneously issued.
When an alert is issued, annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD. The terrain alert annunciation appears
to the left of the Selected Altitude box on the PFD, and bottom left on the MFD on the Terrain-SVT Page. If the
terrain page is not displayed at the time, a pop-up alert appears on the MFD. To acknowledge the pop-up alert:
• Press the CLR Key (returns to the currently viewed page), or
AFCS
• Press the ENT Key (accesses the Terrain-SVT Page)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
Pop-up
SYSTEM
Alert Annunciation Alert

INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
Figure 6-65 Terrain-SVT Alert Annunciations

& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Potential Impact
Area
AFCS
Terrain Legend
Alert Annunciation
Figure 6-66 Navigation Map Page

(After Terrain-SVT Pop-up Alert Acknowledgment)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
The following table lists the possible Terrain-SVT alerts.
SYSTEM
PFD/Terrain- MFD
Alert Type SVT Pop-Up Alert (except Voice Alert
Annunciation Terrain-SVT Page)
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance “Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
Warning (RTC)
Imminent Terrain Impact Warning (ITI) “Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance “Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”

Warning (ROC)
EIS
Imminent Obstacle Impact Warning (IOI) “Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance “Caution; Terrain, Terrain”

Caution (RTC)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Imminent Terrain Impact Caution (ITI) “Caution; Terrain, Terrain”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance “Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”

Caution (ROC)
MANAGEMENT
Imminent Obstacle Impact Caution (IOI) “Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”
FLIGHT
Table 6-11 Terrain-SVT Alerts Summary
AVOIDANCE
FORWARD LOOKING TERRAIN AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
The Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA) feature of Terrain-SVT compares the projected flight path as
derived from GPS data with terrain features and obstacles from the terrain and obstacle databases. The system
issues FLTA alerts when the projected flight path conflicts with terrain or obstacles.
The projected flight path is a calculated area ahead of, to the sides, and below the aircraft. The size of the
AFCS
projected flight path varies based on factors including ground speed (the path ahead is larger when the ground
speed is higher), whether the aircraft is level, turning, or descending, and the proximity to the nearest runway
along the current track. As the aircraft approaches the runway, the projected flight path becomes narrower until
the system automatically disables FLTA alerts or the pilot manually inhibits them.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
There are two types of FLTA alerts, Reduced Required Terrain/Obstacle Clearance (RTC or ROC respectively)
and Imminent Terrain/Obstacle Impact (ITI or IOI respectively).
APPENDICES
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
Level (FT) Descending (FT)

800
700
(FT) 600
INSTRUMENTS
Clearance (FT)
Clearance
FLIGHT
500
400
Required Terrain
Required
300
200
EIS
100
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
AUDIO PANEL
Distance From Runway (NM)

& CNS
Figure 6-67 FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values
The system automatically disables FLTA alerts when the aircraft is less than 200 feet above the destination
MANAGEMENT
runway elevation while within 0.5 nm of the approach runway or the aircraft is between runway ends.
FLIGHT
When Terrain-SVT FLTA alerts are manually inhibited, the annunciation is shown on the PFD and in the MFD
for maps displaying relative terrain
Terrain-SVT System
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Figure 6-68 FLTA Alerting is Inhibited when Annunciation is displayed
SYSTEM STATUS
AFCS
TERRAIN-SVT
During power-up, Terrain-SVT conducts a self-test of its visual annunciations and voice alerts. An voice alert
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
is issued at test completion.

Terrain-SVT continually monitors several system-critical items such as database validity, hardware status, and
GPS status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not available, the system issues the voice alert “Terrain System
Failure” along with the ‘TER FAIL’ alert annunciation.
APPENDICES
Terrain-SVT requires a 3-D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical accuracy minimums. Should
the navigation solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the annunciation
‘TER N/A’ is generated in the annunciation window and on the Terrain-SVT Page. The voice alert “Terrain
System Not Available” is generated. When sufficient GPS signal is returns and the aircraft is within the
database coverage area, the voice alert “Terrain System Available” is generated.
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
PFD/Terrain-
Terrain-SVT Page Center
Alert Type SVT Voice Alert
Banner Annunciation
Annunciation
System Test in Progress TERRAIN TEST None
INSTRUMENTS
System Test Pass None None “Terrain System Test OK”
FLIGHT
Terrain Alerting Inhibited None None
No GPS position NO GPS POSITION “Terrain System Not Available”*
Excessively degraded GPS signal;
None “Terrain System Not Available”*
or Out of database coverage area
EIS
Terrain System Test Fail; Terrain
or Obstacle database unavailable
or invalid; Invalid software TERRAIN FAIL “Terrain System Failure”
AUDIO PANEL
configuration; or System audio
& CNS
fault
MFD Terrain or Obstacle database
unavailable or invalid, and
None TERRAIN DATABASE FAILURE None
Terrain-SVT operating with PFD
MANAGEMENT
Terrain or Obstacle databases
FLIGHT
* “Terrain System Available” will be heard when sufficient GPS signal is received, or Terrain database coverage area re-
entered.
Table 6-12 Terrain-SVT System Status Annunciations
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
6.4 TRAFFIC INFORMATION SERVICE (TIS)

SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
NOTE: TIS is available only when the aircraft is within the service volume of a TIS-capable terminal radar
site. Aircraft without an operating transponder are invisible to both Traffic Advisory Systems (TAS), Traffic
Alert and Collision Avoidance Systems (TCAS) and TIS. Aircraft without altitude reporting capability are
EIS
shown without altitude separation data or climb descent indication.
NOTE: Mode S TIS is disabled if another traffic system such as TAS or Automatic Dependent Surveillance-
AUDIO PANEL
Broadcast (ADS-B) is installed.

& CNS
Traffic Information Service (TIS) is designed to help in detection and avoidance of other aircraft. TIS uses
the Mode S transponder for the traffic data link. TIS receives traffic information from ground stations, and is
updated every five seconds. The system displays up to eight traffic symbols within a 7.5-nm radius, from 3000
MANAGEMENT
feet below to 3500 feet above the requesting aircraft. The system displays TIS traffic with the symbology shown
FLIGHT
in the following table.
TIS Symbol Description

AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Non-Threat Traffic
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Traffic Advisory Off Scale

AFCS
Table 6-13 TIS Traffic Symbols

ADDITIONAL
Traffic Advisories (TA) alert the crew to intruding aircraft. When traffic meets the advisory criteria for the TA,
FEATURES
a solid amber circle symbol appears. A TA which is detected but is outside the range of the map on which traffic
is displayed are indicated with a message in the lower left corner of the map.
TIS also provides a vector line showing the direction in which the traffic is moving, to the nearest 45°. Traffic
information for which TIS is unable to determine the bearing (non-bearing traffic) is displayed in the center of the
APPENDICES
Traffic Map Page or in a banner at the lower left corner of maps other than the Traffic Map Page on which traffic
can be displayed.
The altitude difference between the requesting aircraft and other intruder aircraft is displayed above/below the
traffic symbol in hundreds of feet. If the other aircraft is above the requesting aircraft, the altitude separation
appears above the traffic symbol; if below, the altitude separation appears below. Altitude trend is displayed as
INDEX
an up/down arrow (for speeds greater than 500 fpm in either direction) to the right of the target symbol. Traffic
symbols for aircraft without altitude reporting capability appear without altitude separation or climb/descent
information.
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
DISPLAYING TRAFFIC DATA
SYSTEM
The ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page is the principal map page for viewing traffic information. Traffic information
can also be displayed on the following other maps for additional reference on the MFD when the traffic TIS is
operating:
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
• PFD Maps • Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page • Nearest Pages
• Traffic Map Page • Active Flight Plan Page
EIS
Traffic information can also be displayed on the PFD when the Terrain-SVT option is installed and enabled.
See the Additional Features Section for details.
Enabling/disabling traffic overlays (MFD navigation maps):
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the Traffic Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the navigation map.
When traffic is selected on maps other than the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page, an icon is shown to indicate the
MANAGEMENT
feature is enabled for display.
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
Traffic Advisory,
HAZARD
500’ Below,
Climbing
Non-Threat
Traffic, Not
Reporting
Altitude
AFCS
TA Off Scale
Banner
Annunciation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Traffic System
Status Banner
Annunciations
Figure 6-69 TIS Traffic on Navigation Map Page
The ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkey for enabling/
APPENDICES
disabling display of traffic. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which traffic data
(symbols and labels) are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is
selected, the data is removed from the map. Maps besides the Traffic Map Page use settings based on those
selected for the Navigation Map Page.
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
Enabling/disabling traffic information on the PFD Inset Map or HSI Map:

SYSTEM

2) Press the Traffic Softkey to enable/disable the display traffic information on the Inset Map or HSI Map.
INSTRUMENTS
Customizing traffic display on the Navigation Map Page:

FLIGHT

4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Traffic’ Group and press the ENT Key.
EIS
• Traffic – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
AUDIO PANEL
• Traffic Mode – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
& CNS
- All Traffic - Displays all traffic

- TA/PA - Traffic Alerts and Proximity Alerts.
MANAGEMENT
- TA Only - Displays Traffic Alerts only

FLIGHT
• Traffic Symbols – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown
• Traffic Labels – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels are shown (with the option to turn off)
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD

8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE

The ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page is specialized to show surrounding TIS traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s
AFCS
current position and altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aircraft orientation on this map is always
heading up unless there is no valid heading. Map range is adjustable with the Joystick from 2 to 12 nm, as
indicated by the map range rings.
ADDITIONAL
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page. When the aircraft is
FEATURES
on the ground, TIS automatically enters Standby Mode. Once the aircraft is airborne, TIS switches from Standby
to Operating Mode and the system begins to display traffic information. Refer to the System Status discussion
for more information.
APPENDICES
Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page:

2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
3) Confirm TIS is in Operating Mode:
SYSTEM
Press the TIS OPER Softkey to begin displaying traffic.
Or:
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
b) Select ‘Operate Mode’ (shown if TIS is in Standby Mode) and press the ENT Key.
Traffic Mode Annunciation
EIS
“TIS Not Available”
Voice Alert Status
Non-Threat
Traffic, 1200’
AUDIO PANEL
Traffic Advisory, 500’
Below, Climbing Above,
& CNS
Descending
“Non-Bearing” Traffic
(System Unable to Range
Determine Bearing) Marking
Distance is 4.0 nm, Rings
MANAGEMENT
1100’ Above,
Descending
FLIGHT
Off-Scale Traffic
Advisory
400’ Below, Level
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Traffic Status Banner Select
Annunciations to Mute
“TIS Not
Available”
Voice Alert
Figure 6-70 Traffic Map Page
AFCS
TIS ALERTS
When the number of TAs on the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page increases from one scan to the next, the following
ADDITIONAL
occur:
FEATURES
• A single “Traffic” voice alert is generated.
• A ‘TRAFFIC’ Annunciation appears to the right of the airspeed tape, flashes for five seconds, and remains
displayed until no TAs are detected in the area.
APPENDICES
• The PFD Inset Map or HSI Map is automatically displayed with traffic.
To reduce the number of nuisance alerts due to proximate aircraft, the “Traffic” voice alert is generated only
when the number of TAs increases. For example, when the first TA is displayed, a voice and visual annunciation
are generated. As long as a single TA remains on the display, no additional voice alerts are generated. If a second
TA appears on the display or if the number of TAs initially decreases and then subsequently increases, another
INDEX
voice alert is generated.
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Inset Map
Displays When
EIS
TA is Detected
Figure 6-71 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
A “TIS Not Available” (TNA) voice alert is generated when the TIS service becomes unavailable or is out of
range. TIS may be unavailable in the radar coverage area due to the following:
• Radar site TIS Mode S sensor is not operational or is out of service
MANAGEMENT
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is beyond the maximum range of the TIS-capable Mode S radar site.
FLIGHT
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is above the radar site in the cone of silence and out of range of an adjacent site.
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is below radar coverage. In flat terrain, the coverage extends from about 3000
feet upward at 55 miles. Terrain and obstacles around the radar site can further decrease radar coverage in all
AVOIDANCE
directions.
HAZARD
• Traffic does not have an operating transponder.

The “TIS Not Available” (TNA) voice alert can be manually muted to reduce nuisance alerting. TNA muting
status is shown in the upper right corner of the Traffic Map Page.
AFCS
Muting the “TIS Not Available” voice alert:

1) Select the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
2) Press the TNA Mute Softkey. The status is displayed in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
b) Select ‘‘’Not Available” Mute On’ (shown if TNA muting is currently off) and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM STATUS
SYSTEM
The system performs an automatic test of TIS during power-up. If TIS passes the test, TIS enters Standby
Mode (on the ground) or Operating Mode (in the air). If TIS fails the power up test, an annunciation is shown
in the center of the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Traffic Map Page Center
Description
Banner Annunciation
NO DATA Data is not being received from the transponder*
Data is being received from the transponder, but
DATA FAILED
a failure is detected in the data stream*
EIS
FAILED The transponder has failed*
UNAVAILABLE TIS is unavailable or out of range
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
* Contact a service center or Garmin dealer for corrective action
Table 6-14 TIS Failure Annunciations
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper right corner of the Traffic Map Page. When the aircraft is on the
MANAGEMENT
ground, TIS automatically enters Standby Mode. If traffic is selected for display on another map while Standby
FLIGHT
Mode is selected, the traffic display enabled icon is crossed out (also the case whenever TIS has failed). Once
the aircraft is airborne, TIS switches to Operating Mode and traffic information is displayed. The mode can be
changed manually using softkeys or the page menu.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Traffic Map Mode Traffic Map Center Traffic Overlay Status
Description
Annunciation Banner Annunciation Icon (Navigation Maps)
Data is being received from the transponder,
DATA FAILED TRFC FAIL
but a failure is detected in the data stream*
Data is not being received from the
NO DATA TRFC FAIL
AFCS
transponder*
TIS is operating and is receiving traffic data
OPERATING None
from a data link.
TIS is operating, but the traffic service is
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
OPERATING UNAVAILABLE currently unavailable or is out of reception
range.
STANDBY STANDBY TIS is in Standby Mode.

APPENDICES
UNIT FAILED TRFC FAIL The transponder has failed*
* Contact a service center or Garmin dealer for corrective action

Table 6-15 TIS Modes and Status Annunciations
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
Switching between TIS modes:

SYSTEM

2) Press the Standby or Operate Softkey to switch between modes. The mode is displayed in the upper right
corner of the Traffic Map Page.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Or:
b) Select ‘Operate Mode’ or ‘Standby Mode’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
EIS
maps on which traffic can be displayed, as shown in the following table.
Traffic Status Banner

Description
Annunciation
AUDIO PANEL
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*

& CNS
TA OFF SCALE
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the selected display range
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**
TA X.X ± XX ↕ Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation in hundreds of feet, and
MANAGEMENT
altitude trend arrow (climbing/descending)

FLIGHT
Appears if traffic data is not refreshed within 6 seconds

AGE MM:SS If after another 6 seconds data is not received, traffic is removed from the display
The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced as the age increases
The displayed data is not current (6 to 12 seconds since last message)
TRFC COAST
AVOIDANCE
The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced when this message is displayed
HAZARD
Traffic is removed because it is too old for coasting (12 to 60 seconds since last message)
TRFC RMVD
Traffic may exist within the selected display range, but it is not displayed
TRFC FAIL Traffic data has failed
NO TRFC DATA Traffic has not been detected
AFCS
TRFC UNAVAIL The traffic service is unavailable or out of range

*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
ADDITIONAL
Table 6-16 TIS Traffic Status Annunciations

FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
6.5 AVIDYNE TAS600 TRAFFIC
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
information within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate
information from other aircraft, traffic may be present but not represented on the display.
EIS
NOTE: Pilots should be aware of traffic system limitations. Traffic systems require transponders of other
aircraft to respond to system interrogations. If the transponders do not respond to interrogations due
AUDIO PANEL
to phenomena such as antenna shading or marginal transponder performance, traffic may be displayed
& CNS
intermittently, or not at all. Aircraft without altitude reporting capability are shown without altitude
separation data or climb descent indication. Pilots should remain vigilant for traffic at all times.
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: Mode-S TIS is disabled when another traffic system is installed.
FLIGHT
NOTE: Refer to the Avidyne TAS600 Series Pilot’s Guide for a detailed discussion of the Avidyne TAS600
System.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
The optional Avidyne TAS600 is a Traffic Advisory System (TAS). It enhances flight crew situational awareness
by displaying traffic information for transponder-equipped aircraft. The system also provides visual annunciations
and voice alerts to help the pilot visually acquire traffic.
No TAS surveillance is provided for aircraft without operating transponders.
AFCS
TAS THEORY OF OPERATION
When the traffic system is in Operating Mode, the system directly interrogates the transponders of other
aircraft in the vicinity. The traffic system uses this information to derive the distance, relative bearing, and if
ADDITIONAL
reported, the altitude and vertical trend for each aircraft within its surveillance range. The traffic system then
FEATURES
calculates a closure rate to each intruder based on the projected Closest Point of Approach (CPA). If the closure
rate meets the threat criteria for a Traffic Advisory (TA), the traffic system provides visual annunciations and
voice alerts. APPENDICES
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
TAS SYMBOLOGY
SYSTEM
If a Avidyne TAS600 is installed with a Garmin GTX 335 or GTX 345 transponder, the system uses the
following symbols to represent traffic.
INSTRUMENTS
TAS Symbol Description

FLIGHT
Non-Threat Traffic
Proximity Advisory (PA)

EIS
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Traffic Advisory Off Scale

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Table 6-17 TAS Symbol Description
Symbol Description
MANAGEMENT
Traffic Advisory with directional information. Points in the direction of the intruder aircraft track.
FLIGHT
Traffic Advisory without directional information.

AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Traffic Advisory out of the selected display range with directional information. Displayed at outer range ring at proper bearing.
Traffic Advisory out of the selected display range without directional information. Displayed at outer range ring at proper
bearing.
Proximity Advisory with directional information. Points in the direction of the aircraft track.
AFCS
Proximity Advisory without directional information.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Other Non-Threat traffic with directional information. Points in the direction of the intruder aircraft track.
Other Non-Threat traffic without directional information.

APPENDICES
Traffic located on the ground with directional information. Points in the direction of the aircraft track. Ground traffic is only
displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the ground.
Ground traffic without directional information. Ground traffic is only displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own
aircraft is on the ground.
Non-aircraft ground traffic with ADS-B directional information. Pointed end indicates direction of travel. Ground traffic is only
INDEX
Non-aircraft ground traffic without ADS-B directional information. Ground traffic is only displayed when ADS-B is in Surface
(SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the ground.
Table 6-25 ADS-B Traffic Symbology with GTX 345 R
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
A Traffic Advisory (TA), displayed as a solid amber circle or circle enclosing an arrow, alerts the crew to a
SYSTEM
potentially hazardous intruding aircraft, if the closing rate, distance, and vertical separation meet TA criteria.
A TA that is beyond the selected display range (off scale) is indicated by a half TA symbol at the edge of the
screen at the relative bearing of the intruder.
INSTRUMENTS
A Proximity Advisory (PA), displayed as a solid white diamond or arrow, indicates the intruding aircraft is
FLIGHT
within ±1200 feet and is within a 6 nm range, but is still not considered a TA threat.
Other, non-threat traffic, shown as an open white diamond or arrow, is displayed for traffic beyond six
nautical miles that is neither a TA or PA.
Relative altitude, when available, is displayed above or below the corresponding intruder symbol in
hundreds of feet. When this altitude is above own aircraft, it is preceded by a ‘+’ symbol; a minus sign ‘-’
EIS
indicates traffic is below own aircraft.
The system displays the altitude vertical trend as an up/down arrow (for speeds greater than 500 fpm in
either direction) to the right of the intruder symbol.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Relative Altitude
Vertical trend arrow
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Figure 6-72 Intruder Altitude and Vertical Trend Arrow
TAS ALERTS
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
NOTE: If an optional Avidyne TAS600 is installed, refer to the Pilot’s Guide from the manufacturer for
information about voice alerts for that traffic system.
When the Avidyne TAS600 detects a new TA, the following occur:
AFCS
• The system issues a single “Traffic!” voice alert, followed by additional voice information about the bearing,
relative altitude, and approximate distance from the intruder that triggered the TA. For example, the
announcement “Traffic! 12 o’clock, high, four miles,” would indicate the traffic is in front of own aircraft,
above own altitude, and approximately four nautical miles away.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Bearing Relative Altitude Approximate Distance (nm)
“One o’clock” through “High”, “Low”, “Same Altitude” (if “Less than one mile”,
“Twelve o’clock” within 200 feet of own altitude), or “One Mile” through “Ten Miles”, or
APPENDICES
or “No Bearing” “Altitude not available” “More than ten miles”
Table 6-18 TA Descriptive Voice Announcements
• A TRAFFIC Annunciation appears at the right of the airspeed on the PFD, flashes for five seconds, and
remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area.
INDEX
• A PFD map is automatically displayed with TA traffic.
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
If the bearing of TA traffic cannot be determined, a yellow text banner will be displayed in the center of the
SYSTEM
Traffic Map Page and in the lower-left of the PFD inset map instead of a TA symbol. The text will indicate
“TA” followed by the distance, relative altitude, and vertical trend arrow for the TA traffic, if known.
A TA will be displayed for at least eight seconds, even if the condition(s) that initially triggered the TA are no
INSTRUMENTS
longer present.
FLIGHT
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic Appears
when TA is
Detected
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
SYSTEM TEST
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
NOTE: If an optional Avidyne TAS600 is installed, refer to the applicable Pilot’s Guide from the manufacturer
for information about applicable voice alerts for the system test.
The traffic system provides a system test mode to verify the TAS is operating normally. The test takes about
ten seconds to complete. When the system test is initiated, a test pattern of traffic symbols appears on the ‘Map
AFCS
- Traffic Map’ Page. When the system test is complete, the traffic system enters Standby Mode.
Testing the traffic system:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the Joystick to set the range to 2/6 nm to allow for full test pattern to be displayed during test.
4) Press the Standby or TAS STBY Softkey.
APPENDICES
5) Press the Test Softkey.

Or:
1) With the Traffic system in Standby mode, press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Test Mode’.
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
TAS Test Mode
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-74 System Test in Progress with Test Pattern
FLIGHT
OPERATION
NOTE: Refer to the Avidyne TAS600 Series Pilot’s Guide for a detailed discussion of the Avidyne TAS600
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
system operation.
When the avionics system initially receives power on the ground, the traffic system is in Standby Mode. The
system must be in Operating Mode for traffic to be displayed and for TAs to be issued.
Changing traffic system modes on the Traffic Map Page:
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
3) Press the Operate or TAS OPER Softkey to begin displaying traffic. ‘OPERATING’ is displayed in the Traffic
FEATURES
mode field.
4) Press the Standby or TAS STBY Softkey to place the system in the Standby mode. ‘STANDBY’ is displayed in
the Traffic mode field.
APPENDICES
Or:
1) With the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the small FMS knob to highlight the desired mode.
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE

SYSTEM
The ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page shows surrounding traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current position
and altitude, without basemap clutter. It is the principal map page for viewing traffic information. Aircraft
orientation is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. The pilot can adjust the map range with
INSTRUMENTS
the Joystick. A range indication appears on each range ring.

FLIGHT
The system annunciates the traffic mode and altitude display mode in the upper right corner of the ‘Map -
Traffic Map’ Page.
TAS Operating Mode

EIS
Annunciation
AUDIO PANEL
Other Non-Threat
& CNS
Traffic, 1000 above, Traffic Advisory,

climbing 200’ above,
climbing
No-bearing
MANAGEMENT
Traffic Advisory,
FLIGHT
4.0 nm away,
Traffic Display 1100’ above,
Range Rings descending
Proximity
Advisory, 1200’
AVOIDANCE
feet below,
HAZARD
descending
Altitude Display Mode

AFCS
The pilot can select the volume of airspace in which Other Non-Threat and Proximity Advisory traffic is
displayed. If traffic meets the criteria for a TA, it is also displayed even if it is outside of the selected volume
of airspace.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Changing the altitude range:

1) On the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page, press the ALT Mode Softkey.
2) Select one of the following Softkeys:
APPENDICES
• Above: Displays Other Non-Threat and Proximity Advisory traffic from 9900 feet above the aircraft to 2700
feet below the aircraft. Typically used during climb phase of flight.
• Normal: Displays Other Non-Threat and Proximity Advisory traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to
2700 feet below the aircraft. Typically used during enroute phase of flight.
• Below: Displays Other Non-Threat and Proximity Advisory traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 9900
INDEX
feet below the aircraft. Typically used during descent phase of flight.
• UNREST (unrestricted): All traffic is displayed from 9900 feet above and 9900 feet below the aircraft.
3) To return to the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page, select the Back Softkey.
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
Or:
SYSTEM
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select one of the following (see softkey description in the previous step 2):
INSTRUMENTS
• Above
FLIGHT
• Normal
• Below
• Unrestricted
3) Press the ENT key.
EIS
Traffic Map Page Display Range
The display range on the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page can be changed at any time. Map range is adjustable
AUDIO PANEL
with the Joystick, and rings on the map denote the ranges.
& CNS
Changing the display range on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the Joystick.
MANAGEMENT
2) The following range options are available:
FLIGHT
• 750 ft (with optional ADS-B)
• 750 ft and 1500 ft (with optional ADS-B)
• 1500 ft and 0.5 nm (with optional ADS-B)
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
• 0.5 nm and 1 nm (with optional ADS-B)
• 1 nm and 2 nm (with optional ADS-B)
• 2 nm
• 2 and 6 nm
AFCS
• 6 and 12 nm
• 12 and 24 nm
• 24 and 40 nm
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ADDITIONAL TRAFFIC DISPLAYS
The ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page is the principal map page for viewing traffic information. Traffic information
can also be displayed on the following other maps for additional reference on the MFD when the traffic unit
APPENDICES
is operating:
• Navigation Map Page • Nearest Pages
• Traffic Map Page • Active Flight Plan Page
• Trip Planning Page
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
Enabling/disabling traffic information (MFD maps other than the Traffic Map Page):
SYSTEM

2) Press the Traffic Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the map.
INSTRUMENTS
When traffic is selected on maps other than the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page, the system shows a traffic status
FLIGHT
icon to indicate traffic is enabled for display as well as the altitude display mode (Above, Below, Normal,
Unres).
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Proximity
Advisory
Traffic Advisory
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Traffic Traffic overlay

Advisory Off- enabled icon and
AVOIDANCE
Scale Banner Altitude Display

HAZARD
Annunciation Mode
Figure 6-76 TAS Traffic on Navigation Map
Customizing the traffic display on the Navigation Map Page:

AFCS

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Group and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through the selections.
• Traffic – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
APPENDICES
• Traffic Mode – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
- All Traffic - Displays all traffic
- TA/PA - Displays only Traffic Advisories and Proximity Advisories
- TA Only - Displays Traffic Advisories only
INDEX
• Traffic Symbols – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown
• Traffic Labels – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels (relative altitude, vertical trend) are
shown with the option to turn off
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (On/Off, range settings, etc.).
SYSTEM
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
INSTRUMENTS
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu also controls the display of traffic. The setup menu controls the map
FLIGHT
range settings. Traffic data symbols and labels can be decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than
the map range setting is selected, the data is removed from the map. Maps besides the Traffic Map Page use
settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
A traffic-only inset map is available on the PFD by pressing the TFC Map Softkey. A traffic map appears on
the PFD. This map resembles the Traffic Map Page, and presents a heading up format. Traffic information
EIS
can also be overlaid on PFD navigation maps.
Enabling/disabling traffic overlay on PFD navigation maps:
1) With the Inset Map or HSI Map displayed, press the Map/HSI Softkey on the PFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the Traffic Softkey to enable/disable the display traffic information.
SYSTEM STATUS
MANAGEMENT
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper right corner of the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
FLIGHT
Traffic Mode Annunciation Traffic Display Status Icon
Mode
(Traffic Map Page) (Other Maps)
Traffic System Test TEST
AVOIDANCE
Initiated (‘TEST MODE’ shown in center of page)
HAZARD
Operating OPERATING
STANDBY
Standby
(also shown in white in center of page)
AFCS
Traffic System Failed* FAIL
* See Table 6-23 for additional failure annunciations
ADDITIONAL
Table 6-19 Traffic Modes
FEATURES
If the traffic unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the center of the ‘Map -
Traffic Map’ Page. During a failure condition, the Operating Mode cannot be selected. APPENDICES

Description
Annunciation
NO DATA Data is not being received from the TAS unit
DATA FAILED Data is being received from the TAS unit, but the unit is self-reporting a failure
FAILED Incorrect data format received from the TAS unit
INDEX
Table 6-20 TAS Failure Annunciations
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
maps on which traffic can be displayed.

Description
Annunciation
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*.

TA OFF SCALE
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the selected display range.
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**.
TA X.X ± XX ↕ Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation in hundreds of feet, and
altitude trend arrow (climbing/descending).
EIS
TRFC FAIL TAS unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or sending incorrectly formatted data)
NO TRFC DATA Data is not being received from the TAS unit
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Table 6-21 TAS Traffic Status Annunciations

MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
6.6 ADS-B TRAFFIC
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
information within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate
information from other aircraft, traffic may be present but not represented on the display.
EIS
ADS-B SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Broadcast (ADS-B) is a core technology in the FAA NextGen air traffic
AUDIO PANEL
control system. It offers improved surveillance services, both air-to-air and air-to-ground, especially in areas
& CNS
where radar coverage is ineffective due to terrain, or where it is impractical or cost prohibitive. ADS-B is
comprised of three segments for the purposes of providing traffic information: ADS-B (Broadcast), ADS-R
(Rebroadcast), and Traffic Information Service-Broadcast (TIS-B).
MANAGEMENT
ADS-B includes the automatic broadcast of position reports by aircraft, surface vehicles, and transmitters on
FLIGHT
fixed objects. These broadcasts contain information such as GPS position, identity (Flight ID, Call Sign, Tail
Number, ICAO registration number, etc.), ground track, ground speed, pressure altitude, and emergency status.
1090 ES
AVOIDANCE
GPS
UAT
HAZARD
RADAR
Composite
1090 ES
AFCS
18,000 FT
10,000 FT
Mode A/C UAT
ADDITIONAL
UAT
FEATURES
ATC UAT 1090 ES
RADAR
ADS-B Ground Station (ADS-R,
TIS-B, FIS-B)
APPENDICES
Figure 6-77 ADS-B System
For the purpose of distinguishing between levels of ADS-B service, there are three classifications of aircraft or
system capability: ADS-B In, ADS-B Out, and ADS-B participating. ADS-B In refers to the capability to receive
ADS-B information. ADS-B Out refers to the capability to transmit ADS-B information. ADS-B participating
INDEX
refers to the capability to both send and receive ADS-B information. Aircraft lacking either ADS-In, ADS-B Out,
or both ADS-B capabilities may also be referred to as ADS-B nonparticipating aircraft.
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
The ADS-B system operates on two frequencies: 1090 MHz and 978 MHz. Both frequencies provide the same
SYSTEM
traffic information. An aircraft may be ADS-B In, Out, or participating on one or both frequencies, depending
on the installed equipment. The 1090 MHz frequency portion of ADS-B is known as 1090 Extended Squitter
(1090 ES). The 978 MHz portion of ADS-B is known as Universal Access Transceiver (UAT).
INSTRUMENTS
The optional Garmin GTX 345R transponder provides ADS-B Out functions using the 1090 ES data link. It
FLIGHT
also performs ADS-B In functions using the UAT data link. This includes the reception of Flight Information
Services-Broadcast (FIS-B) data link weather service, provided when the aircraft is receiving data from a
participating ground station; refer to the Data Link Weather section for more information about FIS-B Weather.
AUTOMATIC DEPENDENT SURVEILLANCE-REBROADCAST (ADS-R)

EIS
Because it is not required that ADS-B In capable aircraft be able to receive ADS-B data on both the 1090
MHz and 978 MHz data links, a method exists to get data from one data link to the other. ADS-R is the
rebroadcast of ADS-B data by FAA ground stations, which provide this service by taking traffic data from one
AUDIO PANEL
link and rebroadcasting it on the other. For example, if two aircraft are in the service volume for a ground
& CNS
station, and one is transmitting on 1090 MHz and the other is transmitting on 978 MHz, the ground station
retransmits the data from each aircraft on the other link to ensure the two aircraft can “see” each other as
traffic.
If another aircraft can only receive 978 MHz UAT information, it cannot directly ‘see’ another aircraft
MANAGEMENT
sending only 1090 ES information aircraft unless an ADS-R ground station in the vicinity rebroadcasts the
FLIGHT
1090 ES data over the 978 MHz UAT frequency. This is also true for an aircraft when can only receive 1090
ES data; it would need an ADS-R ground station to ‘see’ another aircraft operating on the UAT frequency.
TRAFFIC INFORMATION SERVICE-BROADCAST (TIS-B)

AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
TIS-B provides a link between the secondary surveillance radar (SSR)-based system ATC uses and the ADS-
B-based system. When an ADS-B In or Out capable aircraft is within the service volume of an FAA ADS-B
ground station, the ground station broadcasts a portion of the ATC radar data to the aircraft. This aircraft is
then included in the list of aircraft being provided TIS-B service and is then considered a “TIS-B participant.”
TIS-B coverage is available when the aircraft is within ground station coverage, in SSR coverage, and the
AFCS
other aircraft is also in SSR coverage, and is transmitting its altitude.

The ground station provides ATC radar information for other aircraft within ±3,500 feet and 15 NM of the
participant, to include altitude, position, ground speed, and ground track. TIS-B broadcasts occur once every
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
three to thirteen seconds, depending on the characteristics of the ground station providing the TIS-B service.
The following table describes the aircraft that are observed by a GTX 345R-equipped aircraft according to
the level of equipment installed in the other aircraft.
APPENDICES
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
Other Aircraft Equipment Viewable by GTX 345R Equipped Aircraft
1090ES Out Equipped Yes
UAT Receive Only Capable No
UAT Transmit Equipped Yes
INSTRUMENTS
No Transponder, No ADS-B No
FLIGHT
Non ADS-B Equipped, but with Mode C or S Transponder Yes*
* Only when in ADS-B ground station coverage and when the other aircraft is in ATC radar coverage.
Table 6-22 Aircraft Available for Viewing by an ADS-B Equipped Own Aircraft
EIS
ADS-B WITH TAS
When an optional Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is also installed and operating with the UAT, the UAT
receives traffic from the active traffic system and attempts to match (or “correlate”) this traffic with ADS-B
AUDIO PANEL
traffic the UAT is tracking. When a correlation is made, only the traffic with the most accurate information
& CNS
is displayed to the flight crew. Any traffic that is not correlated (i.e., only detected by one system but not the
other) is also displayed for the flight crew. This correlation of traffic by the UAT improves the accuracy of the
traffic displayed, while reducing the occurrence of the same aircraft being displayed twice.
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
NOTE: In certain situations, a single aircraft may be depicted as two aircraft on the display if the system
is unable to correlate the traffic. This may occur, for example, when operating on the edges of ATC radar
coverage, or when using an optional active traffic system providing intermittent data. This may also occur
if TIS-B traffic data does not closely match the traffic data from other sources, especially while the traffic
AVOIDANCE
tracked by ATC radar is turning.
HAZARD
NOTE: The TAS system issues alerts for traffic it is tracking using TAS alerting criteria. The ADS-B system
issues alerts for traffic it is tracking using the Conflict Situational Awareness & Alerting (CSA) criteria.
Either the TAS or the UAT unit can issue a traffic alert. If both systems determine an alert is necessary, and
AFCS
the traffic is correlated, only the TAS-generated alert is issued. If traffic is not correlated, and both systems
determine an alert is necessary, the TAS-generated alert occurs first, followed by the UAT-generated alert.
CONFLICT SITUATIONAL AWARENESS & ALERTING (CSA)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Conflict Situational Awareness (CSA) is an alerting algorithm which provides ADS-B traffic alerting similar to
the TAS system discussed previously.
When a TA occurs with this equipment, the system displays a ‘TRAFFIC’ annunciation and provides a voice
alert for example “Traffic! Two O’clock, Low, Two Miles.”.
APPENDICES
The own aircraft altitude above terrain determines the sensitivity of the CSA algorithm to minimize nuisance
alerts. Height Above Terrain, and Geodetic Sea Level (GSL) altitude are used to adjust the sensitivity of the CSA
algorithm in accordance with the following table:
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
Vertical Protected
Sensitivity Height Above Own Altitude Look-ahead
GPS Phase of Flight Threshold for Volume
Level Terrain (HAT) (Feet) time (sec)
Alert (feet) (NM)
4 Any Any Any 20 850 0.20
INSTRUMENTS
4 Any Any Any 20 850 0.20

FLIGHT
4 Unavailable Approach Any 20 850 0.20

5 Any Any Any 25 850 0.20
5 >1000 Any Any 25 850 0.20
<=2350
5 Unavailable Terminal Any 25 850 0.20
EIS
6 Unavailable or Not approach and not <=5000 30 850 0.35

>2350 Terminal (including
unavailable)
AUDIO PANEL
7 Unavailable or Not approach and not >5000 40 850 0.55

& CNS
>2350 Terminal (including <=10,000

unavailable)
8 Unavailable or Not approach and not >10,000 45 850 0.80
MANAGEMENT
unavailable)
FLIGHT
9 Unavailable or Not approach and not >20,000 48 850 1.10

unavailable)
10 Unavailable or Not approach and not > 42,000 48 1200 1.10
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
>2350 Terminal (including

unavailable)
Table 6-23 CSA Alerting Thresholds for ADS-B Traffic
When the system detects a new Traffic Advisory (TA), the following occur:
AFCS
• The system issues a single “Traffic!” voice alert, followed by additional voice information about the bearing,
relative altitude, and approximate distance from the intruder that triggered the TA. For example, the
announcement “Traffic! 12 o’clock, high, four miles,” would indicate the traffic is in front of own aircraft,
above own altitude, and approximately four nautical miles away.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Bearing Relative Altitude Approximate Distance (nm)

“One o’clock” through “High”, “Low”, “Same Altitude” (if “Zero miles”, “Less than one mile”,
“Twelve o’clock” within 200 feet of own altitude), or “One Mile” through “Ten Miles”, or
APPENDICES
or “No Bearing” “Altitude not available” “More than ten miles”
Table 6-24 TA Descriptive Voice Announcements
• A ‘TRAFFIC’ annunciation appears to the right of the Airspeed Indicator on the PFD, flashes for five seconds,
and remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area..
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
• If the PFD Inset Map or HSI Map was already displayed, the traffic is shown on the displayed map. Otherwise
SYSTEM
the Traffic Map is shown on the PFD.
If the bearing of TA traffic cannot be determined, a yellow text banner will be displayed in the center of the
Traffic Map and in the lower-left of the PFD inset map instead of a TA symbol. The text will indicate ‘TA’
INSTRUMENTS
followed by the distance, relative altitude, and vertical trend arrow for the TA traffic, if known.
FLIGHT
A TA will be displayed for at least eight seconds, even if the condition(s) that initially triggered the TA are no
longer a factor.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Inset Map
MANAGEMENT
Displays When
FLIGHT
TA is Detected
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
NOTE: ADS-B traffic voice alerts are suppressed when below 500 feet.
AIRBORNE AND SURFACE APPLICATIONS

ADS-B traffic can help the pilot visually acquire traffic both in the air and on-the-ground. There are two ADS-B
AFCS
applications or modes: Airborne Situational Awareness (AIRB) and Surface Situational Awareness (SURF). The
system automatically selects the appropriate application based on conditions.
The AIRB application is on when the aircraft is more than five NM and 1,500 feet above the nearest airport.
ADDITIONAL
When the AIRB application is active, the system only displays traffic which is airborne.
FEATURES
The SURF application is on when the aircraft is within five NM and less than 1,500 feet above field elevation.
When the SURF applications is on, the system displays airborne and on the ground traffic. At a Traffic Map
Page range of one nm or less, the airport environment (including taxiways and runways) appears in addition to
traffic. The airport displays are derived from the SafeTaxi database. Refer to the Additional Features section for
APPENDICES
more information about SafeTaxi displays.
NOTE: Do not rely on the solely on the traffic display to determine the runway alignment of traffic, especially
when runways are in close proximity to each other.
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
Due to the varying precision of the data received via ADS-B, ADS-R, and TIS-B services, not all traffic symbols
SYSTEM
may be depicted on the traffic display. Because higher data precision is required for traffic to be displayed in the
SURF environment, some traffic eligible for AIRB will not be displayed while SURF is on. Availability for AIRB
and SURF is depicted on the Aux - ADS-B Status Page, discussed later in this section.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
SURF Application On
Ground-based
vehicle
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Aircraft on the
ground
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Figure 6-79 Traffic Map Page with SURF Mode On

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
TRAFFIC DESCRIPTION
SYSTEM
The symbols used to display ADS-B traffic are shown in the following table.
Symbol Description
INSTRUMENTS
Traffic Advisory with directional information. Points in the direction of the intruder aircraft track.
FLIGHT
Traffic Advisory without directional information.
Traffic Advisory out of the selected display range with directional information. Displayed at outer range ring at proper bearing.
EIS
Traffic Advisory out of the selected display range without directional information. Displayed at outer range ring at proper
bearing.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Proximity Advisory with directional information. Points in the direction of the aircraft track.
Proximity Advisory without directional information.
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Other Non-Threat traffic with directional information. Points in the direction of the intruder aircraft track.
Other Non-Threat traffic without directional information.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Traffic located on the ground with directional information. Points in the direction of the aircraft track. Ground traffic is only
Ground traffic without directional information. Ground traffic is only displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own
aircraft is on the ground.
Non-aircraft ground traffic with ADS-B directional information. Pointed end indicates direction of travel. Ground traffic is only
AFCS
Non-aircraft ground traffic without ADS-B directional information. Ground traffic is only displayed when ADS-B is in Surface
(SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the ground.
Table 6-25 ADS-B Traffic Symbology
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
OPERATION
SYSTEM
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE

The ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page shows surrounding traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current position and
INSTRUMENTS
altitude, without basemap clutter. Aircraft orientation is always heading up unless there is no valid heading.
FLIGHT
Map range is adjustable with the Joystick, as indicated by the map range rings.
The traffic mode and altitude display mode are annunciated in the upper right corner of the page.
EIS
AIRB Application On
Other Non-Threat
Traffic, 1000 below,
climbing
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic Advisory,
200’ above,
climbing
No-bearing
MANAGEMENT
Traffic Advisory,
FLIGHT
4.0 nm away,
Traffic Display 1100’ above,
Range Rings descending
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD

AFCS
Enabling/disabling the display of ADS-B traffic:

ADDITIONAL
2) Press the ADS-B Softkey.

FEATURES
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘ADS-B On’ or ‘ADS-B Off’.
APPENDICES
Testing the display of ADS-B traffic:

2) If necessary, turn the Joystick to select a map range of 2 and 6 nm to ensure full test pattern display.
3) Ensure the ADS-B Softkey is disabled.
INDEX
4) If the optional TAS is installed, ensure the TAS STBY Softkey is enabled.
5) Press the Test Softkey.
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
Or:
SYSTEM
b) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘Test Mode’.
INSTRUMENTS
c) Press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
A test pattern of traffic symbols appears during the test, and a ‘TRAFFIC’ annunciation appears on the
PFD. At the conclusion of the test, the system issues the voice alert “Traffic System Test”. If the test pattern
is displayed and the voice alert is heard, the system has passed the test.
EIS
ADS-B Test Mode
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Figure 6-81 System Test in Progress with Test Pattern
The pilot can select the volume of airspace in which Other Non-Threat and Proximity traffic is displayed.
AFCS
TAs occurring outside of these limits will always be shown.
Changing the altitude range:
ADDITIONAL
1) On the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page, press the ALT Mode Softkey.
FEATURES
2) Press one of the following softkeys:
• Above: Displays Other Non-Threat and proximity traffic from 9000 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet
below the aircraft. Typically used during climb phase of flight.
APPENDICES
• Normal: Displays Other Non-Threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet
below the aircraft. Typically used during enroute phase of flight.
• Below: Displays Other Non-Threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 9000 feet
below the aircraft. Typically used during descent phase of flight.
• UNREST (unrestricted): All traffic is displayed from 9900 feet above and 9900 feet below the aircraft.
INDEX
3) To return to the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page, press the Back Softkey.
Or:
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight one of the following options (see softkey description in the previous step
SYSTEM
2):
• Above
• Normal
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
• Below
• Unrestricted
DISPLAYING MOTION VECTORS

EIS
When Absolute Motion Vectors are selected, the vectors extending from the traffic symbols depict the
traffic’s reported track and speed over the ground. When Relative Motion Vectors are selected, the vectors
extending from the traffic symbols display how the traffic is moving relative to own aircraft. These vectors
AUDIO PANEL
are calculated using the traffic’s track and ground speed and own aircraft’s track and ground speed. These two
& CNS
values are combined to depict where the traffic is moving purely with respect to own aircraft, and provide a
forecast of where the traffic will be, relative to own aircraft, in the near future.
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Absolute
Motion Vectors
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
Absolute Motion Vectors

FEATURES
selected
Figure 6-82 Traffic Map Page with Absolute Motion Vectors Enabled
APPENDICES
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Relative Motion
Vectors
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Relative Motion Vectors
selected
Figure 6-83 Traffic Map Page with Relative Motion Vectors Enabled
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Enabling/disabling the Motion Vector display:
1) Press the ‘Map -Traffic Map’ Page.
2) Press the Motion Softkey.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
3) Select one of the following softkeys:
• Absolute: Displays the motion vector pointing in the absolute direction.
• Relative: Displays the motion vector relative to own aircraft
• Off: Disables the display of the motion vector.
AFCS
Or:
1) Select the ‘Map -Traffic Map’ Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘Relative Motion’, ‘Absolute Motion’ or ‘Motion Vector Off’.
Adjusting the duration for the Motion Vector projected time:

APPENDICES

2) Press the Motion Softkey.
3) Press the Duration Softkey.
4) Press a softkey for the desired duration (30 SEC, 1 MIN, 2 MIN, 5 MIN).
INDEX
5) When finished, press the Back Softkey to return to the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
Displaying Additional Traffic Information

SYSTEM
The ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page can display additional information for a selected aircraft symbol. This may
include the aircraft tail number/Flight ID, type of aircraft (e.g., glider, small/medium/large aircraft, service
vehicle, unmanned airborne vehicle (UAV), course, track, groundspeed), and other information.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Showing additional traffic information:

2) Press the FMS Knob. A cyan border appears on the first selected traffic symbol. Additional information appears
in a window in the lower-left corner of the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
EIS
3) To select a different aircraft symbol, turn the FMS Knob to move the cyan border until another symbol is
selected.
4) When finished, press the FMS Knob again to disable the traffic selection.
AUDIO PANEL
Traffic Map Page Display Range

& CNS
The display range on the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page can be changed at any time. Map range is adjustable
with the Joystick, as indicated by the map range rings.
MANAGEMENT
Changing the display range on the Traffic Map Page:

FLIGHT
1) Turn the Joystick.

2) The following range options are available:
• 750 feet
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
• 750 feet and 1500 feet

• 1500 feet and 0.5 nm
• 0.5 and 1 nm
• 1 and 2 nm
AFCS
• 2 and 6 nm
• 6 and 12 nm
• 12 and 24 nm
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• 24 and 40 nm
NOTE: ADS-B traffic can be displayed as an overlay to navigation maps and IFR/VFR Charts. Refer to the
previous TAS discussions for information about these additional traffic displays.
APPENDICES
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
ADS-B SYSTEM STATUS
SYSTEM
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper right corner of the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
Traffic Mode Annunciation Traffic Map Page Center Traffic Display Status Icon
INSTRUMENTS
ADS-B Mode
(Traffic Map Page) Banner Annunciation (Other Maps)
FLIGHT
ADS-B System Test
ADS-B: TEST TEST MODE
Initiated
ADS-B Operating in
ADS-B: AIRB None
Airborne Mode
ADS-B Operating in
EIS
ADS-B: SURF None
Surface Mode
ABS-B Traffic Off ADS-B: OFF ADS-B TRFC OFF
AUDIO PANEL
ADS-B Traffic Not
& CNS
ADS-B: N/A ADS-B TRFC N/A
Available
ADS-B Failed* ADS-B: FAIL ADS-B TRFC FAIL
MANAGEMENT
* See Table 6-28 for additional failure annunciations
FLIGHT
Table 6-26 ADS-B Modes
NOTE: If the optional TAS fails, the display of ADS-B traffic (ADS-B In) also fails, unless a GTX 345R
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
transponder is installed. In this case, if the TAS fails, the display of ADS-B traffic continues even if the TAS
has failed.
If the traffic unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the center of the ‘ Map - Traffic
Map’ Page. During a failure condition, the Operating Mode cannot be selected.
AFCS
Description
Annunciation
NO DATA Data is not being received from the traffic unit
ADDITIONAL
DATA FAILED Data is being received from the traffic unit, but the unit is self-reporting a failure
FEATURES
FAILED Incorrect data format received from the traffic unit
Table 6-27 Traffic Failure Annunciations APPENDICES
maps on which traffic can be displayed.
INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM

Description
Annunciation
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*.
TA OFF SCALE
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the selected display range.
INSTRUMENTS
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**.

FLIGHT
TA X.X ± XX ↕ Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend
arrow (climbing/descending).
TRFC FAIL Traffic unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or sending incorrectly formatted data)
NO TRFC DATA Data is not being received from the traffic unit
EIS

Table 6-28 Traffic Status Annunciations
AUDIO PANEL
Additional information about the status of ADS-B traffic products is available on the ‘Aux - ADS-B Status’
& CNS
Page.
Viewing ADS-B Traffic Status:
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - ADS-B Status’ Page.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-84 Viewing ADS-B Traffic Status on ADS-B Status Page

INDEX
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
ADS-B Status Page
Status Message Description
Item
Traffic Application On Traffic application is currently on. Required input data is available, and it meets
Status: Airborne performance requirements.
INSTRUMENTS
(AIRB), Surface (SURF), Available to Run Traffic application is not currently active, but application is ready to run when
FLIGHT
Airborne Alerts (CSA) condition(s) determine the application should be active. Required input data is
available, and it meets performance requirements.
Not Available Traffic application is not available. Required input data is available, but it does
not meet performance requirements.
Fault Traffic application is not available. Required input data is not available or the
EIS
application has failed.
Not Configured Traffic application is not available, because it has not been configured. If this
annunciation persists, the system should be serviced.
AUDIO PANEL
---------------- Traffic application status is invalid or unknown.
& CNS
TIS-B/ADS-R Coverage Available The system is receiving the ADS-R coverage from an FAA ground station.
Not Available The system is not receiving the ADS-R coverage from an FAA ground station.
--------------- ADS-R coverage is invalid or unknown.
MANAGEMENT
GPS Status: GPS External #1 The system is using the #1 GPS receiver for the GPS position source.
FLIGHT
Source External #2 The system is using the #2 GPS receiver for the GPS position source.
--------- The GPS source is invalid or unknown.
Ground Uplink Status: Number of minutes, or Displays the number of minutes since the last uplink from a ground station
Last Uplink ‘------’ occurred. If no uplink has been received, or the status is invalid, dashes appear
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
instead of the number of minutes.
Table 6-29 Aux-ADS-B Status Page Messages for ADS-B Traffic
The ‘Traffic Map’ Page displays a white antenna icon to indicate the successful reception of ADS-B traffic
AFCS
services from a ground station. A white-X over this icon indicates reception of ADS-B services is unavailable.
ADS-B Ground Station Reception Status ‘Traffic Map’ Pane Icon

Receiving ADS-B traffic services from a ground
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
station
Not receiving ADS-B traffic services from a
ground station
Table 6-30 ADS-B Modes
APPENDICES
INDEX
350
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Blank Page

190-02452-00 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
7.1 AFCS OVERVIEW
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
NOTE: The current version of the pertinent flight manual always supersedes the information in this Pilot’s
Guide.
NOTE: A failure of the primary (#1) Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU) results in loss of the Flight Director. Any
EIS
IAU failure results in loss of the autopilot and manual electric trim.
The Garmin AFCS is a digital Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS), fully integrated within the avionics
architecture. The System Overview section provides a block diagram to support this system description.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Garmin AFCS can be divided into these main operating functions:
• Flight Director (FD) — Flight Director operation takes place within the primary (#1) IAU. Flight Director
commands are displayed on the PFD. The Flight Director provides:
MANAGEMENT
– Command Bars showing pitch/roll guidance
FLIGHT
– Pitch/roll mode selection and processing
– Autopilot communication
• Autopilot (AP) — Autopilot operation occurs within the pitch, roll, and pitch trim servo and provides servo
AVOIDANCE
monitoring and automatic flight control in response to Flight Director steering commands, AHRS attitude and
HAZARD
rate information, and airspeed.
• Manual Electric Trim (MET) — The pitch trim servo provides manual electric trim capability when the
autopilot is not engaged.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-02452-00 Rev. A G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG 351
OVERVIEW
AFCS CONTROLS
SYSTEM
The AFCS Controls are positioned on the MFD, and has the following controls:
1 AP Key Engages/disengages the autopilot
INSTRUMENTS
2 FD Key Activates/deactivates the Flight Director only

FLIGHT
Pressing once turns on the Flight Director in the default pitch and roll modes.
Pressing again deactivates the Flight Director and removes the Command Bars. If
the autopilot is engaged, the key is disabled.
3 NAV Key Selects/deselects Navigation Mode
4 ALT Key Selects/deselects Altitude Hold Mode
EIS
5 VS Key Selects/deselects Vertical Speed Mode

6 FLC Key Selects/deselects Flight Level Change Mode
7 HDG Key Selects/deselects Heading Select Mode
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8 APR Key Selects/deselects Approach Mode

9 VNV Key Selects/deselects Vertical Path Tracking Mode for Vertical Navigation flight control
10 NOSE UP/ Control the mode reference in Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level
NOSE DN Change modes
MANAGEMENT
Keys
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
2 7
AFCS
3 8
4 9
5
ADDITIONAL
10
FEATURES
6
APPENDICES
Figure 7-1 Dedicated MFD AFCS Controls

INDEX
352 G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG 190-02452-00 Rev. A
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL AFCS CONTROLS
SYSTEM
The following AFCS controls are located in the cockpit separately from the MFD:
AP DISC Switch Disengages the autopilot and interrupts pitch trim operation
INSTRUMENTS
(Autopilot This switch may be used to mute the aural autopilot disconnect alert.
FLIGHT
Disconnect)
The AP DISC Switch is located on each control stick.
CWS Button While pressed, allows manual control of the aircraft while the autopilot is engaged and
(Control Wheel synchronizes the Flight Director’s Command Bars with the current aircraft pitch (if
Steering) not in Glideslope Mode) and roll (if in Roll Hold Mode)
EIS
Upon release of the CWS Button, the Flight Director may establish new reference
points, depending on the current pitch and roll modes. CWS operation details are
discussed in the Flight Director modes section.
AUDIO PANEL
The CWS Button is located on the top of the left control stick.
& CNS
GO AROUND Disengages the autopilot and selects Flight Director Takeoff (on ground) or Go Around
Button (in air) Mode
If an approach procedure is loaded this switch also activates the missed approach when
MANAGEMENT
the selected navigation source is GPS or when the navigation source is VOR/LOC and
FLIGHT
a valid frequency has been tuned.
The GO AROUND Button is located on the left hand throttle
AP TRIM Switch Used to command manual electric trim (MET)
AVOIDANCE
(Autopilot Trim) This composite switch is split into left and right sides. The left switch is the ARM contact
HAZARD
and the right switch controls the DN (forward) and UP (rearward) contacts. The AP
TRIM ARM switch can be used to disengage the autopilot and to acknowledge an
autopilot disconnect alert and mute the associated aural tone.
Manual trim commands are generated only when both sides of the switch are
AFCS
operated simultaneously. If either side of the switch is active separately for more than
three seconds, MET function is disabled and ‘PTRM’ is displayed as the AFCS Status
Annunciation on the PFD. The function remains disabled until both sides of the switch
are inactivated.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The AP TRIM Switch is located on the left control stick.
APPENDICES
INDEX
OVERVIEW
7.2 FLIGHT DIRECTOR OPERATION

SYSTEM
The Flight Director function provides pitch and roll commands to the AFCS and displays them on the PFD.
With the Flight Director activated, the aircraft can be hand-flown to follow the path shown by the Command Bars.
INSTRUMENTS
Maximum commanded pitch (-15°/+16°) and roll (22°) angles, vertical acceleration, and roll rate are limited to
FLIGHT
established values. The Flight Director also provides commands to the autopilot.
ACTIVATING THE FLIGHT DIRECTOR

An initial press of a key listed in following table (when the Flight Director is not active) activates the Flight
Director in the listed modes. The Flight Director may be turned off and the Command Bars removed from the
EIS
display by pressing the FD Key again. The FD Key is disabled when the autopilot is engaged.
Modes Selected
Control Pressed
AUDIO PANEL
Lateral Vertical
& CNS
FD Key Roll Hold (default) ROL Pitch Hold (default) PIT

AP Key Roll Hold (default) ROL Pitch Hold (default) PIT
CWS Button Roll Hold (default) ROL Pitch Hold (default) PIT
MANAGEMENT
GO-AROUND Takeoff (on ground) TO Takeoff (on ground) TO

FLIGHT
Button Go Around (in air) GA Go Around (in air) GA

ALT Key Roll Hold (default) ROL Altitude Hold ALT
VS Key Roll Hold (default) ROL Vertical Speed VS
VNV Key Roll Hold (default) ROL Vertical Path Tracking* VPTH
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
GPS
VOR
NAV Key Navigation** Pitch Hold (default) PIT
LOC
BC
GPS PIT
AFCS
APR Key Approach** VOR Pitch Hold (default) GP

LOC GS
HDG Key Heading Select HDG Pitch Hold (default) PIT
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
*Valid VNV flight plan must be entered before VNV Key press activates the Flight Director.
**The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS
course before NAV or APR Key press activates the Flight Director.
Table 7-1 Flight Director Activation
APPENDICES
INDEX
OVERVIEW
AFCS STATUS BOX
SYSTEM
Flight Director mode annunciations are displayed on the PFD when the Flight Director is active. Autopilot
status is displayed in the center of the AFCS Status Box. Lateral Flight Director modes are displayed on the left
and Vertical Modes on the right. Armed modes are annunciated in white and active in green.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Autopilot
Lateral Modes Status Vertical Modes
Armed Active Active Mode Armed
EIS
Reference
AFCS Status Box
AUDIO PANEL
Selected
& CNS
Altitude
Figure 7-2 PFD AFCS Display
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT DIRECTOR MODES
FLIGHT
Flight Director modes are normally selected independently for the pitch and roll axes. Unless otherwise
specified, all mode keys are alternate action (i.e., press on, press off). In the absence of specific mode selection,
the Flight Director reverts to the default pitch and/or roll mode(s).
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Armed modes are annunciated in white and active in green in the AFCS Status Box. Under normal operation,
when the control for the active Flight Director mode is pressed, the Flight Director reverts to the default
mode(s) for the axis(es). Automatic transition from armed to active mode is indicated by the white armed mode
annunciation moving to the green active mode field and flashing for 10 seconds.
If the information required to compute a Flight Director mode becomes invalid or unavailable, the Flight
AFCS
Director automatically reverts to the default mode for that axis. A flashing yellow mode annunciation and
annunciator light indicate loss of sensor (ADC) or navigation data (VOR, LOC, GPS, VNV, SBAS) required to
compute commands. When such a loss occurs, the system automatically begins to roll the wings level (enters
Roll Hold Mode) or maintain the pitch angle (enters Pitch Hold Mode), depending on the affected axis. The
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
flashing annunciation stops when the affected mode key is pressed or another mode for the axis is selected. If
after 10 seconds no action is taken, the flashing annunciation stops.
APPENDICES
Figure 7-3 Loss of GPS Signal
The flight director is automatically disabled if the attitude information required to compute the default flight
director modes becomes invalid or unavailable.
INDEX
OVERVIEW
COMMAND BARS
SYSTEM
Upon activation of the Flight Director, Command Bars are displayed on the PFD as a single magenta cue.
The Command Bars move together vertically to indicate pitch commands and bank left or right to indicate roll
commands. The Command Bars do not override the aircraft symbol.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
If the attitude information sent to the Flight Director becomes invalid or unavailable, the Command Bars are
removed from the display. The Flight Director Command Bars also disappear if either pitch exceeds +30˚/-20˚
or bank exceeds 65˚.
Command Bars
EIS
Aircraft Symbol
AUDIO PANEL
Figure 7-4 Single-cue Command Bars

& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
OVERVIEW
7.3 AFCS MODES
SYSTEM
The AFCS is capable of operating in a variety of independent Lateral Modes, Vertical Modes and Combination
of both the Lateral and Vertical Modes.
INSTRUMENTS
VERTICAL MODES
FLIGHT
The following table lists the vertical modes with their corresponding controls and annunciations. The mode
reference is displayed next to the active mode annunciation for Altitude Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level
Change modes. The NOSE UP/DN Keys can be used to change the vertical mode reference while operating
under Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, or Flight Level Change Mode.
EIS
Reference
Reference
Vertical Mode Description Control Annunciation Change
Range
AUDIO PANEL
Increment
& CNS
Holds the current aircraft pitch
-15° to
Pitch Hold attitude; may be used to climb/ (default) PIT 0.5°
+16°
descend to the Selected Altitude
Selected Altitude Capture Captures the Selected Altitude * ALTS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Altitude Hold Holds the current Altitude Reference ALT Key ALT nnnnn ft
Maintains the current aircraft vertical
-3000 to
Vertical Speed speed; may be used to climb/descend VS Key VS nnnn fpm 100 fpm
+1500 fpm
to the Selected Altitude
AVOIDANCE
Maintains the current aircraft
HAZARD
airspeed while the aircraft is 90 to
Flight Level Change FLC Key FLC nnn kt 1 kt
climbing/descending to the Selected 185 kt
Altitude
* ALTS armed automatically when PIT, VS, FLC, TO, or GA active, and under VPTH when Selected Altitude is to be captured
instead of VNV Target Altitude
AFCS
Table 7-2 Flight Director Vertical Modes
PITCH HOLD MODE (PIT)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When the flight director is activated (the FD Key is pressed), Pitch Hold Mode is selected by default. Pitch
Hold Mode is indicated as the active vertical mode by the ‘PIT’ annunciation. This mode may be used for
climb or descent to the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter), since Selected Altitude Capture Mode
is automatically armed when Pitch Hold Mode is activated.
APPENDICES
In Pitch Hold Mode, the flight director maintains a constant pitch attitude, the pitch reference. The pitch
reference is set to the aircraft pitch attitude at the moment of mode selection. If the aircraft pitch attitude
exceeds the flight director pitch command limitations, the flight director commands a pitch angle equal to
the nose-up/down limit.
INDEX
OVERVIEW
Changing the Pitch Reference

SYSTEM
When operating in Pitch Hold Mode, the pitch reference can be adjusted by:
• Using the NOSE UP/DN Keys
INSTRUMENTS
• Pressing the CWS Button, hand-flying the aircraft to establish a new pitch reference, then releasing the
FLIGHT
CWS Button
Pitch Hold Selected Altitude
Mode Active Capture Mode Armed
EIS
Selected
Altitude
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Command Bars Maintain

Desired Pitch Reference
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Figure 7-5 Pitch Hold Mode
SELECTED ALTITUDE CAPTURE MODE (ALTS)

AFCS
Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically armed with activation of the following modes:
• Pitch Hold • Takeoff/Go Around (if the Selected Altitude is at
• Vertical Speed least 400 feet above the current aircraft altitude)
ADDITIONAL
• Vertical Path Tracking (if the Selected Altitude

FEATURES
• Flight Level Change

is to be captured instead of the VNV Target
Altitude)
The white ‘ALTS’ annunciation indicates Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed (see previous figure for
example). The ALT SEL Knob is used to set the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter) until Selected
APPENDICES
Altitude Capture Mode becomes active.

As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions to Selected Altitude
Capture Mode with Altitude Hold Mode armed (next figure). This automatic transition is indicated by the
green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds and the appearance of the white ‘ALT’ annunciation.
The Selected Altitude is shown as the Altitude Reference beside the ‘ALTS’ annunciation.
INDEX
OVERVIEW
At 50 feet from the Selected Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions from Selected Altitude
SYSTEM
Capture to Altitude Hold Mode and holds the Selected Altitude (shown as the Altitude Reference). As Altitude
Hold Mode becomes active, the white ‘ALT’ annunciation moves to the active vertical mode field and flashes
green for 10 seconds to indicate the automatic transition.
INSTRUMENTS
Altitude Reference
FLIGHT
(in this case, equal to
Selected Altitude)
Flash up to 10 sec, Indicating Automatic Transition
EIS
Figure 7-6 Automatic Mode Transitions During Altitude Capture
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Changing the Selected Altitude
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while in Selected Altitude Capture Mode does not cancel the mode.
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Use of the ALT SEL Knob to change the Selected Altitude while Selected Altitude Capture Mode is active
causes the flight director to revert to Pitch Hold Mode with Selected Altitude Capture Mode armed for the
new Selected Altitude.
ALTITUDE HOLD MODE (ALT)
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Altitude Hold Mode can be activated by pressing the ALT Key; the flight director maintains the current
aircraft altitude (to the nearest 10 feet) as the Altitude Reference. The flight director’s Altitude Reference,
shown in the AFCS Status Box, is independent of the Selected Altitude, displayed above the Altimeter.
Altitude Hold Mode active is indicated by a green ‘ALT’ annunciation in the AFCS Status Box.
AFCS
Altitude Hold Mode is automatically armed when the flight director is in Selected Altitude Capture Mode.
Selected Altitude Capture Mode automatically transitions to Altitude Hold Mode when the altitude error is
less than 50 feet. In this case, the Selected Altitude becomes the flight director’s Altitude Reference.
Changing the Altitude Reference
ADDITIONAL
NOTE: Turning the ALT SEL Knob while in Altitude Hold Mode changes the Selected Altitude, but not the FEATURES
flight director’s Altitude Reference, and does not cancel the mode. APPENDICES
With the CWS Button depressed, the aircraft can be hand-flown to a new Altitude Reference. When the
CWS Button is released at the desired altitude, the new altitude is established as the Altitude Reference.
INDEX
OVERVIEW
Altitude Hold Altitude

SYSTEM
Mode Active Reference

INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Selected
Altitude
EIS
Selected
Altitude
Bug
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Command Bars Hold Pitch Attitude

to Maintain Altitude Reference
Figure 7-7 Altitude Hold Mode

MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
VERTICAL SPEED MODE (VS)

In Vertical Speed Mode, the flight director acquires and maintains a Vertical Speed Reference. Current
aircraft vertical speed (to the nearest 100 fpm) becomes the Vertical Speed Reference at the moment of Vertical
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Speed Mode activation. This mode may be used for climb or descent to the Selected Altitude (shown above
the Altimeter) since Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically armed when Vertical Speed Mode is
selected.
When Vertical Speed Mode is activated by pressing the VS Key, ‘VS’ is annunciated in green in the AFCS
Status Box along with the Vertical Speed Reference. The Vertical Speed Reference is also displayed above the
AFCS
Vertical Speed Indicator. A Vertical Speed Reference Bug corresponding to the Vertical Speed Reference is
shown on the indicator.
Changing the Vertical Speed Reference

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Vertical Speed Reference (shown both in the AFCS Status Box and above the Vertical Speed Indicator)
may be changed by:
• Using the NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys
APPENDICES
• Pressing the CWS Button, hand-flying the aircraft to attain a new Vertical Speed Reference, then releasing
the CWS Button
NOTE: If the Selected Altitude is reached during CWS maneuvering, the Altitude Reference is not changed.
To adjust the Altitude Reference in this case, the CWS Button must be pressed again after the Selected
Altitude is reached.
INDEX
OVERVIEW
Vertical Selected
SYSTEM
Vertical Speed Speed Altitude Capture
Mode Active Reference Mode Armed
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Selected Vertical
Altitude Speed
Reference
Vertical
Speed
EIS
Reference
Bug
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Command Bars Indicate Climb to
Attain Vertical Speed Reference
MANAGEMENT
Figure 7-8 Vertical Speed Hold Mode
FLIGHT
FLIGHT LEVEL CHANGE MODE (FLC)
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: The Selected Altitude should be set before selecting Flight Level Change Mode.
HAZARD
Flight Level Change Mode is selected by pressing the FLC Key. This mode acquires and maintains the
Airspeed Reference while climbing or descending to the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter). When
Flight Level Change Mode is active, the flight director continuously monitors Selected Altitude, airspeed, and
altitude.
AFCS
The Airspeed Reference is set to the current airspeed upon mode activation. Flight Level Change Mode is
indicated by a green ‘FLC’ annunciation beside the Airspeed Reference in the AFCS Status Box. The Airspeed
Reference is also displayed directly above the Airspeed Indicator, along with a bug corresponding to the
ADDITIONAL
Airspeed Reference along the tape.
FEATURES
Engine power must be adjusted to allow the autopilot to fly the aircraft at a pitch attitude corresponding
to the desired flight profile (climb or descent) while maintaining the Airspeed Reference. The flight director
maintains the current altitude until either engine power or the Airspeed Reference are adjusted and does not
allow the aircraft to climb or descend away from the Selected Altitude.
APPENDICES
INDEX
OVERVIEW
Changing the Airspeed Reference

SYSTEM
The Airspeed Reference (shown in both the AFCS Status Box and above the Airspeed Indicator) may be
adjusted by:
• Using the NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
• Pressing the CWS Button, hand-flying the aircraft to attain a new Airspeed Reference, then releasing the
CWS Button
NOTE: If the Selected Altitude is reached during CWS maneuvering, the Airspeed Reference is not changed.
To adjust the Airspeed Reference in this case, the CWS Button must be pressed again after the Selected
Altitude is reached.
EIS
Flight Level Selected

Change Mode Airspeed Altitude Capture
Active Reference Mode Armed
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airspeed
Reference
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Airspeed
Reference
AVOIDANCE
Bug
HAZARD
Command Bars Indicate Climb

to Attain Selected Altitude
AFCS
Figure 7-9 Flight Level Change Mode

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
OVERVIEW
LATERAL MODES
SYSTEM
The following table relates each Garmin AFCS lateral mode to its respective control and annunciation. Refer
to the combination modes section for information regarding Go Around and Takeoff modes.
INSTRUMENTS
Maximum Roll
FLIGHT
Lateral Mode Description Control Annunciation
Command Limit
Holds the current aircraft roll
attitude or rolls the wings level,
Roll Hold (default) ROL 25°
depending on the commanded
bank angle
EIS
Captures and tracks the Selected HDG
Heading Select HDG 25°
Heading Key
Navigation, GPS GPS 25°
AUDIO PANEL
Captures and tracks the selected 25° Capture
& CNS
Navigation, VOR Enroute Arm/Capture/Track NAV VOR
navigation source (GPS, VOR, 10° Track
Key
Navigation, LOC Capture/Track LOC) 25° Capture
LOC
(No Glideslope) 10° Track
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Table 7-3 Flight Director Lateral Modes
The CWS Button does not change lateral references for Heading Select, Navigation, Backcourse, or Approach
Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Heading/Course upon release of the CWS Button.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
ROLL HOLD MODE (ROL)
NOTE: If Roll Hold Mode is activated as a result of a mode reversion, the flight director rolls the wings level.
When the flight director is activated or switched, Roll Hold Mode is selected by default. This mode is annunciated
AFCS
as ‘ROL’ in the AFCS Status Box. The current aircraft bank angle is held, subject to the bank angle condition.
Figure 7-10 Roll Hold Mode Annunciation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Bank Angle Flight Director Response
< 6° Rolls wings level
6 to 25° Maintains current aircraft roll attitude
APPENDICES
> 25° Limits bank to 25°
Table 7-4 Roll Hold Mode Responses

INDEX
OVERVIEW
Changing the Roll Reference

SYSTEM
The roll reference can be changed by pressing the CWS Button, establishing the desired bank angle, then
releasing the CWS Button.
INSTRUMENTS
HEADING SELECT MODE (HDG)

FLIGHT
Heading Select Mode is activated by pressing the HDG Key. Heading Select Mode acquires and maintains
the Selected Heading. The Selected Heading is shown by a cyan bug on the HSI and in the box to the upper
left of the HSI.
Changing the Selected Heading

EIS
NOTE: Pressing the HDG Knob synchronizes the Selected Heading to the current heading.
The Selected Heading is adjusted using the HDG Knob. Pressing the CWS Button and hand-flying
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
the aircraft does not change the Selected Heading. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected
Heading upon release of the CWS Button.
Turns are commanded in the same direction as Selected Heading Bug movement, even if the bug is turned
more than 180° from the present heading (e.g., a 270° turn to the right). However, Selected Heading
MANAGEMENT
changes of more than 330° at a time result in turn reversals.

FLIGHT
Heading Select
Mode Active
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Command Bars Track

Selected Selected Selected Heading
APPENDICES
Heading Heading
Bug
Figure 7-11 Heading Select Mode

INDEX
OVERVIEW
NAVIGATION MODES (GPS, VOR, LOC)
SYSTEM
NOTE: The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS course for the
flight director to enter Navigation Mode.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Pressing the NAV Key selects Navigation Mode. Navigation Mode acquires and tracks the selected navigation
source (GPS, VOR, LOC). The flight director follows GPS roll steering commands when GPS is the selected
navigation source. When the navigation source is VOR or LOC, the flight director creates roll steering
commands from the Selected Course and deviation. Navigation Mode can also be used to fly non-precision
GPS and LOC approaches where vertical guidance is not required.
EIS
If the Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) shows greater than one dot when the NAV Key is pressed, the
selected mode is armed. If the CDI shows less than one dot, Navigation Mode is automatically captured when
the NAV Key is pressed. The armed annunciation appears in white to the left of the active lateral mode.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 7-12 GPS Navigation Mode Armed
MANAGEMENT
When the CDI has automatically switched from GPS to LOC during a LOC/ILS approach, GPS Navigation
FLIGHT
Mode remains active, providing GPS steering guidance until the localizer signal is captured. LOC Navigation
Mode is armed automatically when the navigation source switch takes place if the APR Key is not pressed
prior to the automatic source switch.
If Navigation Mode is active and either of the following occur, the flight director reverts to Roll Hold Mode
AVOIDANCE
(wings rolled level):
HAZARD
• Different VOR tuned while in VOR Navigation Mode (VOR Navigation Mode reverts to armed)
• Navigation source manually switched (with the CDI Softkey)
• During a LOC/ILS approach, the FAF is crossed while in GPS Navigation Mode after the automatic navigation
source switch from GPS to LOC
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
OVERVIEW
Changing the Selected Course

SYSTEM
If the navigation source is VOR or localizer or OBS Mode has been enabled when using GPS, the Selected
Course is controlled using the CRS Knob. Pressing the CWS Button and hand-flying the aircraft does
not change the Selected Course while in Navigation Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Course (or GPS flight plan) when the CWS Button is released.
FLIGHT
GPS Navigation
Mode Active
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Command Bars Indicate Left

AVOIDANCE
GPS is Selected Selected Turn to Track GPS Course

HAZARD
Navigation Source Course
Figure 7-13 Navigation Mode

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
OVERVIEW
COMBINATION MODES (VNV, APR, NAV, BC, GA)
SYSTEM
The following table lists the modes that operating by using both Vertical and Lateral Modes with their
corresponding controls and annunciations.
Maximum
INSTRUMENTS
Roll Reference
FLIGHT
Mode Description Control Annunciation
Command Range
Limit
Captures and tracks descent
Vertical Path Tracking legs of an active vertical VNV Key VPTH
profile
EIS
Captures the Vertical
VNV Target Altitude Capture Navigation (VNV) Target * ALTV
Altitude
AUDIO PANEL
Captures and tracks the
& CNS
Glidepath GP
SBAS glidepath on approach
APR Key
Captures and tracks the ILS
Glideslope GS
glideslope on approach
MANAGEMENT
Captures and tracks
FLIGHT
Backcourse Arm/Capture/Track a localizer signal for BC Key BC 25°
backcourse approaches
Approach, GPS Arm/Capture/Track GPS 25°
Approach, VOR Arm/Capture/Track Captures and tracks the VAPP 25°
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
selected navigation source APR Key
Approach, ILS Arm/Capture/Track (GPS, VOR, LOC)
(Glideslope Mode automatically LOC 25°
armed)
Commands a constant pitch
GO-
angle and wings level on the
AFCS
Takeoff AROUND TO 6°
ground in preparation for
Button
takeoff
Commands a constant pitch GO-
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Go Around** angle and wings level in the AROUND GA 6°
air Button
Autopilot engages and

commands pitch angle
Level *** LVL N/A
APPENDICES
necessary to establish zero

vertical fpm
* ALTV is armed automatically under VPTH when VNV Target Altitude is to be captured instead of Selected Altitude.
**Go Around mode disengages the autopilot unless a compatible lift computer is installed.
INDEX
*** Level mode can only become activated as a function of Electronic Stability and Protection (ESP). Refer to the Additional
Features section for a detailed discussion of the optional ESP feature.
Table 7-5 Flight Director Combination Modes
OVERVIEW
VERTICAL NAVIGATION MODES (VPTH, ALTV)

SYSTEM
NOTE: VNV is disabled when parallel track or Dead Reckoning Mode is active.
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The Selected Altitude takes precedence over any other vertical constraints.
FLIGHT
Vertical Navigation (VNV) flight control is available for enroute/terminal cruise and descent operations any
time that VNV flight planning is available. Refer to the GPS Navigation Section for more information on VNV
flight plans. Conditions for availability include, but are not limited to:
• The selected navigation source is GPS.
EIS
• A VNV flight plan (with at least one altitude-constrained waypoint) or vertical direct-to is active.
• VNV is enabled (VNV Softkey pressed on the MFD).
AUDIO PANEL
• Crosstrack error is valid and within certain limits.

& CNS
• Desired/actual track are valid or track angle error is within certain limits.
• The VNV Target Altitude of the active waypoint is no more than 250 ft above the current aircraft altitude.
MANAGEMENT
The flight director may be armed for VNV at any time, but no target altitudes are captured during a climb.
FLIGHT
The Command Bars provide vertical profile guidance based on specified altitudes (entered manually or loaded
from the database) at waypoints in the active flight plan or vertical direct-to. The appropriate VNV flight
control modes are sequenced by the flight director to follow the path defined by the vertical profile. Upon
reaching the last waypoint in the VNV flight plan, the flight director transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and
AVOIDANCE
cancels any armed VNV modes.

HAZARD
Vertical Path Tracking Mode (VPTH)
NOTE: If another vertical mode key is pressed while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is selected, Vertical Path
Tracking Mode reverts to armed.
AFCS
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is active does not cancel the mode. The
autopilot guides the aircraft back to the descent path upon release of the CWS Button.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When a vertical profile (VNV flight plan) is active and the VNV Key is pressed, Vertical Path Tracking
Mode is armed in preparation for descent path capture. ‘VPTH’ (or ‘/V’ when Glidepath or Glideslope
Mode is concurrently armed) is annunciated in white in addition to previously armed modes. If applicable,
the appropriate altitude capture mode is armed for capture of the next VNV Target Altitude (ALTV) or the
APPENDICES
Selected Altitude (ALTS), whichever is greater.
Figure 7-14 Vertical Path Tracking Armed Annunciations

INDEX
OVERVIEW
Prior to descent path interception, the Selected Altitude must be set below the current aircraft altitude
SYSTEM
by at least 75 feet. For the flight director to transition from Altitude Hold to Vertical Path Tracking Mode,
acknowledgment is required within five minutes of descent path interception by:
• Pressing the VNV Key
INSTRUMENTS
• Adjusting the Selected Altitude
FLIGHT
If acknowledgment is not received within one minute of descent path interception, the white ‘VPTH’
annunciation starts to flash. Flashing continues until acknowledged or the descent path is intercepted. If
the descent is not confirmed by the time of interception, Vertical Path Tracking Mode remains armed and
the descent is not captured.
EIS
In conjunction with the “TOD [top of descent] within 1 minute” annunciation in the Navigation Status
Box and the “Vertical track” voice message, VNV indications (VNV Target Altitude, vertical deviation, and
vertical speed required) appear on the PFD in magenta.
AUDIO PANEL
Vertical Path Tracking
& CNS
Altitude Hold Armed (Flashing Indicates
Mode Active Acknowledgment Required
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
VNV Target
Altitude
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Selected
Altitude
Required
Vertical
AFCS
Speed Bug
GPS is Selected Enroute
ADDITIONAL
Navigation Phase of
FEATURES
Source Flight
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
APPENDICES
Figure 7-15 Vertical Path Capture
When a descent leg is captured (i.e., vertical deviation becomes valid), Vertical Path Tracking becomes
active and tracks the descent profile (next figure). An altitude capture mode (‘ALTS’ or ‘ALTV’) is armed as
appropriate.
INDEX
OVERVIEW
Vertical Path VNV Target Altitude

SYSTEM
Tracking Active Capture Armed

INSTRUMENTS
VNV Target
FLIGHT
Altitude
EIS
Required
Vertical
Speed Bug
AUDIO PANEL
GPS is Selected Terminal Command Bars Indicate Descent to

Maintain Required Vertical Speed
& CNS
Navigation Phase of
Source Flight
Vertical Deviation
Indicator (VDI)
MANAGEMENT
Figure 7-16 Vertical Path Tracking Mode

FLIGHT
If the altimeter barometric setting is adjusted while Vertical Path Tracking is active, the flight director
increases/decreases the descent rate by up to 500 fpm to re-establish the aircraft on the descent path
(without commanding a climb). Adjusting the altimeter barometric setting creates discontinuities in VNV
AVOIDANCE
vertical deviation, moving the descent path. For large adjustments, it may take several minutes for the
HAZARD
aircraft to re-establish on the descent path. If the change is made while nearing a waypoint with a VNV
Target Altitude, the aircraft may not re-establish on the descent path in time to meet the vertical constraint.
Automatic Reversion to Pitch Hold Mode
Several situations can occur while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is active which cause the flight director
AFCS
to revert to Pitch Hold Mode:

• Vertical deviation exceeds 200 feet during an overspeed condition.
• Vertical deviation experiences a discontinuity that both exceeds 200 feet in magnitude and results in
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
the vertical deviation exceeding 200 feet in magnitude. Such discontinuities are usually caused by
flight plan changes that affect the vertical profile.
• Vertical deviation becomes invalid (the Vertical Deviation Indicator is removed from the PFD).
• A display enters Reversionary Mode (this does not apply to an active vertical direct-to).
APPENDICES
Unless VNV is disabled, Vertical Path Tracking Mode and the appropriate altitude capture mode become
armed following the reversion to Pitch Hold Mode to allow for possible profile recapture.
INDEX
OVERVIEW
Non-Path Descents
SYSTEM
Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level Change modes can also be used to fly non-path descents
while VNV flight control is selected. If the VS or FLC Key is pressed while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is
selected, Vertical Path Tracking Mode reverts to armed along with the appropriate altitude capture mode
INSTRUMENTS
to allow profile re-capture.
FLIGHT
Figure 7-17 Flight Level Change VNV Non-Path Descent
EIS
To prevent immediate profile re-capture, the following must be satisfied:
• At least 10 seconds have passed since the non-path transition was initiated
• Vertical deviation from the profile has exceeded 250 feet, but is now less than 200 feet
AUDIO PANEL
Pressing the VNV Key twice re-arms Vertical Path Tracking for immediate profile re-capture.
& CNS
VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode (ALTV)
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: Armed VNV Target Altitude and Selected Altitude capture modes are mutually exclusive. However,
FLIGHT
Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed implicitly (not annunciated) whenever VNV Target Altitude Capture
Mode is armed.
VNV Target Altitude Capture is analogous to Selected Altitude Capture Mode and is armed automatically
after the VNV Key is pressed and the next VNV Target Altitude is to be intercepted before the Selected
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Altitude. The annunciation ‘ALTV’ indicates that the VNV Target Altitude is to be captured. VNV Target
Altitudes are shown in the active flight plan or vertical direct-to, and can be entered manually or loaded
from a database (see the GPS Navigation Section for details). At the same time as “TOD within 1 minute”
is annunciated in the Navigation Status Box, the active VNV Target Altitude is displayed above the Vertical
Speed Indicator.
AFCS
As the aircraft nears the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions to VNV Target
Altitude Capture Mode with Altitude Hold Mode armed. This automatic transition is indicated by the green
‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds and the appearance of the white ‘ALT’ annunciation.
The VNV Target Altitude is shown as the Altitude Reference beside the ‘ALTV’ annunciation and remains
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
displayed above the Vertical Speed Indicator. The Required Vertical Speed Indication (RVSI) is removed
once VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode becomes active.
At 50 feet from the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions from VNV Target
Altitude Capture to Altitude Hold Mode and tracks the level leg. As Altitude Hold Mode becomes active,
APPENDICES
the white ‘ALT’ annunciation moves to the active vertical mode field and flashes green for 10 seconds to
indicate the automatic transition. The flight director automatically arms Vertical Path Tracking, allowing
upcoming descent legs to be captured and subsequently tracked.
INDEX
OVERVIEW
Altitude Reference (In This Case,

SYSTEM
Equal To VNV Altitude Target)
Flash up to 10 sec, Indicating Automatic Transition

INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Figure 7-18 Automatic Mode Transitions During Altitude Capture
Changing the VNV Target Altitude

EIS
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while in VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode does not cancel the mode.
AUDIO PANEL
Changing the current VNV Target Altitude while VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode is active causes
& CNS
the flight director to revert to Pitch Hold Mode. Vertical Path Tracking and the appropriate altitude
capture mode are armed in preparation to capture the new VNV Target Altitude or the Selected Altitude,
depending on which altitude is to be intercepted first.
MANAGEMENT
VNV target altitudes can be changed while editing the active flight plan (see the Flight Management
Section for details).
FLIGHT
GLIDEPATH MODE (GP)

Glidepath Mode is used to track the SBAS-based glidepath. When Glidepath Mode is armed, ‘GP’ is
AVOIDANCE
annunciated in white in the AFCS Status Box.

HAZARD
Selecting Glidepath Mode:

1) Ensure a GPS approach is loaded into the active flight plan. The active waypoint must be part of the flight plan
(cannot be a direct-to a waypoint not in the flight plan).
2) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
AFCS
necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: Some RNAV (GPS) approaches provide a vertical descent angle as an aid in flying a stabilized
approach. These approaches are NOT considered Approaches with Vertical Guidance (APV). Approaches
that are annunciated on the HSI as LNAV or LNAV+V should be flown to an MDA, until visual with the
landing surface, even though vertical glidepath (GP) information may be provided.
APPENDICES
WARNING: Do not rely on the autopilot to level the aircraft at the MDA/DH when flying an approach with
vertical guidance. The autopilot will not level the aircraft at the MDA/DH even if the MDA/DH is set in the
altitude preselect.
INDEX
OVERVIEW
Upon reaching the glidepath, the flight director transitions to Glidepath Mode and begins to capture and
SYSTEM
track the glidepath.
INSTRUMENTS
Figure 7-19 Glidepath Mode Armed
FLIGHT
Once the following conditions have been met, the glidepath can be captured:
• A GPS approach with vertical guidance (LPV, LNAV/VNAV, LNAV+V) is loaded into the active flight plan.
• The active waypoint is at or after the final approach fix (FAF).
EIS
• Vertical deviation is valid.
• The CDI is at less than full-scale deviation
AUDIO PANEL
• Automatic sequencing of waypoints has not been suspended (no ‘SUSP’ annunciation on the HSI)
& CNS
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while Glidepath Mode is active does not cancel the mode. The autopilot
guides the aircraft back to the glidepath upon release of the CWS Button.
MANAGEMENT
GPS Approach Glidepath
Mode Active
FLIGHT
Mode Active
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
GPS is Selected LPV Approach
FEATURES
Navigation Active
Source Glidepath
Indicator
Figure 7-20 Glidepath Mode
APPENDICES
INDEX
OVERVIEW
GLIDESLOPE MODE (GS)

SYSTEM
Glideslope Mode is available for LOC/ILS approaches to capture and track the glideslope. When Glideslope
Mode is armed (annunciated as ‘GS’ in white), LOC Approach Mode is armed as the lateral flight director
mode.
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting Glideslope Mode:

FLIGHT
1) Ensure a valid localizer frequency is tuned.

2) Ensure that LOC is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
EIS
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
necessary).
& CNS
2) Ensure a LOC/ILS approach is loaded into the active flight plan.

3) Ensure the corresponding LOC frequency is tuned.
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Figure 7-21 Glideslope Mode Armed

AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Once LOC is the navigation source, the localizer and glideslope can be captured. Upon reaching the
glideslope, the flight director transitions to Glideslope Mode and begins to capture and track the glideslope.
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while Glideslope Mode is active does not cancel the mode. The autopilot
guides the aircraft back to the glideslope upon release of the CWS Button.
AFCS
APPROACH MODES (GPS, VAPP, LOC)

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS course for the
flight director to enter Approach Mode.
Approach Mode is activated when the APR Key is pressed. Approach Mode acquires and tracks the
selected navigation source (GPS, VOR, or LOC), depending on loaded approach. This mode uses the selected
APPENDICES
navigation receiver deviation and desired course inputs to fly the approach. Pressing the APR Key when the
CDI is greater than one dot arms the selected approach mode (annunciated in white to the left of the active
lateral mode). If the CDI is less the 1 dot, the LOC is automatically captured when the APR Key is pressed.
VOR Approach Mode (VAPP) provides greater sensitivity for signal tracking than VOR Navigation Mode.
INDEX
OVERVIEW
Selecting VOR Approach Mode:
SYSTEM
1) Ensure a valid VOR frequency is tuned
2) Ensure that VOR is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
When GPS Approach Mode is armed, Glidepath Mode is also armed.
Selecting GPS Approach Mode:
1) Ensure a GPS approach is loaded into the active flight plan. The active waypoint must be part of the flight plan
EIS
(cannot be a direct-to a waypoint not in the flight plan).
necessary).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 7-22 GPS Approach Mode Armed
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
LOC Approach Mode allows the autopilot to fly a LOC/ILS approach with a glideslope. When LOC
Approach Mode is armed, Glideslope Mode is also armed automatically. LOC captures are inhibited if the
difference between aircraft heading and localizer course exceeds 105°.
AVOIDANCE
Selecting LOC Approach Mode:
HAZARD
1) Ensure a valid localizer frequency is tuned.
2) Ensure that LOC is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
AFCS
Or:
necessary).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Ensure a LOC/ILS approach is loaded into the active flight plan.
3) Ensure the corresponding LOC frequency is tuned.
APPENDICES
If the following occurs, the flight director reverts to Roll Hold Mode (wings rolled level):
• Approach Mode is active and a Vectors-To-Final is activated
• Approach Mode is active and Navigation source is manually switched
• During a LOC/ILS approach, GPS Navigation Mode is active and the FAF is crossed after the automatic
INDEX
navigation source switch from GPS to LOC
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM
Course is controlled using the CRS Knob.
Pressing the CWS Button and hand-flying the aircraft does not change the Selected Course while in
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Approach Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Course (or GPS flight plan) when
the CWS Button is released.
BACKCOURSE MODE (BC)

NOTE: When making a backcourse approach, set the Selected Course to the localizer front course.
EIS
Backcourse Mode captures and tracks a localizer signal in the backcourse direction.Backcourse Mode is
armed if the CDI is greater than one dot when the mode is selected.The flight director creates roll steering
commands from the Selected Course and deviation when in Backcourse Mode.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Backcourse
Mode Active
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
LOC2 is Selected Navigation Source

Figure 7-23 Backcourse Mode
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

APPENDICES
Course is controlled using the CRS Knob.

Pressing the CWS Button and hand-flying the aircraft does not reset any reference data while in Backcourse
Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Course when the CWS Button is released.
INDEX
OVERVIEW
INTERCEPTING AND FLYING A DME ARC
SYSTEM
The AFCS will intercept and track a DME arc that is part of the active flight plan provided that GPS
Navigation Mode is engaged, GPS is the active navigation source on the CDI, and the DME arc segment is
the active flight plan leg. It is important to note that automatic navigation of DME arcs is based on GPS.
INSTRUMENTS
Thus, even if the APR key is pressed and LOC or VOR Approach Mode is armed prior to reaching the Initial
FLIGHT
Approach Fix (IAF), Approach Mode will not activate until the arc segment is completed.
If the pilot decides to intercept the arc at a location other than the published IAF (i.e. ATC provides vectors
to intercept the arc) and subsequently selects Heading Mode or Roll Mode, the AFCS will not automatically
intercept or track the arc unless the pilot activates the arc leg of the flight plan and arms GPS Navigation
Mode. The AFCS will not intercept and fly a DME arc before reaching an IAF that defines the beginning of the
EIS
arc segment. Likewise, if at any point while established on the DME arc the pilot deselects GPS Navigation
Mode, the AFCS will no longer track the arc.
TAKEOFF (TO) AND GO AROUND (GA) MODES
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Go Around and Takeoff modes are coupled pitch and roll modes and are annunciated as both the vertical
and lateral modes when active. In these modes, the flight director commands a constant set pitch attitude and
wings level. The Go Around Button is used to select both modes. The mode entered by the flight director
MANAGEMENT
depends on whether the aircraft is on the ground.
FLIGHT
Takeoff Mode provides an attitude reference during rotation and takeoff. This mode can be selected only
while on the ground by pushing the Go Around Button. The flight director Command Bars assume a wings-
level, pitch-up attitude.
Pressing the Go Around Button while in the air activates the flight director in wings level, pitch-up attitudes,
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
allowing the execution of a missed approach or a go around.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
Go Around
Mode Active
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Command Bars Indicate Climb

MANAGEMENT
Takeoff Mode Active

FLIGHT
Figure 7-24 Takeoff and Go Around Modes

AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
LEVEL MODE (LVL)

Level (LVL) mode becomes active only as a function of Electronic Stability and Protection (ESP). Refer to
the Additional Features section for a detailed discussion of the ESP feature.
When the normal flight envelope thresholds have been exceeded for more than 50% of the last 20 seconds,
AFCS
Level mode is activated. The autopilot will engage and provide input to bring the aircraft back into straight
and level flight based on zero degrees roll angle and zero feet per minute vertical speed. An aural “Engaging
Autopilot” alert sounds and the lateral and vertical flight director annunciations will display “LVL”. The AFCS
ADDITIONAL
will remain in Level mode until the pilot selects another mode.
FEATURES
Figure 7-25 Level Mode

APPENDICES
INDEX
OVERVIEW
7.4 AUTOPILOT OPERATION
SYSTEM
NOTE: Refer to the current pertinent flight manual for specific instructions regarding emergency procedures.
INSTRUMENTS
The autopilot operate flight control surface servos to provide automatic flight control. The autopilot controls
FLIGHT
the aircraft pitch and roll attitudes following commands received from the Flight Director. Pitch autotrim provides
trim commands to the pitch trim servo to relieve any sustained effort required by the pitch servo.
FLIGHT CONTROL
Pitch and roll commands are provided to the servos, based on the active Flight Director modes. Servo motor
EIS
control limits the maximum servo speed and torque. The servo mounts are equipped with slip-clutches set to
certain values. This allows the servos to be overridden in case of an emergency.
PITCH AXIS AND PITCH TRIM
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The autopilot pitch axis uses pitch rate to stabilize the aircraft pitch attitude during upsets and Flight
Director maneuvers. Flight Director pitch commands are rate and attitude-limited, combined with pitch
damper control, and sent to the pitch servo motor. The pitch servo measures the output effort (torque) and
provides this signal to the pitch trim servo. The pitch trim servo commands the motor to reduce the average
MANAGEMENT
pitch servo effort.
FLIGHT
When the autopilot is not engaged, the pitch trim servo may be used to provide manual electric trim.
This allows the aircraft to be trimmed using a control stick switch rather than the trim wheel. Manual trim
commands are generated only when both halves of the MEPT Switch are operated simultaneously. Trim
AVOIDANCE
speeds are scheduled with airspeed to provide more consistent response.
HAZARD
ROLL AXIS
The autopilot roll axis uses roll rate to stabilize aircraft roll attitude during upsets and Flight Director
maneuvers. The Flight Director roll commands are rate- and attitude-limited, combined with roll damper
control, and sent to the roll servo motor.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
OVERVIEW
ENGAGEMENT
SYSTEM
NOTE: Autopilot engagement/disengagement is not equivalent to servo engagement/disengagement. Use

the CWS Button to disengage the pitch and roll servos while the autopilot remains active.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
When the AP Key is pressed, the autopilot and flight director (if not already active) are activated and the
annunciator lights on the AFCS controller for the autopilot is illuminated. The flight director engages in Pitch
and Roll Hold Modes when initially activated.
Autopilot
Engaged
EIS
Figure 7-26 Autopilot Engaged

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Autopilot status is displayed in the center of the AFCS Status Box. Engagement is indicated by green ‘AP’
annunciation.
CONTROL WHEEL STEERING

MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
During autopilot operation, the aircraft may be hand-flown without disengaging the autopilot. Pressing and
holding the CWS Button disengages the pitch and roll servos from the flight control surfaces and allows the
aircraft to be hand-flown. At the same time, the flight director is synchronized to the aircraft attitude during
the maneuver.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
The ‘AP’ annunciation is temporarily replaced by ‘CWS’ in white for the duration of CWS maneuvers.
Control Wheel Steering
AFCS
Figure 7-27 CWS Annunciation
In most scenarios, releasing the CWS Button reengages the autopilot with a new reference. Refer to flight
director mode descriptions for specific CWS behavior in each mode.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
OVERVIEW
DISENGAGEMENT
SYSTEM
The autopilot is manually disengaged by pushing the AP DISC Switch, AP TRIM ARM Switch, or the AP Key
on the MFD. Manual disengagement is indicated by a five-second flashing yellow ‘AP’ annunciation and a two-
second autopilot disconnect aural alert. After manual disengagement, the autopilot disconnect aural alert may
INSTRUMENTS
be cancelled by pushing the AP TRIM ARM or AP DISC Switch (AP DISC Switch also cancels the flashing ‘AP’
FLIGHT
annunciation).
Figure 7-28 Manual Autopilot Disengagement
EIS
Automatic autopilot disengagement is indicated by a flashing red and white ‘AP’ annunciation and by the
autopilot disconnect aural alert, which continue until acknowledged by pushing the AP DISC or AP TRIM ARM
Switch. Automatic autopilot disengagement occurs due to:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• System failure
• Invalid sensor data
• Stall warning
MANAGEMENT
• Inability to compute default flight director modes (FD also disengages automatically)
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
OVERVIEW
7.5 AFCS ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS

SYSTEM
AFCS ALERTS
INSTRUMENTS
Alert Condition Annunciation Description

FLIGHT
Aileron Mistrim Right AILñ Roll servo providing sustained force in the
Aileron Mistrim Left œAIL indicated direction
Elevator Mistrim Pitch servo providing sustained force in the

¤ELE
Down
EIS
indicated direction. May indicate a failure of

Elevator Mistrim Up £ELE the pitch trim servo or trim system.
Pitch Trim Failure If AP engaged, take control of the aircraft and

disengage AP
AUDIO PANEL
(or Stuck AP TRIM PTRM If AP disengaged, move AP TRIM switches separately

& CNS
Switch) to unstick
Roll Failure ROLL Roll axis control failure; AP inoperative
Pitch Failure PTCH Pitch axis control failure; AP inoperative

MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AP and MEPT are unavailable; FD may still be

System Failure AFCS
available
Performing preflight system test; aural alert sounds at
completion
Do not press the AP DISC Switch during servo power-
AVOIDANCE
PFT
HAZARD
up and preflight system tests. Doing so may cause

Preflight Test
the preflight system test to fail or never to start. Cycle
power to the servos if this occurs.
PFT Preflight system test failed; aural alert sounds at failure
Table 7-6 AFCS Alerts

AFCS
OVERSPEED PROTECTION
NOTE: Overspeed protection is not active in ALT, GS or GP modes.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
While Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, Flight Level Change, Vertical Path Tracking, or an altitude capture mode is
active, airspeed is monitored by the flight director. Overspeed protection is provided to limit the flight director’s
pitch command in situations where the flight director cannot acquire and maintain the mode reference for the
selected vertical mode without exceeding Vne.
APPENDICES
When Overspeed Protection is active, the Airspeed Reference appears in a box above the Airspeed Indicator,
flashing a yellow ‘MAXSPD’ annunciation. Engine power should be reduced and/or the pitch reference adjusted
to slow the aircraft. The annunciation disappears when the overspeed condition is resolved.
INDEX
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
Figure 7-29 Overspeed Annunciation
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM
SUSPECTED AUTOPILOT MALFUNCTION

INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
NOTE: Consult the aircraft documentation for the location of circuit breakers as well as specifics that may
supplement or amplify this procedure.
If an autopilot failure or trim failure is suspected to have occurred, perform the following steps:
1) Firmly grasp the control wheel.
EIS
2) Press and hold the AP DISC Switch. The autopilot will disconnect and power is removed from the trim motor.
Power is also removed from all primary servo motors and engaged solenoids. Note the visual and aural alerting
indicating autopilot disconnect.
AUDIO PANEL
3) Retrim the aircraft as needed. Substantial trim adjustment may be needed.

& CNS
4) Pull the appropriate circuit breaker(s) to electrically isolate the servo and solenoid components.
5) Release the AP DISC Switch.
MANAGEMENT
OVERPOWERING AUTOPILOT SERVOS

FLIGHT
In the context of this discussion, “overpowering” refers to any pressure or force applied to the pitch controls
when the autopilot is engaged. A small amount of pressure or force on the pitch controls can cause the autopilot
automatic trim to run to an out-of-trim condition. Therefore, any application of pressure or force to the
AVOIDANCE
controls should be avoided when the autopilot is engaged.

HAZARD
Overpowering the autopilot during flight will cause the autopilot’s automatic trim to run, resulting in an out-
of-trim condition or cause the trim to hit the stop if the action is prolonged. In this case, larger than anticipated
control forces are required after the autopilot is disengaged.
The following steps should be added to the preflight check:
AFCS
1) Check for proper autopilot operation and ensure the autopilot can be overpowered.
2) Note the forces required to overpower the autopilot servo clutches.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
NOTE: With the availability of SafeTaxi®, ChartView, IFR/VFR, or FliteCharts®, it may be necessary to carry
another source of charts on-board the aircraft.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Additional features of the system include the following:
• SafeTaxi® diagrams • Iridium® Satellite Telephone and SMS text messaging
• ChartView, FliteCharts®, and IFR/VFR electronic • Bluetooth connections (Connext®)
charts • Electronic Stability and Protection (ESP™) System
EIS
• AOPA™ or AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory (optional)
• SiriusXM® Satellite Radio entertainment • Electronic Checklists
• Flight Data Logging
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SafeTaxi diagrams provide detailed taxiway, runway, and ramp information at more than 1300 airports in the
United States. By decreasing range on an airport that has a SafeTaxi diagram available, a close up view of the
airport layout can be seen.
The optional ChartView, FliteCharts and IFR/VFR electronic charts provides on-board electronic terminal
MANAGEMENT
procedures charts. Electronic charts offer the convenience of rapid access to essential information.
FLIGHT
The Airport Directory offers detailed information for a selected airport, such as available services, hours of
operation, and lodging options.
The optional SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment audio feature of the GDL® 69A SXM Data Link Receiver
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
handles more than 170 channels of music, news, and sports. SiriusXM Satellite Radio offers more entertainment
choices and longer range coverage than commercial broadcast stations.
The Flight Data Logging feature automatically stores critical flight and engine data on an SD™ data card.
Approximately 1,000 flight hours can be recorded for each 1GB of available space on the card.
Iridium Telephone Services and SMS messaging is an optional subscription service offered through Garmin
AFCS
Connext® and Iridium Satellite LLC.
Connext® allows for setting up the installed optional Flight Stream device for a Bluetooth connection between
the system and a mobile device running the Garmin Pilot™ application.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The optional Garmin Electronic Stability and Protection (ESP) system discourages aircraft operation outside the
normal flight envelope.
Electronic checklists allow a pilot to quickly find the proper procedure for a particular phase of flight. APPENDICES
INDEX
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
8.1 SAFETAXI
SYSTEM
SafeTaxi is an enhanced feature that gives greater map detail when viewing airports at close range. The
maximum map ranges for enhanced detail are pilot configurable. When viewing at ranges close enough to
INSTRUMENTS
show the airport detail, the map reveals taxiways with identifying letters/numbers, airport Hot Spots, and airport
FLIGHT
landmarks including ramps, buildings, control towers, and other prominent features. Resolution is greater at
lower map ranges. When the MFD display is within the SafeTaxi ranges, the airplane symbol on the airport
provides enhanced position awareness.
Designated Hot Spots are recognized at airports with many intersecting taxiways and runways, and/or complex
ramp areas. Airport Hot Spots are outlined to caution pilots of areas on an airport surface where positional
EIS
awareness confusion or runway incursions happen most often. Hot Spots are defined with a magenta circle or
outline around the region of possible confusion.
Any map page that displays the navigation view can also show the SafeTaxi airport layout within the maximum
AUDIO PANEL
configured range. The following is a list of pages where the SafeTaxi feature can be seen:
& CNS
• Navigation Map Page • VOR Information Page

• PFD Maps • User Waypoint Information Page
• Weather Datalink Page • Trip Planning Page
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
• Airport Information Page • Nearest Pages

• Intersection Information Page • Active and Stored Flight Plan Pages
• NDB Information Page
AVOIDANCE
During ground operations the aircraft’s position is displayed in reference to taxiways, runways, and airport
HAZARD
features. In the example shown, the aircraft is on taxiway Bravo inside the High Alert Intersection boundary
on KSFO airport. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta. When panning over the airport, features such as
runway holding lines and taxiways are shown at the cursor.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Taxiway
EIS
Identification
Aircraft
Position
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airport Hot
Spot Outline
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Airport
AVOIDANCE
Features
HAZARD
Detail Softkey
Removes
Taxiway
Markings
AFCS
Figure 8-1 SafeTaxi Depiction on the Navigation Map Page
The Detail Softkey (declutter) label advances to Detail All, Detail 3, Detail 2 and Detail 1 each time the
softkey is selected for easy recognition of decluttering level. Pressing the Detail All Softkey removes the taxiway
ADDITIONAL
markings and airport feature labels. Pressing the Detail 3 Softkey removes VOR station ID, the VOR symbol,
FEATURES
and intersection names if within the airport plan view. Pressing the Detail 2 Softkey removes the airport runway
layout, unless the airport in view is part of an active route structure. Pressing the Detail 1 Softkey cycles back to
the original map detail. Refer to Map Declutter Levels in the Flight Management Section.
APPENDICES
INDEX
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
Configuring SafeTaxi range:

SYSTEM
1) While viewing the ‘Map-Navigation Map’ Page, press the MENU Key to display the ‘Page Menu.’
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Map Settings’ Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aviation’ Group and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the ‘Aviation’ Group options to SafeTaxi.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the range of distances.
6) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired distance for maximum SafeTaxi display range.
7) Press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
EIS
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map-Navigation Map’ Page.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
8.2 CHARTS
SYSTEM
Electronic charts that resemble the paper versions of AeroNav Services terminal procedures charts (FliteCharts)
and Jeppesen terminal procedures charts (ChartView) can be displayed on the MFD. When the databases for
INSTRUMENTS
both chart types are purchased and loaded in the system, the desired charts brand, or source, can be selected for
FLIGHT
viewing. The active chart source for a particular procedure is shown on the information pane under Source.
Selecting Preferred Charts Source:
1) While viewing a chart press the MENU Softkey to display the Page Menu Options.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup menu option and press the ENT Key.
EIS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move to the Preferred Charts Source option.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between the available options (FliteCharts, ChartView).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Preferred Charts Source Option
Chart Setup Option
Figure 8-2 Preferred Charts Source
AFCS
Chart Source
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 8-3 Chart Source
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
CHARTVIEW
SYSTEM
ChartView resembles the paper version of Jeppesen terminal procedures charts. The charts are displayed
in full color with high-resolution. The MFD depiction shows the aircraft position on the moving map in the
planview of approach charts and on airport diagrams. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
The geo-referenced aircraft position is indicated by an aircraft symbol displayed on the chart when the current
position is within the boundaries of the chart. Inset boxes are not considered within the chart boundaries.
Therefore, when the aircraft symbol reaches a chart boundary line, or inset box, the aircraft symbol is removed
from the display.
The following figure shows examples of off-scale areas, indicated by the grey shading. Note, the grey shading
EIS
is for illustrative purposes only and will not appear on the published chart or MFD display. These off-scale
areas appear on the chart to convey supplemental information. However, the depicted geographical position of
this information, as it relates to the chart planview, is not the actual geographic position. Therefore, when the
aircraft symbol appears within one of these areas, the aircraft position indicated is relative to the chart planview,
AUDIO PANEL
not to the off-scale area.

& CNS
Inset Box
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Off-Scale
Area
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Off-Scale
Areas
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-4 Sample Chart Indicating Off-Scale Areas
NOTE: Do not maneuver the aircraft based solely upon the geo-referenced aircraft symbol.
APPENDICES
The ChartView database subscription is available from Jeppesen, Inc. Available data includes:
• Arrivals (STAR) • Airport Diagrams
• Departure Procedures (DP) • NOTAMs
• Approaches
INDEX
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
TERMINAL PROCEDURES CHARTS
SYSTEM
Selecting Terminal Procedures Charts:
While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Nearest Airport Page, or Flight Plan Page, press the Charts Softkey.
INSTRUMENTS
Or:
FLIGHT
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Options Menu to Show Approach Chart
3) Press the ENT Key to display the chart.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Figure 8-5 Chart Options Page Menu
On the Waypoint Airport Information Page Options Menu, select the desired chart and press the ENT Key
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
to display the chart.
When no terminal procedure chart is available, the banner CHART NOT AVAILABLE appears on the screen.
The CHART NOT AVAILABLE banner does not refer to the FliteCharts subscription, but rather the availability
of a particular airport chart selection or procedure for a selected airport.
AFCS
Figure 8-6 No Available Charts Banner
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an individual chart), the
banner UNABLE TO DISPLAY CHART is then displayed.
APPENDICES
Figure 8-7 Unable To Display Chart Banner
When a chart is not available by pressng the Charts Softkey or selecting a Page Menu Option, charts may
be obtained for other airports from the WPT Pages or Flight Plan Pages.
INDEX
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
If a chart is available for the destination airport, or the airport selected in the active flight plan, the chart
SYSTEM
appears on the screen. When no flight plan is active, or when not flying to a direct-to destination, pressing
the Charts Softkey displays the chart for the nearest airport, if available.
The chart shown is one associated with the ‘WPT – Airport Information’ page. Usually this is the airport
INSTRUMENTS
runway diagram. Where no runway diagram exists, but Take Off Minimums or Alternate Minimums are
FLIGHT
available, that page appears. If Airport Information pages are unavailable, the Approach Chart for the airport
is shown.
Selecting a chart:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Flight Plan Page, or Nearest Airports Page, press the Charts Softkey.
EIS
The airport diagram or approach chart is displayed on the Airport Information Page.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select either the Airport Identifier Box or the Approach Box. (Press the APR Softkey
AUDIO PANEL
if the Approach Box is not currently shown).

& CNS
4) Turn the small and large FMS Knob to enter the desired airport identifier.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the airport selection.
MANAGEMENT
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Approach Box.

FLIGHT
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to show the approach chart selection choices.
8) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the available charts.
9) Press the ENT Key to complete the chart selection.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Select Desired
Approach Chart
from Menu
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Chart Scale
INDEX
Figure 8-8 Approach Information Page, Chart Selection
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
While the Approaches Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the system softkeys are blank. Once the
SYSTEM
desired chart is selected, the chart scale can be changed and the chart page can be scrolled using the Joystick.
Pressing the Joystick centers the chart on the screen.
The aircraft symbol is shown on the chart only if the chart is to scale and the aircraft position is within the
INSTRUMENTS
boundaries of the chart. The aircraft symbol is not displayed when the Aircraft Not Shown Icon appears. If
FLIGHT
the Chart Scale Box displays a banner NOT TO SCALE, the aircraft symbol is not shown. The Aircraft Not
Shown Icon may appear at certain times, even if the chart is displayed to scale.
Pressing the Chart Softkey switches between the ChartView diagram and the associated map in the WPT
page group. In the example shown, the Chart Softkey switches between the Dekalk-Peachtree, GA (KPDK)
Airport Diagram and the navigation map on the ‘MAP – Chart + Navigation Map’ page.
EIS
Pressing the Info Softkey returns to the airport diagram when the view is on a different chart. If the
displayed chart is the airport diagram, the Info Softkey has no effect. The aircraft position is shown in
magenta on the ChartView diagrams when the location of the aircraft is within the chart boundaries.
AUDIO PANEL
Another source for additional airport information is from the Info Box above the chart for certain airports.
& CNS
This information source is not related to the Info Softkey. When the Info Box is selected using the FMS Knob,
the system softkeys are blank. The Charlotte, NC airport has five additional charts offering information;
the Airport Diagram, Take-off Minimums, Class B Airspace, Airline Parking Gate Coordinates, and Airline
MANAGEMENT
Parking Gate Location. (The numbers in parentheses after the chart name are Jeppesen designators.)
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Aircraft
Current
Position APPENDICES
Figure 8-9 Airport Information Page, Info View, Full Screen Width
INDEX
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
In the example shown in following figure, the Class B Chart is selected. Pressing the ENT Key displays the
SYSTEM
Charlotte Class B Airspace Chart.

INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Figure 8-10 Airport Information Page, Class B Chart Selected from Info View
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
- Pressing the DP Softkey displays the Departure Procedure Chart if available.

- Pressing the STAR Softkey displays the Standard Terminal Arrival Chart if available.
- Pressing the APR Softkey displays the approach chart for the airport if available.
- Pressing the WX Softkey shows the airport weather frequency information, and includes weather data such
AFCS
as METAR and TAF from the SiriusXM Data Link Receiver, when available. Weather information is available
only when a SiriusXM Data Link Receiver is installed and the SiriusXM Weather subscription is current.
- Recent NOTAMS applicable to the current ChartView cycle are included in the ChartView database. Pressing
the NOTAM Softkey shows the local NOTAM information for selected airports, when available. When
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTAMS are not available, the NOTAM Softkey label appears subdued and is disabled. The NOTAM
Softkey may appear on the Airport Information Page and all of the chart page selections. Pressing the
NOTAM Softkey again removes the NOTAMS information.
APPENDICES
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.

INDEX
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
CHART OPTIONS
SYSTEM
- Pressing the CHRT Opt Softkey displays the next level of softkeys, the Chart Options level.
- Pressing the All Softkey shows the complete approach chart on the screen.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
Complete
& CNS
Chart
Shown
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Figure 8-11 Approach Information Page, ALL View
- Pressing the Header Softkey shows the header view (approach chart briefing strip) on the screen.
- Pressing the Plan Softkey shows the approach chart two dimensional plan view.
AFCS
- Pressing the Profile Softkey displays the approach chart descent profile strip.
- Pressing the Minimums Softkey displays the minimum descent altitude/visibility strip at the bottom of the
approach chart.
ADDITIONAL
- If the chart scale has been adjusted to view a small area of the chart, pressing the Fit WDTH Softkey changes
FEATURES
the chart size to fit the available screen width.
- Pressing the Full SCN Softkey alternates between removing and replacing the data window to the right.
- Pressing the ROT CCW Softkey rotates the displayed chart counter clockwise in 90 degree increments.
APPENDICES
- Pressing the ROT CW Softkey rotates the displayed chart clockwise in 90 degree increments.
- Pressing the Back Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts to the chart selection softkeys.
INDEX
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
Selecting Additional Information:

SYSTEM
1) While viewing the Airport Taxi Diagram, press the Full SCN Softkey to display the information windows (Airport,
Info).
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Airport, Info, Runways, or Frequencies Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Info Box choices. If multiple choices are available, scroll to the desired
choice with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
5) Press the FMS Knob again to deactivate the cursor.
EIS
Pressing the Back Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts to the chart selection softkeys. The full screen
view can also be selected by using the page menu option.
Selecting full screen On or Off:
AUDIO PANEL
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu Options.
& CNS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Full Screen On Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
Figure 8-12 Page Menus
Selecting Day, Night, or Automatic View:

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
INDEX
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
EIS
Figure 8-13 Page Menu Chart Setup
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between Day, Auto, and Night Options.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) If Auto Mode is selected, turn the large FMS Knob to select the percentage field. Use the small FMS Knob to
change the percentage value. The percentage value is the day/night crossover point based on the percentage of
backlighting intensity. For example, if the value is set to 15%, the day/night display changes when the display
backlight reaches 15% of full brightness.
MANAGEMENT
The display must be changed in order for the new setting to become active. This may be accomplished by
FLIGHT
selecting another page or changing the display range.
5) Press the FMS Knob when finished to remove the Chart Setup Menu.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-14 Arrival Information Page, Day View

INDEX
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
Figure 8-15 Arrival Information Page, Night View

& CNS
FLITECHARTS
MANAGEMENT
FliteCharts resemble the paper version of AeroNav Services terminal procedures charts. The charts are
FLIGHT
displayed with high-resolution and in color for applicable charts.

position is within the boundaries of the chart. Not all charts are geo-referenced. These charts will display an
Aircraft Not Shown Icon in the lower right corner of the MFD.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
An aircraft symbol may be displayed within an off-scale area depicted on some charts. Off-scale areas are
indicated by the grey shading. Note, these areas are not shaded on the published chart. These off-scale areas
appear on the chart to convey supplemental information. However, the depicted geographical position of
this information, as it relates to the chart planview, is not the actual geographic position. Therefore, when the
aircraft symbol appears within one of these areas, the aircraft position indicated is relative to the chart planview,
AFCS
not to the off-scale area.

The FliteCharts database subscription is available from Garmin. Available data includes:
• Arrivals (STAR) • Approaches
ADDITIONAL
• Departure Procedures (DP) • Airport Diagrams

FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
Off-Scale
FLIGHT
Areas Off-Scale
Area
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Off-Scale
Areas
Off-Scale
AVOIDANCE
Area
HAZARD
AFCS
Figure 8-16 Sample Chart Indicating Off-Scale Areas
NOTE: Do not maneuver the aircraft based solely upon the geo-referenced aircraft symbol.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
FLITECHARTS SOFTKEYS
FliteCharts functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. While on the Navigation Map Page, Nearest
Airports Page, or Flight Plan Page, pressing the Charts Softkey displays the available terminal chart and
APPENDICES
advances to the chart selection level of softkeys: CHRT Opt, Chart, Info, DP, STAR, APR, WX, and Go
Back. The chart selection softkeys appear on the Airport Information Page.
- Pressing the Go Back Softkey reverts to the top level softkeys and previous page.
- Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the available terminal chart and advances to the next level of
softkeys: All, Fit WDTH, Full SCN, and Back.
INDEX
While viewing the CHRT Opt Softkeys, after 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, the system reverts to the chart
selection softkeys.
NOTAMs are not available with FliteCharts. The NOTAM Softkey label appears subdued and is disabled.
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
TERMINAL PROCEDURES CHARTS

SYSTEM
Selecting Terminal Procedures Charts:

While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Nearest Airport Page, or Flight Plan Page, press the Charts Softkey.
INSTRUMENTS
Or:
FLIGHT

2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Options Menu to Charts.
3) Press the ENT Key to display the chart.
EIS
On the Waypoint Airport Information Page Options Menu, select the desired chart and press the ENT Key
to display the chart.
When no terminal procedure chart is available, the banner NO AVAILABLE CHARTS appears on the screen.
AUDIO PANEL
The NO AVAILABLE CHARTS banner does not refer to the FliteCharts subscription, but rather the availability
& CNS
of a particular airport chart selection or procedure for a selected airport.

MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-17 No Available Charts Banner

FLIGHT
If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an individual chart), the
banner UNABLE TO DISPLAY CHART is then displayed.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Figure 8-18 Unable To Display Chart Banner

AFCS
When a chart is not available by pressing the Charts Softkey or selecting a Page Menu Option, charts may
be obtained for other airports from the WPT Pages or Flight Plan Pages.
If a chart is available for the destination airport, or the airport selected in the active flight plan, the chart
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
appears on the screen. When no flight plan is active, or when not flying to a direct-to destination, pressing
the Charts Softkey displays the chart for the nearest airport, if available.
The chart shown is one associated with the ‘WPT – Airport Information’ page. Usually this is the airport
runway diagram. Where no runway diagram exists, but Take Off Minimums or Alternate Minimums are
APPENDICES
available, that page appears. If Airport Information pages are unavailable, the Approach Chart for the airport
is shown.
INDEX
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
Selecting a chart:
SYSTEM
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Flight Plan Page, or Nearest Airports Page, press the Charts Softkey.
The airport diagram or approach chart is displayed on the Airport Information Page.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select either the Airport Identifier Box or the Approach Box. (Press the APR Softkey
if the Approach Box is not currently shown).
4) Turn the small and large FMS Knob to enter the desired airport identifier.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the airport selection.
EIS
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Approach Box.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to show the approach chart selection choices.
8) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the available charts.
AUDIO PANEL
9) Press the ENT Key to complete the chart selection.
& CNS
While the Approach Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the sytem softkeys are blank. Once the desired
chart is selected, the chart scale can be changed and the chart can be panned using the Joystick. Pressing the
Joystick centers the chart on the screen.
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
The aircraft symbol is not shown on FliteCharts. The Chart Scale Box displays a banner NOT TO SCALE,
and the Aircraft Not Shown Icon is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen.
Pressing the Chart Softkey switches between the FliteCharts diagram and the associated map in the WPT
page group. In the example shown, the Chart Softkey switches between the Gainesville, FL (KGNV) Airport
AVOIDANCE
Diagram and the navigation map on the ‘WPT – Airport Information’ page.
HAZARD
Pressing the Info Softkey returns to the airport diagram when the view is on a different chart. If the
displayed chart is the airport diagram, the Info Softkey has no effect.
Another source for additional airport information is from the Info Box above the chart or to the right of the
chart for certain airports. This information source is not related to the Info Softkey. When the Info Box is
AFCS
selected using the FMS Knob, the system softkeys are blank.
- Pressing the ENT Key displays the IFR Alternate Minimums Chart.
- Pressing the DP Softkey displays the Departure Procedure Chart if available.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Pressing the STAR Softkey displays the Standard Terminal Arrival Chart if available.
- Pressing the APR Softkey displays the approach chart for the airport if available.
- Pressing the WX Softkey shows the airport weather frequency information, when available, and includes
weather data if a data link weather receiver is installed.
APPENDICES
INDEX
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
Selecting Additional Information:

SYSTEM
1) While viewing the Airport Taxi Diagram, press the WX Softkey to display the information windows (Airport, Info).
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Info Box.

FLIGHT
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Info Box choices. When the Info Box is selected the System softkeys are
blank. If multiple choices are available, scroll to the desired choice with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT
Key to complete the selection.
5) Press the FMS Knob again to deactivate the cursor.
EIS
Pressing the Go Back Softkey reverts to the previous page (Navigation Map Page or Flight Plan Page).
CHART OPTIONS
AUDIO PANEL
- Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the next level of softkeys, the Chart Options level.
& CNS
- Pressing the All Softkey shows the complete chart on the screen.
- Pressing the Fit WIDTH Softkey fits the width of the chart in the display viewing area. In the example
shown, the chart at close range is replaced with the full width chart.
MANAGEMENT
- Pressing the Full SCN Softkey alternates between removing and replacing the data window to the right.
FLIGHT
- Pressing the ROT CCW Softkey rotates the displayed chart counter clockwise in 90 degree increments.
- Pressing the ROT CW Softkey rotates the displayed chart clockwise in 90 degree increments.
- Pressing the Back Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts to the chart selection softkeys.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
The full screen view can also be selected by using the page menu option.
Selecting full screen On or Off:
AFCS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move between the Full Screen and Color Scheme Options.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between the On and Off Full Screen Options.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
DAY/NIGHT VIEW
FliteCharts can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing. The Day View offers
a better presentation in a bright environment. The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a
dark environment. When the Chart Setup Box is selected the MFD softkeys are blank.
APPENDICES
INDEX
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
Selecting Day, Night, or Automatic View:
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move to the Color Scheme Option.
FLIGHT
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between Day, Auto, and Night Options.
5) If Auto Mode is selected, turn the large FMS Knob to select the percentage field. Use the small FMS Knob to
change the percentage value. The percentage value is the day/night crossover point based on the percentage of
backlighting intensity. For example, if the value is set to 15%, the day/night display changes when the display
backlight reaches 15% of full brightness.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
6) Press the FMS Knob when finished to remove the Chart Setup Menu.
& CNS
IFR/VFR CHARTS
The system can display GPS navigation information on a VFR chart, a low altitude IFR chart, or a high altitude
IFR chart, if installed. The information overlaid on the IFR/VFR Charts is selected and setup on the Navigation
MANAGEMENT
Map, but the IFR/VFR charts will not display some of the selected items. Only the following items will be
FLIGHT
overlaid on the chart:
• Map Pointer (distance and bearing to pointer, location of pointer, name, and other pertinent information)
• Map Range (17 range choices from 1 nm to 150 nm)
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
• Map Orientation (always North Up for IFR/VFR Charts)
• Aircraft Icon (representing present position)
• Wind Direction and Speed
• Icons for enabled map features (Traffic only)
• Flight Plan Legs
AFCS
• Track Vector
• Runway Extension
• Missed Approach Preview
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Intersections (only as part of active flight plan)
• Visual Reporting Points
• VNAV Constraints
• Selected Altitude Intercept Arc
APPENDICES
Map panning on the IFR/VFR Charts works the same as on the Navigation Map. Map range selected on either
the Navigation Map or the IFR/VFR Charts applies to both. However, if the range selected on the Navigation
Map it is not a valid chart range, the chart is shown with a range of 2.5 nm.
When different VFR charts exist for the same area the chart type will automatically display according to the
range chosen. For example, in an area where both a Sectional and a Terminal Area Chart (TAC) are available, a
INDEX
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
range of 5 nm or more will show the Sectional chart. Once the range is decreased below 5 nm, the system will
SYSTEM
automatically change the displayed chart from the Sectional to the TAC.
Due to the potential error involved with the electronic depiction of maps, charts will display a ‘gray circle of
uncertainty’ centered upon the aircraft icon. The aircraft’s actual position can be anywhere within the range of
INSTRUMENTS
the gray circle. The range of the circle will change based on the chart displayed and current zoom range.
FLIGHT
position is within the boundaries of the chart. Not all charts are geo-referenced. IFR/VFR charts may be viewed
by selecting the ‘Map - IFR/VFR Charts’ Page.
Navigation Data Bar
EIS
Map Orientation
AUDIO PANEL
VFR Chart
& CNS
Map Range

Aircraft Icon
MANAGEMENT
at Present Position
FLIGHT
Gray Circle of
Uncertainty
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Figure 8-19 GPS Navigation Information on the VFR Chart

AFCS
Selecting IFR Low, IFR High, VFR Charts:

1) Select the ‘Map - IFR/VFR Charts’ Page.
2) Press the VFR, IFR Low, or IFR High Softkey to display the desired chart.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the ‘Page Menu.’
2) Select ‘Display VFR’, ‘Display IFR Low’ or ‘Display IFR High’ to display the desired chart.
APPENDICES

INDEX
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
Navigation Data Bar
SYSTEM
Map Orientation
INSTRUMENTS
IFR Low Altitude
FLIGHT
Chart
Map Range
Aircraft Icon
at Present Position
EIS
Gray Circle of
Uncertainty
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-20 GPS Navigation Information on the IFR Low Altitude Chart
FLIGHT
Navigation Data Bar
AVOIDANCE
Map Orientation
HAZARD
IFR High Altitude
Chart
Map Range
AFCS
Aircraft Icon
at Present Position
Gray Circle of
Uncertainty
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-21 GPS Navigation Information on the IFR High Altitude Chart
INDEX
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
8.3 AIRPORT DIRECTORY

SYSTEM
The Aircraft Owners and Pilots Association™ (AOPA) and optional AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory databases
offer detailed information regarding services, hours of operation, lodging options, and more. This information
INSTRUMENTS
is viewed on the Airport Information Page by pressing the Info Softkey until Info 2 is displayed.
FLIGHT
Both Airport Directories are available for downloading at flygarmin.com. However, copy only one of the
databases to the Supplemental Data Card. The system cannot recognize both databases simultaneously.
Selecting the Airport Directory Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘WPT’ page group.
EIS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Airport Information Page. Initially, information for the airport closest to
the aircraft’s present position is displayed.
3) If necessary, press the Info softkey until Info 2 is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-22 AOPA Information on the Airport Information Page

APPENDICES
INDEX
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
8.4 DATABASE CYCLE NUMBER AND REVISIONS
SYSTEM
CYCLE NUMBER AND REVISION
INSTRUMENTS
Databases that may be available include FliteCharts, Obstacle, Terrain, IFR/VFR, Navigation, ChartView,
FLIGHT
SafeTaxi, Airport Directory. Data is revised and expiration dates vary. Data is still viewable during a period that
extends from the cycle expiration date to the disables date. When turning on the system, the Power-up Page
displays the current status of the databases. As an example, see the table below for the various FliteCharts
Power-up Page displays and the definition of each. The expiration date and disables date varies for each database.
Example Power-up Page Display Text
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
Table 8-1 Database Power-up Page Annunciations
HAZARD
White text, such as ‘FliteCharts Data Expires’ plus a date, indicates the chart database is current. Yellow text,
such as ‘Chart data is out of date!’ or ‘FliteCharts Data: Disabled”, indicates charts are no longer viewable and
have expired.
Database time critical information can also be found on the ‘Aux - System Status’ page. The database Region,
AFCS
Cycle number, Effective, Expires, and Disables dates of the subscription appear in either blue or yellow text.
Dates shown in blue are current data. Dates shown in yellow indicate the data is not within the current
subscription period.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
Press the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the Database window. Scroll through the listed information
by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the applicable database information is shown.
APPENDICES
Database cycle numbers are in a format such as YYTI or YYII, which are deciphered as follows:
INDEX
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
YYTI
SYSTEM
YY – Indicates the last two digits of the year (ex. 18 represents 2018)
T – Indicates the database type (ex. S is for SafeTaxi, D is for Airport Directory)
INSTRUMENTS
I – Indicates the numerical issue of the database for the year (ex. 5 is the fifth issue of the year)
FLIGHT
YYII
YY – Indicates the last two digits of the year (ex. 18 represents 2018)
II – Indicates the numerical issue of the database for the year (ex. 05 is the fifth issue of the year)
EIS
Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix for instructions on revising databases.

Example Power-up Page Display Text Database Cycle Number Format Revision Cycle
YYII 28 days
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
YYMI Not Applicable

MANAGEMENT
YYTI Not Applicable

FLIGHT
YYBI 56 days
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
YYSI 56 days
YYDI 56 days
AFCS
YYII 28 days
ADDITIONAL
YYII 14 days
FEATURES
YYII 28 days
APPENDICES
Table 8-2 Database Cycle Number and Revision

INDEX
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
8.5 SIRIUSXM RADIO ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEM
NOTE: Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section for information about SiriusXM Weather products.
INSTRUMENTS
The optional SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment feature of the GDL 69A SXM Data Link Receiver is available
FLIGHT
for the pilot’s and passengers’ enjoyment. The GDL 69A SXM can receive SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment
services at any altitude throughout the Continental U.S.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio offers a variety of radio programming over long distances without having to constantly
search for new stations. Based on signals from satellites, coverage far exceeds land-based transmissions.
EIS
SiriusXM Satellite Radio services are subscription-based. For more information on specific service packages, visit
www.siriusxm.com.
ACTIVATING SIRIUSXM SATELLITE RADIO SERVICES
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The service is activated by providing SiriusXM Satellite Radio with either one or two coded IDs, depending on
the equipment. Either the Audio Radio ID or the Data Radio ID, or both, must be provided to SiriusXM Satellite
Radio to activate the entertainment subscription.
It is not required to activate both the entertainment and weather service subscriptions with the GDL 69A SXM.
MANAGEMENT
Either or both services can be activated. SiriusXM Satellite Radio uses one or both of the coded IDs to send
FLIGHT
an activation signal that, when received by the GDL 69A SXM, allows it to play entertainment programming.
These IDs are located:
• On the label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
• On the XM Information Page on the MFD
• On the XM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions included with the unit (available at www.garmin.com, P/N
190-00355-04)
Contact the installer if the Data Radio ID and the Audio Radio ID cannot be located.
AFCS
Activating the SiriusXM Satellite Radio services:
1) Contact SiriusXM Satellite Radio. Follow the instructions provided by SiriusXM Satellite Radio services.
2) Select the Auxiliary Page Group.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Select the ‘Aux - XM Radio’ page.
4) Press the Info Softkey to display the ‘Aux-XM Information’ Page.
5) Verify that the desired services are activated.
APPENDICES
INDEX
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
Audio
Data Radio ID
Radio ID
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Weather
Products
Window
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Figure 8-23 XM Information Page
If SiriusXM Weather services have not been activated, all the weather product boxes are blank on the XM
Information Page and a yellow Activation Required message is displayed in the center of the Weather Data
AVOIDANCE
Link Page (Map Page Group). The Service Class refers to the groupings of weather products available for
HAZARD
subscription.
USING SIRIUSXM RADIO

The XM Radio Page provides information and control of the audio entertainment features of the SiriusXM
AFCS
Satellite Radio.
Selecting the XM Radio Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Auxiliary Page Group.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the displayed ‘Aux - XM Information’ Page.
3) Press the Radio Softkey to show the ‘XM Radio’ Page where audio entertainment is controlled.
ACTIVE CHANNEL AND CHANNEL LIST

APPENDICES
The Active Channel Box on the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected channel that the SiriusXM
Radio is using.
The Channels List Box of the XM Radio Page shows a list of the available channels for the selected category.
Channels can be stepped through one at a time or may be selected directly by channel number.
INDEX
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
Selecting a channel from the channel list:
SYSTEM
1) While on the ‘Aux-XM Radio’ Page, press the Channel Softkey.
2) Press the CH + Softkey to go up through the list in the ‘Channels’ Box, or move down the list with the
CH – Softkey.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Or:
1) Press the FMS Knob to highlight the channel list and turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the channels.
2) Press the ENT Key to activate the selected channel.
Selecting a channel directly:
EIS
1) While on the ‘Aux-XM Radio’ Page, press the Channel Softkey.
2) Press the Direct CH Softkey. The channel number in the ‘Active Channel’ Box is highlighted.
AUDIO PANEL
3) Press the numbered softkeys located on the bottom of the display to directly select the desired channel number.
& CNS
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the selected channel.
CATEGORY
MANAGEMENT
The Category Box of the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected category of audio. Categories of
FLIGHT
channels such as jazz, rock, or news can be selected to list the available channels for a type of music or other
contents. One of the optional categories is Presets to view channels that have been programmed.
Selecting a category:
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the Category Softkey on the ‘Aux-XM Radio’ Page.
HAZARD
2) Press the CAT + and CAT - Softkeys to cycle through the categories.
Or:
Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Categories list. Highlight the desired category with the small FMS Knob
and press the ENT Key. Selecting All Categories places all channels in the list.
AFCS
PRESETS
Up to 15 channels from any category can be assigned a preset number. The preset channels are selected by
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
pressing the Presets and More Softkeys. Then the preset channel can be selected directly and added to the
channel list for the Presets category.
Setting a preset channel number:
1) On the ‘Aux-XM Radio’ Page, while listening to an ‘Active Channel’ that is wanted for a preset, press the
APPENDICES
Presets Softkey to access the first five preset channels (Preset 1 - Preset 5).
2) Press the More Softkey to access the next five channels (Preset 6 – Preset 10), and again to access the
last five channels (Preset 11 – Preset 15). Pressing the More Softkey repeatedly cycles through the preset
channels.
3) Press any one of the (Preset 1 - Preset 15) softkeys to assign a number to the active channel.
INDEX
4) Press the Set Softkey on the desired channel number to save the channel as a preset.
Pressing the Back Softkey, or 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, returns the system to the top level softkeys.
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
VOLUME
SYSTEM
Radio volume is shown as a percentage. Volume level is controlled by pressing the Volume Softkey, which
brings up the Mute Softkey and the volume increase and decrease softkeys.
INSTRUMENTS
Adjusting the volume:

FLIGHT
1) With the ‘Aux-XM Radio’ Page displayed, press the Volume Softkey.
2) Press the VOL – Softkey to reduce volume or press the VOL + Softkey to increase volume. (Once the VOL
Softkey is pressed, the volume can also be adjusted using the small FMS Knob.)
Muting SiriusXM audio:
EIS
1) Select the ‘Aux-XM Radio’ Page or ‘Aux-XM Information’ Page.

2) Press the Mute Softkey to mute the audio. Press the Mute Softkey again to unmute the audio.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
8.6 FLIGHT DATA LOGGING
SYSTEM
NOTE: Some aircraft installations may not provide all aircraft/engine data capable of being logged by the
system.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
The Flight Data Logging feature will automatically store critical flight and engine data on an SD data card (up
to 16GB) inserted into the top card slot of the MFD. Approximately 1,000 flight hours can be recorded for each
1GB of available space on the card.
Data is written to the SD card once each second while the MFD is powered on. All flight data logged on a
specific date is stored in a file named in a format which includes the date, time, and nearest airport identifier. The
EIS
file is created automatically each time the system is powered on, provided an SD card has been inserted.
The status of the Flight Data Logging feature can be viewed on the ‘Aux-Utility’ Page. If no SD card has been
inserted, “NO CARD” is displayed. When data is being written to the SD card, “LOGGING DATA” is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
The .csv file may be viewed with Microsoft Excel® or other spreadsheet applications.
& CNS
The following is a list of data parameters the system is capable of logging.
• Local Date (YYYY-MM-DD) • Roll Commanded (degrees) • CDI Deflection (0.0 to 1.0)
MANAGEMENT
• Local Time (HH:MM:SS) • OAT (deg. C) • VDI Deflection (0.0 to 1.0)
FLIGHT
• Active Waypoint Distance (nm) • True Airspeed (kts) • Normal Acceleration (g)
• Active Waypoint Bearing • Selected Vertical Speed (fpm) • Heading (degrees magnetic)
(degrees mag.) • Vertical Speed (fpm) • Course (deg)
• UTC Offset (HH:MM) • HSI Selection (GPS,NAV1/2) • Wind Direction (degrees mag.)
AVOIDANCE
• Mag. Variation (degrees)
HAZARD
• GPS Fix (e.g. 2D, 3D, 3DDiff) • Wind Speed (kts)
• Active Waypoint Identifier • Indicated Airspeed (kts) • Gnd Trk (degrees magnetic)
• Voltage 1 (volts) • Horizontal Alert Limit (HAL, • Fuel Flow (gph)
• Voltage 2 (volts) meters) • Fuel Press. (psi)
• Amps 1 (amps) • Gnd Speed (kts) • Oil Temperature (deg. F)
AFCS
• Amps 2 (amps) • Vertical Alert Limit (VAL, meters) • Oil Pressure (psi)
• AFCS On ( 0 – false, 1 – true) • Vertical Speed (fpm) • Engine Speed (rpm)
• Latitude (degrees) • NAV1 Frequency (MHz) • Power (%)
• AFCS Roll Mode (e.g. HDG, • NAV2 Frequency (MHz) • Np (rpm)
ADDITIONAL
LOC, GPS, VOR, ROL)
FEATURES
• Horizontal Protection Level
• Longitude (degrees) (HPLWAS, meters)
• Right Fuel Qty (gals or lbs) • Pitch (degrees)
• Left Fuel Qty (gals or lbs) • Roll (degrees)
• Center Fuel Qty (gals or lbs) • Horizontal Protection Level
APPENDICES
• AFCS Pitch Mode (e.g. ALT, GS, (HPLFD, meters)

GP, VS) • Vertical Protection Level
• Barometric Altitude (feet) (VPLWAS, meters)
• Altimeter Setting (in. Hg.) • COM1 Frequency (MHz)
• GPS Altitude (ft) • COM2 Frequency (MHz)
• Lateral Acceleration (g)
INDEX
• Pitch Commanded (degrees)
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
The file containing the recorded data will appear in the format shown in the following figure. This file can be
SYSTEM
imported into most computer spreadsheet applications.
Nearest Airport
(A blank will be
INSTRUMENTS
Local Date Local 24hr Time inserted if no

FLIGHT
YYMMDD HHMMSS airport is found)
log_180610_104506_KIXD.csv
EIS
Figure 8-24 Log File Format

AUDIO PANEL
Data logging status can be monitored on the ‘Aux-Utility’ Page.

& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
8.7 SATELLITE TELEPHONE AND SMS MESSAGING
SYSTEM
NOTE: An account must be established to access the Iridium satellite network for voice/SMS.
INSTRUMENTS
The GSR 56 Iridium Transceiver provides an airborne low speed data link, Iridium Satellite Telephone service,
FLIGHT
and Short Message Service (SMS).
The telephone is available to the flight crew through the audio panel and headsets.
REGISTERING WITH GARMIN CONNEXT

A subscriber account must be established prior to using the Iridium Satellite System. Before setting up an
EIS
Iridium account, obtain the serial number of the Iridium Transceiver and the System ID by selecting the ‘Aux-
System Status’ Page. Contact Garmin at www.flyGarmin.com.
AUDIO PANEL
DISABLING/ENABLING IRIDIUM TRANSCEIVER
& CNS
Iridium telephone and data communications may be turned on or off by performing these simple steps.
Disabling/enabling telephone and low speed data services:
MANAGEMENT
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the Aux page group.
FLIGHT
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux-Telephone’ Page.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-25 Report Status Page
3) Press the MENU Key. The Page Menu window is now displayed.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Disable Iridium Transmission’ in the menu list.
INDEX
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
EIS
Figure 8-26 Select Disable Iridium Transmission

AUDIO PANEL
5) Press the ENT Key. The Iridium transceiver is now disabled.

& CNS
6) To enable the Iridium transceiver, repeat steps 1 through 3, then select ‘Enable Iridium Transceiver’.
TELEPHONE COMMUNICATION
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
The pilot or copilot can place and answer calls on the Iridium satellite network. Control and monitoring of
telephone functions are accomplished through the ‘Aux-Telephone’ Page.
Viewing the Telephone Page:
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Telephone’ or ‘Aux - Text Messaging’ Page.
3) If necessary, press the Phone Softkey to display the ‘Aux-Telephone’ Page.
The phone status display gives a graphical representation of the current disposition of voice and/or data
transmissions.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
Internal External
Description
Phone Phone
Phone is Idle
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Phone is ringing
Phone has a dial tone (off hook) or connected to another phone
EIS
Phone dialed is busy
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Phone is dialing another phone
Phone has failed
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Phone status not known
Phone is disabled
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Phone is reserved for data transmission
AFCS
Calling other phone or incoming call from other phone
ADDITIONAL
Other phone is on hold
Phones are connected FEATURES

APPENDICES
Table 8-3 Telephone Symbols

INDEX
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
CONTACTS
SYSTEM
The names, telephone number, and email addresses can be saved in a list of contacts for easy use when
making telephone calls.
INSTRUMENTS
Entering a new contact:

FLIGHT
1) With the ‘Aux - Telephone’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to display the cursor.
2) If necessary, turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘New Entry’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor moves the ‘Name’ field of the ‘Contact Details’ window.
4) Enter the desired name of the new contact. Entry can be accomplished through the alphanumeric keys on the
EIS
MFD Controller, or the FMS Knobs on the controller or the MFD.

5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the ‘Phone Number’ field.
AUDIO PANEL
6) Enter the desired telephone number. Entry can be accomplished through the alphanumeric keys on the MFD
& CNS
Controller, or the FMS Knobs on the controller or the MFD.

7) Press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the ‘Email’ field.
8) Enter the desired email address. Entry can be accomplished through the alphanumeric keys on the MFD
MANAGEMENT
Controller, or the FMS Knobs on the controller or the MFD.

FLIGHT
9) Press the ENT Key. The Save button is highlighted.

10) Press the ENT Key. The new contact entry is added to the list of saved contacts.
Deleting a contact:
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired contact name.
3) Press the Delete Softkey. A confirmation window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the selected contact.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 8-27 Editing a Contact
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Editing a contact:
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired contact name.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
3) Press the Edit Softkey. The cursor is placed in the ‘Name’ field. Enter the desired changes. Entry can be
accomplished through the alphanumeric keys on the MFD Controller, or the FMS Knobs on the controller or the
MFD.
4) Press the ENT Key when each field is complete. The Save Button is now highlighted.
5) Press the ENT Key to save the changes.
AFCS
INCOMING CALLS
When viewing MFD pages other than the ‘Aux-Telephone’ Page, a pop-up alert will be displayed and an
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
aural alert “Incoming Call” will be heard. If the incoming call is an Iridium network call, Iridium will be
displayed. The pop-up alert may be inhibited at times, such as during takeoff. In addition to the pop-up
alert, a ringing phone symbol will be displayed to the right of the MFD page title. Also, the voice alert
“Incoming Call” will be heard on the selected cockpit audio.
APPENDICES
INDEX
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
Answering an incoming call in the cockpit:

SYSTEM
1) Press the Phone Key on the appropriate audio panel.

2) Press the Answer Softkey on the MFD.
INSTRUMENTS
Or:
FLIGHT
While viewing the ‘Aux-Telephone’ Page
NOTE: The Push-to-Talk switch is not utilized for telephone communication. The microphone is active after
pressing the Answer Softkey, and stays active until the call is terminated.
EIS

3) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Answer Incoming Call’.
AUDIO PANEL

& CNS
Pressing the Ignore Softkey will extinguish the pop-up window and leave the call unanswered. Pressing
the Phone Softkey will display the ‘Aux-Telephone’ Page allowing additional call information to be viewed
before answering.
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Muting incoming call alerts:

1) With the ‘Aux-Telephone’ Page displayed, press the MENU Key on the MFD to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Disable Incoming Call Alerts’.
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the ENT Key. The voice and pop-up alert will not be displayed now when an incoming call is received.
HAZARD
OUTGOING CALLS
Making an external call from the cockpit using the Iridium satellite network:
AFCS
2) Press the Dial Softkey on the MFD.

3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Iridium’.
ADDITIONAL
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor has now moved to the phone number entry field.
FEATURES
The International dialing sequence is necessary to place a call from the cockpit to an external phone:
Country Code + City/Area Code (if any) + Telephone Number. The following country codes may be used
when calling other satellite telephone systems.
APPENDICES
Satellite System Country Code

Inmarsat 870
ICO 8810 or 8811
Ellipso 8812 or 8813
Iridium 8816 or 8817
INDEX
Globalstar 8818 or 8819
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Figure 8-28 Enter Phone Number
5) Enter the desired telephone number (country code first) by pressing the number softkeys on the MFD.
6) Press the ENT Key. ‘OK’ is highlighted.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-29 Make the Call

INDEX
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
7) Press the ENT Key. The system will begin calling the number.
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Figure 8-30 System is Making the Connection
When the phone is answered, the connection is established. To exit the call, press the Hangup Softkey.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-31 Phone is Answered, Connection Complete

INDEX
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
Making an external call from the cockpit by using the Contact List:
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired contact name in the list of contacts.
FLIGHT
4) Press the Call Softkey. The external call is initiated and the number associated with the contact name is dialed.
PLACING THE COCKPIT PHONE ON HOLD

Placing a call on hold:
EIS
Press the Hold Softkey on the MFD.
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Put Current Call On Hold’.
& CNS
The cockpit phone is now isolated from the call. This figure illustrates a call between the cockpit and an
MANAGEMENT
external phone in which the cockpit phone has been put on hold. Press the Hold Softkey again to resume
FLIGHT
the call.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-32 Cockpit Phone on Hold

FLIGHT
TEXT MESSAGING (SMS)

The pilot or copilot can send and receive text messages on the Iridium satellite network. Messages may
AVOIDANCE
be sent to an email address or text message capable cellular telephone. Message length is limited to 160
HAZARD
characters, including the email address. Senders should address text messages to aircraft by entering [aircraft
Iridium phone number]@msg.iridium.com.
The text messaging user interface is mainly through the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page.
Viewing the Text Messaging Page:
AFCS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux-Telephone’ or ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page.
3) If necessary, press the SMS Softkey to display the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-33 Text Messaging Page
FLIGHT
Message Symbol Description
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Received text message that has not been opened
Received text message that has been opened
AFCS
Saved text message, draft not sent
System is sending text message
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Text message has been sent
APPENDICES
System failed to send text message
Predefined text message
Table 8-4 Text Message Symbols

INDEX
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
VIEWING A TEXT MESSAGE WHEN RECEIVED

SYSTEM
When viewing MFD pages other than the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, a pop-up alert will be displayed when
a new text message is received.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
EIS
New Text Message Pop-up New Text Message Symbol on MFD Page
Figure 8-34 New Text Message Received

AUDIO PANEL
Press the View Softkey to view the message. Pressing the Ignore Softkey will extinguish the pop-up
& CNS
window and leave the text message unopened. Pressing the Ignore All Softkey will extinguish the pop-
window and ignore all future incoming text messages. Pressing the SMS Softkey will display the ‘Aux-Text
Messaging’ Page.
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-35 Text Message Displayed from Pop-Up Alert
The pop-up alerts may be enabled or disabled through the Page Menu.
Enabling/disabling incoming text message pop-up alerts:
INDEX
1) With the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page displayed, press the MENU Key on the MFD to display the Page Menu.
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Disable New Message Popups’ or ‘Enable New Message Popups’.
SYSTEM
3) Press the ENT Key. The pop-up alert will not be displayed when an incoming text message is received.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 8-36 Disabling New Text Message Pop-Ups
MANAGEMENT
REPLY TO A TEXT MESSAGE
FLIGHT
After reading a text message, a reply may be sent.
Replying to a text message:
While viewing the text message, press the Reply Softkey.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Or:
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Reply To Message’.
AFCS
SENDING A TEXT MESSAGE
Text messages may be sent from the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Sending a new text message:
1) While viewing the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the New Softkey.
Or:
APPENDICES
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.

b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Draft New Message’.
INDEX
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-37 Composing a New Text Message

FLIGHT
2) The SMS Text Message Draft Window is now displayed with the cursor in the ‘To’ field. Enter the desired
telephone number or email address. Entry can be accomplished through the alphanumeric keys on the MFD
Controller, or combination of the FMS Knob on the controller and softkeys on the MFD. The FMS Knob is used
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
to enter letters and numbers, or numbers can be entered from the MFD by pressing the Numbers Softkey. Press
the CapsLock Softkey to create upper and lower case alpha characters. Special characters can be accessed by
pressing the Symbols Softkey.
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed in the ‘Message’ field.
4) Enter the desired message using any combination of entry methods as described in step 2.
AFCS

6) Press the Send Softkey to send the message immediately, or press the Save Softkey to save the message in
Outbox for sending at a later time. Press the Cancel Softkey to delete the message.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
PREDEFINED TEXT MESSAGES

Time and effort can be saved in typing text messages that are used repeatedly by saving these messages as
APPENDICES
a predefined message.
Creating a predefined text message:
1) While viewing the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
INDEX
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
EIS
Figure 8-38 Creating/Editing Predefined Messages
2) Turn either FMS Knob to select ‘Edit Predefined Messages’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the ENT Key. The Predefined Messages view is now displayed.
4) Press the New Softkey.
Or:
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Draft New Predefined Message’.
c) Press the ENT Key. The Predefined SMS Text Message Window is now displayed.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-39 Composing a Predefined Message

INDEX
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
5) The cursor is displayed in the ‘Title’ field. Enter the desired message title. Entry can be accomplished through
SYSTEM
the alphanumeric keys on the MFD Controller, or combination of the FMS Knob on the controller and softkeys
on the MFD. The FMS Knob is used to enter letters and numbers, or numbers can be entered from the MFD by
pressing the Numbers Softkey. Press the CapsLock Softkey to create upper and lower case alpha characters.
Special characters can be accessed by pressing the Symbols Softkey.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
7) Enter the desired message using any combination of entry methods as described in step 5.
9) Press the Save Softkey. The new predefined message is now shown in the displayed list. Pressing the Cancel
EIS
Softkey will delete the message without saving.

11) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Cancel Drafting Message’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Sending a predefined text message:

1) While viewing the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the New Softkey.
MANAGEMENT
2) The Predefined SMS Text Message Window is now displayed with the cursor in the ‘To’ field. Enter the desired
FLIGHT
telephone number or email address. Entry can be accomplished through the alphanumeric keys on the MFD
Controller, or combination of the FMS Knob on the controller and softkeys on the MFD. The FMS Knob is used
to enter letters and numbers, or numbers can be entered from the MFD by pressing the Numbers Softkey. Press
the CapsLock Softkey to create upper and lower case alpha characters. Special characters can be accessed by
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
pressing the Symbols Softkey.

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-40 Predefined Message Softkey Shown When Composing a Message
FLIGHT
4) Press the Predefined Softkey. The Predefined Message Menu Window is displayed.
5) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired predefined message.
6) Press the ENT Key. The predefined message text is inserted into the message field. If desired, the message can
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
be edited by using the FMS Knobs.
8) Press the Send Softkey to transmit the message.
AFCS
TEXT MESSAGE BOXES
Received text messages reside in the Inbox as ‘Read’ or ‘Unread’ messages. The Outbox contains ‘Sent” and
‘Unsent’ text messages. Saved messages that are meant to be sent later are stored as Drafts. Each text message
ADDITIONAL
box may be viewed separately, or together in any combination.
FEATURES
Showing Inbox messages:
While viewing the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the Arrange Softkey, then press the Inbox Softkey.
Or:
APPENDICES

INDEX
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Show Inbox Messages’.
SYSTEM
3) Press the ENT Key. The message box selected for viewing is indicated at the bottom left of the list window.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Figure 8-41 Text Message Inbox

AVOIDANCE
Showing Outbox messages:

HAZARD
While viewing the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the Arrange Softkey, then press the Outbox Softkey.
Or:
AFCS
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Show Outbox Messages’.
Showing Draft messages:

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
While viewing the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the Arrange Softkey, then press the Drafts Softkey.
Or:
APPENDICES
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Show Draft Messages’.
MANAGING TEXT MESSAGES

INDEX
The viewed messages may be listed according to the date/time the message was sent or received, the type of
message (read, unread, sent, unsent, etc.), or by message address.
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
Viewing messages sorted by message date/time:
SYSTEM
While viewing the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the Arrange Softkey, then press the Time Softkey.
Or:
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Sort By Date/Time’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The sorting selection is indicated at the bottom center of the list window.
Viewing messages sorted by message type:

While viewing the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the Arrange Softkey, then press the Type Softkey.
EIS
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Sort By Type’.
& CNS
Viewing messages sorted by address:
MANAGEMENT
While viewing the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the Arrange Softkey, then press the Address Softkey.
FLIGHT
Or:
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Sort By Address’.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Viewing the content of a text message:

1) While viewing the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, select the desired message box.
AFCS
3) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired message.
4) Press the VIEW Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
Or:
FEATURES
Press the ENT Key.
Or:
APPENDICES
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘View Selected Message’.
Message content is displayed.
INDEX
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-42 Viewing Message Content

FLIGHT
5) To close the text message, press the Close Softkey.

Or:
AVOIDANCE

HAZARD
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Close Message’.

Marking selected message as read:

AFCS
1) While viewing the Inbox on the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Press the MRK Read Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Mark Selected Message As Read’.
APPENDICES

The message symbol now indicates the message has been opened.
Marking all messages as read:

1) While viewing the Inbox on the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
INDEX
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Mark All New Messages As Read’.
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed.
SYSTEM
4) With cursor highlighting ‘YES’, press the ENT Key. The message symbols now indicate all the message have
been opened.
Deleting a message:
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
1) While viewing the Inbox on the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Press the Delete Softkey.
Or:
EIS
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Delete Selected Message’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
8.8 CONNEXT SETUP

SYSTEM
The Connext Setup Page allows for setting up the installed optional Flight Stream 510 device for a Bluetooth
connection between the system and a mobile device running the Garmin Pilot™ application.
INSTRUMENTS
The mobile device must be ‘paired’ with the system in order to use the various functions. Pairing is accomplished
FLIGHT
by first placing the system in pairing mode by displaying the Connext Setup Page. The system is ‘discoverable’
whenever this page is displayed. The pairing operation is completed from the mobile device and the Garmin Pilot
application. See the device Bluetooth pairing instructions and the connection instructions in the Garmin Pilot
application.
Viewing the Connext Setup Page
EIS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Connext Setup page.
AUDIO PANEL
Changing the Bluetooth Name

& CNS
1) While viewing the Connext Setup Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the ‘Bluetooth Name’ field.
MANAGEMENT
3) Enter the desired name by using the large FMS Knob to select the character field, and the small FMS Knob
FLIGHT
select the desired alphanumeric character for that field.

4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is removed and the new name is displayed.
Enabling/Disabling Flight Plan Importing from Garmin Pilot

AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the ‘Flight Plan Import’ field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Enabled’ or ‘Disabled’.
AFCS
Enabling/Disabling WiFi Database Importing from Garmin Pilot

ADDITIONAL
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the ‘WiFi Database Import’ field.
FEATURES

Enabling/Disabling Automatic Reconnection of a Specific Paired Device

APPENDICES
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired paired device.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Enabled’ or ‘Disabled’. Selecting ‘Enabled’ allows the system to automatically
connect to a previously paired device when detected.
INDEX
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
Removing a Specific Paired Device from the List of Paired Devices:
SYSTEM
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired paired device.
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the Remove Softkey. A confirmation screen is displayed.
FLIGHT
4) If necessary, turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘Yes’.
5) Press the ENT Key to remove the device from the list of paired devices.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
8.9 ELECTRONIC STABILITY AND PROTECTION (ESP)

SYSTEM
NOTE: Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual to determine approval of ESP functionality.
INSTRUMENTS
The Garmin Electronic Stability and Protection (ESP) is designed to provide automatic control inputs to
FLIGHT
discourage aircraft operation outside a normal flight envelope. Garmin ESP works to maintain the desired pitch,
roll, and airspeed operating envelope by automatically engaging one or more servos when the aircraft is near a
defined pitch, roll, and/or airspeed operating limit. While ESP utilizes the same sensors, processors, and actuators
as the autopilot, it is a separate function. The ESP system only operates when autopilot is not engaged and the
aircraft is above 200 feet AGL.
EIS
ESP engages when the aircraft exceeds one or more conditions (pitch, roll, and airspeed) beyond the normal flight
parameters. Enhanced stability for each condition is provided by applying a force to the appropriate control surface
to return the aircraft to the normal flight envelope. This is perceived by the pilot as resistance to control movement
AUDIO PANEL
in the undesired direction when the aircraft approaches a steep attitude or high airspeed.
& CNS
As the aircraft deviates further from the normal attitude and/or airspeed range, the force increases (up to an
established maximum) to encourage control movement in the direction necessary to return to the normal attitude
and/or airspeed range. Except in the case of high airspeed, when maximum force is reached, force remains constant
MANAGEMENT
up to the maximum engagement limit. Above the maximum engagement limit, forces are no longer applied. There
FLIGHT
is no maximum engagement related to a high airspeed condition.

When ESP has been engaged for more than ten seconds (cumulative; not necessarily consecutive seconds) of a
20-second interval, the autopilot is automatically engaged with the flight director in Level Mode, bringing the aircraft
into level flight. An aural “Engaging Autopilot” alert is played and the flight director mode annunciation will indicate
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
‘LVL’ for vertical and lateral modes.

The pilot can interrupt ESP by pressing and holding the Autopilot Disconnect (AP DISC) switch or the Control
Wheel Steering (CWS) button. Upon releasing AP DISC or CWS, ESP force will again be applied, provided aircraft
roll attitude is within engagement limits. ESP can also be overridden by overpowering the servo’s mechanical torque
limit.
AFCS
ESP can be enabled or disabled on the ‘Aux - System Setup 2’ Page on the MFD.
Enabling/disabling ESP:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
3) If necessary, press the Setup 2 Softkey to display the ‘Aux - System Setup 2’ Page. If the ‘Aux - System Setup 2’
Page is already displayed, proceed to step 4.
APPENDICES

5) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the Stability & Protection field.
INDEX
ESP is automatically enabled on system power up.
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
ROLL ENGAGEMENT
SYSTEM
Roll Limit Indicators are displayed on the roll scale at 45° right and left, indicating where ESP will engage. As
roll attitude exceeds 45°, ESP will engage and the on-side Roll Limit Indicator will move to 30°. The Roll Limit
Indicator is now showing where ESP will disengage as roll attitude decreases.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Roll Limit Indicator Roll Limit Indicator
ESP Engage (45°) ESP Engage (45°)
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 8-43 ESP Roll Engagement Indication (ESP NOT Engaged)
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
ESP Engage (45°) ESP Disengage (30°)
Aircraft Roll Attitude = 44° Aircraft Roll Attitude = 46°
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Before ESP Engage After ESP Engage
Figure 8-44 Roll Increasing to ESP Engagement

APPENDICES
Once engaged, ESP force will be applied between 30° and 75°, as illustrated in the following figure. The
force increases as roll attitude increases and decreases as roll attitude decreases. The applied force is intended
to encourage pilot input that returns the airplane to a more normal roll attitude. As roll attitude decreases, ESP
will disengage at 30°.
INDEX
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
10º 0º 10º
20º 20º
º 30
30 º
45º
45
INSTRUMENTS
º
FLIGHT
º
60
60
º
75º
75º
EIS
90º
90º
Figure 8-45 ESP Roll Operating Range When Engaged
(Force Increases as Roll Increases & Decreases as Roll Decreases)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ESP is automatically disengaged if the aircraft reaches the autopilot roll engagement attitude limit of 75°.
ESP Upper Disengage Limit (75°)
Aircraft Roll Attitude = 74°
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
Figure 8-46 Roll Attitude Autopilot Engagement Limit (ESP Engaged)

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
PITCH ENGAGEMENT
SYSTEM
ESP engages at 17° nose-up and 15° nose-down. Once ESP is engaged, it will apply increasing opposing
force between 17° and 20° nose-up and between 15° and 18° nose-down, as indicated in the following figure.
Maximum opposing force is applied between 20° and 50° nose-up and between 18° and 50° nose-down. ESP
INSTRUMENTS
disengages when 50° is exceeded in a nose-up or nose-down attitude.
FLIGHT
With ESP engaged, and the aircraft in a nose-up condition, opposing force steadily decreases from 20° nose-
up to 15° nose-up as aircraft pitch moves toward zero degrees. ESP disengages at 15° nose-up. With ESP
engaged, and the aircraft in a nose-down condition, opposing force steadily decreases from 18° nose-down to
13° nose-down as aircraft pitch moves toward zero degrees. ESP disengages at 13° nose-down.
EIS
The opposing force increases or decreases depending on the pitch angle and the direction of pitch travel. This
force is intended to encourage movement in the pitch axis in the direction of the normal pitch attitude range
for the aircraft.
AUDIO PANEL
There are no indications marking the pitch ESP engage and disengage limits in these nose-up/nose-down
& CNS
conditions.
50˚ 50˚
45˚ 45˚
MANAGEMENT
40˚ 40˚
FLIGHT
35˚ 35˚
ESP
30˚ 30˚
25˚ 25˚
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
20˚ 20˚
15˚ 15˚
10˚ 10˚
5˚ 5˚
AFCS
0˚ 0˚
5˚ 5˚
10˚ 10˚
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
15˚ 15˚
20˚ 20˚
25˚ 25˚
APPENDICES
30˚ 30˚
ESP
35˚ 35˚
40˚ 40˚
45˚ 45˚
INDEX
50˚ 50˚
Figure 8-47 - ESP Pitch Operating Range When Engaged
(Force Increases as Pitch Increases & Decreases as Pitch Decreases)
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
ANGLE OF ATTACK PROTECTION

SYSTEM
Angle of attack protection is provided as part of the ESP feature. ESP force may be applied if a stall warning
condition is imminent. In this condition, the Pitch Limit Indicator will be initially displayed 4° below this
computed pitch attitude. When pitch attitude equals that indicated by the Pitch Limit Indicator, ESP will
INSTRUMENTS
engage, applying a force in the direction necessary to lower the nose of the aircraft.
FLIGHT
EIS
Pitch Limit Indicator

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-48 Pitch Limit Indicator

FLIGHT
HIGH AIRSPEED PROTECTION

AVOIDANCE
Exceeding Vmo/Mmo will result in ESP applying force to raise the nose of the aircraft. When the high
HAZARD
airspeed condition is remedied, ESP force is no longer applied.

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
8.10 ELECTRONIC CHECKLISTS
SYSTEM
NOTE: The optional checklists presented here are for example only and may differ from checklists available
INSTRUMENTS
for the DA40NG. The information described in this section is not intended to replace the checklist information
FLIGHT
described in the current pertinent flight manual or the Pilot Safety and Warning Supplements document.
NOTE: Garmin is not responsible for the content of checklists. Checklists are created by the aircraft
manufacturer. Modifications or updates to the checklists are coordinated through the aircraft manufacturer.
The user cannot edit these checklists.
EIS
The MFD is able to display optional electronic checklists which allow a pilot to quickly find the proper procedure
on the ground and during each phase of flight. The system accesses the checklists from an SD card inserted into
the bezel slot. If the SD card contains an invalid checklist file or no checklist, the Power-up Page messages display
AUDIO PANEL
‘Checklist File: Invalid’ or ‘Checklist File: N/A’ (not available) and the Checklist Softkey is not available.
& CNS
Accessing and navigating checklists:
1) From any page on the MFD (except the EIS Pages), press the Checklist Softkey or turn the large FMS Knob to
MANAGEMENT
select the Checklist Page.
FLIGHT
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Group’ field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired procedure and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Checklist’ field.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired checklist and press the ENT Key. The selected checklist item is
indicated with white text surrounded by a white box.
6) Press the ENT Key or Check Softkey to check the selected checklist item. The line item turns green and a
checkmark is placed in the associated box. The next line item is automatically selected for checking.
Either FMS Knob can be used to scroll through the checklist and select the desired checklist item.

AFCS
Press the CLR Key or Uncheck Softkey to remove a check mark from an item.
7) When all checklist items have been checked, ‘*Checklist Finished*’ is displayed in green text at the bottom left
of the checklist window. If all items in the checklist have not be checked, ‘*Checklist Not Finished*’ will be
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
displayed in yellow text.
8) Press the ENT Key. ‘Go To Next Checklist?’ will be highlighted by the cursor.
9) Press the ENT Key to advance to the next checklist.
APPENDICES
10) Press the Exit Softkey to exit the Checklist Page and return to the page last viewed.
Accessing emergency procedures:

1) From any page on the MFD (except the EIS Pages), press the Checklist Softkey or turn the large FMS Knob to
select the Checklist Page.
INDEX
2) Press the EMER Softkey.
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired emergency checklist and press the ENT Key.
SYSTEM
4) Press the ENT Key or Check Softkey to check the selected emergency checklist item. The line item turns green
and a checkmark is placed in the box next to it. The next line item is automatically highlighted for checking.
Either FMS Knob can be used to scroll through the checklist and select the desired checklist item.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Press the CLR Key or Uncheck Softkey to remove a check mark from an item.
5) When all checklist items have been checked, ‘*Checklist Finished*’ is displayed in green text at the bottom left
of the checklist window. If all items in the checklist have not be checked, ‘*Checklist Not Finished*’ will be
displayed in yellow text.
6) Press the ENT Key. ‘Go To Next Checklist?’ will be highlighted by the cursor.
EIS
7) Press the ENT Key to advance to the next checklist.

8) Press the Return Softkey to return to the previous checklist.
AUDIO PANEL
9) Press the Exit Softkey to exit the Checklist Page and return to the page last viewed.
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
SIRIUSXM DATA LINK RECEIVER TROUBLESHOOTING
INSTRUMENTS
For troubleshooting purposes, check the LRU Information Box on the ‘Aux - System Status’ Page for
FLIGHT
GDL 69A SXM status, serial number, and software version number. If a failure has been detected in the
GDL 69A SXM the status is marked with a red X.
Selecting the ‘Aux - System Status’ Page:
EIS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Status’ Page.
Some quick troubleshooting steps listed below can be performed to find the possible cause of a failure.
• Ensure the installed Data Link Receiver or Iridium Transceiver has an active subscription or account
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Perform a quick check of the circuit breakers to ensure that power is applied to the Data Link Receiver or
Iridium Transceiver
Ensure that nothing is plugged into the MUSIC 1 or MUSIC 2 jacks because that would prevent SiriusXM
MANAGEMENT
radio from being heard
FLIGHT
If a failure still exists, the following messages may provide insight as to the possible problem:
Message Message Location Description

Data Link Receiver antenna error; service
AVOIDANCE
CHECK ANTENNA XM Information Page (MFD)
HAZARD
required
UPDATING XM Information Page (MFD) Data Link Receiver updating encryption code
XM Information Page Weather Datalink Page Loss of signal; signal strength too low for
NO SIGNAL
(MFD) receiver
LOADING XM Radio Page (MFD) Acquiring channel audio or information
AFCS
OFF AIR XM Radio Page (MFD) Channel not in service
-------- XM Radio Page (MFD) Missing channel information
No communication from Data Link Receiver
WEATHER DATA LINK FAILED Weather Datalink Page (MFD)
ADDITIONAL
within last 5 minutes
FEATURES
ACTIVATION REQUIRED XM Information Page (MFD) SiriusXM subscription is not activated
DETECTING ACTIVATION Weather Datalink Page (MFD) SiriusXM subscription is activating.
SiriusXM subscription confirmed downloading
WAITING FOR DATA... Weather Datalink Page (MFD)
weather data.
APPENDICES
Table 8-5 GDL 69A SXM Data Link Receiver Messages

INDEX
446
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Blank Page
G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG

190-02452-00 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
NOTE: The current version of the pertinent flight manual supersedes information found in this document.

The Alerting System conveys alerts using the following:
INSTRUMENTS
• CAS Window: The Annunciation Window displays abbreviated annunciation text. Text color is based on alert
FLIGHT
levels described in the following section. The CAS Window is located to the right of the Altimeter and Vertical
Speed Indicator. All Crew Alerting System (CAS) annunciations can be displayed simultaneously in the CAS
Window. A white horizontal line separates annunciations that are acknowledged from annunciations that are
not yet acknowledged. Higher priority annunciations are displayed towards the top of the window.
• Messages Window: The Messages Window displays text messages for up to 64 prioritized alert messages.
EIS
Pressing the Messages Softkey displays the Messages Window. Pressing the Messages Softkey a second time
removes the Messages Window from the display. When the Messages Window is displayed, the FMS Knob can
be used to scroll through the alert message list.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Softkey Annunciation: During certain alerts, the Messages Softkey may appear as a flashing annunciation
to accompany an alert. The Messages Softkey assumes a new label consistent with the alert level (Warning,
Caution, or Advisory). By pressing the softkey when flashing an annunciation, the alert is acknowledged. The
softkey label then returns to Messages. If alerts are still present, the Messages label is displayed in white with
MANAGEMENT
black text. Pressing the Messages Softkey a second time views the alert text messages.
FLIGHT
• System Annunciations: Typically, a large red or amber ‘X’ appears over instruments whose information is
supplied by a failed Line Replaceable Unit (LRU). See the System Annunciations Section for more information.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
System
Annunciation
Amber 'X'
System
Annunciation
Red‘X’
AFCS
Annunciation
Window
ADDITIONAL
Alerts Window
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Alerts Softkey Annunciation

after acknowledgement
Figure A-1 Alerting System
INDEX
APPENDIX A
OVERVIEW
CAS MESSAGE PRIORITIZATION

SYSTEM
NOTE: Refer to the current version of the pertinent flight manual for corrective pilot actions.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
NOTE: Any CAS messages that are generated when the system is first powered on are considered already
acknowledged. They do not flash or trigger the Master Warning or Master Caution.
The Alerting System uses three alert levels. Messages are grouped by criticality (warning, caution, advisory)
and sorted by order of appearance (most recent messages on top). The color of the message is based on its
urgency and on required action:
EIS
The Crew Alerting System (CAS) Window is located on the right side of the PFD. Warning messages cannot
be scrolled through and remain at the top of the CAS display. The scroll bar appears if more caution and
advisory messages exist than can be displayed at once or if messages have been scrolled off the display. The
AUDIO PANEL
CAS softkeys also become available.

& CNS
NOTE: Aural alerts associated with abnormal conditions and advisories are managed through the audio
panels. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information.
MANAGEMENT
Warning: This level of alert requires immediate attention. A warning alert appears in the Annunciation
FLIGHT
Window and is accompanied by a continuous aural tone. Text appearing in the Annunciation Window is red. A
warning alert is also accompanied by a flashing Warning Softkey annunciation. Pressing the Warning Softkey
acknowledges the warning alert and stops the aural tone, if applicable.
AVOIDANCE
Caution: This level of alert indicates the existence of abnormal conditions on the aircraft that may require
HAZARD
pilot intervention. When a new caution alert appears in the Annunciation Window, it is shown in black on
amber inverse video in conjunction with the Caution Softkey and is accompanied by an aural tone. Pressing
the Caution Softkey acknowledges all amber messages and extinguishes the softkey. Once acknowledged,
caution messages are displayed until the issue is corrected.
System Message Advisory: This level of alert provides general information to the pilot. Message Advisories
AFCS
appear in the Alerts Window and are not shown in the Annunciation Window. When a Message Advisory occurs,
the system provides a white flashing Messages Softkey annunciation. Pressing the softkey acknowledges the
message advisory alert, and displays the associated text in the Alerts Window.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Some CAS messages can be display in more than one alert level group. For example, a message might
display as both a warning and a caution, but cannot appear more than once at any given time (unless the CAS
is being tested). If the received signals justify multiple priorities for a certain message, the message is displayed
for the higher priority condition. When graduating to a higher priority, the message flashes and requires
new acknowledgment. When degrading to a lower priority condition, the message moves to the top of the
APPENDICES
appropriate grouping, but does not require new acknowledgment.

INDEX
APPENDIX A
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
CAS
Window
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Softkey
Annunciation
Figure A-2 CAS Message Prioritization
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Figure A-3 Softkey Annunciation (Message Softkey Labels)
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
CAS ANNUNCIATIONS
Red annunciation window text signifies warnings, amber signifies cautions, and white signifies advisories.
See the the current version of the pertinent flight manual for a list of CAS annunciations and for recommended
pilot action.
AFCS
DISPLAY INHIBITS
Inhibits prevent certain CAS messages from being displayed during the following conditions:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If two alert levels of the same message are active simultaneously (e.g., L FUEL QTY warning and L FUEL
QTY caution) only the higher alert level is displayed.
If a GEA or GIA fails, all CAS messages depending on sensors associated with that LRU are automatically
inhibited. Inhibits cannot be activated by invalid sensor data.
APPENDICES
INDEX
APPENDIX A
OVERVIEW
WARNING ANNUNCIATIONS
SYSTEM
Annunciation Window Text Alerts Window Message Audio Alert

ALTN AMPS Engine alternator output is > 70 amps.
INSTRUMENTS
ALTN FAIL Engine alternator has failed.

FLIGHT
DOOR OPEN Front or rear door is not closed.

ENG TEMP Engine coolant temp is >105 deg. C.
FUEL PRES Engine fuel pressure is low.
GBOX TEMP Engine gearbox temp is > 120 deg. C. Continuous Aural Tone
L FUEL TEMP Left fuel temp is greater than 60 deg. C.
EIS
OIL PRES Engine oil pressure is less than 0.9 bar.

OIL TEMP Engine oil temp is greater than 140 deg. C.
R FUEL TEMP Right fuel temp is greater than 60 deg. C.
AUDIO PANEL
STARTER
& CNS
Engine starter is engaged.
CAUTION ANNUNCIATIONS
MANAGEMENT

FLIGHT
COOL LVL Engine coolant level is low.

ECU A FAIL Engine ECU A has failed.
ECU B FAIL Engine ECU B has failed.
FUEL LOW Left fuel quantity is low Single Aural Tone
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
VOLTS LOW Bus voltage is less than 25 volts.

PITOT FAIL Pitot heat has failed.
PITOT HT OFF Pitot heat is off.
ADVISORY ANNUNCIATIONS
AFCS

GIA FAN FAIL The cooling fan for the GIA’s is inoperative
GLOW ON Engine glow plug active.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
FUEL XFER Fuel transfer in progress None

MFD FAN FAIL The cooling fan for the MFD is inoperative
PFD FAN FAIL The cooling fan for the PFD is inoperative
APPENDICES
INDEX
APPENDIX A
OVERVIEW
AUDIO ALERTING SYSTEM TEST
SYSTEM
The system issues audio alert tones when specific system conditions are met. Should the #1 GIA 64W fail,
audio and voice alerts are not generated. The annunciation tone may be tested from the AUX - System Status
Page.
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Testing the system annunciation tone:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Status Page.
2) Select the Ann Test Softkey.
Or:
EIS
2) Highlight ‘Enable Annunciator Test Mode’ and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
SYSTEM MESSAGE ADVISORIES
& CNS
NOTE: This section provides information regarding message advisories that may be displayed by the system.
Knowledge of the aircraft, systems, flight conditions, and other existing operational priorities must be
MANAGEMENT
considered when responding to a message.
FLIGHT
This section describes various system message advisories. Certain messages are issued due to an LRU or LRU
function failure. Such messages are normally accompanied by a corresponding red or amber ‘X’ annunciation
as shown previously in the System Message Annunciations section.
AVOIDANCE
Message Comments
HAZARD
ABORT APR – Loss of GPS navigation.
Abort approach due to loss of GPS navigation.
Abort approach.
ADC1 ALT EC – ADC1 altitude error
GDC1 is reporting that the altitude error correction is unavailable.
correction is unavailable
ADC1 AS EC – ADC1 airspeed error
AFCS
GDC1 is reporting that the airspeed error correction is unavailable.
correction is unavailable.
ADC1 SERVICE – ADC1 needs service.
The GDC1 should be serviced.
Return unit for repair.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AHRS1 CAL – AHRS1 calibration version
The #1 AHRS calibration version error. The system should be serviced.
error. Srvc req’d.
AHRS1 CONFIG – AHRS1 config error. AHRS configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory. The
Config service req’d. system should be serviced.
APPENDICES
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 using backup The #1 AHRS is using the backup GPS path. Primary GPS path has failed. The system
GPS source. should be serviced when possible.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 not receiving The #1 AHRS is not receiving any or any useful GPS information. Check the current
any GPS information. version of the pertinent flight manual limitations. The system should be serviced.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 not receiving
INDEX
The #1 AHRS is not receiving backup GPS information. The system should be serviced.
backup GPS information.
APPENDIX A
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
Message Comments
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 operating
The #1 AHRS is operating exclusively in no-GPS mode. The system should be serviced.
exclusively in no-GPS mode.
AHRS1 SERVICE – AHRS1 Magnetic- The #1 AHRS earth magnetic field model is out of date. Update magnetic field model
INSTRUMENTS
field model needs update. when practical.

FLIGHT
AHRS1 TAS – AHRS1 not receiving The #1 AHRS is not receiving true airspeed from the air data computer. The AHRS
airspeed. relies on GPS information to augment the lack of airspeed. The system should be
serviced.
APR DWNGRADE – Approach
Use LNAV minima when approach is downgraded.
downgraded.
EIS
ARSPC AHEAD – Airspace ahead less Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft will penetrate the airspace within
than 10 minutes. 10 minutes.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near – less
Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position.
AUDIO PANEL
than 2 nm.
& CNS
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near and

Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position.
ahead.
APR INACTV – Approach is not active. The system notifies the pilot that the loaded approach is not active. Activate approach
when required.
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AUDIO MANIFEST - Audio software

The GMA has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
mismatch, communication halted.
CHECK CRS – Database course for Selected course for LOC2 differs from published localizer course by more than 10
LOC2 / [LOC ID] is [CRS]°. degrees.
AVOIDANCE
CNFG MODULE – PFD1 configuration The PFD1 configuration module backup memory has failed. The system should be
HAZARD
module is inoperative. serviced.

COM1 CONFIG – COM1 config error. The COM1 configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
Config service req’d. system should be serviced
COM #[1, 2] INOP - CAL - Check COM 1 and/or COM 2 calibration version error. Check COM calibration.
COM calibration.
AFCS
COM #[1, 2] INOP - CRNT - Check COM 1 and/or COM 2 current is low. Check COM current.
COM current.
COM #[1, 2] INOP - NTRL - Com COM 1 and/or COM 2 has an internal fault.
ADDITIONAL
internal fault.
FEATURES
COM #[1, 2] REDUCED TX POWER - COM 1 and/or COM 2 has a reduced transmission power.
COM synthesizer lock fault.
COM #[1, 2] INOP - SYNTH - COM The COM 1 and/or COM 2 has a synthesizer lock fault.
synthesizer lock fault.
APPENDICES
COM1 PTT – COM1 push-to-talk key The COM1 external push-to-talk switch is stuck in the enable (or “pressed”) position.
is stuck. Press the PTT switch again to cycle its operation.
If the problem persists, the system should be serviced.
COM1 RMT XFR – COM1 remote The COM1 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”) position. Press the
transfer key is stuck. transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists, the system should
INDEX
be serviced.
APPENDIX A
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
Message Comments
COM1 SERVICE – COM1 needs The system has detected a failure in COM1. COM1 may still be usable. The system
service. Return unit for repair. should be serviced when possible.
COM1 TEMP – COM1 over temp. The system has detected an over temperature condition in COM1. The transmitter
INSTRUMENTS
Reducing transmitter power. operates at reduced power. If the problem persists, the system should be serviced.
FLIGHT
COM2 CONFIG – COM2 config error. The COM2 configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
Config service req’d. system should be serviced
COM2 PTT – COM2 push-to-talk key The COM2 external push-to-talk switch is stuck in the enable (or “pressed”) position.
is stuck. Press the PTT switch again to cycle its operation.
If the problem persists, the system should be serviced.
EIS
COM2 RMT XFR – COM2 remote The COM2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”) position. Press the
transfer key is stuck. transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists, the system should
be serviced.
AUDIO PANEL
COM2 SERVICE – COM2 needs The system has detected a failure in COM2. COM2 may still be usable. The system
& CNS
service. Return unit for repair. should be serviced when possible.
COM2 TEMP – COM2 over temp. The system has detected an over temperature condition in COM2. The transmitter
Reducing transmitter power. operates at reduced power. If the problem persists, the system should be serviced.
COPILOT RADIOS MUTED – Copilot
MANAGEMENT
The copilot radios are set on mute.
radios are muted.
FLIGHT
DATA LOST – Pilot stored data was The pilot profile data was lost. System reverts to default pilot profile and settings. The
lost. Recheck settings. pilot may reconfigure the MFD & PFD with preferred settings, if desired.
DB CHANGE – Database changed. This occurs when a stored flight plan contains procedures that have been manually
AVOIDANCE
Verify user modified procedures. edited. This alert is issued only after an navigation database update. Verify that the
HAZARD
user-modified procedures in stored flight plans are correct and up to date.
DB CHANGE – Database changed. This occurs when a stored flight plan contains an airway that is no longer consistent
Verify stored airways. with the navigation database. This alert is issued only after an navigation database
update. Verify use of airways in stored flight plans and reload airways as needed.
DB MISMATCH – Navigation The PFD and MFD have different navigation database versions or types installed.
AFCS
database mismatch. Xtalk is off. Crossfill is off. Check the Aux-System Status Page to determine versions or regions.
Also, check the Aux-System Status Page for a database synchronization function not
completed. After synchronization is complete, power must be turned off, then on.
DB MISMATCH – Obstacle database The PFD and MFD have different obstacle database versions or types installed. Check
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
mismatch. the Aux-System Status Page to determine versions or regions. Also, check the Aux-
System Status Page for a database synchronization function not completed. After
synchronization is complete, power must be turned off, then on.
DB MISMATCH – Terrain database The PFD and MFD have different terrain database versions or types installed. Check
APPENDICES
mismatch. the Aux-System Status Page to determine versions or regions. Also, check the Aux-
System Status Page for a database synchronization function not completed. After
synchronization is complete, power must be turned off, then on.
DIG GMA1 MANIFEST – DIG GMA The digital audio controller has incorrect software installed. The system should be
1 software mismatch, communication serviced.
halted.
INDEX
APPENDIX A
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
Message Comments
DISABLE GP TO ARM CLIMB – Press
APPR button to enable VNAV track Disable AFCS APPR mode to enable VNAV
change.
INSTRUMENTS
DISABLE GS TO ARM CLIMB – Press

FLIGHT
APPR button to enable VNAV track Disable AFCS APPR mode to enable VNAV
change.
DME CHECK RANGE – DME range A failure or disagreement has been detected in a DME receiver. Check position
disagreement. Check position sensors. sensors.
FAILED PATH – A data path has
A data path connected to the GDU or the GIA 64W has failed.
EIS
failed.
FPL TRUNC – Flight plan has been This occurs when a newly installed navigation database eliminates an obsolete
truncated. approach or arrival used by a stored flight plan. The obsolete procedure is removed
from the flight plan. Update flight plan with current arrival or approach.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FPL WPT LOCK – Flight plan waypoint Upon power-up, the system detects that a stored flight plan waypoint is locked. This
is locked. occurs when an navigation database update eliminates an obsolete waypoint. The
flight plan cannot find the specified waypoint and flags this message. This can also
occur with user waypoints in a flight plan that is deleted.
MANAGEMENT
Remove the waypoint from the flight plan if it no longer exists in any database,
FLIGHT
OR
update the waypoint name/identifier to reflect the new information.
G/S1 FAIL – G/S1 is inoperative. A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1. The system should be serviced.
G/S1 SERVICE – G/S1 needs service. A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1. The receiver may still be
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Return unit for repair. available. The system should be serviced when possible.
G/S2 FAIL – G/S2 is inoperative. A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 2. The system should be serviced.
G/S2 SERVICE – G/S2 needs service. A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 2. The receiver may still be
Return unit for repair. available. The system should be serviced when possible.
GDC1 MANIFEST – GDC1 software
The AHRS has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
AFCS

GDL69 CONFIG – GDL 69 config GDL 69/69A SXM configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration
error. Config service req’d. memory. The system should be serviced.
GDL69 FAIL – GDL 69 has failed. A failure has been detected in the GDL 69/69A or GDL 69/69A SXM. The receiver is
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
unavailable. The system should be serviced.

GDL69 MANIFEST – GDL software
The GDL 69/69A SXM has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
GEA1 CONFIG – GEA1 config error. The GEA1 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory.
APPENDICES
Config service req’d. The system should be serviced.

GEA1 MANIFEST – GEA1 software
The #1 GEA has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
GEO LIMITS – AHRS1 too far North/ The aircraft is outside geographical limits for approved AHRS operation. Heading is
South, no magnetic compass. flagged as invalid.
GFC MANIFEST – GFC software
INDEX
Incorrect servo software is installed, or gain settings are incorrect.

GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1 audio config
The GIA1 have an error in the audio configuration. The system should be serviced.
error. Config service req’d.
APPENDIX A
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
Message Comments
GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1 config error. The GIA1 configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
GIA1 COOLING – GIA1 temperature The GIA1 and/or GIA2 temperature is too low to operate correctly. Allow units to
INSTRUMENTS
too low. warm up to operating temperature.
FLIGHT
GIA1 COOLING – GIA1 over
The GIA1 temperature is too high. If problem persists, the system should be serviced.
temperature.
GIA1 MANIFEST – GIA1 software
The GIA1 1 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
GIA1 SERVICE – GIA1 needs service.
EIS
The GIA1 self-test has detected a problem in the unit. The system should be serviced.
Return the unit for repair.
GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2 audio config
The GIA2 have an error in the audio configuration. The system should be serviced.
error. Config service req’d.
AUDIO PANEL
GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2 config error. The GIA2 configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
& CNS
GIA2 COOLING – GIA2 over
The GIA2 temperature is too high. If problem persists, the system should be serviced.
temperature.
MANAGEMENT
GIA2 COOLING – GIA2 temperature The GIA2 temperature is too low to operate correctly. Allow units to warm up to
FLIGHT
too low. operating temperature.
GIA2 MANIFEST – GIA2 software
The GIA 2 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
GIA2 SERVICE – GIA2 needs service.
The GIA2 self-test has detected a problem in the unit. The system should be serviced.
AVOIDANCE
Return the unit for repair.
HAZARD
GMA1 AUX MANIFEST – GMA 1 AUX The digital audio controller has incorrect software installed. The system should be
software mismatch, communication serviced.
halted.
GMA1 CONFIG – GMA1 config error. The audio panel configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory.
Config service req’d. The system should be serviced.
AFCS
GMA1 FAIL – GMA1 is inoperative. The audio panel self-test has detected a failure. The audio panel is unavailable. The
system should be serviced.
GMA1 MANIFEST – GMA1 software
The audio panel has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
GMA1 SERVICE – GMA1 needs The audio panel self-test has detected a problem in the unit. Certain audio functions may
service. Return unit for repair. still be available, and the audio panel may still be usable. The system should be serviced
when possible.
GMU1 MANIFEST – GMU1 software
APPENDICES
The GMU has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
Loss of GPS navigation due to insufficient satellites.
navigation. Insufficient satellites.
Loss of GPS navigation due to position error.
navigation. Position error.
INDEX

Loss of GPS navigation due to GPS failure.
navigation. GPS fail.
APPENDIX A
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
Message Comments
GPS1 SERVICE – GPS1 needs service.
Return unit for repair. A failure has been detected in the GPS1 and/or GPS2 receiver. The receiver may still
GPS2 SERVICE – GPS2 needs service. be available. The system should be serviced.
INSTRUMENTS

FLIGHT
GRS1 MANIFEST – GRS1 software

The AHRS has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
GTS CONFIG – GTS config error. GTS 800 configuration settings do not match those of the GDU configuration. The
GTS MANIFEST – GTS software The GTS has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
EIS

GTX1 MANIFEST – GTX1 software
The transponder has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
AUDIO PANEL
HDG FAULT – AHRS1 magnetometer A fault has occurred in the #1 GMU. Heading is flagged as invalid. The AHRS uses
& CNS
fault has occurred. GPS for backup mode operation. The system should be serviced.
HW MISMATCH – GIA hardware
mismatch. GIA1 communication
halted.
MANAGEMENT
A GIA mismatch has been detected, where only one is SBAS capable.
FLIGHT
HW MISMATCH – GIA hardware

mismatch. GIA2 communication
halted.
INSIDE ARSPC – Inside airspace. The aircraft is inside the airspace.
AVOIDANCE
INVALID ADM – Invalid ADM: ATN Data link avionics were not configured correctly and therefore will not be able to
HAZARD
communication halted. communicate with the ground network.

LOCKED FPL – Cannot navigate This occurs when the pilot attempts to activate a stored flight plan that contains
locked flight plan. locked waypoint. Remove locked waypoint from flight plan. Update flight plan with
current waypoint.
LOI – GPS integrity lost. Crosscheck
AFCS
GPS integrity is insufficient for the current phase of flight.

with other NAVS.
LRG MAG VAR – Verify all course The GDU’s internal model cannot determine the exact magnetic variance for
angles. geographic locations near the magnetic poles. Displayed magnetic course angles may
ADDITIONAL
differ from the actual magnetic heading by more than 2°.

FEATURES
MANIFEST – MFD1 software

The PFD and/or MFD has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
MANIFEST – PFD1 software
APPENDICES
MFD SOFTWARE – MFD mismatch, The specified GDU has different software versions installed. The system should be
communication halted. serviced.
MFD TERRAIN DSP – MFD Terrain One of the terrain or obstacle databases required for TAWS in the specified GDU is
awareness display unavailable. missing or invalid.
MFD1 BACKLIGHT CALIBRATION – The specified GDU’s backlight calibration cannot be found or is invalid. The system
INDEX
MFD1 calibration. Return for repair. should be serviced.

MFD1 CONFIG – MFD1 config error. The MFD configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
APPENDIX A
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
Message Comments
MFD1 COOLING – MFD1 has poor The MFD is overheating and is reducing power consumption by dimming the display.
cooling. Reducing power usage. If problem persists, the system should be serviced.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 obstacle The MFD detected a failure in the obstacle database. Ensure that the data card
INSTRUMENTS
database error exists. is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the system should be
FLIGHT
serviced.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 obstacle
The obstacle database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified LRU.
database missing.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 terrain The MFD detected a failure in the terrain database. Ensure that the terrain card is
database error exists. properly inserted in display. Replace terrain card. If problem persists, the system
EIS
should be serviced.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 terrain
The terrain database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified LRU.
database missing.
AUDIO PANEL
MFD1 SERVICE – MFD1 needs
The MFD self-test has detected a problem. The system should be serviced.
& CNS
service. Return unit for repair.
MFD1 KEYSTK – MFD1 [key name] A key is stuck on the MFD bezel. Attempt to free the stuck key by pressing it several
is stuck. times. The system should be serviced if the problem persists.
MFD1 VOLTAGE – MFD1 has low
MANAGEMENT
The MFD voltage is low. The system should be serviced.
voltage. Reducing power usage
FLIGHT
NAV1 MANIFEST – NAV1 software NAV1 software mismatch. The system should be serviced.
NAV1 RMT XFR – NAV1 remote The remote NAV1 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”) state. Press
AVOIDANCE
transfer key is stuck. the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists, the system
HAZARD
should be serviced.
NAV1 SERVICE – NAV1 needs service. A failure has been detected in the NAV1 receiver. The receiver may still be available.
Return unit for repair. The system should be serviced.
NAV2 MANIFEST – NAV2 software NAV2 software mismatch. The system should be serviced.
AFCS
NAV2 RMT XFR – NAV2 remote The remote NAV2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”) state. Press
transfer key is stuck. the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
ADDITIONAL
NAV2 SERVICE – NAV2 needs service. A failure has been detected in the NAV2 receiver. The receiver may still be available.
FEATURES
Return unit for repair. The system should be serviced.
NON-MAGNETIC UNITS– Non- Navigation angle is not set to MAGNETIC at power-up.
magnetic NAV ANGLE display units
are active.
APPENDICES
NON WGS84 WPT – Do not use GPS The position of the selected waypoint [xxxx] is not calculated based on the WGS84
for navigation to [xxxx] map reference datum and may be positioned in error as displayed. Do not use GPS to
navigate to the selected non-WGS84 waypoint..
PFD1 BACKLIGHT CALIBRATION – The PFD1 backlight calibration cannot be found or is invalid. The system should be
PFD1 calibration lost. Return for repair. serviced.
INDEX
PFD1 CONFIG – PFD1 config error. The PFD configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
APPENDIX A
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
Message Comments
PFD1 COOLING – PFD1 has poor The PFD is overheating and is reducing power consumption by dimming the display.
cooling. Reducing power usage. If problem persists, the system should be serviced.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 obstacle
The obstacle database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified LRU.
INSTRUMENTS
database missing.
FLIGHT
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 terrain The PFD detected a failure in the terrain database. Ensure that the terrain card is
database error exists. properly inserted in display. Replace terrain card. If problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 terrain
The terrain database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified LRU.
database missing.
EIS
PFD1 KEYSTK – PFD1 [key name] is A key is stuck on the PFD bezel. Attempt to free the stuck key by pressing it several
stuck. times. The system should be serviced if the problem persists.
[PFD1 or MFD1] CARD 1 REM – The SD card was removed from the top card slot of the specified PFD or MFD. The SD
AUDIO PANEL
Card 1 was removed. Reinsert card. card needs to be reinserted.

& CNS
[PFD1 or MFD1] CARD 2 REM – The SD card was removed from the bottom card slot of the specified PFD or MFD. The
Card 2 was removed. Reinsert card. SD card needs to be reinserted.
[PFD1 or MFD1] CARD 1 ERR – Card
The SD card in the top card slot of the specified PFD or MFD contains invalid data.
1 is invalid.
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
[PFD1 or MFD1] CARD 2 ERR – Card

The SD card in the bottom card slot of the specified PFD or MFD contains invalid data.
2 is invalid.
PFD1 VOLTAGE – PFD1 has low
The PFD1 voltage is low. The system should be serviced.
AVOIDANCE
PFD1 KEYSTK – PFD2 [key name] is A key is stuck on the PFD bezel. Attempt to free the stuck key by pressing it several
HAZARD
stuck. times. The system should be serviced if the problem persists.

PFD1 SERVICE – PFD1 needs service.
The PFD self-test has detected a problem. The system should be serviced.
PFD1 TERRAIN DSP – PFD1 Terrain One of the terrain or obstacle databases required for TAWS in PFD1 is missing or
awareness display unavailable. invalid.
AFCS
PFD1 VOLTAGE – PFD2 has low

The PFD2 voltage is low. The system should be serviced.
PILOT RADIOS MUTED – Pilot
The pilot radios are set on mute.
ADDITIONAL
radios are muted.

FEATURES
PTK FAIL – Parallel track unavailable:

Invalid leg type for parallel offset.
invalid leg type.
IAF waypoint for parallel offset has been passed.
past IAF.
APPENDICES

Bad parallel track geometry.
bad geometry.
SCHEDULER [#] – <message>. Message criteria entered by the user.
SLCT FREQ – Select appropriate The system notifies the pilot to load the approach frequency for the appropriate NAV
frequency for approach. receiver. Select the correct frequency for the approach.
INDEX
APPENDIX A
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
Message Comments
SLCT MAG– Select MAGNETIC NAV The system notifies the pilot to set the Nav Angle units on the Avionics Settings Screen
ANGLE display units. to Magnetic.
SLCT NAV – Select NAV on CDI for The system notifies the pilot to set the CDI to the correct NAV receiver. Set the CDI to
INSTRUMENTS
approach. the correct NAV receiver.
FLIGHT
SLCT NON-MAG– Select alternate The system notifies the pilot to set the Nav Angle units on the Avionics Settings Screen
NAV ANGLE display units. to True.
STEEP TURN – Steep turn ahead. A steep turn is 15 seconds ahead. Prepare to turn.
STRMSCP FAIL – Stormscope has
Stormscope has failed. The system should be serviced.
failed.
EIS
SVT DISABLED – Out of available Synthetic Vision is disabled because the aircraft is not within the boundaries of the
terrain region. installed terrain database.
SVT DISABLED – Terrain DB Synthetic Vision is disabled because a terrain database of sufficient resolution is not
AUDIO PANEL
resolution too low. currently installed.
& CNS
SW MISMATCH – GDU software The MFD and PFD have different software versions installed. The system should be
version mismatch. Xtalk is off. serviced.
TERRAIN AUD CFG – Trn Awareness TAWS is disabled because the audio configuration is invalid. The system should be
MANAGEMENT
audio config error. Service req’d. serviced.
FLIGHT
TERRAIN DISABLED – Terrain TAWS is disabled because a terrain database of sufficient resolution is not currently
Awareness DB resolution too low. installed.
TIMER EXPIRD – Timer has expired. The system notifies the pilot that the timer has expired.
TRAFFIC FAIL – Traffic device has The system is no longer receiving data from the traffic system. The traffic device
AVOIDANCE
failed. should be serviced.
HAZARD
TRN AUD FAIL – Trn Awareness
Terrain Awareness audio is unavailable. The system should be serviced.
audio source unavailable
UNABLE V WPT – Can’t reach current The current vertical waypoint can not be reached within the maximum flight path
vertical waypoint. angle and vertical speed constraints. The system automatically transitions to the next
vertical waypoint.
AFCS
VNV – Unavailable. Excessive
The current crosstrack exceeds the limit, causing vertical deviation to go invalid.
crosstrack error.
VNV – Unavailable. Excessive track The current track angle error exceeds the limit, causing the vertical deviation to go
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
angle error. invalid.
VNV – Unavailable. Parallel course
A parallel course has been selected, causing the vertical deviation to go invalid.
selected.
VNV – Unavailable. Unsupported leg The lateral flight plan contains a procedure turn, vector, or other unsupported leg
type in flight plan. type prior to the active vertical waypoint. This prevents vertical guidance to the active
APPENDICES
vertical waypoint.
WPT ARRIVAL – Arriving at waypoint
Arriving at waypoint [xxxx], where [xxxx] is the waypoint name.
-[xxxx]
XPDR1 ADS-B 1090 – Datalinik:
A failure has been detected in the 1090 receiver.
ADS-B 1090 receiver has failed.
INDEX
APPENDIX A
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
Message Comments
XPDR1 ADS-B FAIL – Transponder: ADS-B is inoperative. The transponder may not be receiving a valid GPS position.
XPDR1 is unable to transmit ADS-B Other transponder functions may be available. Service when possible.
messages.
INSTRUMENTS
XPDR1 ADS-B NO POS –

FLIGHT
Transponder: ADS-B is not transmitting The transponder is not able to receive position information.
position.
XPDR1 ADS-B TRFC – Transponder:
The Transponder is incapable of processing traffic information.
ADS-B traffic has failed
XPDR1 ADS-B UAT – Datalink:
A failure has been detected in the UAT receiver.
EIS
ADS-B in UAT receiver has failed.

XPDR1 CONFIG – XPDR1 config error. The transponder configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration
Config service req’d. memory. The system should be serviced.
AUDIO PANEL
XPDR1 CSA FAIL - Traffic: ADS-B In

ADS-B Conflict Situational Awareness (CSA) is unavailable.
& CNS
traffic alerting has failed.

XPDR1 FAIL – XPDR1 is inoperative. There is no communication with the #1 or #2 transponder.
XPDR1 FAULT – Datalink: ADSB-B in The transponder is unable to receive ADS-B information.
has failed.
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
XPDR1 FIS-B WX – Datalink: FIS-B The transponder is unable to receive FIS-B weather information.
Weather has failed.
XPDR1 OVER TEMP - Transponder: The system has detected an over temperature condition in XPDR1. The transmitter
Transponder over temp. operates at reduced power. If the problem persists, the system should be serviced.
AVOIDANCE
XPDR1 PRES ALT –Transponder:

HAZARD
Unable to provide pressure altitude information.

ADS-B no pressure altitude.
XPDR1 SRVC – XPDR1 needs service. The #1 transponder should be serviced when possible.
XPDR1 UNDER TEMP - Transponder: The system has detected an under temperature condition in XPDR1. The transmitter
Transponder under temp. operates at reduced power. If the problem persists, the system should be serviced.
AFCS
XTALK ERROR – A flight display The MFD and PFD are not communicating with each other. The system should be
crosstalk error has occurred. serviced.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
APPENDIX B
OVERVIEW
DATABASE MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
Database information is obtained from third party sources. Inaccuracies in the data may be discovered from
time to time. Garmin communicates this information by issuing a Database Alert. These notifications are available
INSTRUMENTS
on flygarmin.com.
FLIGHT
Garmin requests the flight crew report any observed discrepancies related to database information. These
discrepancies could come in the form of an incorrect procedure; incorrectly identified terrain, obstacles
and fixes; or any other displayed item used for navigation or communication in the air or on the ground.
Go to flygarmin.com and select Aviation Data Error Report.
EIS
CAUTION: Never disconnect power to the system when loading a database. Power interruption during the
database loading process could result in maintenance being required to reboot the system.
The system uses Secure Digital (SD) cards to load various types of data. For basic flight operations, SD cards
AUDIO PANEL
are required for database storage as well as database updates. Not all SD cards are compatible with the system.
& CNS
NOTE: When loading database updates, the ‘DB Mismatch’ message will be displayed until database
synchronization is complete, followed by turning system power off, then on. Synchronization can be
MANAGEMENT
monitored on the ‘Aux – Databases’ Page.
FLIGHT
NOTE: Loading a database in the system prior to its effective date will result in the expiration date on the
power-up screen and the effective date on the ‘Aux – Databases’ Page being displayed in amber.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
LOADING UPDATED DATABASES
CAUTION: Never disconnect power to the system when loading a database. Power interruption during the
database loading process could result in maintenance being required to reboot the system.
AFCS
NOTE: When loading database updates, the ‘DB Mismatch’ message will be displayed until database
synchronization is complete, followed by turning system power off, then on. Synchronization can be
monitored on the ‘Aux-Database’ Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Databases may be loaded through Garmin Pilot and Flight Stream 510. When loading databases through
Garmin Pilot and the Flight Stream 510, the Flight Stream 510 must be enabled on the system and the multimedia
card inserted in the bottom SD slot of the MFD.
APPENDICES
The cycles and dates for both standby and active databases are displayed on the “Aux – Databases” page on
the MFD. Any active databases with expiration dates in the past will be highlighted with amber text. When
an expired active database has a standby database that is ready to become effective, a cyan double-sided arrow
will be displayed between the database cycles. When this arrow is visible, it indicates that the standby and
active databases in that row will be switched on the next power cycle, activating the current standby database.
INDEX
APPENDIX B
OVERVIEW
Databases can also be manually selected (or deselected) by highlighting a list item and pressing the ENT Key,
SYSTEM
provided a valid, verified standby database is present.

In some cases it may be necessary to obtain an unlock code from Garmin in order to make the database
product functional. It may also be necessary to have the system configured by a Garmin authorized service
INSTRUMENTS
facility in order to use some database features.

FLIGHT
The navigation database contains the aeronautical data used by the system for the flight management and
flight planning functions. Included is detailed data for waypoints, procedures (arrivals, departures, approaches),
and airways. The navigation database is updated every 28 days.
The basemap database contains data for the topography and land features, such as rivers, lakes, and towns.
It is updated only periodically, with no set schedule. There is no expiration date.
EIS
The terrain database contains the terrain mapping data. These databases are updated periodically and have
no expiration date.
AUDIO PANEL
The obstacle database contains data for obstacles, such as towers, that pose a potential hazard to aircraft.
& CNS
Obstacles 200 feet and higher are included in the obstacle database. It is very important to note that not all
obstacles are necessarily charted and therefore may not be contained in the obstacle database. This database is
updated on a 56-day cycle.
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: The data contained in the terrain and obstacle databases comes from government agencies. Garmin
FLIGHT
accurately processes and cross-validates the data, but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of
the data.
The AOPA or AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory provides data on airports and heliports throughout the U.S. or
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
worldwide, respectively. The AOPA Directory offers detailed information for over 5,300 U. S. airports, along
with the names and phone numbers of thousands of FBOs. These databases are updated every 56 days. The
AC-U-KWIK Directory offers detailed information for more than 8,000 airports with runways longer than 3,000
feet worldwide.
The SafeTaxi database contains detailed airport diagrams for selected airports. These diagrams aid in following
AFCS
ground control instructions by accurately displaying the aircraft position on the map in relation to taxiways,
ramps, runways, terminals, and services. This database is updated on a 56-day cycle.
The FliteCharts database contains procedure charts. This database is updated on a 28-day cycle. If not
updated within 180 days of the expiration date, FliteCharts will no longer function.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The ChartView database is updated on a 14-day cycle. If the ChartView database is not updated within 70
days of the expiration date, ChartView will no longer function. The ChartView database must be purchased
directly from Jeppesen, but can be updated at jeppesen.com or flygarmin.com.
The IFR/VFR charts database contains VFR and IFR raster charts. The VFR Charts are digital representations
APPENDICES
of the Sectional Aeronautical Charts and Terminal Area Charts. The IFR Charts include both IFR High (designed
for navigation at or above 18,000 ft) and IFR Low (designed for navigation below 18,000 ft). IFR/VFR Charts
are updated every 28 days except for Canadian IFR/VFR Charts which are updated every 56 days.
INDEX
APPENDIX B
OVERVIEW
UPDATING DATABASES USING A SUPPLEMENTAL DATA CARD
SYSTEM
All databases are updated through a single SD card in the bottom slot of the MFD. When the card is
inserted, the databases on the card will be copied to standby and synchronized across all powered, configured
units. After update, the card is removed and the databases are stored on the system. When in standby,
INSTRUMENTS
databases are not immediately available for use, but stored to be activated at a later time.
FLIGHT
Database updates can be obtained by following the instructions detailed in the ‘Aviation Databases’ section
of the Garmin website (flygarmin.com). Once the updated files have been downloaded from the website, a
PC equipped with an appropriate SD card reader is used to unpack and program the new databases onto an
existing Supplemental Data Card. Equipment required to perform the update is as follows:
EIS
• Windows-compatible PC computer
• SD Card Reader: SanDisk SDDR-93, SanDisk SDDR-99, Verbatim #96504, or equivalent
• Updated database obtained from the Garmin website
AUDIO PANEL
• Supplemental SD Cards
& CNS
Updating Databases:
1) With the system OFF, remove an SD Card from the top SD card slot of the MFD.
MANAGEMENT
2) Download and install the databases on an SD card.
FLIGHT
3) Put the SD Card in the top SD card slot of the MFD.
4) Turn the system ON.
5) Press the ENT Key or the right-most softkey on MFD display to acknowledge the startup screen.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
6) Turn the large FMS Knob and select Aux.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob and select Databases.
8) Monitor the Sync Status on the ‘Aux-Databases’ Page. Wait for all databases to complete syncing, indicated by
‘Sync Complete’ being displayed. A cyan double-arrow will appear between the Standby and Active columns to
AFCS
show which Standby databases will be transferred to Active at the next power cycle.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
APPENDIX B
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Figure B-1 ‘Aux - Databases’ Page before Activation of Standby Databases

AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
9) Verify the correct database cycle information is shown in the Standby column.
10) Remove the SD card from the bottom slot of the MFD if desired.
11) Remove and reapply power to the system.
AFCS

14) Turn the small FMS Knob and select the Databases.
15) Verify that the standby databases transferred and are now in the Active column.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
APPENDIX B
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Figure B-2 ‘Aux - Databases’ Page - Updated Databases
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
16) To manually activate any databases that did not transfer to the active column:
a) Press the FMS Knob. The first database title on the screen will be selected.
b) Turn the small FMS Knob as necessary to select the database title.
c) Press the ENT Key. A cyan double-sided arrow will appear indicating that the standby database will
AFCS
become active.
Or:
Press the Menu Key and select ‘Swap Stby/Actv’ using the small FMS Knob. Press the ENT Key. A cyan
ADDITIONAL
double-sided arrow will appear indicating that the standby database will become active.
FEATURES
d) Remove and reapply power to the system.
e) Press the ENT Key or the right-most softkey on MFD display to acknowledge the startup screen.
f) Turn the large FMS Knob and select Aux.
APPENDICES
g) Turn the small FMS Knob and select Databases.

h) Verify that the standby databases transferred and are now in the Active column.
INDEX
APPENDIX B
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
17) For additional information on each database, press and then turn the FMS Knob to select the database, and
then press the Details Softkey. Press the ENT Key or the FMS Knob to exit.
Or:
INSTRUMENTS
Press the Menu Key and select ‘Details’ using the small FMS Knob and press the ENT Key. Press the ENT Key or
FLIGHT
the FMS Knob to exit.

18) To view database information for an individual display:
a) Turn the large FMS Knob and select Aux.
b) Turn the small FMS Knob and select System Status.
EIS
c) Press the Display Database Selection Softkey (MFD1 DB, PFD1 DB, PFD2 DB) to show database
information for each display. Use the small FMS Knob to scroll through the database information. Press
the ENT Key or the FMS Knob to exit.
AUDIO PANEL
UPDATING DATABASES USING FLIGHT STREAM 510 (OPTIONAL)

& CNS
In order to load databases through Garmin Pilot and the Flight Stream 510, the Flight Stream 510 must be
enabled on the system and inserted in the bottom SD slot of the MFD. A mobile device with Garmin Pilot
must be paired with the Flight Stream 510 over Bluetooth (refer to the Additional Features section). When
MANAGEMENT
there is at least one paired device available to connect, the Flight Stream 510 will automatically connect to the
FLIGHT
system’s preferred mobile device. The preferred device can be selected on the ‘Aux - Databases’ Page from a
menu list of paired devices.
Once a connection to the paired mobile device is made, Garmin Pilot makes available databases that can
be transferred to the Flight Stream 510. If any of these databases is more recent than the respective standby
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
database on the system, (or if there is no standby database on the system) those databases will be automatically
selected to load. The database updates may be initiated from the ‘Aux - Databases’ Page, or from other pages
on the MFD.
NOTE: The system will only provide a WiFi connection if new databases have been detected for download
AFCS
on Garmin Pilot via a valid Bluetooth connection. If there are no database updates required the system will
not provide a WiFi signal.
NOTE: If the mobile device has previously connected to the FS510, and is not connected to another WiFi
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
source, the mobile device should connect automatically to the FS510. If the mobile device is connected to
another WiFi source (i.e. hangar wifi), then the FS510 will not connect automatically.
Updating Databases from any MFD page (except the ‘Aux - Databases’ Page):
APPENDICES
1) Insert the Flight Stream 510 SD Card in the bottom slot of the MFD if not already inserted.
4) On the mobile device, start Garmin Pilot and touch Home > Connext > Database Concierge.
INDEX
APPENDIX B
OVERVIEW
6) Turn the small FMS Knob and select the Connext Setup.
SYSTEM
7) Ensure that Wifi Database Import is enabled in the ‘Device’ Window (refer to Additional Features section for
instructions to enable Wifi Database Import).
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
WiFi Enabled
Bluetooth
Status WiFi Status
WiFi Password
EIS
Figure B-3 ‘Connext Setup’ Page
8) Verify that the mobile device is enabled via Bluetooth in the Bluetooth settings on the mobile device.
AUDIO PANEL
9) In the ‘Paired Devices’ Window on the ‘Connext Setup’ Page, ensure the system is paired with the mobile device
& CNS
in use. (refer to Additional Features for instructions on connection to a preferred device).
NOTE: The database updates may now be continued from any MFD page, however, the update windows
shown in these instructions will not be shown on the ‘Aux - Databases’ Page. Use the proceeding instructions
MANAGEMENT
in this section to update databases from the ‘Aux - Databases’ Page.
FLIGHT
10) Press the Update Softkey when the following window appears. (Pressing the View Softkey will allow database
updates to be viewed from the ‘Aux Databases’ Page, however, the windows shown below will not appear on
the ‘Aux Databases’ Page. Pressing the Ignore Softkey will postpone the updates until further action is taken.)
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
Figure B-4 Database Update Available
ADDITIONAL
11) If using a device that has not been previously paired with the system, a password prompt will appear on the
FEATURES
mobile device. Enter the password shown in the ‘Password’ Field of the ‘Aux - Connext Setup’ Page.
12) The following window will appear. Database update progress may be monitored on the mobile device. APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure B-5 Starting Database Transfer
APPENDIX B
OVERVIEW
13) When the transfer is complete, the following screen will appear.
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
Figure B-6 Database Transfer Complete

14) Press the Close Softkey.
EIS

AUDIO PANEL

& CNS

MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure B-7 ‘Aux Databases’ Page with Updated Databases

INDEX
APPENDIX B
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
become active.
Or:
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Or:
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
c) Press the Display Database Selection Softkey (MFD1 DB, PFD1 DB, PFD2 DB) to show database
AFCS
Updating Databases from the ‘Aux - Databases’ Page:
ADDITIONAL
NOTE: The system will only provide a WiFi connection if new databases have been detected for download
FEATURES
on Garmin Pilot via a valid Bluetooth connection. If there are no database updates required the system will
not provide a WiFi signal.
NOTE: If the mobile device has previously connected to the FS510, and is not connected to another WiFi
APPENDICES
source, the mobile device should connect automatically to the FS510. If the mobile device is connected to
another WiFi source (i.e. hangar wifi), then the FS510 will not connect automatically.
1) Insert the Flight Stream 510 SD Card in the bottom slot of the MFD if not already inserted.
INDEX
4) On the mobile device, start Garmin Pilot and tap Home > Connext > Database Concierge.
APPENDIX B
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
6) Turn the small FMS Knob and select the Connext Setup.
7) Ensure that Wifi Database Import is enabled in the ‘Device’ Window (refer to Additional Features section for
instructions to enable Wifi Database Import).
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
WiFi Enabled
Bluetooth
Status WiFi Status
WiFi Password
EIS
Figure B-8 ‘Connext Setup’ Page
8) Verify that the mobile device is enabled via Bluetooth in the Bluetooth settings on the mobile device.
AUDIO PANEL
9) In the ‘Paired Devices’ Window on the ‘Connext Setup’ Page, ensure the system is paired with the mobile device
& CNS
in use. (refer to Additional Features for instructions on connection to a preferred device).

10) Press the Device Softkey to view databases that are ready to be loaded from the mobile device (pressing the
Stby/Actv Softkey will again display the current Standby and Active databases).
MANAGEMENT
11) The ‘Aux - Databases’ Page will show the databases connected to the mobile device in place of the active
FLIGHT
databases on the system. Databases selected to load to the system will be indicated by a single cyan arrow.
12) Press the Update Softkey.
13) If using a device that has not been previously paired with the system, a password prompt will appear on the
AVOIDANCE
mobile device. Enter the password shown in the ‘Password’ Field of the ‘Aux - Connext Setup’ Page.
HAZARD
14) Database Update status will appear in the ‘Status’ Window at the top of the page. Monitor update progress in
the ‘Status’ Window, or on the mobile device.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
APPENDIX B
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Figure B-9 Device Database Transfer
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
15) When all databases have been successfully transferred from the mobile device and appear in the Standby
column, remove and reapply power to the system.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
APPENDIX B
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
Figure B-10 ‘Aux - Databases’ Page with Updated Databases

AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
c) Verify the correct database cycle information is shown for each database for each display.
AFCS
Or:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

APPENDICES
Or:
INDEX
APPENDIX B
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
become active.
d) Press the Display Database Selection Softkey (MFD1 DB, PFD1 DB, PFD2 DB) to show database
EIS
DATABASE DELETION FEATURE
AUDIO PANEL
If databases are not properly loading or functioning, and an attempt has been made to load the databases
& CNS
using a new SD card or multimedia card, it may be necessary to delete the databases from the system.
Deleting databases:
1) Touch the Menu Key.
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Delete Databases.’
3) Push the ENT Key.
4) A prompt will appear to confirm deletion of all internal databases. Push the ENT Key.
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Figure B-11 Delete Databases Confirmation Window
5) Another prompt will appear to confirm deletion of all internal databases. Push the ENT Key.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
Figure B-12 Delete Databases Confirmation Window FEATURES
APPENDICES
10) Confirm that all databases have been deleted from the system.
INDEX
APPENDIX B
OVERVIEW
MAGNETIC FIELD VARIATION DATABASE UPDATE

SYSTEM
A copy of the current magnetic field variation database (MV DB) is included with the navigation database.
At startup, the system compares this version of the MV DB with that presently being used by each AHRS
(GRS1 and GRS2). If the system determines the MV DB needs to be updated, a prompt is displayed on the
INSTRUMENTS
MFD, as shown in Figure B-13. Note, in the following example, GRS1 is the first AHRS to indicate an update
FLIGHT
is available. In actuality, this is dependent on which AHRS is the first to report status to the system. GRS2
may be displayed before GRS1. The order is not important, only that both AHRS be updated.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
Figure B-13 GRS1 Magnetic Field Variation Database Update Prompt

& CNS
Loading the magnetic field variation database update:

1) With ‘OK’ highlighted, as seen in Figure B-13, press the ENT Key on the MFD. A progress monitor is displayed
MANAGEMENT
as shown in Figure B-14.

FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
Figure B-14 Uploading Database to GRS1

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) When the upload is complete, the system is ready for use.

APPENDICES
INDEX
APPENDIX C
OVERVIEW
AVIATION TERMS AND ACRONYMS
SYSTEM
A Amps AOA Angle of Attack, ACARS Over AVLC
AC Advisory Circular, Alternating Current AOC Aeronautical Operational Control
INSTRUMENTS
ACARS Airborne Communications Addressing AOG Aircraft On Ground
and Reporting System
FLIGHT
AOPA Aircraft Owners and Pilots Association
ACC Accuracy AP Autopilot
ACK Acknowledge AP DISC Autopilot Disconnect
ACT, ACTV Active, Activate, Altitude Compensated APPR, APR Approach
Tilt
APT Airport, Aerodrome
EIS
ADAHRS Air Data, Attitude and Heading Reference
System APTSIGNS Airport Signs
ADC Air Data Computer ARINC Aeronautical Radio Incorporated
ADF Automatic Direction Finder ARSPC Airspace
AUDIO PANEL
ARTCC Air Route Traffic Control Center
& CNS
ADI Attitude Direction Indicator
ADIZ Air Defense Identification Zone ARV Arrival
ADS-B Automatic Dependent Surveillance- AS Airspeed
Broadcast ASB Aviation Support Branch
MANAGEMENT
ADS-R Automatic Dependent Surveillance- ASOS Automated Surface Observing System
FLIGHT
Rebroadcast
AT Auto Throttle
AEA Aircraft Electronic Association
ATC Air Traffic Control
AF Arc to Fix Leg
ATCRBS ATC Radar Beacon System
AFCS
AVOIDANCE
Automatic Flight Control System
ATIS
HAZARD
Automatic Terminal Information Service
AFM Airplane Flight Manual
ATK Along Track
AFMS Airplane Flight Manual Supplement
ATN Aeronautical Telecommunications
AFN ATS Facilities Notification Network
AFRM Airframe ATS Air Traffic Services
AFCS
AGL Above Ground Level AUTOSEQ Automatic Sequence
AHRS Attitude and Heading Reference System AUX Auxiliary
AIM Aeronautical Information Manual AVG Average
AIRB Airborne AVLC Aviation VHF Link Control
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AIRMET Airman’s Meteorological Information AWOS Automated Weather Observing System
AIRREP Air Reports
ALRT Alert B Both Runways
ALT Altitude B ALT Barometric Altitude
APPENDICES
ALT, ALTN Alternator, Alternate BARO Barometer, Barometric

ALTS Selected Altitude Capture Mode BATT Battery
ALTV VNAV Altitude Capture Mode BC Backcourse
AM Amplitude Modulation Bearing The compass direction from the present
AMPS Amperes position to a destination waypoint.
INDEX
ANNUNC/ANN Annunciation/Annunciator BFO Beat Frequency Oscillator

ANT Antenna BKSP Backspace
APPENDIX C
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
Bluetooth Wireless standard for data exchange over Course to The recommended direction to steer
short distances Steer in order to reduce course error or stay
BOC Bottom of Climb on course. Provides the most efficient
heading to get back to the desired course
BOD Bottom of Descent and proceed along the flight plan.
INSTRUMENTS
BRG see also Bearing CPDLC Controller Pilot Datalink Communications

FLIGHT
CPL Couple
°C Degrees Celsius CR Course to Radial Leg
C Center Runway CRG Cockpit Reference Guide
CA Course to Altitude Leg CRNT Current
EIS
CAL Calibrated Crosstrack The distance the aircraft is off a desired

CALC Calculator Error course in either direction, left or right.
Calibrated Indicated airspeed corrected for CRS see also Course, Course to Steer
Airspeed installation and instrument errors.
AUDIO PANEL
CRSR Cursor
& CNS
CAS Crew Alerting System CSA Conflict Situational Awareness

CCG Current Climb Gradient CSC Current Speed Control
CD Course to DME Distance Leg CTA Control Area
CDA Current Data Authority
MANAGEMENT
CTR Center
FLIGHT
CDI Course Deviation Indicator CTRL Control

CDU Control Display Unit Cumulative, The total of all legs in a flight plan.
CF Course to Fix Leg CUM
CG Center of Gravity CVDR Cockpit Voice Data Recorder
AVOIDANCE
CVR Cockpit Voice Recorder

HAZARD
CH, CHNL Channel

CHT Cylinder Head Temperature CVRG Coverage
CHKLIST Checklist CWS Control Wheel Steering
CI Course to Intercept Leg CYC CTR Cyclic Centering
CLD Cloud CYL Cylinder
AFCS
CLR Clear
CM Centimeter D ALT Density Altitude
CMC Central Maintenance Computer D-ATIS Digital Automatic Terminal Info Service
ADDITIONAL
DB, DBASE Database

FEATURES
CN Canada
CNS Communication, Navigation, & dBZ Decibels ‘Z’ (Radar Return)
Surveillance DCL Departure Clearance
CO Carbon Monoxide DCLTR, DECLTR Declutter
COM Communication Radio
APPENDICES
DEC FUEL Decrease Fuel

CONFIG Configuration DEG Degree
COOL Coolant DEIC, DEICE De-icing
COPLT Copilot DEP Departure
Course The line between two points to be Desired Track The desired course between the active
followed by the aircraft.
INDEX
“from” and “to” waypoints.

DES, DEST Destination
DEV Deviation
APPENDIX C
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
DF Direct to Fix Leg EICAS Engine Indication and Crew Alerting
DFLT Default System
DG Directional Gyro EIS Engine Indication System
DGRD Degrade ELEV Elevation, Elevator
INSTRUMENTS
DH Decision Height ELT Emergency Locator Transmitter
FLIGHT
Dilution of A measure of GPS satellite geometry EMER, EMERG, Emergency
Precision quality on a scale of one to ten (lower EMERGCY
numbers equal better geometry, where EMI Electromagnetic Interference
higher numbers equal poorer geometry). END, ENDUR Endurance
DIR Direction Endurance Flight endurance, or total possible flight
EIS
DIS Distance time based on available fuel on board.
Distance The ‘great circle’ distance from the ENG Engine
present position to a destination ENGD Engaged
AUDIO PANEL
waypoint.
ENR Enroute; ETE to Final Destination
& CNS
DL LTNG Datalink Lightning
Enroute Safe Uses Grid MORAs to determine a safe
DLS Data Link System Altitude (ESA) altitude within ten miles left or right of
DME Distance Measuring Equipment the desired course on an active flight
plan or direct-to.
MANAGEMENT
DN Down
ENT Enter
FLIGHT
DNALT Density Altitude
DOD Department of Defense EPE see also Estimated Position Error
DOP see also Dilution of Precision EPU Estimated Position Uncertainty
DP Departure Procedure ERR Error
AVOIDANCE
ES Extended Squitter
HAZARD
DPRT Departure
DR Dead Reckoning ESA see also Enroute Safe Altitude
DSBL Disabled ESP Electronic Stability and Protection
DSP Datalink Service Provider, Digital Signal Estimated A measure of horizontal GPS position
Processor Position Error error derived by satellite geometry
(EPE) conditions and other factors.
AFCS
DTG Distance To Go, Remaining distance to
last active FPL waypoint Estimated The estimated time at which the aircraft
Time of Arrival should reach the destination waypoint,
DTK see also Desired Track (ETA) based upon current speed and track.
DQR Data Quality Requirements
ADDITIONAL
Estimated The estimated time it takes to reach
FEATURES
Time Enroute the destination waypoint from the
(ETE) present position, based upon current
E Empty, East groundspeed.
EAS Engine and Airframe Systems ETA see also Estimated Time of Arrival
ECU Engine Control Unit
APPENDICES
ETE see also Estimated Time Enroute

EDM Emergency Descent Mode EVS Enhanced Vision System
EFC Expected Further Clearance EXPIRD Expired
Efficiency A measure of fuel consumption,
expressed in distance per unit of fuel.
°F Degrees Fahrenheit
EGNOS European Geostationary Navigation
INDEX
Overlay Service FA Course From Fix to Altitude Leg

EGT Exhaust Gas Temperature FAA Federal Aviation Administration
FADEC Full Authority Digital Engine Control
APPENDIX C
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
FAF Final Approach Fix G/S Glideslope

FAIL Failure GA Go-Around
FANS Future Air Navigation System GAGAN GPS Aided GEO Augmented Navigation
FAR Federal Aviation Regulations GAGL GPS AGL Altitude
INSTRUMENTS
FBO Fixed Base Operator GAL, GL Gallon(s)

FLIGHT
FC Course From Fix to Distance Leg GBOX Gearbox

FCC Federal Communication Commission GBT Ground Based Transceiver
FCST Forecast GCU Garmin Control Unit
FD Flight Director, Course From Fix to DME GCS Ground Clutter Suppression
EIS
Distance Leg GDC Garmin Air Data Computer

FDE Fault Detection and Exclusion GDL Garmin Satellite Data Link
FF, FFLOW see also Fuel Flow GDR Garmin Data Radio
AUDIO PANEL
FIS-B Flight Information Services-Broadcast GDU Garmin Display Unit

& CNS
FISDL Flight Information Service Data Link GEA Garmin Engine/Airframe Unit
FL Flight Level GEN Generator
FLC Flight Level Change GEO Geographic
MANAGEMENT
FLT Flight Timer GFC Garmin Flight Control

FLIGHT
FLTA Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance GIA Garmin Integrated Avionics Unit
FM Course From Fix to Manual Termination GLONASS Global Orbiting Navigation Satellite
Leg Landing System
FMS Flight Management System GLS Global Navigation Satellite Landing
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
FOB see also Fuel On Board System

FOD see also Fuel Over Destination GMA Garmin Audio Panel System
FPA Flight Path Angle GMC Garmin Mode Controller
FPL Flight Plan GMT Greenwich Mean Time
FPM Feet Per Minute, Flight Path Marker GMU Garmin Magnetometer Unit
AFCS
FREQ Frequency GND Ground

FRMT Format GOLD Global Operational Data Link
FRZ Freezing GPH Gallons per Hour
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
FSM Flight System Messages GPN Garmin Part Number

FSS Flight Service Station GPS Global Positioning System
FT foot/feet GPWS Ground Proximity Warning System
Fuel Flow The fuel flow rate, expressed in units of Grid MORA One degree latitude by one degree
fuel per hour.
APPENDICES
(Minimum longitude in size and clears the highest

Fuel On Board The total amount of usable fuel on board Off—Route elevation reference point in the grid by:
the aircraft. Altitude) a) 1,000 feet where the highest elevation
is <5001MSL or b) 2,000 feet where the
Fuel Over The estimated fuel remaining when the highest elevation is >5000MSL
Destination aircraft reaches the destination waypoint,
based upon current fuel flow. Groundspeed The velocity that the aircraft is travelling
relative to a ground position.
INDEX
FWD Forward
Ground Track See Track
GRS Garmin Reference System
APPENDIX C
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
GS Ground Speed, Glideslope
GSA Garmin Servo Adapter I Inner Marker
GSD Garmin Data Concentrator IAF Initial Approach Fix
GSL Geodetic Sea Level IAS Indicated Air Speed
INSTRUMENTS
GSR Garmin Satellite Radio IAT Indicated Air Temperature
FLIGHT
GSU Garmin Sensor Unit IAU Integrated Avionics Unit
GTC Garmin Touchscreen Controller ICAO International Civil Aviation Organization
GTS Garmin Traffic System ICS Intercom System
GTX Garmin Transponder ID Identification/Morse Code Identifier
EIS
GW Gross Weight IDENT, IDNT Identification
GWX Garmin Weather Radar IEEE Institute of Electrical & Electronics Engineers
IF Initial Fix
AUDIO PANEL
HA Hold Terminating at Altitude Leg IFR Instrument Flight Rules
& CNS
HDG see also Heading IG Imperial Gallon
HDOP Horizontal Dilution of Precision IGE In Ground Effect
Heading The direction an aircraft is pointed, ILS Instrument Landing System
MANAGEMENT
based upon indications from a magnetic IMC Instrument Meteorological Conditions
FLIGHT
compass or a properly set directional
gyro. IN Inch
HF High Frequency, Hold Terminating at Fix INACTV Inactive
Leg INC FUEL Increase Fuel
HFOM see also Horizontal Figure of Merit
AVOIDANCE
IND Indicator, Indicated
HAZARD
Hg Mercury Indicated Information provided by properly
HI High calibrated and set instrumentation on the
aircraft panel.
HI SENS High Sensitivity
INFO Information
HM Hold with Manual Termination Leg
IN Hg Inches of Mercury
AFCS
HNS Hybrid Navigation System
INS Inertial Navigation System
Horizontal A measure of the uncertainty in the
Figure of aircraft’s horizontal position. INT Intersection(s)
Merit INTEG Integrity (RAIM unavailable)
ADDITIONAL
HOV Hover
FEATURES
IrDA, IRDA Infrared Data Association
HOV-P Hover Prediction ISA International Standard Atmosphere; ISA
hPa Hectopascal Relative Temperature
HPI Hover Power Indicator ISO International Standards Organization
APPENDICES
HPL Horizontal Protection Level ITT Inter-Turbine Temperature, Interstage

HR Hour Turbine Temperature
HRZN HDG Horizon Heading
HSDB High-Speed Data Bus KEYSTK Key Stuck
HSI Horizontal Situation Indicator KG Kilogram
kHz Kilohertz
INDEX
HT Heat
HUL Horizontal Uncertainty Level KM Kilometer
Hz Hertz (cycles per second) KT Knot
APPENDIX C
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
Mach Number Mach number is the ratio of the true

L Left, Left Runway airspeed to the speed of sound.
LAT Latitude, Lateral MAG Magnetic
LBL Label MAG VAR Magnetic Variation
INSTRUMENTS
LB Pound MAHP Missed Approach Hold Point

FLIGHT
LCD Liquid Crystal Display MAN IN Manifold Pressure (inches Hg)

LCL Local MAN SQ Manual Squelch
LDA Landing Distance Available MANSEQ Manual Sequence
LDG ETA at Final Destination MAP Missed Approach Point
EIS
LED Light Emitting Diode MASQ Master Avionics Squelch

Left Over Fuel The amount of fuel remaining on board MAX Maximum
On Board after the completion of one or more legs MAXSPD Maximum Speed (overspeed)
of a flight plan or direct-to.
AUDIO PANEL
MB Marker Beacon
& CNS
Left Over Fuel The amount of flight time remaining, MCP Maximum Continuous Power
Reserve based on the amount of fuel on board
after the completion of one or more legs MDA Barometric Minimum Descent Altitude
of a flight plan or direct-to, and a known MEPT Manual Electric Pitch Trim
consumption rate.
MANAGEMENT
MET Manual Electric Trim

Leg The portion of a flight plan between two
FLIGHT
waypoints. METAR Aviation Routine Weather Report

LGND Legend MFD Multi Function Display
LIFR Low Instrument Flight Rules MGRS Military Grid Reference System
MGT Measured Gas Temperature
AVOIDANCE
LMM Location Middle Marker

HAZARD
LNAV Lateral Navigation MHz Megahertz

LO Low MIC Microphone
LOA Letter of Authorization MIN Minimum
LOC Localizer Minimum Safe Uses Grid MORAs to determine a safe
Altitude (MSA) altitude within ten miles of the aircraft
AFCS
LOI Loss of Integrity (GPS) present position.

LOM Location Outer Marker MKR Marker Beacon
LON Longitude, Longitudinal MOA Military Operations Area
LP Localizer Performance
ADDITIONAL
MON Monitor
FEATURES
LPV Localizer Performance with Vertical MOV Movement

Guidance
MORA Minimum Off-Route Altitude
LRU Line Replaceable Unit
MPEL Maximum Permissible Exposure Level
LSB V Lower Sideband Voice
MPM Meters per Minute
APPENDICES
LT Left
MSA see also Minimum Safe Altitude
LTNG Lightning
MSAS Multi-functional Satellite Augmentation
LVL Level System
MSG Message
M Meter, Middle Marker, Mach MSL Mean Sea Level
INDEX
MMO (VMO) Maximum Speed MT, M Meter
APPENDIX C
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
mV Millivolt(s) POHS Pilot’s Operating Handbook Supplement
MVFR Marginal Visual Flight Rules POS, POSN Position
PPH Pounds per Hour
N North PPM Parts per Million
INSTRUMENTS
NATS North Atlantic Tracks System P. POS Present Position
FLIGHT
NAV Navigation PRES, PRESS Pressure
NAVAID Navigation Aid PROC Procedure(s), Procedure Turn
NDA Next Data Authority PROP Propeller
NDB Non-Directional Beacon PROX Proximity
EIS
NEXRAD Next Generation Radar PSI Pounds per Square Inch, Power Situation
NG Gas Producer Rotation Speed Indicator
NM Nautical Mile(s) PT Procedure Turn
AUDIO PANEL
NoPT No Procedure Turn Required (procedure PTK Parallel Track
& CNS
shall not be executed without ATC PTT Push-to-Talk
clearance) PWR Power
NOTAM Notice To Airman
NP Power Turbine Speed
MANAGEMENT
Q Engine Torque
FLIGHT
NR Rotor Speed QFE Field Elevation Pressure
NRST Nearest QNH Sea Level Pressure
QTY Quantity
O Outer Marker
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
OAT Outside Air Temperature R Right, Right Runway
OBS Omni Bearing Selector RA Resolution Advisory, Radio Altimeter
OFST Offset RAD Radial
OGE Out of Ground Effect RAD ALT Radio Altimeter
OOOI Out of the gate, Off the ground, On the RAIM Receiver Autonomous Integrity
AFCS
ground, and In the gate Monitoring
OXY Oxygen RAM Random Access Memory
RAT Ram Air Temperature
ADDITIONAL
P ALT Pressure Altitude
FEATURES
RCVR Receiver
PA Passenger Address, Proximity Advisory REF Reference
PASS Passenger(s) REM Remaining (fuel remaining), Reminder
PC Personal Computer REQ Required
APPENDICES
PDC Pre-Departure Clearance RES Reserve (fuel reserve entered by pilot)

PFD Primary Flight Display REV Reverse, Revision, Revise
PG Pilot’s Guide RF Radio Frequency, Constant Radius Turn to
PI Procedure Turn to Course Intercept Leg Fix Leg
PIREP Pilot Report RFM Rotorcraft Flight Manual
INDEX
PIT, PTCH Pitch RMI Radio Magnetic Indicator

POA Plain Old ACARS RMT Remote
POH Pilot’s Operating Handbook RNAV Area Navigation
APPENDIX C
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
RNG Range SPKR Speaker

RNP Required Navigation Performance SQ, SQL Squelch
RNWY, RWY Runway SRVC, SVC Service
ROL Roll SSID Wireless Service Set Identifier
INSTRUMENTS
ROM Read Only Memory STAB Stabilization

FLIGHT
RPM Revolutions Per Minute STAL Stall

RST FUEL Reset Fuel STAR Standard Terminal Arrival Route
RSV Reserve (fuel reserve entered by pilot) STATS Statistics
RT Right STBY Standby
EIS
RUDICS Router-Based Unrestricted Digital STD Standard

Interworking Connectivity Solution STRMSCP Stormscope
RVRSNRY Reversionary SUA Special Use Airspace
AUDIO PANEL
RVSM Reduced Vertical Separation Minimums SURF Surface

& CNS
RX Receive SUSP Suspend

SVT Synthetic Vision Technology
S South SW Software
MANAGEMENT
SA Selective Availability SYNC Synchronize

FLIGHT
SAR Search and Rescue SYN TERR Synthetic Terrain

SAT Static Air Temperature SYN VIS Synthetic Vision
SBAS Satellite-Based Augmentation System SYS System
SCIT Storm Cell Identification and Tracking
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
SD Secure Digital T True

SEC Second(s) TA Traffic Advisory
SEL, SLCT Select TACAN Tactical Air Navigation System
SELCAL Selective Calling TAF Terminal Aerodrome Forecast
SENS Sense
AFCS
TAS True Airspeed, Traffic Advisory System

SFC Surface TAT Total Air Temperature
SIAP Standard Instrument Approach TAWS Terrain Awareness and Warning System
Procedures
TCA Terminal Control Area
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SID Standard Instrument Departure

TCAS Traffic Alert Collision Avoidance System
SIG/AIR SIGMET/AIRMET
TEL Telephone
SIGMET Significant Meteorological Information
TEMP Temperature
SIM Simulator
TERM Terminal
APPENDICES
SLD Supercooled Large Droplet

TF Track Between Two Fixes Leg
SLP/SKD Slip/Skid
TFR Temporary Flight Restriction
SMBL Symbol
TGT Target
SMS Short Message System
T HDG True Heading
SNGL Single
TIS Traffic Information Service
INDEX
SPC Space
TIS-B Traffic Information Service-Broadcast
SPD Speed
TIT Turbine Inlet Temperature
SPI Special Position Identification
APPENDIX C
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
TKE see also Track Angle Error VLE Maximum Landing Gear Extended Speed
TMA Terminal Maneuvering Area VLNDx Approach Speed (Flaps at x°)
TMR/REF Timer/Reference VLO Maximum Landing Gear Operating Speed
TOC Top of Climb VMC Minimum Control Speed
INSTRUMENTS
TOD Top of Descent, Time to TOD VMO (MMO) Maximum Operating Speed
FLIGHT
TOGA, TO/GA Take-Off, Go-Around VNE Never-Exceed Speed
TOLD Takeoff and Landing Data VR Takeoff Rotate Speed
TOPO Topographic VREF Landing Approach Speed, Reference
TORA Takeoff Run Available Landing Speed
EIS
TOT Total VSB Maximum Speedbrake Speed
TPA Traffic Pattern Altitude VSR Stall Speed
Track Direction of aircraft movement relative to VT Takeoff Flap Retraction Speed
AUDIO PANEL
a ground position; also ‘Ground Track’. VTIRE Maximum Tire Speed
& CNS
Track Angle The angle difference between the desired VX Best Angle of Climb Speed
Error track and the current track. VY Best Rate of Climb Speed
TRK see also Track VYSE Best Single-Engine Rate of Climb Speed
TRSA Terminal Radar Service Area
MANAGEMENT
V DEV Vertical Deviation
FLIGHT
TRUNC Truncated VA Heading Vector to Altitude Leg
TTL Total VAC Volts Alternating Current
TURB Turbulence VAPP VOR Approach
TURN Procedure Turn VAR Variation
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
TWIP Terminal Weather Information for Pilots VD Heading Vector to DME Distance Leg
TX Transmit VDC Volts Direct Current
VDL VHF Datalink
UAT Universal Access Transceiver VERT Vertical
UHF Ultra-High Frequency Vertical Figure A measure of the uncertainty in the
AFCS
UNAVAIL Unavailable of Merit aircraft’s vertical position.
US United States Vertical Speed The vertical speed necessary to descend/
USB V Upper Sideband Voice Required climb from a current position and altitude
to a defined target position and altitude,
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
USR User based upon current groundspeed.
UTC Coordinated Universal Time VFOM see also Vertical Figure of Merit
UTM/UPS Universal Transverse Mercator/ Universal VFR Visual Flight Rules
Polar Stereographic Grid
VHF Very High Frequency
APPENDICES
VI Heading Vector to Intercept Leg

V Volts
VLOC VOR/Localizer Receiver
V, Vspeed Velocity (airspeed)
VM Heading Vector to Manual Termination
V1 Takeoff Decision Speed Leg
V2 Takeoff Safety Speed VMC Visual Meteorological Conditions
INDEX
VA Maneuvering Speed VNAV, VNV Vertical Navigation

VAPP , VAC Approach Climb Speed VOL Volume
VFE Maximum Flap Extended Speed VOR VHF Omnidirectional Range
APPENDIX C
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
VORTAC VHF Omnidirectional Range Station and WI-FI, WIFI Wireless Local Area Network based on
Tactical Air Navigation IEEE 802.11
VPATH, VPTH Vertical Path WOG Weight on Gear
VPL Vertical Protection Level WOW Weight on Wheels
INSTRUMENTS
VPROF VNAV Profile, Vertical Profile WPT Waypoint(s)

FLIGHT
VR Heading Vector to Radial Leg WT Weight

VRP Visual Reporting Point WW World Wide
VS Vertical Speed WX Weather
VSD Vertical Situation Display
EIS
VSI Vertical Speed Indicator XFER, XFR Transfer

VSR, VS REQ see also Vertical Speed Required XM LTNG SiriusXM Lightning
VTF Vector to Final XMIT Transmit
AUDIO PANEL
XMSN Transmission
& CNS
W Watt(s), West XPDR Transponder

WAAS Wide Area Augmentation System XTALK Cross-Talk
WARN Warning XTK Cross-Track, Crosstrack Error
MANAGEMENT
WATCH Weather Attenuated Color Highlight

FLIGHT
WGS-84 World Geodetic System - 1984 YD Yaw Damper

AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
APPENDIX D
OVERVIEW
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
SYSTEM
If a particular aspect of system operational capability is not addressed by these commonly asked questions or in
the index, contact Garmin (see the copyright page or back cover for contact information) or a Garmin-authorized
INSTRUMENTS
dealer. Garmin is dedicated to supporting its products and customers.
FLIGHT
What is SBAS?
The Satellite Based Augmentation System (SBAS) uses a system of ground stations to correct any GPS signal
errors. These ground stations correct for errors caused by ionospheric disturbances, timing, and satellite
orbit errors. It also provides vital integrity information regarding the health of each GPS satellite. The signal
EIS
correction is then broadcast through geostationary satellites. This correction information can then be received
by any SBAS-enabled GPS receiver.
SBAS is designed to provide the additional accuracy, availability, and integrity necessary to enable users to rely
AUDIO PANEL
on GPS for all phases of flight.
& CNS
There are several SBAS systems serving different parts of the world. The Wide Area Augmentation System
(WAAS) is currently available in the United States, including Alaska and Hawaii. The European Geostationary
Navigation Overlay Service (EGNOS) offers coverage of Europe, parts of the middle east and northern Africa.
MANAGEMENT
The Multi-functional Satellite Augmentation System (MSAS) covers mainly Japan and parts of northern Australia.
FLIGHT
How does SBAS affect approach operations?
Both LNAV/VNAV and LPV approaches use the accuracy of SBAS to include vertical (glide path) guidance
capability. The additional accuracy and vertical guidance capability allows improved instrument approaches to
AVOIDANCE
an expanded number of airports throughout the U.S.
HAZARD
The implementation of LPV approaches further improves precision approach capabilities. LPV approaches
are designed to make full use of the improved GPS signal from the SBAS. This approach combines the LNAV/
VNAV vertical accuracy with lateral guidance similar to the typical Instrument Landing System (ILS). LPV
approaches allow lower approach minimums.
AFCS
What is RAIM and how does it affect approach operations?
RAIM is an acronym for Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring. RAIM is a GPS receiver function that
performs the following functions:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Monitors and verifies integrity and geometry of tracked GPS satellites
• Notifies the pilot when satellite conditions do not provide the necessary coverage to support a certain phase
of flight
APPENDICES
• Predicts satellite coverage of a destination area to determine whether the number of available satellites is
sufficient to satisfy requirements
NOTE: If RAIM is not predicted to be available for the final approach course, the approach does not become
active, as indicated by the “RAIM not available from FAF to MAP” message and the LOI annunciation
flagging on the HSI.
INDEX
APPENDIX D
OVERVIEW
For RAIM to work correctly, the GPS receiver must track at least five satellites. A minimum of six satellites is
SYSTEM
required to allow RAIM to eliminate a single corrupt satellite from the navigation solution.
RAIM ensures that satellite geometry allows for a navigation solution calculation within a specified protection
limit (2.0 nm for oceanic and en route, 1.0 nm for terminal, and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). The
INSTRUMENTS
system monitors RAIM and issues an alert message when RAIM is not available (see Appendix A). Without
FLIGHT
RAIM, GPS position accuracy cannot be monitored. If RAIM is not available when crossing the FAF, the pilot
must fly the missed approach procedure.
What is GSL altitude?

GSL (Geodetic Sea Level) altitude is the height above Mean Sea Level (MSL), as calculated geometrically,
EIS
generally using a global positioning system (GPS) as the primary data source. The calculated result may or may
not include a barometric component, but the primary source is geometric.
Why are there not any approaches available for a flight plan?
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Approaches are available for the final destination airport in a flight plan or as a direct-to (keep in mind
that some VOR/VORTAC identifiers are similar to airport identifiers). If a destination airport does not have a
published approach, the system indicates “NONE” for the available procedures.
MANAGEMENT
What happens when an approach is selected? Can a flight plan with an approach, a departure, or an
FLIGHT
arrival be stored?
When an approach, departure, or arrival is loaded into the active flight plan, a set of approach, departure,
or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan, along with a header line showing the title of the selected
AVOIDANCE
instrument procedure. The original en route portion of the flight plan remains active, unless the instrument
HAZARD
procedure is activated. This may be done either when the procedure is loaded or at a later time.
Flight plans can also be stored with an approach, a departure, or an arrival. Note that the active flight plan
is erased when the system is turned off. Also, the active flight plan is overwritten when another flight plan is
activated. When storing flight plans with an approach, a departure, or an arrival, the system uses the waypoint
information from the current database to define the waypoints. If the database is changed or updated, the
AFCS
system automatically updates the information, provided the procedure has not been modified. Should an
approach, departure, or arrival procedure no longer be available, the flight plan becomes locked until the
procedure is deleted from the flight plan.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Can “slant Golf” (“/G”) be filed using the G1000?

“/G” may be filed for a flight plan. The system meets the requirements of TSO-C145a Class 3 and ETSO C145
Class 3 installations. GPS approaches are not to be flown with an expired database. See the approved Pilot’s
Operating Handbook (POH) as well as the Aeronautical Information Manual (AIM) for more information.
APPENDICES
What does the OBS Softkey do?

The OBS Softkey is used to select manual sequencing of waypoints. Activating OBS mode sets the current
active-to waypoint as the primary navigation reference and prevents the system from sequencing to the next
waypoint in a flight plan. When OBS mode is cancelled, automatic waypoint sequencing is continued, and
INDEX
the system automatically activates the next waypoint in the flight plan once the aircraft has crossed the present
active waypoint.
APPENDIX D
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
Normal (OBS not activated) OBS
• Automatic sequencing of waypoints • Manual sequencing - ‘holds’ on selected waypoint
• Manual course change on HSI not possible • Manually select course to waypoint from HSI
• Always navigates ‘TO’ the active waypoint • Indicates ‘TO’ or ‘FROM’ waypoint
INSTRUMENTS
• Must be in this mode for final approach course • Cannot be set for final approach course or published holding patterns
FLIGHT
When OBS mode is active, the system allows the pilot to set a desired course to/from a waypoint using the
CRS/BARO Knob and HSI (much like a VOR).
The most common application for using the OBS Softkey is the missed approach. The system suspends
automatic waypoint sequencing (indicated by a ‘SUSP’ annunciation placed on the HSI) when the missed
EIS
approach point (MAP) is crossed. This prevents the system from automatically sequencing to the missed
approach holding point (MAHP). During this time, the OBS Softkey designation changes to SUSP. Pressing
the SUSP Softkey reactivates automatic waypoint sequencing. The OBS Softkey then resumes its normal
AUDIO PANEL
functionality.
& CNS
Why might the system not automatically sequence to the next waypoint?
The system only sequences flight plan waypoints when automatic sequencing is enabled (i.e., no ‘OBS’ or
‘SUSP’ annunciation on the HSI). For automatic sequencing to occur, the aircraft must also cross the bisector of
MANAGEMENT
the turn being navigated. The bisector is a line passing through the waypoint common to two flight plan legs
FLIGHT
at an equal angle from each leg.
How can a waypoint be skipped in an approach, a departure, or an arrival?

The system allows the pilot to manually select any approach, departure, or arrival leg as the active leg of
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
the flight plan. This procedure is performed on the MFD from the Active Flight Plan Page by highlighting the
desired waypoint and pressing the ACT Leg Softkey then the ENT Key to approve the selection. The GPS then
provides navigation along the selected flight plan leg.
When does turn anticipation begin?
AFCS
The system smooths adjacent leg transitions based on a normal 15° bank angle (with the ability to roll up to
30°) and provides three pilot cues for turn anticipation:
• A waypoint alert (‘Next DTK ###° in # seconds’ or ‘Next HDG ###° in # seconds’) appears on the PFD 10
ADDITIONAL
seconds before the turn point and flashes as it counts down to zero.
FEATURES
• A flashing turn advisory (‘Turn [right/left] to ###° in # seconds’) appears on the PFD 10 seconds before the
turn and flashes as it counts down to zero. ‘Turn [right/left] to ###° now’ or ‘Next [DTK/HDG] to ###° now’
is displayed when the pilot is to begin the turn and the HSI (GPS mode) automatically sequences to the next
DTK or HDG value.
APPENDICES
• The To/From indicator on the HSI flips momentarily to indicate that the midpoint of the turn has been
crossed.
INDEX
APPENDIX D
OVERVIEW
When does the CDI scale change?

SYSTEM
Once a departure is activated, the Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) full scale deflection is set to 0.3 nm. The
CDI scale changes to 1.0 nm (terminal mode) then ramps up to 2.0 nm (enroute mode) at 30 nm from the
departure airport. When 31 nm from the destination, the CDI scale smoothly transition from 2.0 nm back
INSTRUMENTS
to 1.0 nm (terminal mode). At 2.0 nm before the FAF during an active approach, the CDI scale transitions
FLIGHT
down further based on the type of approach activated (LNAV, LNAV/VNAV, LPV). When a missed approach is
activated, the CDI is set to 0.3 nm. See the Flight Instruments Section for more details on CDI scaling.
Why does the HSI not respond like a VOR when OBS mode is active?
Unlike a VOR, the CDI scale used on GPS equipment is based on the crosstrack distance to the desired
EIS
course, not on the angular relationship to the destination. Therefore, the CDI deflection on the GPS is constant
regardless of the distance to the destination and does not become less sensitive when further away from the
destination.
AUDIO PANEL
What is the correct missed approach procedure? How is the missed approach holding point selected?
& CNS
To comply with TSO specifications, the system does not automatically sequence past the MAP. The first
waypoint in the missed approach procedure becomes the active waypoint when the SUSP Softkey is selected
MANAGEMENT
after crossing the MAP. All published missed approach procedures must be followed, as indicated on the
FLIGHT
approach plate.
To execute the missed approach procedure prior to the MAP (not recommended), select the Active Flight Plan
Page and use the ACT Leg Softkey to activate the missed approach portion of the procedure.
After a missed approach, how can the same approach be re-selected? How can a new approach be
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
activated?
NOTE: Do not attempt to reactivate the current approach prior to crossing the missed approach point
(MAP). If an attempt to do so is made, an alert message “Are you sure you want to discontinue the current
approach?” appears. The system directs the pilot back to the transition waypoint and does not take into
AFCS
consideration any missed approach procedures, if the current approach is reactivated.

After flying the missed approach procedure, the pilot may reactivate the same approach for another attempt by
pressing the PROC Key. Once the clearance is given for another attempt, activate the approach by highlighting
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
‘Activate Approach’ using the large FMS Knob and pressing the ENT Key. The system provides navigation along
the desired course to the waypoint and rejoins the approach in sequence from that point.
To activate a new approach for the same airport, select the new procedure by pressing the PROC Key. Choose
‘Select Approach’, select the desired approach from the list shown, and press the ENT Key. Select the desired
APPENDICES
transition, then activate the approach using the ENT Key.

To activate a new approach to a different airport, press the Direct-to Key and select the desired airport using
the FMS Knobs. Press the ENT Key to accept the selected airport, then follow the steps in the preceding
paragraph to select an approach for the new airport.
INDEX
APPENDIX E
OVERVIEW
MISCELLANEOUS MAP SYMBOLS
SYSTEM
Item Symbol
INSTRUMENTS
ARTCC Frequency or FSS Frequency
FLIGHT
Map Pointer (when panning)
Elevation Pointer
(on Topography Scale when panning)
EIS
Measuring Pointer
AUDIO PANEL
Wind Vector
& CNS
Overzoom Indicator
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
User Waypoint
Vertical Navigation Along Track Waypoint
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Parallel Track Waypoint
Unanchored Flight Path Waypoint
Top of Descent (TOD)
AFCS
Bottom of Descent (BOD)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Navigating using Dead Reckoning
APPENDICES
INDEX
490
APPENDIX E
Blank Page

190-02452-00 Rev. A
INDEX
OVERVIEW
A Approaches--------------------------------------------------226
SYSTEM
Activating-------------------------------------------------230
Active frequency------------------------------- 103, 108, 109
Loading--------------------------------------------- 227, 229
ADF---------------------------------------------------------113
Missed Approach-----------------------------------------231
AC-U-KWIK------------------------------------- 385, 406, 462
Removing--------------------------------------------------230
ADAHRS----------------------------------------------- 454, 456
INSTRUMENTS
Approach Mode---------------------------------------------374
ADF
FLIGHT
Approach Mode (GPS, VAPP, LOC)-----------------------367
ADF mode------------------------------------------ 113, 115
Arrival Alerts-------------------------------------------------- 37
ANT mode-------------------------------------------------115
Arrivals------------------------------------------ 223, 224, 225
Volume-----------------------------------------------------113
Loading----------------------------------------------------224
ADF audio----------------------------------------------------109
Removing--------------------------------------------------225
ADF/BFO-----------------------------------------------------115
Attitude & Heading Reference System (AHRS)---------- 12
ADF frequency tuning--------------------------------------114
Audio alerting system--------------------------------------451
EIS
ADF volume--------------------------------------------------115
Audio Panel----------------------------------------------------- 9
ADS-R---------------------------------------------------------336
Audio panel controls
AHRS--------------------------------------------------- 451, 452
SPKR-------------------------------------------------------122
AIRB----------------------------------------------------------339
Audio panel fail-safe operation---------------------------131
AUDIO PANEL
Aircraft Symbol----------------------------------------------- 56
Auto-designation-------------------------------------------180
& CNS
Airport
Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS)------ 1, 351–384
Auto-nomination-----------------------------------------181
Alerts and annunciations------------------------ 382–383
Directory---------------------------------------------------156
Controls-------------------------------------------- 352–353
Information-----------------------------------------------160
Automatic squelch------------------------------------------104
MANAGEMENT
Nearest----------------------------------------------------158
Autopilot----------------------------------------351, 379–381
Airport Directory------------------------------- 385, 406, 462
FLIGHT
Disconnect------------------------------------------------353
Airspace------------------------------------------------------169
Auto-tuning--------------------------------------------------112
Altitude Buffer--------------------------------------------170
Auto-tuning, COM------------------------------------------104
Nearest----------------------------------------------------171
Auto-tuning, NAV-------------------------------------------110
Smart Airspace--------------------------------------------172
AUX - system status page---------------------------------407
AVOIDANCE
Symbols----------------------------------------------------146
HAZARD
Aviation Symbols------------------------------------- 146, 150
Airspace Alerts----------------------------------------------238
Airspeed Indicator---------------------------------------46, 49
Airspeed Reference---------------------------------- 361–362
B
Airways Backcourse Mode-------------------------------------------376
Collapsing/Expanding-----------------------------------192 Backlighting-------------------------------------------------- 44
In a Flight Plan-------------------------------------------189 Barometric Altimeter Setting---------------------------46, 52
AFCS
Alerts Bearing/distance, measuring------------------------------142
Arrival------------------------------------------------------- 38 Bearing Information-------------------------------------47, 59
Audio voice------------------------------------------------ 38 Bearing Pointer----------------------------------------------- 59
Levels------------------------------------------------------448 Bearing Source----------------------------------------------- 59
Bluetooth---------------------------------------- 201, 385, 436
ADDITIONAL
Along Track Offset----------------------------------- 193, 194
FEATURES
Altimeter--------------------------------------------------46, 50 Bus voltage--------------------------------------------------- 93
Altitude Alerting--------------------------------------------- 70
Altitude Constraint-----------------------------------------212 C
Enabling VNV Guidance---------------------------------211 Calibrated Airspeed-----------------------------------------234
Manually Designating-----------------------------------214 CAS
APPENDICES
Altitude Hold--------------------------------------------------- 6 Annunciations--------------------------------------------449

Altitude Hold Mode----------------------------------------359 Caution-------------------------------------------------------448
Altitude Reference----------------------------- 358, 359, 371 Chart Not Available-----------------------------------------391
Annunciations Chart options----------------------------------------- 395, 402
System------------------------------------------------------ 10 Charts
Test tone---------------------------------------------- 11, 451 Split Screen------------------------------------------------- 28
Annunciator lights------------------------------------------122 CHART SETUP box------------------------------------------402
INDEX
ANT/BFO-----------------------------------------------------115 ChartView--------------------------------------------- 385, 390

AOPA-------------------------------------------------- 385, 462 Checklists--------------------------------------------- 443–444
Approach-----------------------------------------------------486 Circle of Uncertainty----------------------------------------404
Missed Approach-----------------------------------------231 Clearance Recorder-----------------------------------------128
190-02452-00 Rev. A Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG I-1
INDEX
OVERVIEW
Closest Point-------------------------------------------------196 Electronic Stability and Protection (ESP)---- 48, 385, 438,
SYSTEM
Cloud Tops---------------------------------------------------281 441, 442

COM channel spacing--------------------------------------107 Emergency Checklist---------------------------------------443
COM Frequency Box--------------------------------- 103, 108 Emergency frequency---------------------------------------131
Command Bars----------------------------------------------356 Endurance, calculated (ENDUR)--------------------------- 94
INSTRUMENTS
Communication (COM) Frequency Box------------------- 46 Engine display------------------------------------------------ 90

FLIGHT
COM Tuning Failure-----------------------------------------131 Engine Indication System (EIS)------------------------ 89–96

Conflict Situational Awareness (CSA)--------------------337 Engine load indicator------------------------------------91, 93
Controls--------------------------------------------------------- 4 Entering Flight ID-------------------------------------------117
Control Wheel Steering (CWS)--------------------- 353, 380 Entertainment inputs---------------------------------------129
Coolant temperature------------------------------------91, 93
Correlation---------------------------------------------------337 F
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)---------- 56, 60–64, 226
EIS
Fail-safe operation------------------------------------------131
Changing scale-------------------------------------------488 Failure
Course Pointer------------------------------------------------ 56 Input-------------------------------------------------------- 13
Crew Alerting System (CAS) FD---------------------------------------------------------------- 6
Inhibits-----------------------------------------------------449
AUDIO PANEL
Field of View (SVT)------------------------------------------153

Current Heading--------------------------------------------- 56
& CNS
Flight director------------------------------------------------351
Pitch modes---------------------------------------- 357–363
D Flight Director (FD)---------------------------------- 354–355
Database(s)----------------------------------------------------- 8 Flight Instruments-------------------------------------- 45–60
Data Link Receiver------------------------------------------445 Flight level change--------------------------------------------- 6
MANAGEMENT
Datalink receiver troubleshooting------------------------445 Flight Path Angle (FPA)------------------------------------212

FLIGHT
Data logging-------------------------------------------------414 Flight Phase--------------------------------------------------- 56

Date and time------------------------------------------------ 35 Flight plan
Day/Night views-------------------------------------- 396, 403 Storing-----------------------------------------------------486
Day view-----------------------------------------------------397 Flight Plan
DB Mismatch------------------------------------------------461 Flight Plan View------------------------------------------181
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
Dead Reckoning---------------------------------------------- 86 Leg Type---------------------------------------------------178

DEC FUEL softkey-------------------------------------------- 94 Origin Auto-designation--------------------------------180
Decision Height---------------------------------------------- 71 Retention after Shut Down-----------------------------178
Declutter, Display-------------------------------------------- 87 Flight Planning
Deleting Activating a FP Leg--------------------------------------193
Deleting a Store Flight Plan----------------------------208 Adding Airways-------------------------------------------189
AFCS
Deleting the Active Flight Plan-------------------------206 Adding Waypoints----------------------------------------185

Density Altitude---------------------------------------------236 Comment changes---------------------------------------209
Departure Creating---------------------------------------------------184
Time--------------------------------------------------------234 Deleting----------------------------------------------------206
Departures---------------------------------------------------220 Importing/Exporting Flight Plans----------------------201
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Loading----------------------------------------------------221 Inverting a Flight Plan---------------------------- 206, 208

Removing--------------------------------------------------222 Map--------------------------------------------------------183
Digital audio entertainment---------------------------------- 2 Origin------------------------------------------------------180
Direct-to---------------------- 173, 174, 175, 176, 177, 210 Parallel Tracks---------------------------------------------194
Display backup-------------------------------------------9, 102 Split Screen------------------------------------------------182
APPENDICES
Display Pane-------------------------------------------------- 28 Waypoint/Airway modifcations------------------------185

DME Flight Stream------------------------------------------------385
Tuning mode----------------------------------------------113 Flight Stream 510------------------------------------ 436, 466
DME audio---------------------------------------------------109 FliteCharts-------------------------------------------- 385, 398
DME Information Window---------------------------------- 60 Functions--------------------------------------------------399
DME tuning--------------------------------------------------116 Fly-by Waypoint---------------------------------------------189
Fly-over Waypoint-------------------------------------------189
INDEX
E Frequency
Electronic Checklists--------------------------------- 443, 444 Nearest----------------------------------------------------169
I-2 Garmin G1000 NXi Pilot’s Guide for the Diamond DA40NG 190-02452-00 Rev. A
INDEX
OVERVIEW
Frequency spacing------------------------------------------107 Inset Map----------------------------------------------- 47, 133
SYSTEM
Frequently asked questions--------------------------------485 Intercom------------------------------------------------------122
Fuel Intersection--------------------------------------------------161
Calculations------------------------------------------------ 94 Inverting a Flight Plan------------------------------- 206, 208
Efficiency--------------------------------------------------236 IOI-------------------------------------------------------------315
INSTRUMENTS
Endurance-------------------------------------------------236 Iridium--------------------------------------------------------420
FLIGHT
Flow indicator--------------------------------------------- 91 Iridium satellite network----------------415, 416, 420, 424
Quantity------------------------------------------------91, 93
Remaining-------------------------------------------- 93, 236 L
Required---------------------------------------------------236 Land Symbols------------------------------------------------145
Statistics---------------------------------------------------236 Lateral Deviation Scale-------------------------------------- 56
Temperature indicator------------------------------------ 91 Level Mode--------------------------------------------------438
Used--------------------------------------------------------- 93
EIS
LO SENS------------------------------------------------------113
Fuel on Board-----------------------------------------------236 Low Altitude Annunciation--------------------------------- 71
Low speed data---------------------------------------------415
G Lubber Line--------------------------------------------------- 56
AUDIO PANEL
Garmin Connext Weather---------------------------------245
M
& CNS
Garmin Pilot-------------------------------------------------436
Geodetic Sea Level (GSL)----------------------------------307 Magnetometer----------------------------------------------- 13
GFC 700 AFCS--------------------------------------- 351–384 Manual Electric Trim (MET)------------------------- 351, 379
Glidepath Indicator------------------------------------------ 55 Map
Glidepath Mode (GP)-------------------------------- 372, 375
MANAGEMENT
Declutter---------------------------------------------------148
Glideslope Indicator----------------------------------------- 54 Panning----------------------------------------------------140
FLIGHT
Glideslope Mode--------------------------------------------374 Symbol
Global Positioning System (GPS) Setup-------------------------------------------------------147
Navigation----------------------------------------- 173–240 Symbols----------------------------------------------------145
Receiver information--------------------------------- 14–16 Marker Beacon----------------------------------------------112
GMA 1347------------------------------------------------------ 8
AVOIDANCE
Marker Beacon Annunciations----------------------------- 70
HAZARD
Go Around Mode-------------------------------------------377 MASQ processing-------------------------------------------- 97
Groundspeed------------------------------------------------- 42 Menus--------------------------------------------------------- 23
Messages
H Reminder--------------------------------------------------- 42
Heading------------------------------------------------------- 46 Minimum Descent Altitude--------------------------------- 71
Heading Bug-------------------------------------------------- 46 Missed Approach------------------------------------ 231, 232
AFCS
Heading Select------------------------------------------------- 6 MKR/MUTE--------------------------------------------------112
Heading Select Mode--------------------------------------364 Mode S-------------------------------------------------------117
HI SENS-------------------------------------------------------113 Mode selection softkeys---------------------------- 117, 118
Holding Morse code identifier---------------------------------------108
ADDITIONAL
User Defined----------------------------------------------197 Motion Vectors----------------------------------------------344
FEATURES
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)-46, 56–58, 226, 487, Multi Function Display (MFD)
488 Reversionary Mode----------------------------------------- 9
HSI double green arrow------------------------------------109
HSI magenta arrow-----------------------------------------109 N
HSI Map------------------------------------------------------133 National Weather Service (NWS)-------------------------291
APPENDICES
HSI single green arrow-------------------------------------109 NAV1 audio--------------------------------------------------109

HW Mismatch-----------------------------------------------456 NAV2 audio--------------------------------------------------109
Navigation Mode------------------------------------ 365–366
I Navigation mode selection--------------------------------109
IDENT function----------------------------------------------118 Navigation (NAV) Frequency Box-------------------------- 46
ID indicator--------------------------------------------------108 Navigation Source----------------------------------56, 60–61
INDEX
Importing and Exporting Flight Plans--------------------201 Navigation Status Box-------------------------------------- 46

Indicated Airspeed------------------------------------------- 49 Nav radio selection-----------------------------------------109
Indicated Altitude-------------------------------------------234 NDB-----------------------------------------------------------164
INDEX
OVERVIEW
Nearest S
SYSTEM
Airport---------------------------------------- 158, 159, 160

SafeTaxi------------------------------------------------ 385, 386
Airport Minimum Runway Length---------------------160
SBAS--------------------------------------------------- 456, 485
Airports Page-------------------------------------- 159, 160
Scheduler------------------------------------------------- 42–43
Airport Surface Matching-------------------------------160
Secure Digital (SD) card-------------------------- 7, 443, 461
INSTRUMENTS
Nearest airports, frequency tuning-----------------------105

Selected Altitude------357, 358, 359, 360, 361, 368, 371
FLIGHT
NEXRAD------------------------------------------------------273
Selected Altitude Intercept Arc----------------------------151
NextGen------------------------------------------------------335
Selected Course----------------------------- 47, 56, 366, 376
Night view---------------------------------------------------398
Selected Heading--------------------------------- 47, 56, 364
No Available Charts----------------------------------------400
Selected Heading Bug--------------------------------------- 56
Non-path descent-------------------------------------------371
Sequencing waypoints
Normal display operation------------------------------------- 8
Automatic-------------------------------------------------487
EIS
Servos---------------------------------------------------------379
O SIGMET-------------------------------------------------------282
OBS Mode---------------------------------------------------- 56 SiriusXM Radio--------------------------------------- 409, 410
Odometer----------------------------------------------------- 42 SiriusXM Radio Active Channel---------------------------410
AUDIO PANEL
Oil SiriusXM Radio Presets------------------------------------411

& CNS
Pressure indicator-------------------------------------91, 93 SiriusXM Radio Service Class-----------------------------410

Temperature Indicator--------------------------------91, 93 SiriusXM Radio Volume------------------------------------412
Omni Bearing Selector (OBS)----------------------- 486–487 SiriusXM Weather
Other Statistics--------------------------------------- 234, 236 AIREPs-----------------------------------------------------296
Outside Air Temperature------------------------------------ 46
MANAGEMENT
AIRMETs---------------------------------------------------282
Cell Movement-------------------------------------------280
FLIGHT
P Cloud Tops------------------------------------------------278
Page groups--------------------------------------------- 25–28 County Warnings-----------------------------------------291
Pairing--------------------------------------------------------436 Cyclones & Hurricanes----------------------------------292
Parallel Track------------------------------------------ 194, 196 Echo Tops--------------------------------------------------276
AVOIDANCE
Pending Flight Plan-----------------------------------------203 Freezing Level---------------------------------------------288

HAZARD
PFD Icing--------------------------------------------------------293
HSI Map---------------------------------------------------133 Lightning--------------------------------------------------279
Inset Map-------------------------------------------------133 PIREPs-----------------------------------------------------296
Map--------------------------------------------------------133 SIGMETs---------------------------------------------------282
Pitch hold------------------------------------------------------- 6 Surface Analysis------------------------------------------286
Pitch Hold Mode--------------------------------------------357 Turbulence-------------------------------------------------294
AFCS
Pitch Modes, Flight Director------------------------ 357–363 Winds Aloft------------------------------------------------289

Power ON settings------------------------------------------122 Slip/Skid Indicator-------------------------------------------- 48
Power-up Page----------------------------------------------443 Smart Airspace----------------------------------------------172
Predefined message--------------------------- 428, 430, 431 Softkeys------------------------------------ 20, 21, 22, 23, 46
ADDITIONAL
EIS-------------------------------------------------------22, 92
FEATURES
R MFD--------------------------------------------------------- 22
RAIM PFD---------------------------------------------------------- 19
Prediction--------------------------------------------------- 16 Speaker-------------------------------------------------------122
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM)-- 2 2 6 , Split Screen--------------------------------------------------183
485 Flight Plan Views-----------------------------------------182
APPENDICES
Reminder messages----------------------------------------- 42 Split Screen Mode---------------------------------------28, 29

Reversionary mode-----------------------------------------131 Standby frequency-----------------------103, 104, 108, 109
ROC-----------------------------------------------------------315 ADF---------------------------------------------------------113
Roll Hold Mode---------------------------------------------363 Standby frequency field----------------------------- 103, 108
Rotating Compass Card------------------------------------ 56 Standby Navigation Database----------------------------464
RS-232----------------------------------------------------------- 2 Stereo headsets---------------------------------------------122
Stuck microphone-------------------------------------------131
INDEX
RS-485----------------------------------------------------------- 1
RX indicator--------------------------------------------------104 Sunrise / Sunset---------------------------------------------235
INDEX
OVERVIEW
SURF----------------------------------------------------------339 Turn Rate Indicator--------------------------------------46, 58
SYSTEM
Surface Analysis---------------------------------------------286 TX indicator--------------------------------------------------104
SUSP----------------------------------------------------------- 65
SVT Troubleshooting----------------------------------- 87, 445 U
Symbols, map------------------------------------------------489 Unable to display chart----------------------------- 391, 400
INSTRUMENTS
Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT)-------------73, 153, 459 User-Defined Holding Pattern-----------------------------200
FLIGHT
System User Waypoints
Annunciations--------------------------------------------447 Creating---------------------------------------------------165
System Alerting----------------------------------------------- 70 Editing-----------------------------------------------------167
System Status Page------------------------------------------ 11
System Time--------------------------------------------------- 46 V
Vertical deviation-------------------------------------------370
T
EIS
Vertical Navigation flight control------------------ 368–372
Tachometer-----------------------------------------------91, 93 Vertical Navigation (VNAV)-------------------------------212
Takeoff Mode------------------------------------------------377 Direct-to-------------------------------------- 177, 210, 211
TAS Traffic Guidance--------------------------------------------------213
AUDIO PANEL
Non-Threat Traffic----------------------------------------326 Enabling Within a Fligh Plan---------------------------211
& CNS
PA----------------------------------------------------------326 Vertical Path Tracking Mode------------------------ 368–369
Proximity Advisory---------------------------------------326 Vertical Situation Display (VSD)--------214, 215, 216, 217
Telephone--------------------------------------- 415, 416, 417 Messages--------------------------------------------------216
Terminal Aerodrome Forecast (TAF)----------------------284 Vertical speed-------------------------------------------------- 6
Terminal procedures charts-------------389, 391, 400, 404
MANAGEMENT
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)--------------------------46, 54
Terrain--------------------------------------------------------453 Vertical Speed Mode---------------------------------------360
FLIGHT
Terrain Proximity--------------------------------------------307 Vertical Speed Reference----------------------------------360
Terrain-SVS---------------------------------------------------438 VFR code-----------------------------------------------------120
Text messaging---------------------------424, 426, 428, 431 VNAV Target Altitude-------------------------------- 368–371
Timer----------------------------------------------------------- 40 VNAV Target Altitude Capture Mode--------------------371
Departure-----------------------------------------------40, 41
AVOIDANCE
VNV guidance
HAZARD
Flight----------------------------------------------------40, 41 Enabling---------------------------------------------------210
Generic, PFD----------------------------------------------- 40 VNV Indications---------------------------------------------- 69
To/From Indicator-------------------------------------------- 56 Voice Alerts, TIS Traffic--------------------------------------321
TOPO DATA------------------------------------------- 144, 150 Volume-------------------------------------------------------412
TOPO SCALE------------------------------------------ 144, 145 Volume level
Total flight hours--------------------------------------------- 93 ADF-------------------------------------------------- 113, 115
AFCS
Track Indicator------------------------------------------------ 56 VOR---------------------------------------------------- 162, 164
Traffic Information-----------------------------------------------161
Annunciation---------------------------------------------- 47 VOR selection------------------------------------------------109
Traffic Information Service-Broadcast (TIS-B)-----------337 VRP---------------------------------------------- 146, 162, 164
Transponder--------------------------------------------------- 21
ADDITIONAL
VS TGT--------------------------------------------------------212
FEATURES
Transponder code entry------------------------------------120
Transponder data box--------------------------------------- 97 W
Transponder standby mode-------------------------------118
WAAS---------------------------------------------------------485
Transponder Status Box------------------------------------- 46
Waypoint
Trim adapter-------------------------------------------------379
Automatic sequencing----------------------------------487
APPENDICES
Trim, Manual Electric-------------------------------- 351, 353

Skipped----------------------------------------------------487
Trip Planning------------------------------------ 234, 235, 236
Waypoints
Trip statistics-------------------------------------------------- 42
Airports----------------------------------------------------155
Trip Statistics------------------------------------------ 235, 236
Creating---------------------------------------------------165
True Airspeed------------------------------------------------- 49
Duplicates-------------------------------------------------154
True Airspeed (TAS)------------------------------46, 236, 452
Fly-Over----------------------------------------------------188
Turn anticipation--------------------------------------------487
INDEX
Information-----------------------------------------------160
Turn Rate and Heading Trend Vector---------------------- 56
Nearest Airports------------------------------------------158
INDEX
OVERVIEW
Nearest (non-airport)------------------------------------162
SYSTEM
Selection Submenu--------------------------------------174
User-Waypoints-------------------------------------------161
Waypoint Selection Submenu---------------- 174, 186, 187
Weather (real-time)-------------------------------------------- 2
INSTRUMENTS
Wind----------------------------------------------------------152
FLIGHT
X
XM radio entertainment-----------------------------------129
Y
Yaw Damper---------------------------------------------------- 6
EIS
Z
Zoom
Auto--------------------------------------------------------138
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
G1000® NXi Pilot’s Guide
®
Pilot’s Guide
Garmin International, Inc. Garmin AT, Inc. Garmin (Europe) Ltd. Garmin Corporation
Diamond DA40NG
1200 East 151st Street 2345 Turner Road SE Liberty House, Hounsdown Business Park No. 68, Zhangshu 2nd Road
Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A. Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A. Southampton, Hampshire SO40 9LR U.K. Xizhi District,
New Taipei City, Taiwan Cirrus SR2x
Contact Garmin Product Support at: www.flygarmin.com

190-02452-00
Diamond DA40NG
For warranty information refer to: www.flygarmin.com Revision A

GARMIN1000 Pilots Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GARMIN1000 Pilots Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

GARMIN1000 Pilots Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the purpose of this document?

What is the purpose of this document?

What aircraft models does this document cover?

What aircraft models does this document cover?

G1000® NXi Pilot’s Guide

Contact Garmin Product Support at: www.flygarmin.com

AUDIO PANEL & CNS

Garmin International, Inc. Garmin (Europe) Ltd.

Garmin AT, Inc. Garmin Corporation

Contact Garmin Product Support at www.flygarmin.com.

For warranty information refer to www.flygarmin.com.

Printed in the U.S.A.

SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT

SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW 2.4 Garmin Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT)............ 73

Intercom................................................................... 122 5.7 Vertical Navigation................................................ 210

pitch trim. These units interface with each IAU.

• WX-500 Stormscope Lightning Sensor

GPS/SBAS Airframe Unit) GPS/SBAS

VOR/LOC GSA 81 VOR/LOC

AFCS Mode TAS 600 AFCS Mode

Figure 1-1 System (LRU Configuration)

1.2 SYSTEM CONTROLS

MFD are discussed within the following pages of this section.

16 FMS Knob Press to turn the selection cursor ON/OFF.

21 *ALT SEL Key Selects/deselects the Altitude Hold mode.

22 *VS Key Selects/deselects the Vertical Speed mode.

24 *YD Key Engages/disengages the Yaw Damper.

*VNV Key Selects/deselects Vertical Navigation mode

1.3 SYSTEM OPERATION

and emergency power supply operation.

one minute of power-up.

DISPLAY BACKUP Button

Figure 1-5 Reversionary Mode (Failed PFD)

system should be serviced by a Garmin-authorized repair facility.

System Annunciation Comment System Annunciation Comment

Air Data, Attitude and Heading Display system is not receiving

Display system is not receiving Display system is not receiving

Display system is not receiving

Display system is not receiving

navigation use. Note that

valid transponder information.

Display system is not receiving

Table 1-1 System Annunciations

NOTE: Refer to the Appendices for specific AHRS alert information.

GPS Data Available and Reliable?

Available and Reliable?

Air Data Available and Reliable?

Heading Invalid Heading Invalid Attitude/Heading Invalid

Figure 1-7 AHRS Operation

AIR DATA INPUT FAILURE

GPS RECEIVER OPERATION

Selecting the GPS receiver for which data may be reviewed:

below the satellite signal accuracy measurements.

GPS RECEIVER STATUS

Predicting RAIM availability at a selected waypoint:

1) Select the ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page.

Predicting RAIM availability at present position:

SBAS SELECTION (SBAS SOFTKEY IS SELECTED)

to be updated upon WAAS and MSAS enabling/disabling.

4) Press the ENT Key to uncheck the box.